Chinese Tactics

ATP 7-100.
CHINESE TACTICS
A8*8672021
DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION: Approved for public release, distribution is unlimited.
HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

This publication is available at the Army Publishing Directorate site
(https://armypubs.army.mil) and the Central Army Registry site
(https://atiam.train.army.mil/catalog/dashboard). To receive APD’s
weekly publishing update, subscribe at
https://armypubs.army.mil/News/RssInstructions.aspx.
ATP 7-100.3
Army Techniques Publication Headquarters
No. 7-100.3 Department of the Army
Washington, DC, $XJXVW
Chinese Tactics
Contents
Page
PREFACE................................................................................................................... vii
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................... ix
PART ONE PEOPLES’S LIBERATION ARMY FORCES

Chapter 1 PEOPLE’S LIBERATION ARMY FUNDAMENTALS ............................................... 1-1
The Strategic Environment ........................................................................................ 1-1
Chinese Political Objectives ...................................................................................... 1-2
The New Chinese Grand Strategy ............................................................................ 1-4
Chinese Strategic Objectives .................................................................................... 1-4
Maintain Internal Security and Stability ..................................................................... 1-5
Operational Environments ......................................................................................... 1-6
The People’s Liberation Army—Overview................................................................. 1-7
PLA Principles—People’s War ................................................................................ 1-11
China’s Approach to Conflict ................................................................................... 1-13
Framework for PLA Operations............................................................................... 1-14
PLA System Warfare ............................................................................................... 1-16
Chapter 2 PEOPLE’S LIBERATION ARMY FORCE STRUCTURE ......................................... 2-1
China’s Security Apparatus ....................................................................................... 2-1
Chinese National and Strategic-Level Organizations................................................ 2-2
PLAA Operational-Level Organizations..................................................................... 2-6
PLAA Tactical-Level Organizations........................................................................... 2-7
Chapter 3 PEOPLE’S LIBERATION ARMY JOINT CAPABILITIES ........................................ 3-1
The People’s Liberation Army Air Force.................................................................... 3-1
The People’s Liberation Army Navy .......................................................................... 3-3
The People’s Liberation Army Rocket Force............................................................. 3-5
The People’s Liberation Army Strategic Support Force ............................................ 3-6
Chapter 4 TACTICAL SYSTEM WARFARE ............................................................................. 4-1
Tactical System Warfare Principles........................................................................... 4-1
Planning and Organizing PLAA Operations .............................................................. 4-2
Tactical System Warfare Methodology...................................................................... 4-7
Tactical-Level Notional Operational System ........................................................... 4-13
Chapter 5 TACTICAL INFORMATION OPERATIONS ............................................................. 5-1
Overview of PLA Information Operations .................................................................. 5-1
Characteristics of Information Operations ................................................................. 5-1
Principles of Information Operations ......................................................................... 5-3
Information Warfare Tactics ...................................................................................... 5-4
DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION: Approved for public release, distribution is unlimited.
ATP 7-100.3 i
Contents
Overview of PLA Psychological Warfare .................................................................. 5-6

Characteristics of Psychological Warfare ................................................................. 5-7
Principles of Psychological Warfare.......................................................................... 5-9
Psychological Warfare Tactics................................................................................ 5-10
PART TWO PEOPLE’S LIBERATION ARMY ACTIONS

Chapter 6 RECONNAISSANCE AND SECURITY ACTIONS .................................................. 6-1
Reconnaissance Fundamentals................................................................................ 6-1
Reconnaissance at Echelons Above Brigade........................................................... 6-3
Reconnaissance at the Combined Arms Brigade ..................................................... 6-3
Reconnaissance Organizations and Capabilities ..................................................... 6-5
Forms of Tactical Reconnaissance........................................................................... 6-7
Security Fundamentals ........................................................................................... 6-12
Chapter 7 OFFENSIVE ACTIONS ............................................................................................ 7-1
Overview of PLAA Offensive Operations .................................................................. 7-1
The Informationized Battlefield and Offensive Operations ....................................... 7-2
The Transparency of the Informationized Battlefield ................................................ 7-2
Principles of the Offense........................................................................................... 7-3
Planning the Offense ................................................................................................ 7-4
Types of Offensive Operations ............................................................................... 7-15
Offensive Tactics..................................................................................................... 7-22
Chapter 8 DEFENSIVE ACTIONS ............................................................................................ 8-1
Overview of PLAA Defensive Operations ................................................................. 8-1
The Informationized Battlefield and Defensive Operations ...................................... 8-1
Principles of the Defense .......................................................................................... 8-2
Planning the Defense................................................................................................ 8-4
Types of Defensive Operations............................................................................... 8-17
Defensive Tactics.................................................................................................... 8-30
Chapter 9 ANTITERRORISM AND STABILITY ACTIONS ...................................................... 9-1
Overview of PLAA Antiterrorism Operations............................................................. 9-1
The Informationized Battlefield and Antiterrorism Operations .................................. 9-1
Principles of Antiterrorism Operations ...................................................................... 9-2
Antiterrorism Missions and Tactics ........................................................................... 9-3
The Informationized Battlefield and Stability and Security Actions........................... 9-9
Principles of Stability and Security Operations ....................................................... 9-10
Stability and Security Missions in Support of Joint Military Operations .................. 9-11
Appendix A MANEUVER CAPABILITIES ................................................................................... A-1
Appendix B FIRE SUPPORT CAPABILITIES ............................................................................ B-1
Appendix C AIR DEFENSE CAPABILITIES ................................................................................ C-1
Appendix D AVIATION CAPABILITIES ....................................................................................... D-1
Appendix E ENGINEER AND CHEMICAL DEFENSE CAPABILITIES ...................................... E-1
Appendix F NETWORK AND COMMUNICATIONS CAPABILITIES.......................................... F-1
Appendix G SPECIAL OPERATIONS FORCES CAPABILITIES ...............................................G-1
GLOSSARY ................................................................................................ Glossary-1
REFERENCES........................................................................................ References-1
INDEX ............................................................................................................... Index-1
ii ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Contents
Figures
Figure 1-1. Active defense ............................................................................................................. 1-8
Figure 1-2. People’s War.............................................................................................................. 1-10
Figure 1-3. Comprehensive national power ................................................................................. 1-13
Figure 1-4. PLA operational framework ....................................................................................... 1-15
Figure 2-1. Simplified PLA command structure.............................................................................. 2-3
Figure 2-2. PLAA chain of command, isolated............................................................................... 2-5
Figure 2-3. Group army structure (doctrinal).................................................................................. 2-7
Figure 2-4. Light combined arms brigade (doctrinal) ..................................................................... 2-9
Figure 2-5. Medium combined arms brigade (doctrinal) ................................................................ 2-9
Figure 2-6. Heavy combined arms brigade (doctrinal) ................................................................. 2-10
Figure 2-7. Artillery brigade (doctrinal)......................................................................................... 2-11
Figure 2-8. Air defense brigade (doctrinal)................................................................................... 2-12
Figure 2-9. Army aviation brigade (doctrinal) ............................................................................... 2-13
Figure 2-10. Light combined arms battalion (doctrinal)................................................................ 2-14
Figure 2-11. Medium combined arms battalion (doctrinal)........................................................... 2-14
Figure 2-12. Heavy combined arms battalion (doctrinal) ............................................................. 2-15
Figure 2-13. Artillery battalion (doctrinal) ..................................................................................... 2-16
Figure 2-14. Air defense battalion (doctrinal) ............................................................................... 2-16
Figure 2-15. Reconnaissance battalion (doctrinal)....................................................................... 2-17
Figure 3-1. Airborne corps (doctrinal) ............................................................................................ 3-3
Figure 3-2. PLANMC brigade (doctrinal)........................................................................................ 3-5
Figure 4-1. PLAA planning process................................................................................................ 4-3
Figure 4-2. Offensive zone (conceptual) ........................................................................................4-6
Figure 4-3. Defensive zone (conceptual) ....................................................................................... 4-7
Figure 4-4. Operational system force pool (example) .................................................................. 4-14
Figure 4-5. Frontline attack group (example) ............................................................................... 4-15
Figure 4-6. Depth attack group (example) ................................................................................... 4-15
Figure 4-7. Thrust maneuvering group (example)........................................................................ 4-16
Figure 4-8. Artillery group (example)............................................................................................ 4-16
Figure 5-1. Chinese information operations ................................................................................... 5-2
Figure 5-2. Chinese psychological warfare .................................................................................... 5-7
Figure 6-1. Combat reconnaissance (example) ............................................................................. 6-8
Figure 6-2. Linear search (example) ............................................................................................6-10
Figure 6-3. Area search (example)............................................................................................... 6-11
Figure 6-4. Screen (example)....................................................................................................... 6-15
Figure 6-5. Cover (example) ........................................................................................................ 6-17
Figure 6-6. Guard (example) ........................................................................................................ 6-19
Figure 6-7. Security while bivouacking (example)........................................................................ 6-21
Figure 6-8. Area security (example) ............................................................................................. 6-23
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 iii

Contents
Figure 6-9. Route security (example) .......................................................................................... 6-24

Figure 7-1. Offensive zone (notional) ............................................................................................ 7-7
Figure 7-2. Advance (example) ..................................................................................................... 7-9
Figure 7-3. Unfold (example) ....................................................................................................... 7-11
Figure 7-4. Initiate (example) ....................................................................................................... 7-13
Figure 7-5. Annihilate (example).................................................................................................. 7-15
Figure 7-6. Amphibious landing operation (example, part 1 of 3) ............................................... 7-18
Figure 7-9. Urban offensive operation (example) ........................................................................ 7-22
Figure 7-10. Complex envelopment (example)............................................................................ 7-24
Figure 7-11. Simple envelopment (example)............................................................................... 7-25
Figure 7-12. Frontal attack (example).......................................................................................... 7-27
Figure 7-13. Depth attack (example) ........................................................................................... 7-28
Figure 7-14. Infiltration (example)................................................................................................ 7-29
Figure 7-15. Storming attack (example) ...................................................................................... 7-31
Figure 7-16. Pursuit attack (example).......................................................................................... 7-33
Figure 7-17. Ambush (example) .................................................................................................. 7-36
Figure 7-18. Sneak raid (example) .............................................................................................. 7-38
Figure 8-1. Defensive zone (notional)............................................................................................ 8-6
Figure 8-2. Reconnaissance and deployment in the defensive zone (example)........................... 8-9
Figure 8-3. Spoil (example).......................................................................................................... 8-11
Figure 8-4. Resist (example) ....................................................................................................... 8-13
Figure 8-5. Counterattack (example) ........................................................................................... 8-15
Figure 8-6. Consolidate (example) .............................................................................................. 8-17
Figure 8-7. Positional defense (example part 1 of 4)................................................................... 8-19
Figure 8-10. Positional defense (example part 4 of 4)................................................................. 8-22
Figure 8-11. Mobile defense (example part 1 of 4)...................................................................... 8-24
Figure 8-15. Urban defensive operation (example) ..................................................................... 8-29
Figure 8-16. Breakout (example) ................................................................................................. 8-32
Figure 8-17. Withdrawal (example).............................................................................................. 8-34
Figure 8-18. Rear area defense (example).................................................................................. 8-39
Figure 9-1. Riot control (example; part 1 of 3) ............................................................................... 9-4
Figure 9-4. Task-organized People’s Armed Police mobile detachment (example)...................... 9-9
iv ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Contents
Tables
Introductory Table. Unit conversions................................................................................................. x
Table 2-1. Comparison of PLAA combined arms brigade to U.S. brigade combat team............... 2-8
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 v

This page intentionally left blank.
Preface
ATP 7-100.3 describes Chinese tactics for use in Army training, professional education, and leader
development. This document is part of the ATP 7-100 series that addresses a nation-state’s military
doctrine with a focus on army ground forces and tactical operations in offense, defense, and related mission
sets. Other foundational topics include task organization, capabilities, and limitations related to military
mission and support functions. ATP 7-100.3 serves as a foundation for understanding how Chinese ground
forces think and act in tactical operations. This publication presents multiple examples of functional tactics
in dynamic operational environment conditions. The tactics in this ATP are descriptive, and provide an
orientation to tactics gathered from Chinese doctrine, translated literature, and observations from recent
historical events.
The principal audience for ATP 7-100.3 is all members of the profession of arms. Commanders and staffs
of Army headquarters serving as joint task force or multinational headquarters should also refer to
applicable joint or multinational doctrine concerning the range of military operations and joint or
multinational forces. Trainers and educators throughout the Army will also use this publication.
Commanders, staffs, and subordinates ensure that their decisions and actions comply with applicable
United States, international, and in some cases host-nation laws and regulations. Commanders at all levels
ensure that their Soldiers operate in accordance with the law of war and the rules of engagement. (See
FM 6-27.)
To compare and contrast information in this ATP with other Army doctrine, the reader must first
understand the fundamentals of land operations in FM 3-0 and the Army’s supporting ADPs and ATPs that
describe military operations and the application of combat power. Joint and multinational application will
require comparison to and contrast with relevant joint and multinational doctrine.
ATP 7-100.3 uses joint terms where applicable. Selected joint and Army terms and definitions appear in
both the glossary and the text. For definitions shown in the text, the term is italicized and the number of the
proponent publication follows the definition. This publication is not the proponent for any Army terms.
Chinese concepts and publications are mentioned throughout this publication. The former are underlined
upon either first or second appearance, and the latter appear in italics. When a U.S. term—either joint or
Army—has the same name as a Chinese concept and the U.S. term is being referenced, it appears in italics.
ATP 7-100.3 applies to the Active Army, Army National Guard/Army National Guard of the United States,
and United States Army Reserve unless otherwise stated.
The proponent of ATP 7-100.3 is the United States Army Combined Arms Center. The preparing agency is
the Combined Arms Doctrine Directorate, United States Army Combined Arms Center. The lead agency
tasked with developing this ATP is the United States Army Training and Doctrine Command G-2, Analysis
and Control Element, Operational Environment and Threat Analysis Directorate. Send comments and
recommendations on DA Form 2028 (Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms) to
Commander, United States Army Combined Arms Center and Fort Leavenworth, ATTN: ATZL-MCD
(ATP 7-100.3), 300 McPherson Avenue, Fort Leavenworth, KS 66027-2337; by email to
usarmy.leavenworth.mccoe.mbx.cadd-org-mailbox@mail.mil; or submit an electronic DA Form 2028.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 vii

Introduction
ATP 7-100.3, as part of the U.S. Army 7-100 series and in support of AR 350-2, addresses the tactics,
organization, and activities of the People’s Republic of China’s (PRC’s) military, the People’s Liberation
Army (PLA). The PRC is a near-peer competitor to the United States, with significant political and
strategic interests worldwide, though the PRC’s primary geographic focus is Eastern and Southeastern Asia
and the Western Pacific. The PRC has developed significant capabilities in all domains: land, air, maritime,
space, and cyberspace. Capabilities in specific operational environments include a number of different unit
and system combinations able to challenge the combat power of U.S. and allied forces. The PLA represents
a significant competitor to U.S. and allied forces, especially in the Western Pacific. This publication
provides a doctrinal description of PLA tactics and organizations in order to facilitate robust, realistic,
relevant, and challenging conditions in which to train U.S. and allied forces.
PART ONE—PEOPLE’S LIBERATION ARMY FORCES

Chapter 1 describes the strategic environment, operational environments, China’s political objectives, and
its associated strategy. It then delves into China’s military forces: its philosophical underpinnings,
principles, approach to conflict, operational framework, and system warfare.
Chapter 2 describes the PLA’s force structure for its land combat components, an overview of its theater-
level capabilities, and a discussion of tactical-level units such as brigades and battalions.
Chapter 3 provides an overview of PLA joint capabilities that can affect tactical operations, including air
forces, naval forces, rocket and missile forces, and specialized support forces.
Chapter 4 describes the PLA’s primary framework for operations: system warfare, planning processes,
control measures, command posts, and combat groups.
Chapter 5 describes how the PLA approaches information operations, with an emphasis on actions at
tactical echelons.
PART TWO—PEOPLE’S LIBERATION ARMY ACTIONS

Chapter 6 describes the PLA approach to reconnaissance, counterreconnaissance, and security in support
of tactical operations at tactical echelons.
Chapter 7 describes PLA offensive operations at tactical echelons and how the system warfare approach is
applied in these actions.
Chapter 8 describes PLA defensive operations at tactical echelons and how the system warfare approach is
applied in in these actions.
Chapter 9 describes the PLA approach to stability operations at tactical echelons and how the system
warfare approach is applied during stability actions.
APPENDIXES
Appendix A describes the capabilities and limitations of PLA maneuver forces: infantry, armor, marine,
and airborne.
Appendix B describes PLA indirect fire capabilities, including mortars, tube artillery, and rocket artillery
in support of group army and tactical operations; this includes an overview of integrated fires systems.
Appendix C describes PLA tactical air defense forces controlled by its land forces, including an overview
of integrated air defense systems up to the group army echelon.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 ix

Introduction
Appendix D describes how the PLA aviation assets—primarily rotary-wing manned aircraft and unmanned
aircraft—support tactical operations.
Appendix E describes the use of engineers and chemical defense forces in support of tactical operations.
Appendix F describes the PLA’s communications and network architecture at the tactical level.
Appendix G describes special operations forces both at tactical and national/strategic echelons.
UNITS OF MEASURE
Units of measure in ATP 7-100.3 are metric. The introductory table provides conversion data from one
measurement system to another for units used in this publication.
Introductory Table. Unit conversions
Type Metric English
Distance 1 meter (m) 3.28084 feet
Distance 1 kilometer (km) 0.62137 miles
Weapon Bore Size 1 millimeter (mm) 0.03937 inches
Weapon Bore Size 1 millimeter (mm) 0.03937 caliber
Weight 1 kilogram (kg) 2.2046 pounds
Weight 1 metric ton (t) 1.1023 (U.S./short) tons
x ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

PART ONE
People’s Liberation Army Forces

Part one describes the intellectual and philosophical framework of the People’s
Liberation Army (PLA), describes Chinese political objectives and strategy, provides
an overview of PLA joint capabilities, and describes the PLA’s system warfare
construct and unit structure in detail. The information in this section provides the
theoretical structure necessary to fully understand the PLA’s tactical approach, and
also provides detailed information necessary to create realistic variables as a part of
building a Chinese threat model.
Chapter 1
People’s Liberation Army Fundamentals
The People’s Liberation Army (PLA) continues more than two millennia of Chinese
military tradition. China lays cultural claim to many of the world’s most famous
works of military strategy and philosophy—most prominently, The Art of War by Sun
Tzu—and these works are still highly influential throughout the PLA. The Chinese
take military philosophy, politics, and theory very seriously: the PLA is considered
the vanguard of the Chinese Communist Revolution, and its philosophical
underpinnings are important to both its culture and its approach to warfighting at all
levels. The PLA also has a deep commitment to Communist and Maoist philosophy.
THE STRATEGIC ENVIRONMENT

1-1. China’s view of the strategic environment mirrors that of the United States in many ways. There are,
however, key differences in both analysis of the strategic environment and the application of this analysis
that underpin important differences in perspective between the two countries. Both the People’s Republic
of China—commonly referred to as China—and the United States assess the key elements of the strategic
environment discussed in paragraphs 1-2 through 1-9.
1-2. U.S. obligations to allies and partners in the Western Pacific will continue in perpetuity. Key
U.S. allies include Japan, South Korea, Australia, New Zealand, and the Philippines. The United States will
likewise maintain a strong strategic interest in the Western Pacific.
1-3. The United States will maintain strong, though unofficial, support to the Republic of China—
also known as Taiwan. The former will employ a policy of deliberate ambiguity to deter potential Chinese
aggression against the island while maintaining a position respectful of Chinese policy toward the same.
1-4. China will continue to seek improved relations with Russia and India, with Russia likely
proving a more amenable partner. China views improving these two relationships—particularly with
Russia—as very important both politically and economically. Border tensions with India complicate
bilateral relations and are often perceived by India as aggressive, requiring strong responses and
adjustments to its defense posture.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 1-1

Chapter 1
1-5. Increasing competition for limited resources and the effects of global climate change will fuel
conflict among both state and non-state actors. As populations increase, providing adequate quantities of
basic necessities such as water, energy, food, and medical care becomes increasingly difficult. In addition,
competition for human capital and raw materials for industry will increase as the international economy
expands. Conditions such as natural disasters, extreme weather events, and their second- and third-order
effects will have considerable impacts across the globe and will significantly influence political and
military strategies worldwide. The global commons—the earth’s unowned natural resources, such as the
oceans, the atmosphere, and space—will be increasingly important to the global economy and will thus
likely become contested. The PLA characterizes many tasks related to these conditions under the heading
of nontraditional security measures or military operations other than war.
1-6. As the global economy and disparate societies become increasingly interconnected, friction
points continue to emerge. State and non-state actors are already using widely proliferated but immature
technologies—such as social networking— worldwide to influence populations, politics, and policy. Actors
will continue to leverage emerging connections to manipulate public opinion and influence leaders; the
digital world will become an increasingly important front to contest. As national economies continue to
intertwine themselves, competition for jobs, natural and manmade resources, and new or emerging markets
will continue to intensify.
1-7. Technological advances will continue to enhance the lethality of capabilities across all domains.
Soldiers at all echelons on the future battlefield will face unprecedented dangers as both new and proven
technologies are integrated into warfighting. For example, precision munitions will continue to proliferate
and become increasingly affordable as technology costs drop. At the same time, limited defense budgets
coupled with the high expense and relative rarity of modern weapons systems—particularly aircraft,
surface ships, and missiles of all types—will heavily influence future major combat scenarios.
1-8. China faces both nontraditional and hybrid threats. Such threats include criminal organizations,
terrorist organizations, and fringe or rogue states. These threats effectively exploit complex terrain, such as
dense urban and cyber environments, and are not necessarily constrained by international law or protocols
regulating conflict.
Note. The chapters and appendixes of this publication address topics from the Chinese
perspective. As such, the terms friendly refers to Chinese units or the units of Chinese allies.
Enemy refers to units opposing China or its military. This may be a belligerent force or element
within China, or an external actor. Parties are neutral regarding China. Threat uses the standard
dictionary definition as opposed to that of U.S. doctrine. An opponent may be against either the
U.S. or China, with context determining the correct interpretation.
1-9. Four strategic trends will influence future Chinese operations. These trends are population
growth, urbanization, population growth along major bodies of water, and human connectedness and
interrelations.
Note. Chinese concepts and doctrinal phrases contained in this document are used in accordance
with PLA definitions as provided by the translation of Army Combined Tactics under Conditions
of Informationization and Infantry Unit Tactics. Some of these concepts and phrases may mirror
the names of U.S. Department of Defense (DOD) and U.S. Army terms. In such cases, the U.S.
term is being referenced only if the name appears in italics.
CHINESE POLITICAL OBJECTIVES

1-10. A useful analysis of the tactics of the PLA must be underpinned by an understanding of Chinese
political and strategic priorities and an understanding of the complex relationship between the PLA and the
Communist Party of China (CPC). China’s history is deeply intertwined with its military—more so than
any Western nation and possibly more so than any other country, except North Korea. The PLA was the
vanguard of the Chinese Communist Revolution; its history, from the Chinese perspective, is one of
1-2 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

glorious struggle over imperialist and capitalist oppressors. In contrast to Western militaries, the PLA is
deeply politicized. It retains significant ties to Maoist and Marxist-Leninist political thought and has
generations-deep connections with the CPC. While Western militaries are generally apolitical and are
divorced from political parties, the PLA is officially the armed wing of the CPC.
Note. This is an explanation of naming and acronym conventions. The proper name for China’s
military is the People’s Liberation Army, or PLA. This organizational structure is comparable to
the U.S. Department of Defense (DOD); it does not refer exclusively to ground forces, as does
the U.S. Army. The PLA’s land-based service is the People’s Liberation Army Army (PLAA),
the naval branch is the People’s Liberation Army Navy (PLAN), and the aerial branch is called
the People’s Liberation Army Air Force (PLAAF). The PLA’s strategic conventional and
nuclear ballistic and cruise missile service is the People’s Liberation Army Rocket Force
(PLARF). The People’s Liberation Army Strategic Support Force (PLASSF) is a new service-
level organization that incorporates national-level cyber warfare, electronic warfare (EW), space,
and other operational support elements under a single headquarters, and the People’s Liberation
Army Joint Logistics Support Force (PLAJLSF) is a new service-level sustainment organization.
1-11. Despite China’s gradual economic liberalization and movement toward a capitalist, free-market
economy, the PLA ostensibly remains generally steadfast in its support of Marxist-Leninist and Maoist
philosophy. Though the PLA long ago abandoned more extreme Maoist experiments such as “rankless”
force structures and eliminating rank insignia, the idea of People’s War—an armed struggle of a population
against a militarily superior adversary—still colors PLA thinking. This concept eventually took the form of
People’s War under Modern Conditions, an adaptation of Chinese Communist populist warfare that
accounts for modern military capabilities. This in turn evolved to People’s War in Conditions of
Informationization in 2015. This evolution suggests that the PLA now sees itself as having acquired
sufficient information capabilities to successfully employ them in a limited or regional military capacity.
Marxist-Leninist and Maoist thinking still influence PLA operations all the way down to the tactical level,
where a mix of autocratic statism and communal leadership are practiced even within small organizations.
1-12. Chinese national political objectives can be broken into two basic categories: security and
development. Security objectives include the protection of the CPC as China’s ruling party, the protection
of Chinese sovereignty, protection of borders, internal security, and nuclear deterrence. Development
objectives include the protection of Chinese economic interests at home and abroad, ensuring freedom of
navigation for Chinese goods, procuring important commodities such as energy and raw materials, and
establishing new export markets for Chinese goods. As China has transitioned from a closed, unstable,
post-revolutionary internal political environment to a more open and stable one, strategic priorities have
gradually shifted from security to development.
1-13. Today, with the primacy of the CPC virtually assured and few internal security threats, the People’s
Armed Police (PAP) has taken over much of the internal security mission, while the PLA focuses primarily
on development-related objectives. The coordination of military modernization with economic
development is a basic tenet of Chinese national strategy, resulting in significant annual defense budget
increases for the past two decades. This principle is now manifest in its Military-Civil Fusion program,
which seeks greater cooperation between military and civilian elements in achieving shared objectives. An
important objective of Military-Civil Fusion is leveraging civilian assets and capabilities as a cost-efficient
method of managing limited military resources. Military-Civil Fusion can be thought of as an extension of
People’s War, seeking to make best use of civilian assets and natural resources to underpin the growth and
modernization of the PLA.
1-14. The ongoing Chinese movement toward development objectives requires a significant enhancement
of PLA capabilities. Throughout much of its history, including its active conflicts in Korea (1950-53) and
Vietnam (1979), the PLA had little to no expeditionary capability, minimal mechanization, low-technology
systems, and a severe lack of military professionalism. Objectives that support development, however,
generally require meaningful force projection capabilities: a blue-water navy, a modern air force,
long-range targeting and strike capabilities, enhanced long-range air and sea strategic lift capabilities, and a
well-trained, well-equipped, professional ground force. Due to one of the largest and longest economic
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 1-3

Chapter 1
growth cycles in history, China was able to fund the reform and development of the PLA, modernizing it
over the last three decades from a force of poorly armed and poorly trained conscripts into a viable modern
military.
THE NEW CHINESE GRAND STRATEGY

1-15. China desires status as a world power, likely using Imperial Great Britain or post-World War II
United States as a model. This end state helps to achieve many smaller goals important to the Chinese:
global influence, economic development, internal security, and CPC primacy. China views this final
objective as incremental: it seeks to be a “prosperous society” by 2035, with the CPC still remaining the
dominant political entity in China. This objective likely implies China being a regional hegemon in the
Western Pacific, with a robust middle class and fully modernized military. The country desires to transition
to a “leading world power” by the year 2049 (the centennial anniversary of the country’s founding),
complete with a “world-class military.” These objectives are not nebulous, nor are they fanciful thinking—
they are written into the CPC Constitution. Of note, despite the nature of these objectives, the Chinese
government does not describe itself as seeking either regional or global hegemony.
1-16. Throughout Chinese history, beginning in the third century B.C. through the Second Sino-Japanese
War (1937-45), incursions, invasions, and occupations along China’s vast land border and coastline were
constant. This fostered a deep-set national sense of sovereignty and border sanctity among the Chinese.
Even in the Imperial Age (pre-1912), Chinese leaders sought to offset external threats through a
combination of political savvy and military strength. China was historically the dominant economic and
military power in East Asia, and Chinese leaders used this power to try and ensure domestic security and
tranquility.
1-17. Much of this economic and military power was lost during the colonial and world-war periods, a
time the Chinese refer to as a “century of humiliation.” China’s transition to a Communist political and
economic system was a long and enormously destructive process that further marginalized its once-
dominant power. It was not until the late 1970s that the country’s resurgence really began. During this
recent period of enormous economic growth and political change, China again began to seek a position as a
world power. Though the global environment has changed through the years, the Chinese approach to
security and economic growth has not.
1-18. China today seeks what it views as a restoration of its position as a global power through what are
described by the CPC as peaceful and relatively unprovocative means. Bilateral and multilateral
relationships are viewed as optimal, where all parties to a matter see benefit from an arrangement. China
seeks a positive relationship with the West—especially the United States—underpinned by a massive
exchange of trade and economic interdependence. China also seeks to modernize its military—not through
aggressive, short-term arms buildup, but through long-term investment and development. It also seeks
courteous—if not cordial—relations with its neighbors in East Asia. In short, China wishes to be a good
neighbor and a good global citizen.
1-19. This approach has thus far yielded mixed results. Territorial disputes across the Western Pacific and
East Asia, aggressive cyber activities, uncooperative diplomacy, questionable trade practices, and a
horrendous human rights record all undermine the Chinese goal of being seen as a benevolent superpower.
Activities that China views as fundamentally defensive—such as the establishment of artificial island
airbases in the South China Sea—are seen as aggressive and provocative by virtually every other party in
the region. Chinese cyber activities, seen by the nation as simple surveillance and deterrence activities,
have caused several high-profile international incidents.
CHINESE STRATEGIC OBJECTIVES

1-20. China’s strategic objectives are informed by its political objectives and generally support the broad
political goals of Western Pacific dominance by 2035 and becoming a leading world power by 2049. They
are also informed by certain elements of Chinese culture and history: the importance of status and honor,
the desire for peace through power, and the belief in Chinese Communism, among other aspects. Chinese
strategic objectives are to—
1-4 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

z Maintain internal security and stability.

z Secure and protect land borders and coastlines.
z Maintain regional stability.
z Maintain freedom of navigation.
z Resolve maritime territorial disputes.
z Establish positive conditions for potential hostilities.
MAINTAIN INTERNAL SECURITY AND STABILITY

1-21. Foremost in maintaining internal security and stability is ensuring the position of the CPC as the
dominant political entity in China. PLA headquarters at provincial, county, and city levels are military
components of the corresponding local government and are responsible for recruitment, demobilization,
and other support to local governments. While maintaining domestic stability is the primary mission of the
civilian police force and PAP, in extreme situations the PLA may be required to assist these forces in
internal security operations.
SECURE AND PROTECT LAND BORDERS AND COASTLINES

1-22. China’s long historic struggle with border security manifests itself today in a vast array of border
security measures. Of particular note is the border with North Korea: while ostensibly friendly with the
North Koreans, China is deeply concerned with the possible military and humanitarian crisis that might
erupt in the event that the North Korean regime falls or war breaks out on the Korean Peninsula. In
addition, China’s shared border with India continues to be a source of friction and conflict.
MAINTAIN REGIONAL STABILITY

1-23. One of the main benefits China sees to regional dominance is the maintenance of peace and order in
the Western Pacific and East Asia. In addition to the complex political and diplomatic challenges, this
requires the PLA to be capable of conducting shaping and deterrence operations throughout the region, able
to deploy and defeat regional threats as required.
MAINTAIN FREEDOM OF NAVIGATION

1-24. China’s economy is largely dependent on exports, most of which travel via the world’s oceans.
Maintaining safe and free passage through the global commons is a necessary component of Chinese
political stability and economic development. Particular focus areas include the main shipping channels of
the Western Pacific, such as the Strait of Malacca and the South Indian Ocean.
RESOLVE MARITIME TERRITORIAL DISPUTES

1-25. China views several land masses and their surrounding territorial waters in the South China Sea—
and elsewhere in the Pacific—as strategically important. These include, but are not limited to, the Senkaku
Islands, the Spratly Islands, and the Paracel Islands. Their importance is derived not only from their
proximity to important global shipping lanes, but also due to their potential usefulness as military bases—
particularly for naval and coast guard ships, fixed-wing aircraft, antisubmarine warfare capabilities, and
land-based antiaircraft and antiship missile systems.
ESTABLISH POSITIVE CONDITIONS FOR POTENTIAL HOSTILITIES

1-26. China views conflict along a continuum, ranging from steady-state deterrence operations in
peacetime through major combat operations. By meticulously—and sometimes covertly—conducting
peacetime military and intelligence operations against potential opponents, China seeks to place its military
in an advantageous position should active hostilities break out. Such operations include political and
diplomatic efforts, offensive and defensive cyber actions, information operations, and covert intelligence
operations. Central to this objective is the expansion of overseas basing for the PLA, enabling force
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 1-5

Chapter 1
projection outside of Chinese borders and giving Chinese leadership greater flexibility in choosing how and
where to employ military force.
Note. The concept of information operations will be used in this document consistent with the
Chinese expression xinxi zuozhan (ಙᜥసᡈ). This is similar to the U.S. DOD term
information operations, though it is not as inclusive. Chinese information operations include
information warfare, concealment, deception (general efforts to mislead an opponent), and
trickery (specific plans targeted at a particular opponent). The Chinese expression for
information warfare, xinxi zhan (ಙᜥᡈ), refers to direct, specific offensive and defensive
actions, such as EW and cyber warfare, and is not analogous to the U.S. concept of information
warfare that pertains to an opposing force.
OPERATIONAL ENVIRONMENTS
1-27. U.S. military analysis of an operational environment, including a composite environment created for
training, professional education, and leader development purposes, focuses on eight interrelated operational
variables: political, military, economic, social, information, infrastructure, physical environment, and
time—collectively referred to as PMESII-PT. The following is a list of PMESII-PT conditions and trends
found in China. It is not comprehensive, but it suggests a number of possible factors that U.S. exercise
planners might use when constructing scenarios:
z Political:
The fractious relationship between China and Taiwan.
Maritime disputes in the South and East China Seas.
Complex sociopolitical interactions between China and North Korea.
Land border disputes and frictions.
Friction between the CPC and the growing quasi-capitalist ultra-wealthy class.
Expansion of Chinese influence in emerging markets, particularly in Africa and Southwest
Asia.
Human rights violations, particularly against internal political opposition and minorities,
and the harassment and mistreatment of journalists.
Separatism in Western China.
Major anticorruption efforts at every level of government.
z Military:
Growing use of high-technology weapons systems such as fifth-generation and
low-observable aircraft, ballistic and cruise missiles, precision munitions, and networked
warfare.
Ongoing top-to-bottom reform of the PLA, including widespread professionalization.
Expansion of standoff precision munitions and other antiaccess capabilities.
Establishment of hardened military facilities on islands, both natural and manmade,
throughout the Western Pacific.
Gradual expansion of PLA expeditionary capabilities, particularly throughout the Western
Pacific and Indian Oceans.
z Economic:
Continued liberalization of formerly hardline Marxist-Leninist and Maoist economic policy.
Threats to critical shipping lanes and overland trade routes linking China with its export
markets.
Export and trade restrictions on raw materials, particularly on rare but critical metals.
Major anticorruption efforts at every level of government.
Complex economic relationship with North Korea.
1-6 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

z Social:
Increased internal frictions with minority groups, particularly in and around distressed
border regions.
Continued adoption of Western cultural products, especially by younger generations.
Social resistance to heavy-handed governmental approach to internal security.
Increased frictions between quasi-capitalist Chinese oligarchs and more-traditional CPC
supporters due to failure to quell corruption.
z Information:
Extensive use of cyber activities—official, unofficial, and third party—to influence
conditions domestically and abroad.
Ongoing active People’s Republic of China (PRC) cyber activities attempting to extract
sensitive or classified information from foreign networks, particularly those in defense
industries.
Sophisticated information operations campaigns to influence both global and regional
politics.
z Infrastructure:
Continued development of domestic infrastructure with a focus on the export economy.
Heavy investment in overseas infrastructure, particularly in emerging markets for Chinese
export goods.
z Physical Environment:
Ongoing effects of global climate change reducing availability of arable land and
threatening low-lying coastal areas.
Increasing frequency and severity of tropical storms, which affect military and economic
development in the Western Pacific.
Shortsighted environmental policies creating public health crises due to air and water
pollution and rapid depletion of shared international resources, such as fisheries.
z Time:
The Chinese have historically taken a much longer view of time than the United States.
The PLA has deliberately chosen to adopt a more Western view of time as part of its
ongoing military reforms.
THE PEOPLE’S LIBERATION ARMY—OVERVIEW

1-28. The PLA’s basic warfighting philosophy is that of active defense: a fundamentally defensive political
and strategic stance, enabled—when required—by operational and tactical offense. For over two thousand
years, China has been surrounded by enemies, adversaries, and other competitors. Invasion, occupation,
raids, and other incursions into Chinese territory were commonplace. The PLA views protecting Chinese
sovereignty and security as a sacred duty. China traditionally viewed military resistance as an affair for the
entire population: mass resistance, guerrilla warfare, and winning a war of attrition. This understanding has
evolved in the modern age to where a PLA enabled by technology, well-trained personnel, and a whole-of-
government, defense-in-depth approach deters conflict before it ever happens and protects China and the
CPC from foreign aggression and internal tumult. The basic concept of active defense informs every level
of PLA operations and acquisitions. Figure 1-1 provides a graphic depiction of the policy and theoretical
underpinnings of the active defense philosophy.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 1-7

Chapter 1
Figure 1-1. Active defense
1-29. Presently, the PLA is in the midst of a period of comprehensive reform. Central to this is the
evolution of the “big army”—the dominance of the PLAA at the expense of other services—not only
throughout the PLA, but also throughout Chinese politics and society. Reducing manpower and equipment
levels and employing a quality-over-quantity approach is central to this effort, as is the expansion of joint
integration and an expanded emphasis on domains other than just the ground. In addition, PLAA units are
now nationally deployable—able to operate anywhere within Chinese borders—rather than being strongly
tied to a specific region. This is intended to reduce manpower requirements and the influence of the PLA in
local politics, but it requires a top-to-bottom reorganization of PLA training, doctrine, and acquisition.
1-30. Two historical figures feature prominently in the philosophy and strategy of the PLA: Sun Tzu and
Mao Zedong. The PLA views these two strategists as equally important, with People’s War being viewed
as a modern addendum to The Art of War. Sun Tzu and Mao together created the framework from which
the PLA’s modern-day strategy and tactics are derived.
1-31. Influenced largely by The Art of War, the PLA—and China as a whole—look to create advantages
along a vast competition continuum, ranging from diplomacy and covert operations in peacetime to major
combat operations. The PLA views all available government means as a kind of defense in depth. Defense
of China begins with skilled diplomacy and prudent political measures at home and abroad. State actors and
agencies set conditions for military success if and when military action becomes necessary. The PLA
decisively defeats opponents militarily if peaceful measures fail. The ideal outcome in every scenario is to
“win without fighting”—as a philosophy taken directly from Sun Tzu. Military-Civil Fusion is an important
method of incorporating civilian support to achieve military objectives in both peacetime and war.
1-32. PLA doctrine describes three basic ways to use military power: warfighting, military deterrence, and
military operations other than war. Developing warfighting capabilities is the PLA’s core task; prevention
of conflict is the PLA’s most important mission. The PLA’s deterrence mission creates numerous
subordinate objectives designed to demonstrate Chinese capabilities and will, all viewed as critical to
1-8 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

preventing conflict both domestically and abroad. Though China states unequivocally that it will not initiate
conflict, practices only self-defense, and will respond militarily only if attacked, its basic concept of
deterrence has been broadened significantly in recent years. Active defense now includes far more
politically and strategically offensive activities. Examples include, but are not limited to—
z Expanded participation in global peacekeeping operations.
z Expanded air and naval presence in the Western Pacific in an offshore defensive strategy.
z More rapid and thorough responses to non-war crises.
z Expanded operations in the cyber and space domains.
z Defense of the primacy and stability of the CPC.
1-33. PLA views on modern war allow for limited preemptive actions. People’s War initially mandated
few to no pre-emptive military activities, but PLA views on modern war concede that an unmitigated
modern military operation may win a war before a proper response can be organized. As such, certain
allowances for offensive activity under the umbrella of active defense have been made. According to PLA
doctrine, the “first shot” in the area of politics and strategy must be differentiated from the first shot on the
plane of tactics. If any country or organization violates the other country’s sovereignty and territorial
integrity, the other side will have the right to “fire the first shot” on the plane of tactics.
1-34. People’s War encompasses all three levels of warfare. At the strategic level, People’s Armies use
their superior manpower, lesser logistic requirements, and greater political will to defeat opponents in
defensive wars of attrition. At the operational level, a combination of mobility, deception, and willpower
allow formations to rapidly maneuver and close with the enemy in order to engage it in close combat,
offsetting limitations in firepower, technology, and training. At the tactical level, units aggressively
maneuver in order to create massive advantages in combat power at key times and locations, while
simultaneously preventing enemy response through effective deception operations. Infiltration techniques
allow small units to close with and defeat the enemy in detail. At all levels, People’s Army units rely on
superior willpower, cohesion, deception, and manpower to overcome technologically advanced opponents.
1-35. People’s War was initially developed as Mao’s interpretation of Marxism in military conflict: a class
struggle between an oppressed people and a bourgeois or imperialist professional military. The Second
Sino-Japanese War and the Chinese Civil War (1945-49) strengthened this understanding: both conflicts
involved a People’s Army conducting mobile or guerrilla operations, on its own soil, against
better-equipped and trained opponents. Both conflicts resulted in Chinese victories, but they were
enormously costly, both economically and in lives lost.
1-36. People’s War concept and doctrine were significantly altered beginning in the 1980s. At the end of
the Mao era in the late 1970s, PLA strategists began to reassess the nature of People’s War. Mao had taken
Marxist-Leninist ideals to extremes in the military, adopting a military without hierarchy or rank. This
approach proved ineffective, and reforms were needed to make the PLA into a modern force capable of
deterring conflict and defending Chinese strategic and political interests. This evolved into People’s War
under Modern Conditions, a modification that accounted for the increasing lethality and complexity of the
modern battlefield. Joint operations—along with mechanization and artillery—were emphasized. The
concept of deterrence expanded to include not only fighting defensive wars within Chinese territory, but
also the idea that a strong regional and maritime security environment might prevent fighting in Chinese
territory in the first place.
1-37. The modern iteration of People’s War is People’s War in Conditions of Informationization. This
theory incorporates thinking and strategy informed by numerous geopolitical and technological
developments over the past 25 years. First and foremost is the emerging information environment: the PLA
recognizes the importance of the digital battlefield, and it has emerged as a world leader in integrating
cyber warfare into its operational construct. Figure 1-2 on page 1-10 displays the timeline of the evolution
of People’s War concepts.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 1-9

Chapter 1
Figure 1-2. People’s War
1-38. Second, the PLA further expanded its understanding of active defense. After watching nearly six
months of force buildup on the Iraqi border during OPERATIONS DESERT SHIELD and DESERT
STORM, the PLA concluded that the most efficient way to defend Chinese territory was to prevent
potential opponents from building combat power in close proximity to Chinese borders. This in turn
spurred the development and redevelopment of capabilities intended to defeat or interdict the buildup of
combat power at extended ranges and across wide geographic areas. It also compelled development of
capabilities designed to deny use of wide geographic areas to potential foes. Years later, in analyzing this
approach, U.S. strategists denoted it antiaccess/area denial. This phrase was—and still is—an accurate
depiction of the PLA approach to active defense in the Western Pacific.
1-39. Third, People’s War in Conditions of Informationization encompasses the tacit admission that China
may have to become involved in local or regional conflicts in order to maintain the regional or international
economic order, protect the CPC, or otherwise support Chinese economic or political interests. This
ostensibly contradicted Mao’s initial philosophy of People’s War, which is for the most part strictly a
domestic defense-oriented military approach. This appreciation may represent fundamental change for the
PLA, and it requires a vast increase in expeditionary and overseas sustainment capabilities. These
requirements, in turn, demand significant increases in the PLA’s military professionalization, equipment
quality, and air and naval capabilities.
1-40. Local War is the PLA expression for a regional conventional conflict, likely close to Chinese
territory. The PLA views this as the most likely situation calling for military force, and it has developed
capabilities designed to excel in this environment. This conclusion makes sense, as every conflict the PLA
has fought in its history was local, and all but the Chinese Civil War were limited. People’s War in
Conditions of Informationization, when applied to the Local War concept, is frequently referred to as
Winning Informationized Local Wars.
1-41. Chinese military theory may be moving away from traditional Marxist-Leninist and Maoist theory as
PLA leaders acknowledge the importance of technology, professionalization, and military hierarchy. The
PLA, however, still identifies as staunchly Communist and views its modern theories as an evolution of
People’s War, not as a revision or repudiation. People’s War in Conditions of Informationization is said to
be a modern adaptation of The Art of War and People’s War. It retains the concept of active defense as its
centerpiece, and it considers deception and political willpower to be the most important—and most
uniquely Chinese—elements of a successful military campaign.
1-42. The PLA anticipates Informationized Warfare evolving into Intelligentized Warfare in the relatively
near future. Intelligentized Warfare incorporates numerous emerging technologies—including
decentralized computing, data analytics, quantum computing, artificial intelligence, and unmanned or
robotic systems—into the PLA’s conceptual framework. Intelligentized Warfare seeks to increase the pace
of future combat by effectively fusing information and streamlining decision-making, even in ambiguous or
1-10 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

highly dynamic operating environments. Intelligentized Warfare also amplifies the nascent concepts
embodied by the Military-Civil Fusion effort: many of the subsystems that create the backbone of an
Intelligentized PLA are researched and developed initially in the civilian realm. Careful alignment of
military and civilian efforts enables the synchronization of efforts and streamlines the fielding process for
the PLA. Despite its focus on technology, Intelligentized Warfare remains informed by the People’s War
concepts: many Intelligentized Warfare initiatives are clearly shaped by the original People’s War
principles.
PLA PRINCIPLES—PEOPLE’S WAR

1-43. PLA principles were originally written by Mao Zedong during the Long March of 1934—35 and
revised during the Japanese occupation of China, beginning in 1937. These principles still serve as the basis
for People’s War theories, though they have been modernized periodically along with the rest of Chinese
military thought. There are numerous different interpretations and translations of these principles, varying
widely based on when and where they were written and translated. However, the versions are all similar,
generally reflecting Communist political sensibilities, a focus on mobility and deception, and a strong
understanding of basic military theory. The key themes of People’s War are—
z Eliminate isolated pockets of the enemy before concentrating to fight larger forces.
z Capture small villages and towns before capturing large urban areas.
z Eliminate the enemy’s fighting capacity; do not focus on territory.
z Fight no battle unprepared; develop strategy based on the worst conditions.
z Concentrate forces to achieve an overwhelming advantage in numbers, then defeat the enemy in
detail.
z Choose the first battle carefully.
z Unify the command and coordinate.
z Combine mobile war, positional war, and guerrilla war.
z Employ forces and tactics flexibly.
z Fight in one’s own way, and let the enemy fight in its.
ELIMINATE ISOLATED POCKETS OF THE ENEMY BEFORE CONCENTRATING TO FIGHT

LARGER FORCES
1-44. This principle is similar to Western maneuver warfare theories developed during the World Wars. It
calls for rapid maneuver and decisive attacks against weak points before finally seeking a decisive
engagement against an unbalanced enemy.
CAPTURE SMALL VILLAGES AND TOWNS BEFORE CAPTURING LARGE URBAN AREAS
1-45. This somewhat unique Communist Chinese principle was formed from the success of early PLA
operations against Japanese and Republican Chinese forces. Operating in rural areas made it difficult for
early PLA opponents to detect and fix PLA formations. In expeditionary warfare, this principle likely
implies targeting less-challenging defensive positions first, then moving on to more well-defended and
critical positions once initial gains are consolidated.
ELIMINATE THE ENEMY’S FIGHTING CAPACITY; DO NOT FOCUS ON TERRITORY

1-46. This principle is similar to the principle in paragraph 1-45 about towns and cities. It recognizes that,
for most military campaigns, the center of gravity is the enemy force, not territory. Chinese forces may
temporarily—or even deliberately—cede territory in order to enable decisive action against the enemy’s
forces.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 1-11

Chapter 1
FIGHT NO BATTLE UNPREPARED; DEVELOP STRATEGY BASED ON THE WORST

CONDITIONS
1-47. This principle is similar to the general planning process of many armed forces. Commanders ensure
that troops are as prepared as possible for any battle, and they conduct planning based on the enemy’s most
dangerous course of action, rather than its most probable.
CONCENTRATE FORCES TO ACHIEVE AN OVERWHELMING ADVANTAGE IN NUMBERS,

THEN DEFEAT THE ENEMY IN DETAIL
1-48. This is another principle similar to Western military theories, though it specifies the importance of
numerical advantage. This principle is most often seen in PLAA tactics: tactical-level units seek to use a
combination of maneuver and deception to achieve their desired numerical superiority and allow
engagement and defeat of the enemy in detail. Traditionally, the PLA sought to fight using close combat
techniques, taking advantage of night operations to enable infiltration whenever possible. Technological
advances changed this approach, incorporating longer-range weapons and nonlethal effects to strike the
enemy at greater distances, decreasing the effect of the technological gaps the PLA faces with regard to
night vision and electro-optical capabilities.
CHOOSE THE FIRST BATTLE CAREFULLY

1-49. This principle acknowledges the importance of gaining and maintaining the initiative; in this case,
through a victorious first engagement. This principle extends beyond simple military battles; it also
includes choosing the first decisive political or economic engagement carefully in order to set conditions
for victory in a future decisive engagement. Along with “fight no battle unprepared,” this principle suggests
an element of caution and prudence in determining when and if to go to war.
UNIFY THE COMMAND AND COORDINATE

1-50. As a basic and timeless military principle, PLA organization and doctrine regarding unified
command differs somewhat from Western militaries. While the latter imbue command authority with a
single individual—the commander—the PLA considers unity of command to be as much a political issue as
an operational principle. Units feature both military and political leadership, and creating political unity of
purpose is considered a critical component of People’s War.
COMBINE MOBILE WAR, POSITIONAL WAR, AND GUERRILLA WAR

1-51. This principle outlines the three types of warfare proposed by Mao, and it resembles the more
modern theory of hybrid warfare. Mobile units use a combination of maneuver and deception to achieve
surprise in decisive actions; static, defensive units fix opponents and defend or secure key areas from attack
and guerrilla forces conduct irregular campaigns either behind enemy lines or within enemy formations. All
forms are carefully coordinated to ensure unity of purpose and situational understanding.
EMPLOY FORCES AND TACTICS FLEXIBLY

1-52. Similar to U.S. Army principles and doctrine, this principle acknowledges the importance of
flexibility in any military situation. Historically, the PLA was notoriously inflexible, with subordinates
often failing to employ their own judgment due to fear of reprisal or lack of professional competence. The
PLA’s new focus on building a professional noncommissioned officer corps and a decentralized leadership
philosophy reflect its understanding of shortfalls in this area. Many PLA exercises currently stress tactical
innovation on the part of commanders at all levels.
FIGHT IN ONE’S OWN WAY, AND LET THE ENEMY FIGHT IN ITS
1-53. Perhaps the most famous of Mao’s principles, this principle reinforces China’s views about the
uniqueness of its approach to military operations. It stresses the importance of knowing both one’s own
capabilities and those of the opponent.
1-12 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

CHINA’S APPROACH TO CONFLICT

1-54. China considers three aspects in the country’s view of conflict. They are Comprehensive National
Power, deception, and the Three Warfares.
COMPREHENSIVE NATIONAL POWER

1-55. China describes warfare as only one waypoint along a continuum. Military power is only one
component of Comprehensive National Power (CNP), the Chinese method of ranking countries based on an
assessment of all types of state influence. Hard power includes military capability and capacity, defense
industry capability, intelligence capability, and related diplomatic actions such as threats and coercion. Soft
power includes such things as economic power, peaceful diplomatic efforts, foreign development, global
image, and international prestige. These two types of power combine to make up CNP. China views CNP
as a vital measure of its global status. Ultimately, all forms of conflict—be they military, diplomatic, or
other—must enhance China’s CNP. CNP is viewed as a whole-of-government effort; the PLA is simply the
military wing of CPC, so it makes sense to view military action as fundamentally political. The primary
mission of the PLA is strategic deterrence, as illustrated in figure 1-3.
Figure 1-3. Comprehensive national power
DECEPTION
1-56. Deception plays a critical role in every part of the Chinese approach to conflict. The Chinese
emphasis on deception can be traced to Sun Tzu, who believed that it was the basis for all warfare. PLA
views on this topic differ considerably from those of most Western militaries. Instead of being a peripheral
enabler, deception operations are seen as integral to every operation at all levels of war. Where U.S. Army
operational planning uses the concept of a course of action— a scheme developed to accomplish a mission
(JP 5-0)—PLA planners use stratagems. Rather than describing friendly operations, stratagems describe the
enemy’s mindset, focusing on how to achieve the desired perceptions by the opponent, and then prescribing
ways to exploit this perception. Rather than focusing on defeating the opponent in direct conflict—as most
Western militaries do—stratagems consider deception, trickery, and other indirect, perception-based efforts
to be the most important elements of an operation. Deception is a fundamental aspect of the Chinese way of
war, and applications of deception are considered a high priority.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 1-13

Chapter 1
THREE WARFARES
1-57. China’s strategic approach to conflict employs Three Warfares designed to support and reinforce the
PLA’s traditional military operations. These Three Warfares are—
z Public Opinion Warfare.
z Psychological Warfare.
z Legal Warfare.
Though these approaches are called warfares, these strategies—in Western thinking—fall somewhere
between modern concepts such as information operations and historical concepts such as military
operations other than war or effects-based operations. Despite the names, they are universally nonlethal:
they do not involve direct combat operations. Instead, they are designed to pursue what Sun Tzu considered
generalship in its highest form—victory without battle. If a battle must be fought, the Three Warfares are
designed to unbalance, deceive, and coerce opponents in order to influence their perceptions. In a major
change from the past, when political officers were mainly involved in rear area personnel functions, the
Three Warfares make political officers and soldiers into nonlethal warfighters who provide essential
support to combat units.
1-58. Public Opinion Warfare is referred to as huayuquan, which translates roughly as “the right to speak
and be heard.” To the Western mind this implies something along the lines of freedom of speech. Its
meaning to the Chinese, however, is substantially different: it refers to the power to set the terms of a
debate, discussion, or negotiation. In other words, it is China’s high-level information campaign designed
to set the terms of political discussion. China views this effort as influential not only on PLA operations,
but also in support of Chinese economic interests worldwide. China views Public Opinion Warfare as
capable of seizing the initiative in a conflict before any shots are fired by shaping public discourse,
influencing political positions, and building international sympathy. Public Opinion Warfare operations are
seen every day in the PLA’s vast media system of newspapers, magazines, television, and internet sources
that target both domestic and foreign audiences. Public Opinion Warfare supports the PLA’s Psychological
Warfare and Legal Warfare activities in peacetime and war.
1-59. Psychological Warfare is broadly similar to U.S. military information support operations in that it is
intended to influence the behavior of a given audience. PLA Psychological Warfare seeks to integrate with
conventional warfare and includes both offensive and defensive measures. The PLA views Psychological
Warfare through the lens of Sun Tzu, emphasizing its multiplicative effect when coupled with
comprehensive deception operations. Deception operations are critical to the PLA’s entire warfighting
approach, and Psychological Warfare represents the major information operations element of deception
operations.
1-60. Legal Warfare refers to setting the legal conditions for victory—both domestically and
internationally. The U.S. does not have an equivalent concept, although State Department diplomatic and
legal operations have roughly equivalent objectives. Legal Warfare seeks to unbalance potential opponents
by using international or domestic laws to undermine their military operations, to seek legal validity for
PLA operations worldwide, and to support Chinese interests through a valid legal framework. Legal
Warfare has emerged with a particularly prominent role via the various Chinese political maneuverings in
the Western Pacific, particularly those areas surrounding international waterways, disputed land masses,
and economic rights of way. Legal Warfare is present at the tactical and operational levels of war. It guides
how the PLA trains to treat prisoners of war, detainees, and civilians, and how it abides by international
legal conventions, codes, and laws.
FRAMEWORK FOR PLA OPERATIONS

1-61. The PLA operational framework is the lens through which the PLA develops capabilities, plans and
executes operations, develops doctrine, and revises military philosophy and strategy. The operational
framework is complex and comprehensive, running the entire scope of military operations from national
strategy down to small-unit tactics. There is no direct U.S. equivalent, though most of the general ideas are
replicated in various ways in U.S. doctrine. The PLA operational framework consists of five levels, ranging
from the purely philosophical to the prescriptive and practical. These levels are—
1-14 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

z Military Thought.
z Defense Theory and Defense Doctrine.
z Strategic Principles and Operational Principles.
z Campaigns.
z Combat Tactics and Regulations.
Figure 1-4 illustrates the relationship between the different operational framework levels.
Figure 1-4. PLA operational framework
1-62. Military Thought represents the highest levels of PLA military thinking. It embodies China’s long
history as a land of philosophers, and it contains those works held in the highest esteem by the PLA. The
Art of War and People’s War are the two foundational documents and concepts for Military Thought,
though there are many other works constantly being produced, debated, and revised. Military Thought
provides the philosophical foundation for PLA operations, defines the culture and objectives of the PLA,
and defines the PLA’s relationship with the CPC. U.S. equivalents are military concepts and strategic
directives, such as the National Security Strategy and the Capstone Concept for Joint Operations.
1-63. Defense Theory and Defense Doctrine represent the PLA’s strategic-level thinking. Defense Theory
operationalizes the various principles laid out in Military Thought and other high-order documents.
Defense Doctrine codifies the basic PLA approach to warfighting. Doctrine in this sense remains at the
strategic level—the PLA does not appear to use the word “doctrine” to describe operational practices at
operational or tactical levels of war. A U.S. equivalent to Defense Theory is the Air Force Future
Operating Concept; an equivalent to Defense Doctrine is the U.S. Army in Multi-Domain Operations
(formerly the Army Operating Concept).
1-64. Strategic Principles and Operational Principles align roughly with what the U.S. DOD refers to as
doctrine; in other words, a series of situation-based discussions that serve as a guide to actions. These
principles are intended to standardize language and understanding throughout the PLA. One important
difference between Western doctrine and Chinese Strategic and Operational Principles is the importance
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 1-15

Chapter 1
that the PLA places on the interactions and relationship between the military and society. Western
militaries are generally apolitical and consider themselves separate entities from civilian society, whereas
the PLA codifies its place in Chinese society in these principles. In practice, this establishes the role of the
PLA in shaping Chinese society and politics, explains the relationship between militias and the areas they
serve, and describes the role of political officers in PLA units. A U.S. equivalent to Strategic Principles is
JP 3-0, while an equivalent to Operational Principles is ADP 3-0.
1-65. Campaigns do not have a Western equivalent. A PLA campaign is a large-scale, operational-level
effort that likely involves multiple services and a joint command, though it may also be conducted by units
from a single service. Unlike Western theater-level operations that are generally objective-based, PLA
campaigns are mission-based. PLA campaign types include—
z Joint blockade.
z Amphibious landing.
z Antiair raid.
z Mobile/maneuver warfare.
z Mountain offensive.
z Positional offensive.
z Positional defensive.
z Antiterrorism stability maintenance.
z Maritime group to destroy the enemy.
z Maritime interdiction.
z Offensive against coral reefs.
z Sea lane protection.
z Naval base defense.
z Air offensive.
z Airborne.
z Air defense.
z Conventional missile attack.
Each of these campaigns correlates to what U.S. forces would call a mission. In contrast, U.S. operations at
this level tend to be largely based around an objective and a concept of operations. For example, the
U.S.-led coalition operation, OPERATION IRAQI FREEDOM, had the objective of deposing the Ba’athist
government and installing a stable democracy in Iraq, with the concept of operations being to defeat the
Iraqi military, secure civil stability, and transition to a new government. The PLA’s campaign approach
suits its doctrine and philosophy well—it is more prescriptive, centralized, and narrow in scope, and
consequently it requires less freedom of action from subordinates. It remains to be seen if this approach
will be retained as the PLA moves toward more decentralized leadership and actions.
1-66. Combat Tactics and Regulations address unit-level activities and tactical-level doctrine. Tactics and
Regulations provide the basis for campaign operations, ensuring that all PLA units have a shared
understanding of basic maneuvers, actions, and responses. Regulations in this context are not laws and
rules as they are for the U.S. military; instead, they are similar to battle drills or other basic military actions.
This mirrors the old naming convention for U.S. Army doctrine, as predecessors to ADP 3-0 and FM 100-5
were titled Field Service Regulations, Operations until the mid-1960s. This naming convention may also
reflect greater centralization and top-down leadership. This approach may change in a similar way to the
campaign model as the PLA moves toward a decentralized approach to leadership.
PLA SYSTEM WARFARE

1-67. The PLA appears to recognize domains in the same way as the U.S. DOD, and it is actively seeking
to enhance multi-domain capabilities and cross-domain integration. The organization applies all of its basic
military philosophies and principles of active defense, deterrence, and deception to operations in all
domains. The overarching PLA theoretical framework for its multi-domain effort is called system warfare.
The system warfare concept seeks to identify critical or vulnerable system components, then degrade or
destroy the effective use of larger systems through targeted attacks on these vulnerabilities. The primary
1-16 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

principle of system warfare is the identification and isolation of critical or vulnerable subsystems or
interdependence of these subsystems. The PLA believes that if key threat systems are rendered ineffective,
the threat’s ability and will to resist will crumble.
1-68. System warfare is the most recent PLA effort to operationalize the principles of force concentration
and asymmetric attack as outlined by Sun Tzu and Mao, while accounting for the lethality, cost, and
complexity of modern weapons systems. The PLA classifies all capabilities, ranging from ballistic missiles
and strike fighters to cyber operators and special operations forces, as military systems. Each system has
inherent strengths and weaknesses. System warfare involves—
z Bypassing enemy systems’ areas of strength, thus gaining a combat advantage by approaching
them asymmetrically.
z Developing systems that excel at exploiting perceived weaknesses in enemy systems, thereby
offsetting their strengths by undermining the systems’ ability to perform assigned missions.
The most common examples of system warfare are actions such as targeting networks instead of shooters,
sensors instead of aircraft, or command and communication nodes instead of maneuver forces. The PLA
expands system warfare to include diplomatic efforts undermining international alliances, offensive cyber
operations disabling air or seaport operations, or special operations forces undermining civilian morale
through covert operations.
1-69. Many of the systems with which the PLA intends to prosecute system warfare are not standing
capabilities, but rather purpose built in times of conflict. During times of war, the PLA intends to build
task-organized suites of capabilities designed to strike specific weak points of its opponent’s key systems.
These suites of capabilities are called operational systems. Each operational system consists of five main
subcomponents: the command system, the strike system, the information warfare system, the intelligence
system, and the support system.
1-70. At the tactical level, system warfare centers largely on targeting high-value battlefield systems such
as radars, command and communication nodes, and field artillery and air defense systems, and it can
include selective armored vehicles and critical logistics support means. Examples of tactical system warfare
include using heavy rocket artillery to defeat or destroy enemy radars and artillery systems, EW to suppress
or neutralize enemy command and communication networks, and deception operations to target enemy
leadership’s situational understanding and state of mind. Tactical system warfare is discussed in greater
detail in chapter 4.
1-71. The PLA’s employment of system warfare supports the development of several traditional military
strategies, such as preclusion, isolation, and sanctuary, throughout all domains and at all levels of war.
Preclusion is achieved by keeping enemy commanders and forces off balance through asymmetric means,
such as deception and information warfare, while simultaneously denying use of wide geographic areas
through long-range reconnaissance-strike capabilities. Isolation is achieved by jamming or manipulating
communications between units, employing psychological warfare to confuse and segregate enemy units
from one another, then rapidly maneuvering to physically isolate them. Sanctuary is achieved through a
mix of protection, defensive planning, information warfare, and deception operations. Sanctuary includes
not only safety from physical attack, but safety from enemy information operations.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 1-17

Chapter 2
People’s Liberation Army Force Structure
This chapter outlines the organization of the People’s Liberation Army (PLA),
beginning with its organization at the highest levels of the Communist Party of China
(CPC), then describing unit-level organizations at the strategic, operational, and
tactical levels. The PLA is one of the world’s largest formal organizations, and by
military standards it has a very complex organizational structure. Ongoing reforms
and reorganization add to this complexity. Diagrams and descriptions in this section
provide generalized data, and unit organizational diagrams are examples of probable
task-organized capabilities adapted to a mission set.
CHINA’S SECURITY APPARATUS

The PLA represents the armed forces branch of China’s security organizations. Other organizations
under this umbrella include the Ministry of Public Security (MPS), the Ministry of State Security (MSS),
the People’s Armed Police (PAP), and the China Militia. These organizations are collectively referred to as
the Chinese Security Apparatus. The Chinese Security Apparatus is not fully analogous to the U.S.
Department of Defense (DOD): it is more of a descriptive term than a discrete organization. All Security
Apparatus organizations fall under the purview of the CPC, and their missions often overlap with one
another. One of the defining elements of Chinese internal politics is the complex interplay between these
organizations and their leadership. In most cases, the PLA can be thought of as the most important and
most influential member of the Chinese Security Apparatus.
Forces making up each organization in the Chinese Security Apparatus can be described as either
civilian, paramilitary, or military. The composition of each organization varies significantly. Police,
security, and some intelligence forces are described as civilian; the MPS and MSS are comprised mostly of
these personnel. The PAP and the China Militia are largely paramilitary: they conduct military-like training
and employ some military equipment and tactics, but they are not considered part of the PLA.
The MPS is China’s national police force and the world’s largest police organization. Though a
national-level force, it is organized and commanded locally, typically by provincial governments. It is
responsible for day-to-day law enforcement throughout China, and it is directly reportable to China’s State
Council. The MSS is China’s primary national intelligence apparatus, having responsibility for both foreign
and domestic intelligence work and counterintelligence. The MSS’s counterintelligence mission requires a
fairly significant “secret police” element that does not work with the MPS. The PLA generally does not
integrate activities with either the MPS or the MSS, except when intelligence or security information is
exchanged. The roles and responsibility of the MSS are in transition, as a new high-level command—the
People’s Liberation Army Strategic Support Force (PLASSF)—was recently established and appears to
overlap numerous responsibilities with the MSS.
The Chinese Armed Forces consist of the PLA, the PAP, and the China Militia. The PLA’s primary
role within the Chinese Armed Forces is to defend China from external or international threats, while the
PAP focuses on internal threats. The PAP’s mission is internal security and, in conjunction with the MPS,
limited law enforcement. The PAP also has the official mission to support or reinforce the PLA during
times of war. PAP forces are organized on a provincial basis, with two national-level antiterrorism units
stationed in the capital region. The PAP features military-like organizations and extensive use of military
equipment, including small arms, helicopters, and light armored vehicles. The U.S. does not have an
equivalent organization.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 2-1

Chapter 2
The China Militia is a massive quasi-formal militia element of the Chinese Armed Forces, consisting
mostly of poorly trained and equipped part-time regional military units. The militia’s primary mission is to
provide logistics and security support to the PLA, though disaster relief and internal security missions are
also part of its mission set. The China Militia is a different entity from the People’s Liberation Army
Reserve. The militia can be can be considered an aspect of People’s War philosophy, to be integrated with
the military and other entities in times of national emergency or crisis. Like the rest of the Chinese Armed
Forces, it is being downsized and modernized, with less emphasis put on manpower and more emphasis on
quality training and equipment. Like the PAP, there is not a true U.S. equivalent to the China Militia.
The PLA is the armed forces of China. Though called an army, the PLA is analogous to the U.S.
DOD in that it consists of all of the service branches: an army (People’s Liberation Army Army—PLAA),
navy (People’s Liberation Army Navy—PLAN), air force (People’s Liberation Army Air Force—PLAAF),
rocket force (People’s Liberation Army Rocket Force—PLARF), and strategic support force (PLASSF). In
addition, the People’s Liberation Army Joint Logistics Support Force (PLAJLSF), though not a service, is a
national-level PLA organization. The PLA is under the command of the Central Military Commission
(CMC), as supervised by the Politburo Standing Committee and the CPC. The PLA is officially the armed
wing of the CPC; all levels of the PLA are supervised by a system of political officers. The expressed
primary missions of the PLA are to protect the ruling status of the CPC, ensure China’s sovereignty and
territorial integrity, safeguard Chinese interests at home and abroad, and help maintain global stability. (See
figure 2-1 on page 2-3 for a simplified diagram of the PLA’s command structure.)
The PLAA is China’s land combat service. It consists of an active-duty component and a reserve
component, organized in roughly the same way as the U.S. Army’s active and reserve components. The
PLAA’s active force consists of roughly one million soldiers, and it remains the dominant service within
the PLA, despite recent efforts to reduce its influence. The reserve component consists of roughly 500,000
soldiers and, despite being a national-level organization, it is relatively poorly trained and equipped—
though it is a significant improvement over the China Militia. In times of war, the reserve component will
likely take over rear area, security, and sustainment duties in order to free up higher-quality active duty
forces for more rigorous missions. The PLAA recognizes branches in much the same way the U.S. Army
does. PLAA branches are—
z Infantry (including mechanized, motorized, and mountain).
z Armored.
z Artillery (including towed and self-propelled tube artillery, rocket artillery, antitank missiles and
guns).
z Air defense (including short- and medium-range mobile gun and missile systems—heavier
missile systems are operated by the PLAAF).
z Aviation (including helicopters and limited fixed-wing aircraft).
z Engineer.
z Chemical defense.
z Communications.
z Electronic warfare (EW).
z Logistics.
z Armaments (maintenance).
z Special operations forces (SOF).
CHINESE NATIONAL AND STRATEGIC-LEVEL ORGANIZATIONS

The command structure of the PLA is complex and opaque to outsiders. Both its command structure
and apparatus are deliberately complex, designed first and foremost to ensure the security of the CPC. In
stark contrast to Western military philosophy, Chinese command structures do not generally appoint a
single decision maker or imbue a single individual with absolute command authority: decisions are to be
made via consensus, rather than by fiat. Of note, however, the current Chinese President, Xi Jinping,
appears to wield much greater direct authority over the PLA than his predecessors. There are no fewer than
ten different national-level command organizations in China, organized across at least three different levels
of a complex hierarchy. This ATP will not discuss in detail the intricate web of organizations and internal
2-2 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

politics at the top of China’s command structure, but it will provide a simplified overview to enable better
understanding of how these command relationships influence tactical operations.
Figure 2-1. Simplified PLA command structure
The CMC is the most powerful and significant national-level command body in China. It is also the
most relevant to tactical operations. Recent restructuring created no fewer than 15 functional departments,
including a national-level army department and a strategic rocket department. In general, national
headquarters are responsible for capabilities development, education, and training, while theater commands
(discussed in paragraph 2-10) are responsible for operations. The CMC is notionally led by a civilian
chairman: the CPC’s head and China’s president. He is typically assisted in decision making by numerous
vice chairmen and senior PLA officers. The CMC’s command structure relies on a committee approach and
is not formal—it routinely changes based on political dynamics. This committee-based approach differs
significantly from the U.S. approach, where a single decision maker—the President—has all command
authority and is only advised by his staff and cabinet. The Chinese approach likely arose from the desire to
make all military decisions with CPC political objectives in mind, and it helps explain why political
officers are present throughout the PLA chain of command.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 2-3

Chapter 2
CMC command authority is exercised operationally through theater commands (TCs). TCs are joint
commands that exercise extensive—though not exclusive—command authority in their given region. TCs
are tasked with developing strategy, tactics, and policy specific for their areas of responsibility, and they
are directly responsible for responding to threats and crises within their assigned regions. TCs are similar to
U.S. combatant commands, except that the parallel chains of command extend to the national command
structure. TCs are strictly domestic in scope, and they do not extend past Chinese land borders and nearby
maritime regions. TC commands mimic Chinese national command structure in that they are heavily
politicized and bureaucratically complex. TC commanders share command responsibility with political
commissars of the same rank; TC commanders are responsible for operations, while political commissars
are responsible for ideological functions. TC staffs participate in committee-based decision making. Each
TC has a single-service subordinate headquarters responsible for that service’s operations in the theater,
plus an organic electronic countermeasures brigade, an information operations support brigade, and a
reconnaissance and intelligence support brigade. PLAA, PLAAF and PLAN units have dual chains of
command during peacetime, reporting both to their national service-level headquarters and to their assigned
TC. In wartime they will likely be under complete control of their respective TCs. (See figure 2-2 on page
2-5 for an illustration of the TC’s dual reporting structure and the subordinate chain of command.)
Note. The PLA understands rank in the same way that the U.S. military does, but it takes a
fundamentally different view of grade. In the PLA, grade refers to one’s duty position: platoon
leader, brigade deputy leader, and so on. Hierarchy of grade is extremely important to the
PLA—more so than rank. There are 15 different grades, and they are recognized across all of the
PLA’s different services. As such, a PLAA officer’s grade can be directly compared with that of
a PLAN officer, and seniority established between the two. In the U.S. military, grade refers to
military pay, and duty position is clearly subordinate to rank when it comes to determining
seniority.
2-4 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Figure 2-2. PLAA chain of command, isolated
TCs were reorganized in 2016, reducing the number of regions from seven to five and changing the
title of military region to TC. When in a list, TCs are presented in order of protocol, with the most
prestigious—and most militarily relevant—TC listed first. The current TCs, in order of precedence, are—
z Eastern Theater Command, headquartered in Nanjing, with responsibility for central eastern
China and the East China Sea, including the Strait of Taiwan. The Eastern TC likely has
operational responsibility for matters involving Taiwan, Japan, and anything related to the East
China Sea.
z Southern Theater Command, headquartered in Guangzhou, has responsibility for south-central
China, including the border with Vietnam and the South China Sea. The Southern TC’s primary
missions are maintaining security in the South China Sea and supporting the Eastern TC in any
major amphibious operation.
z Western Theater Command, headquartered in Chengdu, has responsibility for virtually the entire
western half of China, including borders with India and Russia and the regions of Tibet and
Xinjiang. The Western TC’s primary missions are contending with perceived separatist and
terrorist threats in Tibet and Xinjiang and addressing border issues with China’s two powerful
western neighbors.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 2-5

Chapter 2
z Northern Theater Command, headquartered in Shenyang, with responsibility for northeastern

China along the Mongolian, Russian, and North Korean borders. The Northern TC’s most
prominent responsibilities are the various contingencies stemming from China’s shared border
with North Korea and maintaining border security with Mongolia and Russia.
z Central Theater Command, headquartered in Beijing, has responsibility for north-central China
and the capital region. The Central TC’s primary mission is the defense of Beijing, and it serves
as the national strategic military reserve.
Military districts (MDs) correspond to Chinese provincial-level governments and are considered the
military organs within their respective provincial-level governments. They use the same dual-command
structure as TCs, with a commander and political commissar sharing command responsibility. The primary
responsibilities of MD headquarters are conscription and demobilization, Military-Civil Fusion, and
command of China Militia units. MDs also have jurisdiction over PLA border defense units in Xinjiang,
Tibet, and part of Inner Mongolia, while TC headquarters command border and coastal defense units in the
rest of the country. MD commanders previously carried the grade equivalent of a corps leader, but this has
likely been reduced following recent reforms in keeping with the general theme of professionalization and
modernization throughout the PLA.
Local commands (LCs), such as military subdistricts or garrisons at the prefecture, county, and city
level, and PLA departments at the county, city, and municipal level represent the lowest level of the PLA’s
command structure. They are described as the military service organs of the people’s government. LCs are
primarily charged with meeting conscription quotas, demobilization, national defense education, local
Military-Civil Fusion, and command of China Militia units. In Xinjiang, Tibet, and part of Inner Mongolia
they also command border defense units.
PLAA OPERATIONAL-LEVEL ORGANIZATIONS

The group army is the PLAA’s basic operational-level organization. The group army structure is an
evolution of the PLA’s corps-based structure that comprised most of its history; it appears the group army
is an attempt to retain most of the capabilities of the traditional corps, but with greater flexibility and ability
to task-organize. Group armies are assigned to TCs; TC command authority is passed through TC PLAA
headquarters to the group army headquarters. Group armies use the same dual-command structure as most
other PLA units, employing both a military commander and a political commissar. Compared to geographic
headquarters (MDs and LCs), it is likely that a group army’s leadership is more heavily influenced by
operational requirements, rather than local political relationships and responsibilities.
Following a complete overhaul and reorganization in 2017, each group army now directly commands
12 brigade-size organizations: six combined-arms brigades and six support brigades of various types.
Except for six legacy divisions, divisional headquarters have been eliminated, notionalized, or made strictly
administrative. This overhaul seeks to eliminate excess command structure, reduce the number of general
officers and associated staffs, and increase capabilities at tactical-level formations. The group army
reorganization coincided with a massive drawdown in manpower across the PLA. This transition seeks to
increase combined arms capability across the PLA through the application of improved technology and
training, while simultaneously reducing PLA manpower and reducing quantities of obsolete equipment. A
more standardized group army is a centerpiece of this effort.
The group army is likely not intended to be employed as an operational unit. Rather, it is the force
pool from which operational systems are built as part of the wider system-warfare construct. Group army
commanders facilitate the assembly of purpose-built operational systems, using their available force
structure to create the command, maneuver, and support systems that execute operations in the group
army’s combat area. As such, concerns about the group army’s large number of subordinate units—and the
ability, or lack thereof, to control them—are not reflective of the PLAA’s approach to building forces.
The main combat power of the notional group army consists of its six combined arms brigades
(CA-BDEs). These brigades are supported by one artillery brigade; one air defense brigade; an aviation
brigade; an SOF brigade; an engineer and chemical defense brigade; and a service support brigade,
consisting of logistics, transportation, medical, repair, ammunition, communications, unmanned aircraft
systems (UAS), and EW units. The 2017 reorganization placed a greater emphasis on system warfare
2-6 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

capabilities at the group army level, providing a much more extensive suite of EW and cyber capabilities,
long-range reconnaissance, and long-range fires under the direct control of group army commanders. Group
army commanders can now support their assigned CA-BDEs with a significant suite of capabilities able to
influence operations across all domains. (See figure 2-3 for a graphic depiction of the group army.)
Figure 2-3. Group army structure (doctrinal)
Group-army joint capabilities are limited, but they are expected to expand with ongoing reforms. TCs
provide air, naval, and some SOF support, though group armies do typically contain an SOF brigade. The
group army also appears to be largely dependent on higher commands—either the TC or PLAJLSF—for
most of its logistics support. This emphasizes the lack of expeditionary capability throughout the PLA:
sustainment within China’s borders may be sufficient to support high-intensity operations, but current
sustainment capabilities likely cannot support major combat operations overseas.
PLAA TACTICAL-LEVEL ORGANIZATIONS

The PLAA has completed a substantial period of reorganization with regard to its tactical unit
structure. Traditionally, the PLAA was built around the division. Divisions were designed around the
Soviet model. They were somewhat smaller and more homogenous than their U.S. counterparts, without
the same combined arms and sustainment capabilities. In a transition similar to that undertaken by the U.S.
Army, Ground Forces of the Russian Federation, and numerous other armies, the PLAA is in the process of
“brigade-ization”—moving capabilities that used to reside at the division echelon to the brigade, with the
goal of creating a more flexible force with a streamlined command structure, from group to army to brigade
to battalion. This reorganization corresponds with the substantial drawdown in manpower ongoing
throughout the PLA. PLAA divisions are now largely an administrative echelon—only six divisions remain
operational, with none residing in group armies. Otherwise, frontline PLA units have moved entirely to a
brigade-oriented structure.
Note. Unit descriptions in this section are notional, as described by the PLAA and supported by
further intelligence analysis. Real-world units may vary widely in composition, organization,
and equipment, though the PLAA is moving in the direction of force-wide standardization. It is
important to note that PLAA units at battalion and below are designed to fight as structured,
without the need for significant task organization.
COMBINED ARMS BRIGADES

The CA-BDE is the PLAA’s basic operational unit. It is similar in size, capability, and organization
to the U.S. Army’s brigade combat team (BCT); it is entirely possible that the PLAA was influenced by
BCT organization when designing the CA-BDE. The CA-BDE mixes different capabilities under a single
headquarters: maneuver, fires, logistics, communications, engineer, and EW subordinate units are
organically assigned to CA-BDE headquarters. CA-BDEs do not appear to have any organic joint
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 2-7

Chapter 2
capability, but they are developing joint capabilities to be able to control units from other services during
training and operations. (See table 2-1 for a comparison of a PLAA CA-BDE to a U.S. BCT.)
Table 2-1. Comparison of PLAA combined arms brigade to U.S. brigade combat team
PLAA Combined Arms Brigade U.S. Brigade Combat Team (BCT)
Maneuver 4–6 battalions 3 battalions
Artillery 1 howitzer battalion 1 howitzer battalion
1 rocket battalion
Air defense 3 batteries, including: None
x Self-propelled guns.
x Man-portable air defense
systems.
x Short-range missile systems.
Reconnaissance Comparable to U.S. BCT
Engineer and Comparable to U.S. BCT
protection
Logistics and Newly established
sustainment Likely less capable than U.S. BCT
There are three distinct types of CA-BDEs: light (motorized), medium (mechanized), and heavy
(armored). The PLAA describes the differences between motorized and mechanized infantry in how
supporting vehicles are employed: motorized units are only transported by their assigned vehicles, while
mechanized forces employ their vehicles as combat platforms that support the infantry. The PLAA employs
a variety of armored personnel carriers (APCs) and infantry fighting vehicles (IFVs) that feature a broad
range of firepower and protection; some are tracked, some are wheeled, and there is considerable overlap.
As such, one must look at how the unit intends to fight, rather than its composition and equipment, when
assessing a unit as motorized versus mechanized. Airborne, mountain, and amphibious CA-BDEs are
described as light. The CA-BDE organizations are described in paragraphs 2-22 through 2-24.
The light CA-BDE contains these units—
z Four motorized combined arms battalions (CA-BNs).
z One reconnaissance battalion.
z One artillery battalion.
z One air defense battalion.
z One headquarters unit.
z One operational support battalion.
z One service support battalion.
(See figure 2-4 for a graphic depiction of the light CA-BDE.).
2-8 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Figure 2-4. Light combined arms brigade (doctrinal)
The medium CA-BDE contains these units—

z Four mechanized CA-BNs.
(See figure 2-5 for a graphic depiction of the medium CA-BDE.)
Figure 2-5. Medium combined arms brigade (doctrinal)
The heavy CA-BDE contains these units—

z Four armored CA-BNs.
(See figure 2-6 for a graphic depiction of the heavy CA-BDE.)
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 2-9

Chapter 2
Figure 2-6. Heavy combined arms brigade (doctrinal)
ARTILLERY BRIGADE
The artillery brigade in the group army employs a variety of towed guns, self-propelled guns (SPGs),
light (122-mm) and heavy (300-mm) rocket artillery systems, and antitank and assault vehicles. These
systems are employed to mass fires on critical targets, reinforce fires at lower echelons (chiefly the
CA-BDE), deter or deny enemy actions, and offset enemy advantages in close combat. Artillery brigade
assets may be employed in direct or general support of CA-BDEs. Artillery battalions include organic
surveillance and target acquisition assets, including UAS, electronic intelligence (ELINT) systems, and
traditional long-range visual forward-observation platforms. It is not clear how effectively the PLAA can
task-organize fires; it traditionally preferred to centralize fires in order to maximize the effects of mass, but
the movement toward smaller tactical formations and modularization requires that lower echelons be
capable of employing effective fire support. In addition to its indirect fire capability, each artillery battalion
includes an antitank guided missile (ATGM) company, employing light armored vehicles mounted with
ATGMs. Artillery brigade composition varies significantly based on operational requirements and system
availability. A notional artillery brigade contains—
Two self-propelled 122-mm, 152-mm, or 155-mm towed or self-propelled howitzer
battalions (three batteries with four to six guns each, from 24 to 36 guns total).
One light (122-mm) rocket battalion (three batteries with nine launchers each, 27 launchers
total).
One heavy (300-mm) rocket battalion (12 launchers total).
One target acquisition battery.
One UAS company.
One command battery.
One support company.
(See figure 2-7 for a graphic depiction of the artillery brigade.)
2-10 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Figure 2-7. Artillery brigade (doctrinal)
AIR DEFENSE BRIGADE

The group army’s air defense brigade provides the middle tier in the PLA’s tiered and layered
approach to ground-based air defense. The PLAA historically relied heavily on antiaircraft guns, both
towed and self-propelled (SPAAGs). These systems are still heavily represented in both the air defense
brigade and in the air defense battalions of the CA-BDEs. The air defense brigade also employs a mixture
of medium-range radar missile systems, short-range missile systems, and sensors designed to support
engagement of aerial targets. It is not known to what extent these tactical air defense systems integrate with
the much-larger theater-wide air defense networks employed by TCs, but it is likely that at least the
medium-range surface-to-air missile (SAM) battalion has some sort of digital integration with a higher air
defense echelon. As with artillery systems, air defense units may be employed in mass to defend critical
assets from air attack, or they may be detached in direct or general support to subordinate CA-BDEs. Each
brigade may also include an electronic air defense battalion, integrating EW assets with gun systems. As
with artillery systems, air defense brigade composition varies significantly based on operational
requirements and system availability. A notional air defense brigade contains—
z One medium-range SAM battalion (three batteries consisting of one radar section and three
launcher sections per battery).
z Two short-range air defense (SHORAD) battalions (three batteries consisting of six to eight
SPAAGs and four to six short-range SAM launchers per battery).
z One electronic air defense battalion (three batteries consisting of varied EW capabilities).
z One command battery.
z One support company.
(See figure 2-8 on page 2-12 for a graphic depiction of the air defense brigade.)
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 2-11

Chapter 2
Figure 2-8. Air defense brigade (doctrinal)
ENGINEER AND CHEMICAL DEFENSE BRIGADE

The group army’s engineer and chemical defense brigade is responsible for protection, mobility,
countermobility, and chemical defense and obscuration functions within the group army’s combat area.
Historically, the PLA invested heavily in its engineer units due not only to its emphasis on mobility and
countermobility, but also for contingency missions in support of disaster relief or other civil emergencies.
This employment strategy is likely to continue. PLAA engineer brigades include mining, countermining,
obstacle, bridging, smoke, chemical defense, and heavy maintenance units. These units provide much of the
PLA’s support to international peacekeeping and development missions.
SERVICE SUPPORT BRIGADE

The service support brigade includes logistics, transportation, medical, repair, ammunition, command
and communication, UAS, and EW units. In addition to traditional combat support roles, the brigade is
postured to perform signal support and EW missions. The service support brigade’s signal element employs
both traditional and network communications throughout the group army’s combat area. Previously,
communications were handled largely at the division, with minimal communications architecture being
employed at lower echelons. With the PLAA’s emphasis on information operations, signal capabilities
were significantly enhanced at tactical echelons. The signal element has responsibility for providing
network connectivity to PLAA units and protecting these communications networks from jamming,
electromagnetic attack, and cyber intrusion. The EW regiment represents a serious investment in EW and
cyber capability to be employed at the operational and tactical levels. It includes a jamming and
electromagnetic attack section, a long-range electronic surveillance section, an electromagnetic protection
section, a network operations section, and a communications operations section. It is unclear how the PLA
will allocate permissions and responsibilities to the EW regiment, though it can be safely assumed that
rules of engagement will be more permissive than they are in Western militaries. It can also be assumed
that the EW regiment will work closely with the artillery and air defense brigades in order to target
long-range artillery fires in a construct similar to the Russian reconnaissance-fire system.
Note. The PLAA describes signal and communications capabilities under the umbrella of
command and communication.
ARMY AVIATION BRIGADE

The army aviation brigade (AAB) provides the group army’s rotary-wing aviation capability. The
AAB’s development is likely influenced by the U.S. Army’s combat aviation brigade, though the AAB has
far fewer airframes than does its U.S. counterpart. The AAB is built around medium-lift transport
helicopters and scout and attack helicopters. The PLAA uses a number of different helicopter types: foreign
2-12 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

systems from Russia, the former Soviet Union, and Europe, and indigenous designs are all present in
significant numbers. The density of helicopters in the PLAA is relatively low as compared to the size of the
rest of the force; the U.S. Army’s ratio of helicopters to troops is over ten times that of the PLAA.
Rotary-wing capability is a significant area of investment in the PLA’s modernization strategy; it is likely
that the AABs will be greatly expanded in the relatively near future, using mainly indigenous or
license-produced airframes. The AAB is organized into eight battalions, mixing general-utility lift
helicopters, attack helicopters, and light attack and reconnaissance helicopters. In addition to the AABs, the
PLAA has also formed two air assault brigades, which include either two or three infantry battalions and up
to six medium-lift helicopter battalions. AABs train frequently with both light CA-BDEs and SOF. A
notional AAB organization contains—
z Four general-utility battalions (eight to 12 medium-lift or general-utility helicopters per
battalion).
z Two attack battalions (eight attack helicopters per battalion).
z One reconnaissance battalion (eight reconnaissance or light attack helicopters).
z One aviation support battalion.
(See figure 2-9 for a graphic depiction of the army aviation brigade.)
Figure 2-9. Army aviation brigade (doctrinal)
SPECIAL OPERATIONS FORCES BRIGADE

The SOF brigade provides the group army with an organic SOF capability. Group-army SOF brigade
operations generally do not focus on training or interacting with foreign militaries; they instead focus on
direct action—deep reconnaissance and commando operations in support of group army operations. Group
army SOF brigades are highly specialized to operate in their specific theater. Mountainous theaters focus
on alpine training, coastal theaters focus on amphibious operations, and urban theaters focus on urban
operations. SOF brigades are equipped with organic surveillance UASs, likely to aid target acquisition in
support of heavy artillery and rocket fires. Group army SOF brigades are more similar to U.S. Army
Ranger light infantry and long-range reconnaissance units than traditional SOF; their primary mission is to
support the group army’s combined arms maneuver operations. SOF brigades habitually train with PLAA
aviation units, but they do not enjoy the wide variety of fixed- and rotary-wing capabilities available to
U.S. SOF units.
COMBINED ARMS BATTALION

The CA-BN is a very new development in the PLAA organization. The CA-BN takes the basic
combined arms approach used to build the CA-BDE and applies it to the battalion echelon. CA-BNs appear
to only combine different maneuver elements along with organic short-range fires elements (assault guns
and mortars), with the provision that CA-BDE headquarters can attach elements from other brigade
organizations as required. The CA-BN is very similar to the U.S. battalion task force concept employed by
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 2-13

Chapter 2
mechanized and armored units since the World War II era, mixing company-level infantry and armor units
to create a single combined arms command. Each CA-BN also houses an organic SHORAD capability
in the form of manportable air defense systems (MANPADS). The PLAA breaks CA-BNs into three
primary categories: light, medium, and heavy. Of note, the CA-BN appears to have only limited staff,
which may affect its ability to function as the PLAA intends—as an independent unit. Combined
arms battalion organizations are described in paragraphs 2-32 through 2-34.
A light infantry CA-BN contains—
z Three motorized infantry companies (10 light wheeled vehicles or APCs per company).
z One firepower company (six to nine rapid-fire 81-mm mortars, the form of man-portable air
defense, and crew-served weapons).
z One service support company.
(See figure 2-10 for a graphic depiction of a light combined arms battalion.)
Figure 2-10. Light combined arms battalion (doctrinal)
A medium CA-BN contains—

z Three mechanized infantry companies (10 wheeled or tracked IFVs per company).
z One assault gun company (14 wheeled 105-mm assault guns).
z One firepower company (six to nine rapid-fire 120-mm self-propelled mortars, MANPADS, and
crew-served weapons).
z One service support company.
(See figure 2-11 for a graphic depiction of a medium combined arms battalion.)
Figure 2-11. Medium combined arms battalion (doctrinal)
2-14 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

A heavy CA-BN contains—

Two tank companies (10-14 tanks per company).
Two mechanized infantry company (10 IFVs per company).
One firepower company (six to nine rapid-fire 120-mm self-propelled mortars, MANPADS,
and crew-served weapons).
One headquarters unit.
One service support company.
(See figure 2-12 for a graphic depiction of a heavy combined arms battalion.)
Figure 2-12. Heavy combined arms battalion (doctrinal)
ARTILLERY BATTALION
The CA-BDE’s artillery battalion is a major focus of PLAA investment. Recognizing that PLAA
forces may be outmatched in close combat with other industrialized nations’ maneuver forces, the PLAA
developed doctrine designed to defeat, suppress, or neutralize enemy maneuver units before close contact
occurs. In practice, this necessitated the fielding of new SPGs in both the 122-mm and 155-mm class, along
with a series of older 152-mm towed guns and heavy, highly capable rocket artillery platforms. Unlike the
U.S. Army, CA-BDEs employ a composite of rocket and tube artillery at the brigade level. CA-BDEs can
be reinforced with guns and rocket artillery from their respective TC’s artillery brigade. Of note, the
artillery battalion contains a robust antitank capability, consisting of light armored ATGM vehicles and
several towed antitank guns. An artillery battalion contains—
z Two to three 122-mm or 155-mm SPG batteries (three platoons with three guns each, 18-27
guns total).
z One light (122-mm) rocket battery (three platoons with three launchers each, nine launchers
total).
z One ATGM company (nine vehicle launchers or antitank guns).
(See figure 2-13 for a graphic depiction of an artillery battalion.)
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 2-15

Chapter 2
Figure 2-13. Artillery battalion (doctrinal)
AIR DEFENSE BATTALION

The CA-BDE’s air defense battalion provides low-altitude air defense in the CA-BDE’s airspace.
PLAA tactical air defense systems are generally mobile, lightweight, and within visual range. They consist
of a mixture of guns and short-range missiles, including both vehicle mounted and MANPADS systems.
The air defense battalion does not appear to have a robust long-range detection or early warning capability;
integration with higher-level air defense units or PLAAF units is limited. Thus, the air defense battalion can
only provide point, within-visual-range air defense against low-flying targets. The air defense battalion’s
primary target set is helicopters, unmanned aircraft, and low-flying aircraft. Fires are likely controlled
locally through visual aircraft identification and weapons control statuses. Radar detection is limited to
short-range organic radars mounted on weapons systems. The air defense battalion’s systems are mobile,
and they move closely with CA-BDE units while maneuvering. Gun systems are dual purpose and can
engage surface targets if necessary. An air defense battalion contains—
z Three SPAAG batteries (six guns per battery, 18 guns total).
z One SHORAD battery (eight systems per battery and possibly one to two radar systems).
(See figure 2-14 for a graphic depiction of an air defense battalion.)
Figure 2-14. Air defense battalion (doctrinal)
2-16 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

RECONNAISSANCE BATTALION
The CA-BDE’s reconnaissance battalion provides multi-domain reconnaissance, intelligence,
surveillance, and target acquisition capabilities. The reconnaissance battalion uses a mixture of mounted,
dismounted, UAS, human intelligence (HUMINT), ELINT, and cyber collection capabilities to support
CA-BDE intelligence and targeting requirements. The reconnaissance battalion’s structure is very similar to
that of the U.S. Army reconnaissance squadron, consisting of three troops employing a mixture of
collection capabilities. In addition to traditional scouts, the reconnaissance battalion may include an
element of SOF-like troops, capable of conducting independent direct action in deep areas. The
reconnaissance battalion is a critical component of the CA-BDE’s reconnaissance-strike capability,
providing much of the deep intelligence needed to support targeting for both the CA-BDE’s organic
surface-to-surface fires and any supporting or reinforcing fires from the artillery brigade. The PLAA places
a very high priority on reconnaissance in general. In order to shape the mindset of one’s opponents, one
must know as much as possible about their disposition and intentions. It should also be noted that group
armies do not have a dedicated ground reconnaissance unit as do U.S. corps; the group army’s SOF brigade
provides much of the ground intelligence in support of group army operations. A reconnaissance battalion
contains—
z Two reconnaissance troops (mounted; six to 10 light armored vehicles per troop).
z One battlefield surveillance company (all-source intelligence organization).
z One UAS company (likely containing two to three aircraft).
(See figure 2-15 on page 2-18 for a graphic depiction of a reconnaissance battalion.)
Figure 2-15. Reconnaissance battalion (doctrinal)
OPERATIONAL SUPPORT BATTALION

The CA-BDE’s operational support battalion provides mobility, countermobility, and protection
capabilities, along with an EW company, a command and communication company, a chemical defense
company, and a security (military police) company. It is similar—though not identical—to the U.S. Army’s
special troops battalion. The operational support battalion likely operates in a highly decentralized manner,
task-organizing support elements to other battalions within the CA-BDE. Operational support battalions are
tailored to the needs of their parent unit; heavier CA-BDEs require heavier engineer support. One of the
most important missions of the operational support battalion is supporting deception operations. The PLAA
puts a very high priority on camouflage and concealment, and much of this responsibility falls to the
engineering element of the operational support battalion. The operational support battalion also employs a
relatively high density of vehicles, representing a significant portion of the CA-BDE’s wheeled-vehicle
inventory.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 2-17

Chapter 2
SERVICE SUPPORT BATTALION

The CA-BDE’s service support battalion provides sustainment support for the CA-BDE, including
supply, medical, and maintenance support. It is likely structured similarly to the US Army’s brigade
support battalion. It is unclear if the service support battalion operates in a more traditional and centralized
manner, or if it habitually task-organizes itself to support individual CA-BNs. It can be assumed that, in
order to support the CA-BN concept, greater logistics decentralization must occur, but PLAA logistics
infrastructure may not support this approach without significant augmentation.
2-18 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Chapter 3
People’s Liberation Army Joint Capabilities
This chapter describes People’s Liberation Army (PLA) joint capabilities, how they
support the tactical commander, and how these forces are integrated into tactical
operations. The modern PLA is a sophisticated joint force, likely capable of
conducting integrated operations across all domains. PLA joint operations are still in
their relative infancy; the PLA has yet to employ a truly integrated joint force in
combat, and many key joint integration enablers are still in the developmental stage.
Nonetheless, PLA joint operations are likely to improve dramatically as integration
technology advances.
THE PEOPLE’S LIBERATION ARMY AIR FORCE

3-1. The People’s Liberation Army Air Force (PLAAF) is one of the world’s largest air forces. Much like
the rest of the PLA, the PLAAF is in the midst of a significant reorganization and modernization campaign,
moving from employing massive numbers of 1960s-era aircraft with very limited capabilities to employing
much smaller numbers of modern 4th-, 4.5th-, and 5th-generation multirole and fighter aircraft. The
PLAAF enjoys a suite of capabilities largely comparable to modern Western air forces, including airborne
early warning, aerial refueling, heavy and medium transport, and electronic warfare (EW), though
relatively few airframes are available for these noncombat missions as compared to the United States Air
Force (USAF). The PLAAF also operates a large and advanced ground-based air defense network
employing medium- and long-range radar-guided missiles in an integrated, tiered, and layered deployment
strategy.
3-2. For most of the PLAAF’s history, its role has been defending Chinese airspace, with secondary
importance given to strike and attack missions and little emphasis on close air support (CAS). This made
sense for the period, considering the perceived threats to Chinese territory and the lack of available
air-ground communications. As the PLAAF has modernized, greater emphasis has been placed on ground
support, but these capabilities are developing and are likely limited in both availability and effectiveness.
Although many PLAAF airframes are nominally multirole—meaning they are capable of conducting both
air-to-air and air- to-ground missions—few air-to-ground-capable airframes are regularly employed in this
mission type.
3-3. Most PLAAF combat aircraft date from the Cold War era. This status is changing rapidly, however,
as newer and far more-capable types are being both purchased and indigenously produced. This creates a
wide spectrum of capabilities within the PLAAF. Older aircraft are not capable of all-weather,
around-the-clock operations, especially in ground-attack roles, and they employ mostly non-precision
munitions with minimal targeting support. Newer aircraft employ precision-guided munitions, some with
standoff capability, with targeting enabled by sophisticated onboard sensor suites. In general, more-capable
aircraft are assigned to theaters with higher priority assets, while older aircraft are assigned to less
important theaters. Nearly all PLAAF aircraft are either Russian-built, Russian-designed, or evolved from
Russian designs. However, unique indigenous designs are starting to reach operational status. PLAAF
combat aircraft capabilities are largely similar to those of their Russian equivalents, though the capabilities
of the newest 5th-generation low- observable aircraft are not well known in the West.
3-4. PLAAF maintenance and logistics capabilities are immature and under-resourced, but they are likely
to improve rapidly in the near future. As part of the PLAAF’s modernization efforts, maintenance and
logistics were relegated to a secondary role behind acquisitions; this in turn had negative impacts on pilot
training and aircraft readiness. In addition, the PLAAF had to modernize the relationship between its
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 3-1

Chapter 3
maintenance and logistics backbone and China’s state-run industry. Historically, repair and maintenance
was largely outsourced to industry, but this relationship has become increasingly unwieldy in the modern
age. The PLA’s new expeditionary requirements place further strain on limited maintenance and logistics
resources. Solutions to these capability gaps are currently in the conceptual and testing phase, but have yet
to be widely implemented.
3-5. PLAAF units are organized into brigades, comparable to USAF groups. Brigades are assigned to
PLAAF bases, which are the grade equivalent of the U.S. Army’s corps and are generally at the disposal of
the theater commander. Some high-value PLAAF assets, however, are controlled by national-level
headquarters, including some of the newest fighter divisions and the airborne corps.
3-6. PLAAF doctrine employs a tiered and layered approach to defending Chinese airspace.
Ground-based air defenses in the form of medium- and long-range radar-guided missiles combine with
manned aircraft to deny use of airspace to enemy platforms of all types. The PLAAF in general is far less
concerned with seizing or maintaining air superiority or air dominance than U.S. forces—it views simply
denying the enemy use of airspace to be adequate. PLAAF forces do not have significant capabilities
outside of Chinese airspace: excepting a few island airbases off the Chinese coast, neither basing nor aerial
refueling capabilities are adequate to project power any significant distance past the Chinese coastline and
territorial waters. Expanding power projection across wider areas is a focus of PLAAF training and
acquisition. It is likely that the PLAAF can successfully deny use of airspace to any opponent wishing to
operate over Chinese territory or ocean areas covered by its surface-to-air missile umbrella.
3-7. PLAAF ground-attack capabilities are immature but improving. Around two decades ago, PLAAF
attack aircraft were limited to daytime visual attacks using only unguided munitions. Today, the PLAAF
operates hundreds of advanced 4th-generation attack aircraft capable of all-weather operations using
precision munitions. The primary ground-attack missions of the PLAAF are strike and interdiction. Both of
these missions attack targets some distance away from friendly troops, and both generally support the
strategic and operational levels of war. PLAAF CAS capabilities are limited due to a lack of training and
integration, but they are seen as critical to developing the combined arms brigade (CA-BDE) as a true
combined arms force. Efforts are currently underway to advance CAS capabilities. Gaps in CAS operations
include a lack of trained forward air controllers, a lack of air-ground communications, and a lack of
developed tactics and guidelines for CAS employment.
3-8. The PLA’s airborne corps is assigned to the PLAAF, and it is the PLA’s strategic airborne unit. It
comprises most of the PLA’s Rapid Reaction Unit, a cohort of light, strategically mobile ground forces that
can provide a significant military presence anywhere in China in a very short period of time. Though called
a corps, the airborne corps mimics the group army in composition, though with fewer support assets. It
consists of six maneuver brigades: four airborne infantry, one mechanized airborne infantry, one air assault,
and one special operations forces, plus transport and support units. An airborne corps includes—
z Four airborne infantry brigades (three airborne infantry battalions and one towed light howitzer
battalion per brigade).
z One airborne infantry (mechanized) brigade (three mechanized infantry battalions and one
self-propelled howitzer battalion per brigade).
z One air assault brigade (three air assault battalions and one towed light howitzer battalion per
brigade).
z One service support brigade.
z One special operations forces brigade.
z One air transport brigade (fixed- and rotary-wing transport capability).
(See figure 3-1 for a graphic depiction of an airborne corps.)
3-2 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Figure 3-1. Airborne corps (doctrinal)
3-9. The PLAAF has the air transport capacity to deploy either two light brigades simultaneously or half
of the mechanized brigade. These units are employed in much the same way as the U.S. Army employs the
82nd Airborne Division: at least one brigade-size unit on very short-term deployment orders, with other
units to follow if required.
THE PEOPLE’S LIBERATION ARMY NAVY

3-10. China traditionally relegated its naval forces to a subordinate role behind its ground and strategic
rocket forces. Much like the rest of the PLA, however, the People’s Liberation Army Navy (PLAN)
adapted and evolved along with the country throughout the 1990s and early 2000s. This evolution took the
PLAN from being a littoral and riverine force to being a viable ocean-going force by 2009. The near-term
goal for the PLAN is to evolve into a true “blue water” force by 2035. In practical terms, this means
operating aircraft carriers, large surface combatants, a submarine force, a naval air wing, an amphibious
assault force, and a logistics force across the Western Pacific and possibly into the Indian Ocean. The initial
geographic limitation for this capability is out to the second island chain in the Western Pacific, which
includes the Yellow Sea, the South and East China Seas, the Philippine Sea, and possibly the Sea of Japan.
The PLAN has also expressed intent to develop a limited global capability, though this requires significant
development of overseas basing support, long-range air and sea lift, and a global command and
communication network that does not currently exist.
3-11. The PLAN is the world’s second-largest navy by tonnage and the third-largest by number of major
surface combatants. It also employs the world’s second-largest submarine force, though the quality and
modernity of its submarines varies significantly. The PLAN consists of five branches: the Surface Force,
the Submarine Force, the Naval Air Force, the Coastal Defense Force, and the Marine Corps. These forces
are deployed in three command navies, each with a specific geographic area of interest. The North
Command Navy is responsible for the Yellow Sea, the East Command Navy is responsible for the East
China Sea, and the South Command Navy is responsible for the South China Sea.
3-12. The Surface Force comprises the PLAN’s surface combatant capability. This includes two aircraft
carriers, around 20 modern, highly capable guided-missile destroyers, numerous lighter frigates and
corvettes, missile boats, amphibious assault ships, and logistics vessels. The PLAN’s aircraft carrier
capability is still in its infancy, currently consisting of a single operational second-hand Soviet aircraft
carrier, but an indigenously built one is scheduled to enter service in 2023. The PLAN intends to procure at
least one more full-sized aircraft carrier, making its carrier fleet the second-largest and -most-capable in the
world—behind only the United States. This timeline is aggressive, however, and is largely dependent on
rapidly developing carrier air-wing tactics and techniques. The Chinese aircraft carriers operate navalized
versions of 4 1/2th-generation Russian-derived multirole combat aircraft. Surface combatants are modern
and capable, employing radar-guided missile-based integrated air defenses and a robust suite of antiship
missiles of varying ranges. China has emphasized the importance of the antiship missile in its naval
strategy for many decades, and much of its evolving navy is built around this capability.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 3-3

Chapter 3
3-13. The Submarine Force is the world’s second-largest submarine fleet, although many boats are
somewhat aged. Throughout the history of the PLAN, this force has been the most capable and most
important sea-control capability. Although in recent years the Submarine Force has not been as well-funded
as the Surface Force, it remains a key component of PLAN shore defense and antiaccess strategies. Most
PLAN submarines are conventionally powered (diesel-electric) attack submarines that are employed
against enemy shipping, emphasizing attacks on enemy surface combatants and troop ships. A small
number of far more expensive, but far more capable, nuclear attack submarines complements the
conventionally powered force. The PLAN’s ballistic missile submarine capability is limited and unproven,
though it appears development of a viable ballistic missile submarine fleet is proceeding.
3-14. The primary mission of the PLAN is defense of Chinese territorial waters and power projection into
Chinese regional waters. This mission includes both operations against regional opponents in limited wars
and operations against powerful opponents as a part of a theater-wide antiaccess campaign. As such, enemy
shipping is the primary target set of PLAN surface combatants, naval aircraft, and submarines. While a
limited ground-attack capability exists in the Naval Air Force, it can be considered a secondary mission,
and far less important to PLA joint operations than U.S. Navy ground support missions are to U.S. joint
operations. Chinese surface ships maintain a robust antiaircraft capability, and they are likely employed in
concert with ground-based air defenses to deny use of wide geographic areas of airspace to enemy aircraft.
The PLAN also maintains a robust Coastal Defense Force that employs shore-based antiship missiles and
infantry to defend Chinese littoral waters and coastlines from amphibious assault or littoral naval
operations.
3-15. The People’s Liberation Army Navy Marine Corps (PLANMC) is the PLA’s expeditionary
amphibious warfare capability. Like the U.S. Marine Corps, it falls under administrative control of the
navy, but it is equipped and organized in a manner similar to that of the army. Unlike the U.S. Marine
Corps, however, the PLANMC does not have the PLA’s heavy amphibious warfare mission—this belongs
to the People’s Liberation Army Army (PLAA). Instead, the PLANMC should be viewed as a light and
strategically mobile force built to conduct expeditionary warfare missions away from Chinese shores.
3-16. The PLANMC consists of six maneuver brigades and associated command and support structure,
totaling approximately 60,000-80,000 personnel. The PLANMC consists of a mix of mechanized and light
forces organized specifically to support amphibious and littoral operations. PLANMC brigades are either
assigned to the South Command Navy and focus their operations and training on the South China Sea, or
they are held as national-level assets. A PLANMC brigade includes—
z Three combined arms battalions (CA-BNs).
z One self-propelled gun artillery battalion.
z One missile battalion (with man-portable air defense systems [MANPADS] and antitank guided
missiles).
z One combat support battalion.
(See figure 3-2 for a graphic depiction of a PLANMC brigade.)
3-4 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Figure 3-2. PLANMC brigade (doctrinal)
3-17. In addition to the PLAN, China operates both the China Coast Guard (CCG)—which falls under the
control of the People’s Armed Police (PAP)—and the Maritime Militia under the China Militia. The CCG
operates a large number of smaller surface vessels and has responsibility for coastal security, patrol,
antipiracy, antismuggling, search and rescue, and maritime police operations. The Maritime Militia
operates an exceedingly large number of small surface vessels, most of which are converted or co-opted
civilian fishing or transport ships. While both the CCG and Maritime Militia have very traditional assigned
roles, China aggressively employs both as part of a hybrid warfare approach during the competition phase
of conflict. CCG and Maritime Militia vessels regularly and aggressively operate in international waters—
and sometimes in the territorial waters of China’s neighbors—ostensibly to protect Chinese fishing and
shipping operations. This approach enables China to influence activity throughout the Western Pacific
without involving the large surface combatants of the PLAN. In a time of war, the CCG and Maritime
Militia will likely take on roles similar to the PAP and China Militia in ground operations: performing low-
intensity or mundane maritime tasks in order to free up more-capable ships for more demanding operations.
THE PEOPLE’S LIBERATION ARMY ROCKET FORCE

3-18. The People’s Liberation Army Rocket Force (PLARF) is the branch responsible for operating
China’s strategic missile and rocket forces and a substantial portion of the country’s long-range tactical
missiles. It is the largest missile force in the world, operating well over 1,000 short-range, medium-range,
and intercontinental ballistic missiles (ICBMs) and over 300 long-range cruise missiles. There is not a U.S.
equivalent to the PLARF. U.S. ICBMs are operated by the USAF, a very limited quantity of short- range
ballistic missiles (SRBMs) are operated by the U.S. Army, and both the U.S. Navy and USAF operate
cruise missiles.
3-19. The PLARF is descended from the Second Artillery Corps, China’s original nuclear missile unit. It is
a discrete military branch similar to PLAAF or PLAN. The PLARF operates using the same
base-brigade-battalion structure as the PLAAF. PLARF bases are corps-grade, and each base operates
multiple PLARF brigades. It is unclear exactly how the PLARF command interacts with theater commands
(TCs), but it is known that each TC houses a PLARF contingent designed to integrate ballistic missile fires
into its operations. PLARF missiles are considered strategic assets, and authority for their use is likely
retained at the national level. It is also likely that high-value strategic missile assets, such as ICBMs and
long-range ballistic missiles, are to be employed only by national authorities, while SRBM brigades may be
attached to TCs in support of their operations.
3-20. The PLARF operates most of China’s nuclear arsenal through a fleet of 60-70 ICBMs. China
professes a “no-first-use” nuclear policy and maintains the nuclear missile fleet in a deterrent capacity—
though there is an ongoing internal dialogue in China about possible situations were first-use may be
necessary. The country at present does not possess an immediate second-strike nuclear capability, and it has
relatively few nuclear warheads. Its nuclear strategy can be described as a minimal deterrence approach,
possessing only the nuclear capability necessary to deter a nuclear attack. Future modernization
accompanied by an expansion of the nuclear force, however, is a clear possibility.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 3-5

Chapter 3
3-21. In contrast to its relatively small nuclear force, the PLARF’s conventional ballistic missile force is
the world’s largest and among the world’s most technologically advanced and most capable. The PLA
employs ballistic missiles as its primary precision deep-strike capability. Ballistic missiles target high-value
assets, including air and seaports, supply depots, and command and communication nodes. Ballistic
missiles represent a significant element of the Chinese antiaccess strategy. More-advanced ballistic missiles
are designed specifically to engage hardened or mobile high-value assets, such as aircraft carriers and
antiballistic missile systems. Chinese ballistic missile capabilities represent one of the PLA’s strongest
investments in system warfare, as ballistic missiles asymmetrically destroy or neutralize assets that
traditionally required force-on-force methods to effectively attack. China is not a signatory to the
Intermediate-Range Nuclear Forces Treaty, and thus it is free to develop short- and medium-range missiles
of all types. Due to the country’s strict no-first-use nuclear policy and its substantial investment in ballistic
missile capabilities, it is unlikely that China will ever voluntarily downgrade its conventional missile-strike
capability.
3-22. While many PLARF ballistic missiles are strategic assets, hundreds of SRBMs may be used to target
high-value tactical assets or in support of tactical-level missions. PLARF ballistic-missile launchers are
mobile, and their facilities hardened, making it difficult to target or neutralize these systems prior to launch.
The PLARF also operates much of China’s land-based cruise-missile fleet. Unlike the United States, PLA
cruise missiles are seen as complementary to the ballistic missile force, rather than the other way around.
3-23. PLARF missile tactics are advanced and mature, taking full advantage of the suite of capabilities
available. PLARF units will work along with other national assets, such as cyber warfare, EW, and air and
naval forces, to neutralize or destroy antiballistic missile and air defense systems using a system warfare,
combined-arms approach. PLARF ballistic missiles are accurate and precise, integrated with advanced
surveillance and targeting capabilities, equipped with advanced penetration aids and countermeasures, and
can be employed in sophisticated structured attacks. The PLA will seek to deplete expensive and rare
antiballistic interceptors; defeat or destroy air defense radars; and either sink, damage, or threaten antiair
surface naval vessels, giving it freedom of maneuver when employing its missile force.
THE PEOPLE’S LIBERATION ARMY STRATEGIC SUPPORT FORCE

3-24. In 2016, the PLA established the People’s Liberation Army Strategic Support Force (PLASSF). The
PLASSF is a unified command with responsibility for national-level space, cyber, and EW missions, along
with national-level intelligence support to military operations and information operations. There is not a
U.S. equivalent to the PLASSF. It mixes capabilities taken from numerous military and nonmilitary
government agencies under a single command, much of which is controlled directly by the Central Military
Commission (CMC).
3-25. The PLASSF represents the evolution of several basic Chinese warfighting principles into a unified
command structure. It combines numerous capabilities along the competition continuum and seeks to
employ them in a more structured and coherent way than the largely piecemeal approach previously used
by the PLA. The PLASSF emphasizes system warfare as its underlying operational principle, seeking to
find asymmetric approaches to neutralizing or otherwise offsetting highly capable enemy systems.
3-26. The PLASSF was likely developed to help reduce the PLA’s acknowledged shortcomings in joint
operations, particularly joint intelligence collection and distribution. It echoes the general PLA trend to
centralize capabilities that are deemed insufficient or immature, with the intent of managing them more
effectively at a national level. The PLASSF also supports the PLA’s initiative toward Military-Civil
Fusion. The intent is to enhance cooperation between the PLA, nonmilitary organizations, and industry.
This initiative is most clear when it comes to space capabilities: the PLASSF will likely work very closely
with the China National Space Administration and the country’s space industry partners to develop
dual-use space capabilities. The advantage to this approach is that it allows military space development
while being minimally provocative internationally, as all initiatives have a legitimate civilian purpose.
3-27. The other major change driving the PLASSF is the integration of national intelligence. China’s
intelligence apparatus is enormous, complex, and almost completely opaque to outsiders. It consists of
numerous and occasionally competing intelligence organizations that focus on both domestic and
international intelligence gathering. The PLASSF integrates electronic intelligence (ELINT), signals
3-6 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

intelligence (SIGINT), long-range surveillance, and information operations capabilities under a single
command. China believes this greater centralization will result in better use of national intelligence assets
while expediting critical intelligence information—such as targeting data—to commanders and weapons
systems that need it.
3-28. The PLASSF likely used the PLARF as the blueprint for its organization. National-level assets are
retained at the top level of command, while lower-level assets are allocated to TCs as missions require.
PLASSF intelligence operations are split into strategic intelligence and tactical intelligence. Strategic
intelligence consists of collection efforts focused on long-term issues of national importance. Tactical
intelligence is composed of collection efforts that directly support PLA operations, such as ground
intelligence, air- and space-based surveillance, deep ELINT, and tactical-level information operations
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 3-7

Chapter 4
Tactical System Warfare
This chapter provides an overview of system warfare as it is applied at tactical

echelons. System warfare is the basic theoretical construct the People’s Liberation
Army (PLA) uses to build capabilities at all echelons. People’s Liberation Army
Army (PLAA) units historically did not often task-organize, especially at tactical
echelons; as such, the system warfare concept is relatively immature at these levels.
System warfare requires a modular approach and substantial task organization in
order to be successful. It also requires enhanced cooperation between sister and
adjacent units, a skill that is similarly underdeveloped in PLAA formations.
Nonetheless, it appears that the PLAA is deeply committed to the system warfare
methodology, and it will likely govern PLAA tactical operations for the foreseeable
future.
TACTICAL SYSTEM WARFARE PRINCIPLES

4-1. Land warfare traditionally involves imposing one’s will upon an uncooperative opponent by the use
of direct lethal attack or threat of attack. Maneuver is the process by which one puts oneself in an
advantageous position to conduct an attack. Thus, ground combat components traditionally maneuver with
the objective of physically isolating their opponents, then defeating them in detail; creating numerical or
firepower advantages at key positions on the battlefield; or deceiving opponents into believing their
position to be hopeless or otherwise indefensible. The PLAA still views land warfare through this lens, but
it sees attacks that do not directly target one’s opponent with the threat of physical danger as equal to or
more important than direct lethal attacks on the modern battlefield. For example, an opponent may be
isolated by disabling network or communications connectivity, rather than by being physically surrounded
and cut off. An opponent may believe its position untenable by having vulnerable nodes of its systems
rendered ineffective, rather than having the entire system destroyed. An opponent may view continued
resistance as futile—not because of the direct threat of physical force—but because it has been deceived
into thinking its situation is hopeless. In other words, system warfare takes the basic principles outlined by
Sun Tzu and Mao and applies them to conflict utilizing modern, high-technology weapons systems that are
manned and operated by professional soldiers.
4-2. The PLA describes system warfare using several different official names, including system
destruction warfare and system confrontation. All of these terms refer to the same basic concept: a type of
conflict wherein systems clash with one another in an attempt to neutralize, destroy, or offset key
capabilities and thus grant one side a decisive advantage. System warfare differs from traditional Western
military thinking in that it does not necessarily consider the human doing the fighting as the most important
element of a combat system. Humans are viewed as subcomponents of a system of systems, to be assessed
and targeted much as any other subcomponent. System warfare represents Military Thought supporting the
Defense Theory and Defense Doctrine concepts within People’s War in Conditions of Informationization.
(See chapter 1 for more information on Defense Theory and Defense Doctrine.) The backbone of the
system of systems is the network; the importance of this backbone in-turn gave rise to the concept of
network-centric warfare.
4-3. The system warfare concept consists of two basic ideas: creating purpose-built operational systems
that combine key capabilities under a single command, and the use of these operational systems to
asymmetrically target and exploit vulnerable components of an opponent’s system. If done effectively, this
method will render the opponent’s key systems ineffective or otherwise unable to function. The PLA
believes that by effectively destroying, isolating, neutralizing, or offsetting key capabilities, the enemy’s
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 4-1

Chapter 4
will or ability to resist will degrade and victory will be achieved. Building operational systems is similar to
creating task forces, but broader in scope, attempting to create a comprehensive suite of capabilities under a
single command. An operational system consists of a number of groups—subordinate entities that are
custom-built for a specific mission, task, or purpose. Virtually every battlefield function is represented by
one or more groups; this publication discusses only the most significant groups as employed by tactical-
level units.
4-4. At the tactical level, operational groups are also referred to as combat teams or combat groups. While
the PLAA stresses a modular approach to building operational systems, it also recognizes that the less
radical the reorganization, the more cohesive a unit will be. The combined arms battalion (CA-BN)
structure is designed to reflect this. It is the basic building block of the tactical operational system, and it is
intended to be employed in something close to its organic or peacetime configuration. Conversely, the
combined arms brigade (CA-BDE) is intended to be easily augmented or task-organized as conditions
dictate, flexibly employing a variety of subordinate CA-BNs, supporting battalions, or other nonorganic
capabilities.
PLANNING AND ORGANIZING PLAA OPERATIONS

4-5. The PLAA places great emphasis on planning. A meticulous approach to operations underpins the
PLAA throughout its history, and this tradition remains in place today. Though the PLAA seeks to
gradually move to an increasingly decentralized leadership philosophy, careful planning at all echelons will
remain a basic principle.
4-6. Movement toward greater decentralization, modular combined arms units, widespread downsizing,
and the creation of new headquarters at the national and theater command levels have significantly
complicated the PLAA’s employment of command and support relationships. The PLAA was traditionally
a strongly centralized and hierarchical force, relying on a mixture of discipline and obedience to overcome
shortages in combat technology and firepower. The evolved PLAA recognizes that greater decentralization
requires a more sophisticated understanding of command and support relationships; improved professional
military education for commanders, staffs, and noncommissioned officers; continued PLAA doctrinal
adjustments as new equipment and technologies enter the force; and a task-oriented approach that
underpins the challenging requirement of building operational systems.
PLAA PLANNING PROCESS

4-7. The PLAA planning process is broadly similar to the U.S. Army’s military decision-making process.
The primary outputs of the planning process are the objectives and scheme of maneuver, along with the
structure of the operational system being used to conduct the operation. The operational system may
include multiple subordinate operational systems in addition to specialized supporting systems.
4-8. The PLAA planning process consists of five steps, each with distinct outputs. Subordinate units
conduct planning in sequence with their higher echelon headquarters and adjust their plan according to
inputs received from it. The planning process seeks to achieve unity of purpose throughout the operation,
ensuring that all subordinate commanders know their role, mission, and place in the wider operation. Figure
4-1 on page 4-3 depicts the PLAA planning process.
Step 1: Assess the Situation

4-9. During this step, the commander assesses four critical components of the upcoming confrontation:
terrain, enemy forces, friendly forces, and other considerations, such as civilian presence and political
elements. The outputs from this step include an early outline of the desired friendly operational systems, a
comprehensive report on enemy strength and disposition enabled by reconnaissance and intelligence
support, and a thorough analysis of all other factors in and around the battlefield that may influence
operations for either side.
4-2 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Step 2: Make Decisions

4-10. This step requires commanders to make several key decisions that determine the direction of the rest
of the planning process and the operation at large. Commanders must establish the purpose and objective of
the operation, the general scheme of maneuver to be employed to achieve this purpose and objective, the
basic structure of the operational systems under their command, and key offensive and defensive points of
interest. The output of this step allows subordinate commanders to begin their own planning process, staffs
to begin building operational systems, and command posts to deploy in order to establish command
systems. Reconnaissance operations should also commence at this point in order to support the intelligence
requirements for the wider operation.
Figure 4-1. PLAA planning process
Step 3: Issue Orders

4-11. This step consists of two main phases. First, commanders conceptualize the battle to their staffs,
accounting for enemy strengths and disposition, friendly forces, and the higher echelon commanders’
intent. The staff then creates an order that clearly lays out the commander’s concept in such a way that
subordinate units can easily understand it. Second, the order is issued to subordinate units, either verbally
or in writing. Orders are ideally issued to subordinate commanders in groups, allowing subordinates to ask
questions and collaborate with one another prior to conducting their own planning process.
Step 4: Organize Coordination

4-12. This step refines the orders issued in step 3. Staffs conduct planning that synchronizes purpose
between subordinate units, ensures that sister units’ schemes of maneuver are integrated, provides useful
predictions about how the battle will be conducted, clarifies issues of confusion with subordinate
commanders, and ensures that shared resources and enablers—such as communications and network
support—are deconflicted.
Step 5: Organize Support

4-13. This step organizes external capabilities that support the operation. Examples include combat
support, logistics support, equipment support, and political support. Specific capabilities include firepower
and artillery support, information warfare, sustainment, casualty evacuation, and medical support. This step
requires staffs to interact with external enablers; higher echelon staffs may provide assistance in building
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 4-3

Chapter 4
this part of the plan. Commanders must account for available resources, mission requirements, and friendly
forces when developing the support plan.
PLAA COMMAND POST OPERATIONS

4-14. The PLAA defines a command post as a temporary command structure formed around a commander
and associated staff. Up to four command posts are established in support of an operational system: a base
command post, an advance command post, a rear command post, and a reserve command post. Command
posts are led by a commander and manned by various command groups. Certain command posts—most
likely those more forward on the battlefield—may be designed as mobile command posts, able to conduct
command post operations while rapidly emplacing and displacing, thus making it more challenging for the
enemy to detect and target. The number and type of command posts are situationally dependent, not
prescribed.
Base Command Post

4-15. The base command post (also called the main command post) is the primary command structure for
the operational system, and it is the center for executing combat command throughout the operational area.
The base command post must be well protected, well concealed, and roughly central within the operational
area. The base command post houses all command groups: command and communication, reconnaissance
and intelligence, firepower coordination, electronic warfare (EW) and cyber warfare, engineering,
battlefield management, and political work. The commander operates out of the base command post, along
with the chief of staff and all primary staff officers.
Advance Command Post

4-16. The advance command post (also called the forward command post) is a forward-based structure
designed to enhance command and communication in a key direction of the battle. Ideally, it is situated
near the main offensive or defensive effort, and it is well concealed and protected. The advance command
post is typically led by the deputy commander and staff, and it houses a command and communication
group, a reconnaissance and intelligence group, and a firepower coordination group.
Rear Command Post

4-17. The rear command post (or alternate command post) is responsible for logistics and equipment
support, along with rear area security. It consists of a combat support and service support group
headquarters, a political work group, and security personnel. The commander of the combat support or
service support group is likely the commander of the rear command post. The rear command post serves as
the primary backup command post in case the base command post is destroyed, neutralized, or otherwise
compromised. Depending on the situation, the deputy commander may choose to operate from the rear
command post.
Reserve Command Post

4-18. The reserve command post is a backup structure in case one of the other three command posts is
compromised, damaged, destroyed, or otherwise neutralized. It is necessarily a smaller and less-capable
structure than the base command post, but it must be able to conduct all base command post operations.
The reserve command post may also serve as an interim command post in case more forward command
posts are temporarily unavailable due to movement or enemy action.
PLAA CONTROL MEASURES

4-19. The PLAA employs zones to define the combat area—a designated area assigned to a military,
paramilitary, or security force in which combat or security operations occur—for both offensive and
defensive actions. These are made up of several secondary zones or areas; each has specific characteristics
and is designed to be occupied by one or more groups. Control measures are established for each echelon
and are typically nested within the combat area for the higher echelon unit. Security zones are established
throughout a zone any time security operations are conducted. Annihilation zones—specific geographic
4-4 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

areas to which the enemy is to be lured or driven and then destroyed—may also be created in any of the
secondary zones.
Offensive Control Measures

4-20. The offensive zone typically consists of four secondary zones or areas: the deep area, the frontline
zone, the reserve zone, and the garrison zone. These control measures are described in paragraphs 4-21
through 4-24. (See figure 4-2 on page 4-6 for an illustration of offensive control measures.)
Deep Area
4-21. The deep area is the territory past which a unit’s organic sensors and weapons can operate. For a
CA-BDE, this typically means the area past which its rocket artillery and targeting support can operate.
Units operating in deep areas are usually more autonomous and can expect minimal support from their
parent unit.
Frontline Zone
4-22. The frontline zone is the territory in which the main offensive action is to take place. Typically,
first-line objectives and the enemy’s main defensive position are located in the frontline zone. The entire
frontline zone should be within the range of the offensive group’s fire support. The frontline zone typically
contains a security zone on its forward edge, where security, reconnaissance, and counterreconnaissance
activities take place.
Reserve Zone
4-23. The reserve zone is the territory just to the rear of the frontline zone that typically houses depth
attack groups, command groups, firepower groups, and forward logistics bases (For more information on
PLAA groups, see paragraphs 4-32 through 4-60.) The reserve zone also serves as a defensive bastion
against enemy counterattacks and as a secure location through which follow-on forces and supplies can
move into frontline and deep areas.
Garrison Zone
4-24. The garrison zone consists of rear areas not actively occupied by the offensive group. Supporting
capabilities such as logistics, EW, and long-range artillery reside here. Garrison zones typically contain one
or more security zones that surround key positions such as bases, supply routes, or command posts. The
People’s Armed Police (PAP) may take on much of the security load in garrison zones in order to free up
PLAA forces for more-intense duties.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 4-5

Chapter 4
Figure 4-2. Offensive zone (conceptual)
Defensive Control Measures

4-25. The defensive zone typically consists of five secondary zones or areas: the deep zone, the frontal
blocking zone, the frontier defense zone, the depth defense zone, and the rear defense zone. These
defensive control measures are described in paragraphs 4-25 through 4-29. (See figure 4-3 for an
illustration of defensive control measures.).
Deep Area
4-26. The deep area is defined in the same way as the deep area in an offensive zone. Usually it is the area
in which independent units conduct reconnaissance and disruption activities prior to heavy enemy contact.
Frontal Blocking Zone

4-27. The frontal blocking zone is the forward-most area occupied by the defensive group. Screening,
reconnaissance, and counterreconnaissance missions are the primary focus in this zone. Groups in the
frontal blocking zone are usually used to disrupt, canalize, and slow down enemy assault forces in
preparation for a future decisive counterattack.
Frontier Defense Zone

4-28. The frontier defense zone is the zone that typically contains the main line of defense, consisting
primarily of the frontier defense group. The bulk of the defensive group is deployed here, making best use
of terrain to slow, disrupt, and degrade enemy units as they conduct their attack. Most fortifications and
other defensive engineering works are focused in the frontier defense zone.
4-6 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Depth Defense Zone

4-29. The depth defense zone is the zone that houses the depth defense group, and it may contain the
firepower strike or coordination group or parts of the command group. The depth defense zone is designed
to facilitate the commitment of the depth defense group to defeat the enemy’s main effort. (For more
information on depth defense groups, see paragraph 4-49. Firepower strike groups are described in
paragraph 4-51, and firepower coordination groups are described in 4-36.)
Rear Defense Zone

4-30. The rear defense zone is the zone that houses the combat reserve group, long-range firepower,
command posts, and forward logistics support. A secondary defensive line is often established in the rear
defense zone as a fallback position in case forward zones are overrun.
Figure 4-3. Defensive zone (conceptual)
TACTICAL SYSTEM WARFARE METHODOLOGY

4-31. Building the operational system is one of the primary outputs of the PLAA’s planning process.
Commanders are given general guidelines on how to assemble the groups that comprise the operational
system, and then they build the operational system to suit the mission and situation. Using the
commander’s purpose, intended scheme of maneuver, and analysis of enemy forces and other battlefield
conditions, groups are formed using the available force pool, weighting specific groups with the
appropriate levels of firepower, mobility, and protection. In tactical ground operational systems, groups can
be organized into five general categories: command groups, offensive groups, defensive groups, firepower
strike groups, and support groups. Not all operational systems will have all groups; most will consist of
command groups supported by one or more additional groups.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 4-7

Chapter 4
Note. PLA literature uses a very wide variety of names for these groups; its approach appears to
be unstandardized and still somewhat in development. This list represents a cross-section of
different group names and mission descriptions and is not exhaustive.
COMMAND GROUPS
4-32. Command groups are the components of the operational system that enable leadership to control the
system, make rapid and effective command decisions, inform subordinate commanders, and coordinate
capabilities. They are built using a variety of different force pools—from command posts and staffs, to
reconnaissance and intelligence units, to network support units. Some functions, such as engineer and
chemical support, are prescribed in both the command group and a support group; it is unclear how the
decision to place these units is made. The following paragraphs describe several of the most important
command groups.
Command Post Group

4-33. The command post group establishes and operates the operational system’s command posts. It is also
responsible for protecting command posts from direct assault and concealing them from enemy surveillance
and targeting. In an operational system designed around a CA-BDE, the CA-BDE’s command post
provides most of the manpower and equipment for the command post group.
Command and Communication Group

4-34. The command and communication group establishes the communications and network architecture
necessary to support the operational system. The PLAA places a high priority on information systems that
are adaptable and reliable, enabling them to operate in a variety of battlefield conditions or when under
electromagnetic or network attack by enemy forces. Communications systems are automated wherever
possible, enabling critical information to be rapidly distilled and then passed to the appropriate consumer.
The PLAA prefers to use a top-down and centralized approach to its information systems, ensuring
interoperability across disparate units. The command and communication group is also responsible for
establishing and monitoring the control measures that control information systems within its combat area—
functions such as assigning radio frequencies, deconflicting electronic emitters, and ensuring network
security. Finally, the command and communication group is responsible for protection of the operational
system’s network backbone. In an operational system designed around a CA-BDE, the CA-BDE’s
communications company within the service support battalion likely forms the basis for the command and
communication group.
Reconnaissance and Intelligence Group

4-35. The reconnaissance and intelligence group is comprised of reconnaissance forces and the operational
system’s intelligence personnel, task-organized under a single group structure. This structure enables close
integration of intelligence and reconnaissance, outlined in detail in chapter 6. The reconnaissance and
intelligence group is responsible for developing the reconnaissance plan, conducting reconnaissance in
support of the operational system, and disseminating relevant intelligence to all members of the operational
system. In an operational system designed around a CA-BDE, the CA-BDE’s reconnaissance battalion and
intelligence headquarters section form the core of the reconnaissance and intelligence group.
Firepower Coordination Group

4-36. The firepower coordination group, also called the firepower coordination center, is responsible for
integrating firepower capabilities of all types into a coherent, synchronized plan in support of the
operational system. Firepower capabilities include, but are not limited to, tube and rocket artillery, ballistic
and cruise missiles, fixed- and rotary-wing aircraft, network, electromagnetic, and information attack. The
firepower coordination group is enabled by the firepower coordination system, an automated or
semiautomated command and communication network that distributes targeting and system data across a
4-8 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

variety of integrated firepower systems and seeks to streamline targeting and fire control. The firepower
coordination group is closely linked with all of the firepower groups.
Electronic and Network Warfare Group

4-37. The electronic and network warfare group is comprised of electronic countermeasure forces, network
warfare forces, and other associated personnel. Its missions include electronic reconnaissance, interference,
sabotage, targeting, network defense, and cyber intrusions against vulnerable enemy networks.
Battlefield Management Group

4-38. The battlefield management group is responsible for managing personnel and administrative
functions in support of the operational system. It consists of the personnel staff officer, supporting staff,
and support teams.
Political Work Group

4-39. The political work group is responsible for political support to the operational system. This includes
managing the political messaging of the commander, ensuring synergy of purpose for all troops in the
operational system, conducting propaganda operations in support of friendly operations and against enemy
operations, and supporting psychological warfare operations. The political work group is led by the
political officer and manned by supporting staff.
OFFENSIVE GROUPS
4-40. Offensive groups are the elements of the operational system that are responsible for fixing,
assaulting, and annihilating enemy forces. Offensive groups are deployed in such a way as to ensure
substantial numerical and firepower advantage over the enemy: PLAA guidelines suggest offensive groups
seek a four-to-one advantage in maneuver forces, a five-to-one to seven-to-one advantage in artillery
firepower, and three PLAA antitank systems for each anticipated enemy armor system. An offensive group
deploys in a focused manner, establishing the depth and three-dimensional organization necessary to
overwhelm the enemy when an assault commences. Offensive groups are integrated with firepower strike
groups in order to achieve synchronization between maneuver and fires capabilities. Offensive tactics and
techniques are discussed in greater detail in chapter 7.
Advance Group
4-41. The advance group is composed of troops that take advanced positions ahead of a primary attack,
conducting a mission roughly similar to the advance guard. The group provides security for the main body,
screens against enemy troops, conducts counterreconnaissance, occupies terrain favorable for the main
body, and initiates contact with the enemy main body. After completing these tasks, the advance group
typically assumes a security or reserve role.
Frontline Attack Group

4-42. The frontline attack group consists of those troops whose mission is to conduct the initial assault
against a hardened enemy target, with the goal of achieving a breach or other small penetration. The
frontline attack group includes infantry units, armor units, firepower units—likely in the form of mortars
supported by artillery—and air defense, antitank, engineer, chemical weapons defense, and electronic
countermeasure units. The group’s primary task is to break through and capture enemy first-line positions.
The frontline attack group is typically subdivided into assault teams and firepower teams, and it seeks to
support each assault team with a firepower team. The frontline attack group attempts to concentrate combat
power on the narrowest possible front, then launch a well-supported attack. Armored units likely form the
core of this main thrust, supported by infantry. Once the assault is successful, the frontline attack group
transitions to a security-or vigilance-role, providing flank and rear security for the depth attack and thrust
maneuvering groups as they commence their follow-on missions.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 4-9

Chapter 4
Depth Attack Group

4-43. The depth attack group (or in-depth attack group) consists of those troops that advance deep into the
enemy position once the initial breach is achieved. The depth attack group likely consists of the
best-available armored forces, supported by mechanized infantry, air defense, antitank, engineer, chemical
weapon defense, and electronic countermeasure units. The tasks of the depth attack group include breaking
into the depth of the enemy’s defense, seizing critical terrain or other targets deep in enemy territory,
annihilating the enemy’s in-depth positions, and occupying positions favorable for defense against the
enemy’s counterattack. The depth attack group is staged in order to ensure that the penetration does not
lose momentum as forces tire, face challenging terrain, or meet enemy resistance.
Thrust Maneuvering Group

4-44. The thrust maneuvering group consists of those troops that exploit the advantages created by the
depth attack group. The thrust maneuvering group may be a highly mobile armored force or an air assault
force, enabled by light artillery, antitank, air defense, engineer, and EW units. The thrust maneuvering
group continues the attack against enemy deep positions, targeting command nodes, supply areas, and key
terrain. Its most important missions, however, are to cut off enemy retrograde routes—enabling the
annihilation of enemy units—and to spoil or disrupt counterattacks as the enemy attempts to reinforce its
units that are caught in the annihilation zone(s).
Combat Reserve Group

4-45. The combat reserve group consists of those troops that remain in the operational system’s rear area,
with missions to reinforce the frontline attack group or depth attack group if necessary, spoil enemy
counterattacks that threaten other offensive groups or the rear area, and deal with any other situations that
may arise in the operational system’s combat area. The combat reserve group likely consists of either
recently used armored units on a rest cycle or lighter mobile units that are able to respond rapidly to
developing situations. The combat reserve group is augmented by antitank and engineer units.
DEFENSIVE GROUPS
4-46. Defensive groups are those groups charged with defending friendly forces, systems, or key terrain
from enemy attack. Defensive groups conduct either a position-based or mobile defense, with the intent of
blunting the enemy’s attack, attriting enemy forces, and enabling friendly counterattack and transition to
the offense. Defensive groups are integrated with firepower strike groups in order to enhance their combat
power and defeat superior enemy forces. Defensive tactics are discussed in greater detail in chapter 8.
Cover Group
4-47. The cover group is made of those troops assigned to a cover mission in support of the operational
system’s main body. The group’s primary tasks are to conduct counterreconnaissance, defend stubbornly in
the face of an enemy attack, screen the main body, and cover the main defensive line’s deployment and
disposition. After the cover mission is complete, the cover group may withdraw to deeper areas and
conduct vigilance or security operations, serve as the combat reserve group, or continue to operate as part
of the main defensive line. If possible, a component of the cover group will attempt to remain behind the
enemy’s main advance in order to conduct operations behind enemy lines. The cover group consists of
reconnaissance or light armored units enabled by light artillery, antitank, antiair, and EW units. Additional
information on the cover mission can be found in chapter 6.
Frontier Defense Group

4-48. The frontier defense group consists of those troops assigned to the main line of defense. Frontier
defense groups are further divided into a main defensive direction group and secondary defensive direction
groups, depending on the enemy’s predicted course of action. The main defensive direction group is
weighted more heavily with numbers and firepower; secondary defensive direction groups are accordingly
less powerful, proportional to the commander’s assessment of the enemy’s approach. The primary tasks of
the frontier defense group are to hold the defensive line, blunt the enemy’s offensive attack, inflict heavy
4-10 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

casualties upon the enemy, buy the commander decision space, and inform the commander about how best
to commit reserves and counterattack forces. In a position-based defense, the frontier defense group is
likely much larger, as a position-based defense requires the defender to hold a fortified position with
minimal maneuver. The frontier defense group consists of infantry and armor, augmented by artillery,
antitank, engineer, anti-chemical weapon, and electronic countermeasure units. It likely consists of a higher
proportion of infantry compared to other defensive groups.
Depth Defense Group

4-49. The depth defense group consists of those troops assigned to defend deep areas of the defense. Its
primary mission is to conduct counterattacks against enemy penetrations; reinforce weak areas of the
frontier defense group’s lines; defeat aerial incursions into the rear defense area; and encircle, isolate, and
assault any enemy forces operating in rear areas. The depth defense group must be mobile, and it likely
contains a high proportion of armored and mechanized forces. In a mobile defensive operation, the depth
defense group is the decisive component. Commitment of the depth defense group is the decisive point in a
defensive battle. The depth defense group is augmented by artillery and antitank units.
Combat Reserve Group

4-50. The combat reserve group is composed of those troops that are retained in depth areas, with a
mission to maintain security and reinforce the main defensive line, if necessary. The group may also
conduct counterattacks against enemy penetrations. The combat reserve group likely consists of light,
mobile troops or troops on a rest cycle following previous action.
Firepower Strike Groups

4-51. Also called fire assault groups, these groups provide the bulk of the operational system’s firepower.
Firepower strike groups include a variety of heavy weapons, such as artillery systems, mortar systems, air
defense systems, and antitank systems, and they include electromagnetic attack and psychological attack
systems. These disparate systems are integrated into the operational system by the firepower coordination
group, and they can further be subdivided into firepower teams charged with supporting small subordinate
elements of the operational system.
Artillery Group
4-52. The artillery group consists of the indirect fire elements of the firepower strike group. These include
122-mm and 155-mm tube artillery systems, light and heavy multiple launch rocket systems, and
short-range ballistic missile systems. The PLAA’s firepower is seen as the backbone of its operations, and
the artillery group provides most of the tactical-level firepower to the operational system commander. The
artillery group is positioned in deep areas, and its primary missions are to—
z Support scouting and security operations.
z Disrupt or pre-empt advancing or unfolding (pre-attack positioning) enemy troops.
z Support defensive groups.
z Disrupt or defeat enemy flanking and encirclement attempts.
z Disrupt enemy penetrations and counterattacks.
z Suppress enemy artillery.
z Strike at key targets, such as enemy command posts and supply areas.
Broadly speaking, fire support missions are conducted by tube artillery units, while annihilation,
suppression, and counterfire missions are conducted by rocket artillery units. Missile units, if available,
conduct precision deep strike missions. The artillery group is built around artillery battalions combined in
such a way as to achieve a combined arms effect.
Air Firepower Strike Group

4-53. The air firepower strike group (also called the aerial firepower assault team) consists of the
operational system’s rotary-wing airframes that are capable of ground-attack operations. The PLAA
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 4-11

Chapter 4
employs its helicopters as airborne fighting vehicles, closely attaching them to ground units and seeking to
maximize their unique capabilities against vulnerable parts of enemy formations. The air firepower strike
group is employed in a variety of ways: as a highly mobile reserve, attacking enemy penetrations and
supporting friendly counterattacks; as mobile artillery, targeting enemy artillery systems and other weapons
that were not destroyed by the artillery group; as an antitank unit targeting enemy tanks and other armored
vehicles; as a deep penetration force targeting enemy command, EW, and sustainment systems; as
reconnaissance and surveillance platforms; and as security and vigilance platforms.
Antitank Group
4-54. The antitank group consists of those troops specially equipped and tasked with targeting and
destroying enemy armored vehicles. The antitank group consists of a combination of mounted antitank
guided missile launchers, dismounted antitank guided missile teams, and antitank artillery—mainly in the
form of assault guns. The antitank group is positioned near the main direction of attack or defense, and it is
employed as a rapid, mobile reserve whenever enemy armored forces are encountered. If armored targets
are not available, the antitank group can serve as one or more firepower teams, augmenting assault teams as
they carry out their missions. The PLAA employs a high density of antitank weapons throughout its
formations, and employment of antitank groups is a key planning consideration.
Mobile Artillery Group

4-55. The mobile artillery group is comprised of highly mobile artillery and mortar systems that provide
direct, close-in fire support to offensive and defensive groups of all types. Missions for mobile artillery
groups include suppressing or destroying enemy positions, delivering obscurants or illumination,
conducting short-range counterfires, and disrupting enemy reinforcement or counterattack maneuvers. The
mobile artillery group is viewed as vulnerable to counterfire and direct fire, and rapid movement is
considered key to its survival. The mobile artillery group is likely built around either 82-mm or 120-mm
rapid-fire mortars or mobile 122-mm self-propelled howitzers.
Air Defense Group

4-56. The air defense group is comprised of most of the operational system’s air defense weapons systems,
plus associated sensors and command nodes. At the tactical level, this consists of short-range air defense
(SHORAD) and man-portable air defense systems (MANPADS), plus a variety of towed and self-propelled
antiaircraft guns (SPAAGs). The air defense group’s primary mission is to deny the use of airspace over the
battlefield by enemy aircraft through a mixture of deterrence and lethal engagements of in-range aircraft.
The air defense group may also conduct air ambushes, intended to surprise and destroy enemy aircraft. Per
Chinese doctrine, the group should be employed using a defense-in-depth approach, with deployments
weighted according to the value of the assets defended.
SUPPORT GROUPS
4-57. Support groups are responsible for the operational system’s support and sustainment functions and
rear area security functions. At the CA-BDE level, these are built primarily using the CA-BDE’s two
support battalions: combat support and service support.
Combat Support Group

4-58. The combat support group consists of a variety of combat support capabilities. At tactical echelons,
most of this group is comprised of the CA-BDE’s combat support battalion. Capabilities include
engineering, mobility, protection, anti-chemical weapons, and communications. Special emphasis is given
to obstacles: there are discrete barrier set-up and removal teams. The combat support group also provides
deception and camouflage support and smokescreen generation.
Rear Area Support Group

4-59. The rear area support group is comprised of most of the operational system’s supply and logistics
capabilities. The rear area support group is divided into two subgroups: logistics support and equipment
4-12 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

support. The logistics support group conducts the supply mission, while the equipment support group
performs maintenance.
Psychological Warfare Group

4-60. The psychological warfare group is comprised of specially trained soldiers that provide support to
frontline units. The group’s mission consists of three tasks: present a clear picture of the enemy’s
psychological situation, conduct psychological attacks on the enemy in support of the operational system’s
operations, and protect friendly troops from enemy psychological attack. The psychological warfare group
also works carefully with the political group to build consensus and morale among friendly troops.
TACTICAL-LEVEL NOTIONAL OPERATIONAL SYSTEM

4-61. This section describes one possible construction of a tactical-level operational system, also called a
combat group. Since operational systems are, by definition, ad hoc and task oriented, there is not one single
or correct way to assemble them. Each operational system is different due to battlefield characteristics, the
nature of the enemy, and the preferences of the commander. This section is intended to demonstrate the
building-block nature of the operational system and how a system of systems is created.
4-62. The example combat group is assembled by a group army, using a medium CA-BDE and a heavy
CA-BDE as the two main force providers. The group army’s artillery, air defense, aviation, and special
operations forces (SOF) brigades provide additional forces to the combat group. The group is assembled in
order to conduct an attack against a fortified enemy. The group army command and staff build a single,
coherent combat group, minimizing ad hoc or unnecessary reorganization and maintaining the cohesion of
subordinate battalions wherever possible.
4-63. The force pool that the combat group is built from consists of all the organic units of the two
CA-BDEs, plus augmentation from the group army. Available forces to build the combat group, with units
in italics being reinforcements from the group army, include—
z Four medium CA-BNs.
z Four heavy CA-BNs.
z Two reconnaissance battalions.
z One unmanned aircraft system (UAS) reconnaissance section.
z One SOF company.
z One scout helicopter company.
z One UAS targeting section.
z Two artillery battalions.
z One heavy multiple rocket launcher (MRL) battery.
z One light MRL battery.
z One attack helicopter company.
z One medium lift helicopter company.
z Two air defense artillery battalions, consisting of three SPAAG batteries and one SHORAD
battery each.
z One heavy SPAAG or missile battery.
z One medium-range surface-to-air missile (SAM) battery.
z One electronic air defense battery.
(See figure 4-4 on page 4-14 for a graphic depiction of an operational system force pool.)
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 4-13

Chapter 4
Figure 4-4. Operational system force pool (example)
4-64. The final combat group structure consists of—

z Command group: reconnaissance and intelligence group. It includes—
One reconnaissance battalion.
One scout helicopter company.
One UAS section (reconnaissance).
z Offensive group: advance group. It includes—
One reconnaissance battalion.
One SOF company.
z Offensive group: frontline attack group. It includes—
Two mechanized CA-BNs.
One 122-mm self-propelled gun (SPG) battery.
One SPAAG battery.
(See figure 4-5 on page 4-15 for a graphic depiction of a frontline attack group.)
4-14 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Figure 4-5. Frontline attack group (example)

z Offensive group: depth attack group. It includes—
Two armored CA-BNs.
One mechanized CA-BN.
One 122-mm SPG battery.
One SPAAG battery.
(See figure 4-6 for a graphic depiction of a depth attack group.)
Figure 4-6. Depth attack group (example)

z Offensive group: thrust maneuvering group. It includes—
Two armored CA-BNs.
One SPAAG battery.
(See figure 4-7 on page 4-16 for a graphic depiction of a thrust maneuvering group.)
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 4-15

Chapter 4
Figure 4-7. Thrust maneuvering group (example)

z Offensive group: reserve group. It includes—
One mechanized CA-BN.
One SPAAG battery.
z Firepower strike group: artillery group. It includes—
One heavy MRL battery.
One light MRL battery.
One UAS section (targeting).
(See figure 4-8 for a graphic depiction of an artillery group.)
Figure 4-8. Artillery group (example)

z Firepower strike group: air group. It includes—
One attack helicopter company.
One medium lift helicopter company.
z Firepower strike group: mobile artillery group. It includes two 155-mm SPG batteries.
z Firepower strike group: air defense group. It includes—
One medium-range surface-to-air missile battery.
Two SHORAD batteries.
Two SPAAG batteries.
One heavy SPAAG or missile battery.
One electronic air defense battery.
4-16 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Chapter 5
Tactical Information Operations
This chapter outlines the characteristics and principles that govern People’s
Liberation Army (PLA) and People’s Liberation Army Army (PLAA) information
operations at tactical echelons. In keeping with the teachings of Sun Tzu, the PLA
considers information operations to be at least as important—if not more important—
than maneuver or firepower. Deception, trickery, and concealment are to be
employed extensively throughout the information operations campaign in order to
manipulate the enemy commander’s state of mind, the morale of enemy troops, and
the enemy’s understanding of the battlefield to the PLAA’s advantage.
OVERVIEW OF PLA INFORMATION OPERATIONS

5-1. Information operations (IO) are comprised of the wide variety of lethal and nonlethal capabilities
with the intent to influence the information environment. This includes information attack and defense,
psychological warfare, and deception, trickery, and concealment efforts. The PLA considers IO to be a
constant and ongoing effort before, during, and after conflict. Information warfare (IW)—also known as
information confrontation—is a subcomponent of IO, and it consists of specific offensive and defensive
information actions that are in direct support of military operations. Along with maneuver, firepower,
special operations, and psychological warfare, IW is conducted as part of a campaign, usually referred to as
campaign information warfare. This is defined by the Chinese as a series of integrated operational
battlefield activities that target enemy sensors, information channels, information processing, and decision
making. The PLA views IO as a zero-sum activity: they involve both attack and defense, and any
information advantages gained in one area may be lost in another. As such, both information attack and
defense are considered critical.
5-2. The objective of PLA IO are to gain information superiority or information dominance. Information
superiority requires one to deprive the enemy of information, disrupt the enemy’s ability to control or
manipulate information of all types, and ensure friendly forces enjoy freedom of maneuver in the
information domain. The PLA considers information superiority to be the new high ground of warfare in
much the same way as the air domain during the mid-20th century or the land domain prior to that.
Moreover, achieving information superiority is thought to have a very low cost-to-effectiveness ratio,
achieving significant effects with relatively minimal expenditure in either lives or resources. (See figure 5-1
on page 5-2 for a graphic overview of Chinese IO.)
CHARACTERISTICS OF INFORMATION OPERATIONS

5-3. Chinese IO have four primary characteristics: universal permeation, high target value, the importance
of integration and synthesis, and the linkage between attack and defense. These characteristics are
described in paragraphs 5-4 through 5-7.
UNIVERSAL PERMEATION
5-4. IO permeate all domains and are throughout all campaigns. Due to the widespread proliferation of
advanced weapons systems, reliance on communications network technology, and information
management systems, IO either govern or affect every aspect of modern conflict. Without information
superiority, the Chinese believe that they cannot achieve dominance in any other domain, be it land, sea,
air, or space. If the information battle is lost, initiative for the entire campaign cannot be achieved, and
campaign activities will be fundamentally less efficient or otherwise blunted. IO are an ongoing and
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 5-1

Chapter 5
continuous process, while IW will likely begin before formal hostilities, making it a precursor to or first
shot in active conflict. The conditions to achieve information superiority must be set prior to the
commencement of hostilities, must actively support PLA forces during open conflict, and must be
maintained through security and stability operations once open conflict has concluded.
Figure 5-1. Chinese information operations
HIGH TARGET VALUE

5-5. Information systems are high-value targets. The PLA defines information systems very broadly,
including all sensors, information management systems, communications network systems, and
decision-making centers at all echelons. System warfare theory suggests that targeting these
subcomponents is often an optimal way to undermine the rest of the system, and it is in close keeping with
the PLA’s warfighting principle of avoiding the enemy’s strengths and attacking its weaknesses.
Information systems are considered to be the senses and brain of a modern force, and destroying or
neutralizing them is an effective way of neutralizing or defeating a stronger enemy. The PLA refers to this
approach as paralysis attack or decapitation attack. Attacking enemy information systems is a high-priority
5-2 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

mission, while defending friendly information systems is of similar importance. The PLA prescribes a mix
of capabilities, both lethal and nonlethal, when targeting enemy information systems.
IMPORTANCE OF INTEGRATION AND SYNTHESIS

5-6. IO require a high level of integration and synthesis of a wide variety of systems, personnel, and
functions. Effective integration of these varying components is referred to as synthetic quality, and it is one
of the unique aspects of IO. Similarly, tactics such as deception, feints, or camouflage must be integrated
into the wider information campaign in order to maximize their effectiveness.
LINKAGE BETWEEN ATTACK AND DEFENSE

5-7. Information attack and defense must be closely linked. Information attack and defense are viewed as
mutually supporting; information attack is most effective when friendly information and information
systems are carefully protected, while information defense is enhanced when enemy IO are disrupted by
offensive actions. IW is a zero-sum game, and any information superiority gained cannot be undermined by
information lost in a different way. Initiative in the information battle is much the same as it is for
maneuver or firepower: the side that effectively seizes initiative and then successfully maintains it enjoys a
fundamental advantage throughout the conflict. Initiative cannot be either seized or maintained without
effective integration of both attack and defense.
PRINCIPLES OF INFORMATION OPERATIONS

5-8. Four principles describe the PLA’s concept of IO: actively attack, target nodes, achieve synthesis,
and protect tightly. These principles are described in paragraphs 5-9 through 5-13.
ACTIVELY ATTACK
5-9. Attack is the primary method by which initiative is gained in an IO campaign. The PLA stresses
aggressive and integrated attack methods early in the conflict as the best way to ensure information
superiority. Further, in an information war it is harder to steal or regain the initiative once it is lost, so
greater emphasis is placed on seizing information superiority early in the campaign. Three specific
characteristics of IO contribute to the focus on early action: its clandestine nature and ease of concealment;
the low requirements on manpower and material resources, making operational sustainment relatively easy;
and the inherent vulnerabilities of information systems due to their reliance on the electromagnetic
spectrum. A strong initial attack takes advantage of these characteristics, but it requires the conditions to be
set long before active hostilities commence.
TARGET NODES
5-10. The Chinese define a node as a critical component of an information system that either provides a
capability or links other nodes. In this context it refers primarily to sensors, information processing centers,
and the network backbone that enables them. Nodal attack attempts to identify, isolate, and target these
objects, and it is the centerpiece of the IO campaign. Destroying or neutralizing nodes has the highest
efficiency of any IW operation: if a critical node is destroyed or neutralized, then all systems reliant on it
become either degraded or disabled. Nodal attack embodies the basic principle of targeting points of
weakness rather than strength and, if applied appropriately, it can concurrently weaken strong points of the
enemy system through isolation and confusion. It is best employed in an integrated manner along with
psychological attack in order to maximize confusion and extend the effects of nodal destruction.
ACHIEVE SYNTHESIS
5-11. Synthesis in the context of an IO campaign implies a variety of different measures all intended to
carefully align, synchronize, and coordinate different IW efforts. This includes coordinating information
attack and defense to maximize the efficiency of both; assuring deconfliction between different efforts so
that one effort does not interfere with another; ensuring that all efforts are unified in their movement
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 5-3

Chapter 5
towards a clear objective; and focusing on building mutually supportive efforts that in turn create a
combined arms effect.
5-12. Adjustment is an analogue to synthesis: it refers to the act of assessing and changing operations
quickly and without the need for extensive planning. IO are inherently fluid; changes are rapid and often
unpredictable. Agility in operations is vital to ensuring IW efforts are targeting the right objects and
achieving desired effects. The primary focus of adjustment is to evaluate different friendly systems and
their respective targets, then deconflict actions between them.
PROTECT TIGHTLY
5-13. As discussed in paragraph 5-9, attack is viewed as the most important basic requirement in campaign
IW. The corollary to this axiom is that one must blunt the enemy’s attacks in order to effectively gain
information superiority. The PLA views information defense as fundamentally more difficult than
information attack due to the broad reliance upon—and disparity in—information systems. Because of the
wide variety of different points of vulnerability, comprehensive information defense is a practical
impossibility—so building systems with resiliency and redundancy is critical. While information defense
typically takes the form of passive defense, active defense also has a significant role. This may be described
as information counterattack: the use of information attack capabilities to strike at and undermine enemy
information attack efforts.
INFORMATION WARFARE TACTICS

5-14. The PLA breaks IW techniques into two broad categories: information attack and information
defense, with each of these containing several subcategories. Information attack is described in paragraphs
5-15 through 5-19. Information defense is described in paragraphs 5-20 through 5-24.
INFORMATION ATTACK
5-15. The PLA defines information attack as any IW activity intended to weaken or deprive the enemy of
control of information. Information attack is the primary means by which information warfare is won, and
it is the key to achieving information superiority. There are four subcategories of information attack:
electromagnetic attack, network attack, psychological attack, and physical attack. Of note, psychological
attack is considered both a form of information attack and its own unique campaign; it is unclear what the
relationship is between the two.
Electromagnetic Attack
5-16. Electromagnetic attack encompasses those activities that manipulate the electromagnetic spectrum to
jam, suppress, deceive, or neutralize enemy information systems. There are three subcategories of
electromagnetic attack: electronic reconnaissance, electromagnetic suppression, and electromagnetic
deception. Electronic reconnaissance attempts to use electromagnetic and other reconnaissance platforms to
collect intelligence on enemy information operations platforms, enabling more effective electromagnetic
attack operations. Electromagnetic suppression uses electronic warfare capabilities to jam or suppress
enemy sensors or communications, softening or neutralizing enemy information systems. Electromagnetic
deception manipulates enemy information operations systems—ideally, without enemy knowledge—in
support of friendly operations. The PLAA views electromagnetic attack as the centerpiece of most IW
operations; this belief is broadly represented in the increasing concentration of IW capabilities at tactical
levels, including ground-based and aerial jammers and electronic reconnaissance platforms.
Network Attack
5-17. Network attack includes those activities that target enemy computer information systems, software,
hardware, and their associated networks. Network attack differs from electromagnetic attack in that it is
conducted digitally and through networks, rather than through the electromagnetic spectrum. There are two
major types of network attack: computer virus attack, which makes use of preprogrammed viruses, and
hacker invasion, which uses active code experts working in real time. The aim of both methods is to
penetrate enemy information systems. The two techniques can be mutually supportive, and should be
5-4 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

closely coordinated. The PLAA broadly prefers clandestine or concealed network attack, wherein the
enemy’s information is manipulated without its knowledge. This is viewed as the most efficient form of
information attack, allowing for more aggressive activities that remain beneath the threshold of active
conflict. Concealed network attack operations in peacetime focus on understanding the enemy’s operational
architecture, disposition, and possible weaknesses, enabling more aggressive network attacks when
hostilities commence. Concealed network attacks also focus on acquiring and exfiltrating critical
information, particularly that surrounding the defense industrial base. The PLAA seeks to employ network
attack even at tactical echelons in order to manipulate enemy situational understanding and trick the enemy
into behavior conducive to PLAA tactical operations.
Physical Attack
5-18. Physical attack comprises those activities that target enemy IO systems with direct physical damage
or destruction. At tactical echelons, this primarily entails attacking command and communication centers,
network nodes, and sensors. There are three subcategories of physical attack: force strength, which is
essentially using maneuver forces to penetrate enemy defenses and destroy the IO systems at close range;
firepower assault, which is the use of fires systems of all types—particularly artillery—to target and
destroy IO systems at extended ranges; and energy weapons, which involves the use of highly specialized
weapons systems to destroy enemy IO systems. The latter includes both current (such as antiradiation
missiles) and future (laser or microwave) weapons systems. The PLAA emphasizes firepower assault as the
most effective method of physical attack, and firepower assaults against IO systems are a key element of
tactical system warfare.
Psychological Attack
5-19. Psychological attack is composed of those activities that target the enemy’s mindset and morale.
While categorized as a form of information attack, psychological attack is also a component of
psychological warfare. Psychological attack is discussed in greater detail in paragraphs 5-40 and 5-41.
INFORMATION DEFENSE
5-20. The PLA defines information defense as all those operational activities that protect friendly IW
systems from enemy IO. The PLA views IW as a zero-sum activity: any successes gained from information
attack are eroded by losses due to inadequate or ineffective information defense. Every potential offensive
tactic has a corresponding defensive responsibility. Information attack and defense are viewed as mutually
supporting, and they should be carefully integrated.
Electromagnetic Protection
5-21. Electromagnetic protection contains those measures put into place to resist enemy electromagnetic
attack. There are two main modes of electromagnetic protection: counterelectronic reconnaissance and
counterelectronic jamming. Counterelectronic reconnaissance is the use of both active and passive means to
prevent enemy collection on friendly IW systems. This includes active suppression of enemy collection
systems, concealment of friendly electromagnetic signals, the use of decoy or spoof signals to confuse
enemy collection, and physical targeting of enemy collection systems. Counterelectronic jamming consists
of those systems and techniques that either eliminate or weaken the effects of enemy jamming. This
includes hardening IW systems, using of more powerful or more resistant emitters, and carefully
monitoring information to weed out disinformation planted by the enemy.
Note. The Chinese concepts of electromagnetic attack and electromagnetic defense comprise
what both China and the U.S. refer to as electronic warfare (EW).
Network Protection
5-22. Network protection encompasses those measures put into place to resist enemy network attack. There
are two main types of network protection: computer virus defense and hacker defense. Each seeks to
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 5-5

Chapter 5
proactively protect friendly hardware, software, and networks from both overt and covert enemy intrusion.
Network defense is both an active and passive activity. Passive defense seeks to prevent, disrupt, or delay
intrusion, while active defense seeks to identify and stop intrusion after it occurs. Due to the extensive use
of computer networks, along with the wide variety of hardware and software in use, network defense is
seen as a highly difficult—though highly important—tactical task.
Note. The Chinese concepts of network attack and network defense comprise what both China
and the U.S. refer to as cyber warfare.
Physical Protection
5-23. Physical protection consists of those activities that defend IW systems from direct lethal attack by
enemy forces. There are two categories of physical protection: force strength and firepower, and quality
protection. Force strength and firepower incorporates tactical activities that preclude, preempt, neutralize,
or defeat enemy direct lethal attack against IW systems. They can be broadly grouped into either defensive
and security activities, such as tactical ground defense, or firepower activities, such as counterfire. Quality
protection comprises those activities that harden or hide IW systems, making them more difficult to
neutralize or destroy. This includes both engineering measures—such as building physical barriers, using
underground facilities, or camouflage and concealment—and survivability measures, such as adding armor.
The PLAA is very concerned about the vulnerability of IW systems to direct attack—particularly by
firepower and energy weapons—and it emphasizes survivability against such attacks.
Intelligence Protection
5-24. Intelligence protection is IW’s counterintelligence component. This includes measures and activities
that defeat enemy reconnaissance, surveillance, and espionage, concealing friendly operations and
capabilities. Intelligence protection in the form of disinformation can be integrated with information
attack—particularly psychological attack—in order to effectively deceive the enemy and trick it into
behaving in a preferred way.
OVERVIEW OF PLA PSYCHOLOGICAL WARFARE

5-25. Chinese psychological warfare encompasses those IO activities wherein a combatant employs
information and media in order to target human thought, emotion, and spirit. At tactical echelons, the
objective of psychological warfare is to create a psychological condition favorable to friendly forces and
unfavorable to the enemy, reducing enemy morale, and consequently, the enemy’s will to resist. The PLA
views psychological warfare as the operational element of the fundamental reason for conflict: a contest of
wills. As such, the PLA notably prioritizes psychological operations. Psychological warfare is considered a
fourth operational mode, in addition to land, air, and sea warfare. An effective psychological warfare
campaign is considered to be the best possible trade-off, paying a small price in lives and material for as
big a victory as possible.
Note. The PLA appears to categorize domains in much the same way as does the United States,
but its categorization of psychological warfare as an operational mode is unique. It is unclear
how operational modes differ from domains.
5-26. The PLA integrates psychological warfare into all elements of its operations. Psychological warfare
is organized as campaign psychological warfare, a discrete campaign in much the same vein as information
warfare, maneuver warfare, or firepower warfare. Psychological warfare is considered to have a much
broader scope than any other campaign, encompassing not only battlefield combatants, but also national
military and economic strength, national will and morale, and national political and social cohesion.
Psychological warfare is one of the main reasons why the PLA employs political officers in most of its
organizations, and the PLA considers itself to have a fundamental advantage in psychological warfare
against nearly any opponent due to its political unity of purpose.
5-6 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

5-27. Psychological warfare seeks to achieve the soft kill: the use of nonlethal coercive means to impose
one’s will upon an uncooperative opponent. This contrasts with hard-kill techniques, which involve the use
of physical force to achieve this coercion. Psychological warfare is thought to have uniquely powerful
soft-kill capabilities: a well-constructed psychological campaign is the only thing that can achieve Sun
Tzu’s definition of supreme excellence—subduing one’s opponent without fighting. (See figure 5-2 for a
graphic overview of Chinese psychological warfare.)
Figure 5-2. Chinese psychological warfare
CHARACTERISTICS OF PSYCHOLOGICAL WARFARE

5-28. Chinese psychological warfare displays four primary characteristics:
z A central role.
z Concurrent hard-kill and soft-kill techniques.
z Long duration.
z Vast scope.
These characteristics are discussed in paragraphs 5-29 through 5-33.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 5-7

Chapter 5
A CENTRAL ROLE
5-29. Psychological warfare has a central role in modern conflict. The informationized battlefield
transitioned psychological warfare from a peripheral or auxiliary military activity to one of the most
important operational forms. Due to modern media and social integration, psychological warfare efforts can
now target the enemy anywhere and at any time. This includes soldiers on the battlefield, in rear areas, or
on the home front; civilians, both enemy and others across the world; and decision makers, including those
at the highest level. Psychological warfare must be proportional to the conflict; however, a full-scale deep
psychological warfare campaign should not be employed in a localized or limited conflict, for instance.
5-30. Every military activity has some value psychologically and politically, and these second-order effects
must be considered carefully by commanders. A campaign’s success is no longer measured by casualties,
material loss, or territory; instead, it is measured by its overall psychological effect on enemy forces,
friendly forces, and neutral or outlying parties around the globe. The ultimate goal of warfare of all types is
winning the contest of wills, and this does not always mean that the side winning the tactical battle wins the
war.
CONCURRENT HARD-KILL AND SOFT-KILL TECHNIQUES

5-31. Hard-kill and soft-kill techniques are concurrent in Chinese psychological warfare. Hard kill and soft
kill have traditionally been mutually exclusive ideas. However, the PLA believes that modern weapons and
a highly integrated approach to psychological warfare can achieve a hard-kill effect through soft-kill
capabilities. The use of overwhelming firepower, when coupled with an effective psychological warfare
campaign, can create hard-kill results through psychological damage. In addition, new weapons are
emerging that are technically nonlethal but have powerful psychological effects: sonic weapons, microwave
weapons, and the like. In order to achieve the maximum deterrent effect, both physical and psychological
hard-kill capabilities must be considered. More-traditional soft-kill capabilities, such as propaganda and
media manipulation, should also be fully integrated into campaign psychological warfare.
LONG DURATION
5-32. Psychological warfare commences long before formal hostilities begin, and it continues long after
they are concluded. It is ultimately tied to a nation’s collective morale, unity, and spirit, and so it lasts a far
longer period than do tactical or even strategic military operations. Subtle or covert psychological warfare
activities—those that fall far beneath the threshold of response—should be practiced long before active
conflict commences. These will naturally lean more toward the defense, buoying the friendly population’s
will and morale, ensuring information advantage in media across the globe, and so on. Campaign
psychological warfare should also commence as early as possible in order to set the right information
environment; to fool, deceive, and trick the enemy; and to erode the enemy’s will. Similarly, psychological
warfare operations continue long after hostilities are over. One should attempt to control—or at least
influence—the post-conflict historical narrative, while using psychological warfare principles to ensure
long-lasting peace and stability.
VAST SCOPE
5-33. The scope of psychological warfare is vast. Psychological warfare activities stretch across entire
regions of the globe, and they can target any individual or organization. The PLA’s view of psychological
warfare is likely influenced by—or influences—its understanding of Comprehensive National Power: the
idea that a nation’s strength is not only military and economic, but also political, diplomatic, cultural, and
religious in nature. Psychological warfare activities can influence or target anything within any of these
fields, and they render the battlefield wholly nonlinear, making coordinated attack and defense not only
complicated, but perhaps one and the same. Achieving psychological superiority in conflict establishes a
baseline advantage for one’s side that permeates to the lowest tactical echelons, and it can enable a
technologically or tactically inferior force to prevail in the face of otherwise insurmountable odds.
5-8 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

PRINCIPLES OF PSYCHOLOGICAL WARFARE

5-34. Four main principles guide psychological warfare:
z Integrate psychological attack and defense.
z Specialize operations.
z Establish clear and reasonable objectives.
z Maintain concealment and secrecy.
These principles are described in paragraphs 5-35 through 5-38.
INTEGRATE PSYCHOLOGICAL ATTACK AND PROTECTION

5-35. The PLA views campaign psychological warfare through much the same lens as any other combat
campaign; in this sense, it includes both offensive and defensive activities. Further, one should target an
enemy’s weaknesses while attempting to fool or deceive it into attacking one’s strengths. Just as with
maneuver warfare, success in psychological warfare centers on seizing the initiative, and this is
accomplished through attack. Maintaining the initiative is largely a defensive effort. Though different
missions, attack and protection are fundamentally linked, and they are mutually supporting. One key
difference in campaign psychological warfare is that most psychological protection (or defense) is passive
in nature. For example, one cannot hope to prevent an enemy from attempting to influence a population
through the global media structure; instead, one must prepare the population to resist these efforts. This
process is ongoing and cannot be successfully implemented on a short timeline. Another key idea is that of
the psychological counterattack: a targeted effort designed to blunt, disrupt, or marginalize enemy
psychological attacks. While broadly similar to other forms of counterattack, the PLA designs
psychological counterattacks to target wide audiences and offset enemy psychological attacks on a broad
scale, rather than targeting specific enemy operations.
SPECIALIZE OPERATIONS
5-36. The idea of a specialized psychological operations section is relatively new in both the PLA and the
PLAA. In the past, psychological operations generally fell to political officers and nonspecialized troops.
Following the model of the U.S. military, the PLAA now builds specialized psychological warfare groups
at a variety of different echelons, ensuring integrated support for ground operations
ESTABLISH CLEAR AND REASONABLE OBJECTIVES

5-37. The wide scope of psychological warfare naturally lends itself to making campaign psychological
warfare objectives extremely broad, perhaps excessively so. Planners must carefully assess operational
needs and then craft specific, achievable psychological warfare goals. This is particularly true for
information and disinformation campaigns. While it is now possible to promulgate a message to a large
number of people with relative ease, messages must be at least plausible in order to be of any use. Indeed,
messaging viewed as fanciful or clearly false may lead the target to dismiss further messages and sabotage
follow-on psychological warfare efforts. The most effective psychological warfare campaigns are those that
are focused and that present their targets with believable messages that roughly align with their existing
perspectives and biases.
MAINTAIN CONCEALMENT AND SECRECY

5-38. Deception is ultimately at the heart of nearly every psychological warfare operation. Psychological
warfare is one of the only forms of warfare wherein awareness of an enemy’s presence decreases the
overall effectiveness of the effort. Concealment is at the core of all deception efforts. The source and
delivery mechanism for psychological warfare actions should remain opaque to the intended recipient
whenever possible. Deception operations are at the core of a number of other PLA and PLAA campaigns,
and nearly all of these efforts can be enhanced by effective psychological warfare operations. Secrecy can
be considered in much the same vein as concealment: a fundamental component of a successful
psychological warfare campaign. Since the main point of psychological warfare is to misinform, confuse,
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 5-9

Chapter 5
fool, or trick the enemy, any breaches in operational security can conclusively undermine psychological
warfare efforts by allowing the enemy to know what is true and what is false.
PSYCHOLOGICAL WARFARE TACTICS

5-39. The PLA divides campaign psychological warfare into attack and protection, similar to IW. These
two aspects result in discrete but mutually supporting operations, and they should be tightly integrated in
order to achieve a combined arms effect.
PSYCHOLOGICAL ATTACK
5-40. Psychological attack contains those activities that target an enemy’s situational understanding,
conviction, will, and morale. The goal of psychological attack is to control the enemy’s awareness and
fighting spirit such that its combat power is weakened. The PLAA views this as a supporting effort to
information attack, although psychological attack is necessarily broader and less technical in nature. There
are two primary methods by which psychological attack is carried out: attacking psychology of
understanding and attacking psychology of conviction. Psychology of understanding attacks target the
enemy’s situational understanding, and they can include everything from camouflage and concealment, to
feint attacks or demonstrations, to disinformation efforts. The general objective of these attacks is to lead
the enemy into an information trap, a situation wherein enemy leaders and planners make erroneous, faulty,
or inefficient decisions due to faulty, insufficient, or misleading information. This can be described as
getting inside of the enemy’s decision-making cycle, and it is considered one of the most difficult and
valuable operational arts in all of warfare. Examples of psychological attack at lower echelons include the
use of loudspeakers, simulated smoke or fire, decoys, and unmanned equipment to distort the enemy’s
situational understanding. Individual soldiers may also be targeted with physical pamphlets or digital
messaging in order to upset morale and cohesion.
5-41. Deception is the activity at the heart of psychology of conviction attacks. Practically every PLAA
operation places as high a premium on deceiving the enemy as it does maneuver or firepower. Attacks
against psychology of conviction target the enemy’s fighting spirit, will, and morale. At political echelons,
this involves broad campaigns to convince or coerce enemy civilians and politicians to abandon support for
the conflict. At tactical levels, the PLAA takes a notably Marxist approach. It seeks to create division
between lower ranks and senior ranks by encouraging antiwar sentiments, homesickness, and fear among
the enemy’s soldiery.
PSYCHOLOGICAL PROTECTION
5-42. Psychological protection encompasses those activities that attempt to blunt, minimize, or neutralize
enemy psychological warfare activities. Psychological protection is divided into two subtypes in much the
same way as psychological attack: protecting psychology of understanding and protecting psychology of
conviction. Protecting psychology of understanding involves attempting to defeat enemy deception or
concealment activities or to minimize enemy disinformation efforts. The objective is to give commanders a
clear and accurate picture of the battlefield, enabling quick and accurate decision making, and keeping the
enemy out of the friendly decision cycle.
5-43. Protecting psychology of conviction includes those activities that maintain friendly cohesion,
morale, and will to fight. It includes defeating broad enemy propaganda efforts or more-direct attacks
against friendly soldiers. It also includes political education efforts and other measures designed to enhance
esprit de corps, and mental strength and resiliency measures put in place to protect and enhance the
individual soldier’s psychological well-being. Political officers are also charged with ensuring support and
compliance from local civilian populations, thus protecting PLA forces from the impact of political ill-will.
5-10 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

PART TWO
People’s Liberation Army Actions

Part two describes the People’s Liberation Army Army’s (PLAA’s) doctrinal approach
to ground combat. The PLAA divides actions into offensive, defensive, and
antiterrorism and stability categories, with reconnaissance and security actions
performed throughout operations of all types. Chapters six through nine each delve
into one of these categories in detail, with discussions on fundamentals, principals,
planning, and tactics.
Chapter 6
Reconnaissance and Security Actions
The People’s Liberation Army Army (PLAA) places a high priority on its
reconnaissance and security operations. These are integral to creating and sustaining
situational awareness, and they are seen as essential to developing an advantage over
one’s opponent. System warfare and the application of combat systems are
underpinned at all levels by extensive reconnaissance. PLAA maneuver units place a
high priority on mounted and dismounted reconnaissance: these units are seen as
prestigious, and their soldiers and leaders are highly regarded. Ground
reconnaissance remains the chief method by which tactical units gain intelligence on
their enemies, but air, space, and electronic reconnaissance are all integrated to
varying degrees, even at tactical echelons. PLAA security operations are linked to
ground reconnaissance. Their primary intent is to protect main-body formations, give
commanders information and decision space, and enable effective risk assessment.
The People’s Armed Police (PAP) also conduct combat and area security operations,
both domestically and in support of PLAA operations. In combat, the PLAA and PAP
likely cooperate and coordinate to ensure security throughout the combat area.
RECONNAISSANCE FUNDAMENTALS
6-1. Recognizing the changes brought by the informationized battlefield, the PLAA invested substantial
time and resources in developing its reconnaissance capabilities. Throughout the Cold War, PLAA units
had only light mounted scouts and unreliable manned aircraft to conduct reconnaissance. Despite
experiences in the Korean War and the basic tenets of People’s War that underpinned the need for effective
reconnaissance operations, the PLAA approach during this era was generally to conduct a massive
reconnaissance effort using primitive methods and obsolete equipment. The post-reform PLAA, however,
places heavy emphasis on advanced reconnaissance methods: more-advanced surveillance platforms,
advanced techniques and better training, mechanization and motorization, and intelligence integration.
Modern PLAA reconnaissance doctrine is designed to support a sophisticated mechanized force and the
system warfare approach.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 6-1

Chapter 6
6-2. PLAA reconnaissance operations obtain information, develop situational understanding, support
decision making and actions, and protect key elements of combat power. Reconnaissance and security
operations are seen as continuous. Their most important role is providing early and accurate warning of
adversary or enemy actions and intent, information about enemy dispositions and mindset, and decision
space for commanders at all echelons. The PLAA puts a high priority on reconnaissance operations of all
types, considering a commander’s situational awareness to be a key factor in being able to detect and
exploit enemy weaknesses. Reconnaissance and security missions are typically interwoven with combined
arms mission tasks. Reconnaissance is considered an ongoing task that is conducted before, during, and
after operations. PLAA leaders match reconnaissance capabilities with missions, seeking to ensure that
reconnaissance efforts support coordinated intelligence collection efforts.
6-3. Reconnaissance and security missions are often linked. Reconnaissance can be seen as a proactive
task, seeking to develop situational understanding through action, while security is a reactive task, done
primarily to preclude enemy actions and enable effective transition to offensive operations. PLAA leaders
build reconnaissance intelligence systems to support each mission, task-organizing reconnaissance
capabilities that are coordinated with the requirements of the unit’s main effort. Dedicated security
missions may be assigned to assault groups, combat reserve groups, or defensive groups of all types. These
units are designated to screen and protect critical assets from enemy actions. Local security is the
responsibility of every unit at all times.
6-4. The PLAA recognizes four key fundamental principles when conducting reconnaissance at all
echelons: continuous, command-directed, performed through action, and agile. These principles are
described in paragraphs 6-5 through 6-8.
CONTINUOUS
6-5. Reconnaissance is continuous. Though a reconnaissance mission may be in support of a specific
mission or objective, it must commence before and continue after its supported mission. Collection plans
and updated reconnaissance objectives ensure an uninterrupted flow of information to the commander,
enabling appropriate reactions to enemy activities and changes on the battlefield.
COMMAND-DIRECTED
6-6. Reconnaissance is command directed. Reconnaissance efforts must be focused on those objectives
that support the unit’s mission. Reconnaissance forces must be given clear objectives, rules for engagement
and disengagement, and follow-on missions. Commanders must ensure that reconnaissance formations are
deployed to support established collection efforts.
PERFORMED THROUGH ACTION

6-7. Reconnaissance is best performed through action. PLAA forces place great emphasis on direct action
in reconnaissance—engaging enemy forces in order to develop situations, fix enemy positions, and force
enemy commanders into early decisions. Reconnaissance through action also includes the use of airborne
sensors to trigger enemy responses and reconnaissance by fire to reveal enemy positions and systems.
Direct action also achieves a disruption effect against the enemy, reducing its cohesion and increasing
uncertainty.
AGILE
6-8. Reconnaissance must be agile. The People’s Liberation Army (PLA) is universally struggling with a
transition from a strong top-down command approach toward a more decentralized methodology. In
previous generations, PLAA reconnaissance efforts—particularly patrols—were strictly controlled by
commanders, with patrolling elements expected to stick steadfastly to predetermined routes and observation
objectives. The reformed PLAA is placing great emphasis on a more flexible approach to patrolling,
allowing the patrol leader discretion in supporting the commander’s objectives.
6-2 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Note. This publication presents PLA military theory largely as written and prescribed by the
PLAA. In most cases this represents a best practice as determined by PLA leadership. Real-
world practices of PLA units are largely opaque to outsiders, and they were generally not
included as part of the analysis underpinning this document. Moreover, the PLA has not
participated in an active conflict in nearly half a century, so real-world applications are minimal.
Available information on Chinese military training exercises and the few recent examples of
conflict seem to indicate that PLA practices—including those of the PLAA—conform closely to
its military theory.
RECONNAISSANCE AT ECHELONS ABOVE BRIGADE

6-9. The PLA views reconnaissance as a national-level mission, and it employs national assets in support
of reconnaissance operations at all echelons. Examples of national-level reconnaissance assets include
satellite surveillance, cyber and electronic surveillance, national information and disinformation campaigns,
and national-level special operations forces (SOF) operations. Collectively, these resources typically focus
either on strategic-level targets or on deep areas of the battlefield. Tactical commanders may benefit
obliquely from surveillance on strategic-level targets, but they are reliant on these assets’ contribution to
deep reconnaissance.
6-10. Deep reconnaissance is loosely defined as reconnaissance operations focusing on areas behind that
which can be serviced by a given unit’s organic weapons systems. For the PLAA combined arms brigade
(CA-BDE), this means the areas past the ranges of its own tube and rocket artillery, beginning at
somewhere between 35 kilometers (km) and 100 km, and extending through the remainder of the theater of
operations. This area typically contains enemy command posts, supply areas, air and sea ports,
reinforcement route and staging areas, and long-range fires.
6-11. PLA deep reconnaissance operations consist of a mix of long-range persistent aerial and ground
sensors using a variety of manned and unmanned systems, long-endurance SOF and similar light infantry
units, and space-based systems. A significant proportion of deep reconnaissance assets are housed in the
theater command’s reconnaissance and intelligence brigade, while others are national-level assets. Some
deep reconnaissance operations are focused on supporting national- and strategic-level assets, while some
play an important role in support of tactical operations. Deep reconnaissance capabilities in support of the
latter provide targeting for long-range fires, supply commanders with imagery analysis and signals
intelligence (SIGINT), and collect on the morale, disposition, and cohesion of large enemy formations.
Deep reconnaissance assets are deployed using a combined arms approach, where the strengths of one
system offset limitations of another. Collection efforts that cannot be processed in real time, such as
imagery analysis, are cross-referenced with collection efforts from SOF and clandestine personnel or
information warfare capabilities to create a more holistic intelligence picture than would be possible with a
lone system.
6-12. Deep reconnaissance operations feed the PLAA’s military planning process during all phases. PLAA
commanders may request or be allocated deep reconnaissance assets based on mission requirements. Much
of the collection performed in support of tactical echelons is performed by manned and unmanned aircraft,
with dismounted ground forces in support. Intelligence is collected in a cycle, wherein collection assets are
paired with areas of interest as part of a wider collection plan.
RECONNAISSANCE AT THE COMBINED ARMS BRIGADE

6-13. Reconnaissance at the CA-BDE is fully integrated with the general intelligence efforts at higher
echelons. Intelligence officers are charged with developing an intelligence plan that supports the objective
of the commander. Reconnaissance operations are a major component of this plan, especially at tactical
echelons. The PLAA employs a simple and robust intelligence cycle designed to integrate all-source
intelligence assets with unit operations. PLAA intelligence is intended to be very specific, with discrete
questions driving discrete answers.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 6-3

Chapter 6
COLLECTION PRINCIPLES
6-14. Five principles guide PLAA intelligence collection efforts: mission-supporting, target-oriented,
well-planned, well-hidden, and selective. These principles are described in paragraphs 6-15 through 6-19.
Mission-supporting
6-15. Perhaps more than any other soldier, the reconnaissance soldier must understand the commander’s
mission and how the reconnaissance effort fits into it. This includes not only understanding the design of
the mission, but also its intent.
Target-oriented
6-16. Intelligence efforts must focus on targets—those objects or activities that best inform commanders
and enable their decision-making process. Accuracy is inherent in this principle; inaccurate intelligence is
at best useless, or at worst, dangerous.
Well-planned
6-17. Reconnaissance operations must be well conceived and carefully thought out. This includes
identifying objectives, schemes of maneuver, and criteria for engagement, disengagement, and reporting.
Conducting reconnaissance without a proper plan results in inconsistent intelligence and compromises the
larger mission.
Well-hidden
6-18. Intelligence operations are at the center of deception, and they are key in gaining an information
advantage over the opponent. Carefully guarding intelligence gains, while simultaneously denying or
deceiving the enemy’s collection efforts, is considered an effort of the highest priority. The intelligence
contest is viewed as zero-sum: allowing one’s opponent to gain information is detrimental to one’s own
intelligence operations.
Selective
6-19. Intelligence efforts must be prioritized; if everything is a focus, then nothing is a focus. Commanders
must make clear what their most important pieces of information are, then efforts to match collection assets
with targets must mirror this prioritization.
COLLECTION PROCESS
6-20. The PLAA reconnaissance and intelligence collection cycle follows four steps:
z Develop the reconnaissance plan.
z Deploy reconnaissance forces.
z Screen and integrate the information.
z Report.
The process is considered continuous, beginning again immediately upon completion.
Develop the Reconnaissance Plan

6-21. This step requires the intelligence officer to identify key terrain features, enemy formations, or other
battlefield features that will contribute the most to the commander’s decision-making cycle. Intelligence
requirements are typically expressed as questions that have clear, unambiguous answers. Good
requirements ask and answer questions that are of immediate use to commanders; questions considered of
the most value are those which inform the commander about the morale, disposition, and potential
weaknesses of the enemy force. PLAA commanders seek to get inside of their opponent’s decision cycle, at
which point they can disrupt, deceive, or otherwise manipulate the opponent to the commanders’
advantage.
6-4 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Deploy Reconnaissance Forces

6-22. Reconnaissance forces are deployed in order to answer the questions asked by the reconnaissance
plan. Commanders should employ all available reconnaissance capabilities and encourage their
reconnaissance forces to employ as many different techniques and technologies as possible. If higher
echelon reconnaissance forces are operating in the area, commanders should integrate or cooperate with
them. Examples of critical information that reconnaissance forces may seek include enemy strength and
disposition, enemy firepower, obstacles, locations of enemy command posts and communication hubs, and
key battlefield terrain features.
Screen and Integrate the Information

6-23. As information begins to flow into the command, the intelligence officer and staff must effectively
filter and screen it for accuracy, consistency, and usefulness within the context of the reconnaissance plan.
Conflicting reports must be resolved, and incomplete reports may be compared with other information in
order to increase accuracy or thoroughness. This phase also emphasizes the importance of security and
secrecy in the reconnaissance process: the intelligence officer must ensure that enemy forces do not gain
access to recently gathered intelligence, nor be able to effectively collect on PLAA forces.
Report
6-24. As intelligence is processed, it must be quickly and accurately reported both up and down the chain
of command. Reports to higher echelons answer their intelligence requirements, while reports to lower
echelons enable prosecution of the commander’s intent. Traditionally, the PLAA was very slow to process
intelligence, as it was deemed necessary to compute both the tactical and political elements of new
information before acting on it. The reformed PLAA places great emphasis on rapid reaction to new data.
RECONNAISSANCE ORGANIZATIONS AND CAPABILITIES

6-25. The PLAA considers reconnaissance an all-arms occupation, and basic training in reconnaissance,
patrolling, reporting, and assessing is provided for all PLAA soldiers. Specialized reconnaissance units,
along with SOF, reconnaissance systems, and national-level assets, provide a comprehensive suite of
sensors intended to give the intelligence officer a wide-ranging menu of options with which to fulfill
intelligence requirements.
6-26. Soldiers and units are the most basic reconnaissance assets. All soldiers are trained on the basics of
observation, recording, patrolling, and assessing enemy formations. Collecting information of this type has
not historically been a strength of the PLAA. Soldiers were often unable to report developments to their
commander due to poor upward communication, a lack of literacy, and poor communications
infrastructure. PLAA reforms seek to offset this historic weakness through enhanced training, better-quality
recruits, a more decentralized command approach, and an emphasis on bottom-up messaging.
6-27. Observer teams are the most basic dedicated reconnaissance element. They may be trained scout
troops or they may be soldiers tasked to perform observation. The observer team functions as a stationary
element typically assigned to observe a particular target, most often a piece of key terrain. The observer
team then informs its higher echelon command if and when an enemy unit occupies or traverses this terrain.
Observer teams are usually not charged with conducting direct action, though they may be given a security
mission in addition to their reconnaissance task. Placing and managing observer teams is a basic
competency for lower-level PLAA leaders. Observer teams often form the first security line for a deployed
unit, screening the unit’s main body and giving the unit’s commander decision time and space in the event
that enemy contact is made. Observer teams may be augmented by unmanned aircraft systems (UAS) or
other advanced surveillance systems; simple unmanned aircraft (UA) may be operated by the observer team
without additional support.
6-28. The scout team is one of the oldest and most important reconnaissance capabilities in the PLAA.
Previous generations relied heavily on the simple two-man dismounted team to provide most ground
intelligence—probes to determine enemy disposition, weak points, and avenues of approach were virtually
all performed by two-man scout teams. The basic mission of the scout team is the patrol: a movement
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 6-5

Chapter 6
designed to surveil one or more reconnaissance objectives over a specified geographic area. The scout team
remains a key element of reconnaissance; trained scouts are present in all units down to the company level.
Scouts today are often mounted, allowing them to conduct patrols over wider areas. They also often have
direct communications back to their headquarters element, allowing for real-time updates to commanders.
Scout teams may also be augmented by UAS or electronic surveillance capabilities, and many scout teams
can operate small UASs without additional support.
6-29. The CA-BDE’s reconnaissance platoons, housed within the reconnaissance battalion, provide the
bulk of the brigade’s long-range reconnaissance patrol capability. The reconnaissance platoon is capable of
conducting independent patrols over several days, deploying numerous scout teams over a wide area to
perform reconnaissance and security tasks. These platoons operate small organic UA to enhance ground
surveillance operations. The reconnaissance platoon may have a direct communications link to the
CA-BDE’s artillery battalion in order to facilitate rapid artillery fire on time-sensitive targets or to facilitate
reconnaissance-by-fire operations. Reconnaissance units also conduct raids, a form of hit-and-run direct
action aimed at forcing a confrontation with enemy formations. Raids may be used to reveal enemy
positions, to seize enemy prisoners, or to disrupt enemy maneuver. Reconnaissance platoons are likely fully
motorized, with heavy CA-BDE reconnaissance platoons operating armored vehicles, such as
eight-by-eight light armored vehicles or infantry fighting vehicles (IFVs), in a cavalry-type role.
Specialized cavalry fighting vehicles equipped with radars and other sophisticated sensors are being
fielded, but there are still of relatively few of them. Reconnaissance platoons work in concert with SOF
units, particularly those SOF units assigned to the SOF brigade of the group army. In most cases, the
reconnaissance battalion comprises the core of the CA-BDE’s reconnaissance intelligence system.
6-30. Each CA-BDE houses numerous UASs, with some in the reconnaissance battalion and some in the
artillery battalion. These units operate group two and possibly group three UA, enabling aerial surveillance
with a sophisticated suite of sensors in a maximum combat radius of roughly 80 km to 100 km. Sensor
options available include simple visual sensors, advanced electro-optical telescopic sensors, infrared
sensors, radars, and passive SIGINT sensors. Many PLAA UA are reconfigurable based on mission
requirements, allowing commanders to tailor sensor suites to support the collection plan. The
reconnaissance battalion’s UASs support the ground reconnaissance efforts of the battalion, and they may
be task-organized to support reconnaissance platoon operations, particularly long-range or long-endurance
patrols. The PLAA also employs UASs in decoy reconnaissance roles: deliberately flying UA in order to
entice high-value sensors and air defense shooters to engage and thus reveal their positions. UASs from the
CA-BDE’s artillery battalion conduct surveillance and targeting operations to support indirect fire. These
UASs are likely tied directly to the CA-BDE’s artillery systems and provide real-time sensor inputs to
enhance artillery targeting. They may also support the CA- BDE’s wider collection efforts, but they are
more likely employed in support of the brigade’s fire support plan, rather than the wider intelligence plan.
6-31. Each group army operates an aviation brigade, which in turn operates a significant number of scout
helicopters. Basic aerial reconnaissance has been a key capability of the PLAA for decades, but dedicated
scout helicopters are a relatively new addition. It is likely that aviation brigade assets will be task-organized
to subordinate CA-BDEs based on mission priority. In many cases, a CA-BDE may be assigned a section
of scout helicopters in order to support its collection plans. Scout helicopters are typically light utility
helicopters equipped with advanced sensors and limited weaponry, and they can provide direct air-ground
communications to CA-BDE leaders as they conduct reconnaissance patrols over wide geographic areas.
Scout helicopters may also communicate directly to attack aviation or artillery units, providing elevated
forward observation in support of firepower operations.
6-32. The CA-BDE employs limited technical reconnaissance capabilities. These include electronic
intelligence (ELINT) and SIGINT systems that support collection efforts through surveillance of the
electromagnetic spectrum. PLAA systems of this type were traditionally limited to simple radio direction-
finding equipment; ELINT and SIGINT operations were clearly less important than ground patrols. PLAA
reforms place much greater emphasis on ELINT and SIGINT, particularly in support of reconnaissance and
counterfire operations. PLAA tactical-level ELINT and SIGINT capabilities include radio direction finding,
network surveillance, radar detection, and fire finding. These capabilities are rare, and the doctrine and
training surrounding their deployment is immature. The systems fielded may vary widely in capability.
PLAA commanders also employ decoy systems, designed to spoof, jam, or deceive enemy collection
systems, as part of their intelligence operations. CA-BDEs will likely receive significant ELINT and
6-6 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

SIGINT intelligence support from group army collection efforts and regional military capabilities such as
dedicated ELINT and SIGINT surveillance aircraft.
6-33. SOF at the group army provide an enhanced long-range ground patrol capability that can be
employed either alongside or in addition to the operations of the reconnaissance battalion. Long-range
patrolling is considered a key competence for PLA SOF. Small SOF units are capable of conducting
days-long patrols both in direct support of CA-BDEs and in deep reconnaissance areas. Many SOF units
are equipped with long-range communications capabilities—including satellite communications—enabling
them to report back findings in near or actual real time. SOF also train extensively on direct action and
reconnaissance by fire. Larger SOF units engage both designated targets and targets of opportunity in order
to develop situational understanding through action. SOF units may be tied directly to long-range shooters,
including rocket artillery and ballistic missiles, and they can provide precise targeting data for high-value
targets in rear areas. These units conduct deep reconnaissance in enemy rear areas. Reconnaissance
methods may include passive surveillance, direct action, or covert action.
6-34. Joint and national assets may provide information to CA-BDE commanders and intelligence officers.
These assets include rare and highly capable ELINT and SIGINT platforms, satellite surveillance, cyber
intelligence, and political intelligence. The degree to which these collection assets are available to the
CA-BDE vary significantly. A CA-BDE, for instance, may receive direct support from a space-based asset
for a high-priority mission, but it may only passively access national-level intelligence data at other times.
National-level assets also contribute heavily to deception campaigns, providing disinformation and decoy
efforts that support tactical operations. Wide-area deception operations are considered a very high-priority
mission, but it is unclear how effectively they are coordinated with activities at tactical echelons. Other
joint assets include manned reconnaissance and strike aircraft operated by air divisions in support of theater
commands, national- level SOF, naval surface and subsurface vessels, and clandestine intelligence
operations—both domestic and abroad. Of note, the People’ Liberation Army Strategic Support Force
(PLASSF) is a unified national-level intelligence command, integrating all-source intelligence into a single,
easily accessible menu of options presented to lower echelon commanders.
FORMS OF TACTICAL RECONNAISSANCE

6-35. The PLAA frames tactical reconnaissance in much the same way as the U.S. Army. Ground
reconnaissance efforts are tailored to meet specific intelligence collection requirements using one or more
forms of reconnaissance. Information superiority at tactical levels begins with a comprehensive and
well-executed reconnaissance plan. Tactical reconnaissance efforts are integrated with operational and
strategic intelligence efforts to provide the commander with a holistic picture of the battlefield, inform
rapid and effective decision making, and deny or deceive enemy collection efforts. The PLAA recognizes
two primary forms of tactical reconnaissance: combat reconnaissance and search.
COMBAT RECONNAISSANCE
6-36. Combat reconnaissance consists of those reconnaissance activities that involve direct action against
the enemy. These are implemented before or during a larger operation to inform the commander’s decision
making as the battle unfolds. Combat reconnaissance is the centerpiece of most PLAA reconnaissance
activities, and great emphasis is placed on winning the information battle during aggressive reconnaissance
activities. All combat reconnaissance techniques are designed to force the enemy to make a decision—
usually related to whether or not to engage—and in doing so, revealing its disposition, strength, or other
capabilities. Figure 6-1 on page 6-8 depicts a reconnaissance attack.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 6-7

Chapter 6
Figure 6-1. Combat reconnaissance (example)
Reconnaissance Attack
6-37. A reconnaissance attack is a deliberate or hasty attack on an enemy position performed during a
reconnaissance mission. The reconnaissance attack differs from a raid in that it is not hit and run; it is a
reconnaissance-in-force that develops into a sustained attack. A commander’s orders may grant
subordinates the authority to decide, upon encountering an enemy force, whether to develop the situation to
gain intelligence and then withdraw, or to press the attack if enemy forces seem weak or otherwise
vulnerable.
Reconnaissance by Fire
6-38. Reconnaissance by fire is the use of fire—typically indirect fire—to either reveal enemy defensive
positions or to encourage the enemy to reveal its artillery assets by counterfire. The reconnaissance by fire
usually involves delivering a large amount of indirect fire into a specific area believed to be occupied by
enemy forces, then observing the area to confirm or deny enemy presence as it reacts to being fired upon.
6-8 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Reconnaissance by fire may also be used to encourage enemy batteries to react with counterfire, allowing
PLAA counterfire capabilities to effectively target them. It has the added effect of depleting enemy
ammunition or forcing the enemy to displace due to the counterfire threat.
Raid
6-39. A raid is a hit-and-run attack, usually performed as a probe to test or locate enemy defenses or
dispositions. Raids may also attempt to seize prisoners, either as a primary mission objective or as a target
of opportunity. Traditionally, the PLAA was heavily reliant on raids as part of the infiltration tactics it used
against strong conventional forces. It is likely that the focus on raids has receded somewhat as more
advanced reconnaissance platforms are fielded.
Feint, Demonstration, Diversion, or Decoy Attack

6-40. Feints, demonstrations, diversions, and decoys employ either expendable assets or careful maneuvers
designed to encourage the enemy to reveal dispositions or capabilities through engagement. Feints and
demonstrations by ground forces involve intentionally engaging the enemy to fool, deceive, or trick it into
making bad decisions. Feints seek enemy contact, while demonstrations seek to avoid contact. Diversions
are activities designed to distract the enemy, causing it to focus on one part of the battlefield while secret
operations are conducted elsewhere. Decoy operations employ expendable systems designed to fool an
enemy into revealing key intelligence. A common example of decoy use is the employment of inexpensive,
expendable UA flown over enemy positions, with the intent of sacrificing the vehicles in order to have the
enemy’s air defense sensors and shooters reveal their positions through engagement. These techniques may
also employ cyber or other information warfare elements to manipulate enemy networks, sensors, or
mission command nodes.
SEARCH
6-41. Search consists of those reconnaissance activities that are designed to assess the enemy, terrain, or
other battlefield features without deliberate or direct action against enemy forces. The PLAA historically
did not emphasize search missions—preferring direct action instead—but on the informationized
battlefield, search is recognized as a critical component of overall reconnaissance efforts. The PLAA
prescribes that search operations be energetic, active, and well-protected, as reconnaissance forces are
high-value targets that are highly susceptible to attack or ambush by a vigilant enemy.
Linear Search
6-42. A linear search is a form of tactical reconnaissance that focuses on a single route or lengthwise piece
of terrain and various features related to that route. Linear search can be thought of as analogous to route
reconnaissance in U.S. doctrine. Though any unit can conduct a linear search, for longer routes of sufficient
size and condition for CA-BDE use, a reconnaissance platoon is likely required. Intelligence questions that
a linear search can answer include condition of roadways, natural or manmade terrain features, presence of
enemy forces, and potential hazards along the route. Linear search is considered a key task in support of the
advance, the CA-BDE’s movement from rear areas to an attack position. The PLAA emphasizes rapid
movement and secrecy during approach marches, and high-quality reconnaissance of the route to be used is
a major enabler to that end. Linear search may be enhanced by imagery or terrain analysis, map
reconnaissance, and aerial surveillance, though scouts moving on the terrain in question are a necessary
component to a thorough linear search. Figure 6-2 on page 6-10 depicts a reconnaissance platoon
conducting a linear search prior to the movement of a CA-BDE along the specified route.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 6-9

Chapter 6
Figure 6-2. Linear search (example)
Area Search
6-43. Area search is a form of tactical reconnaissance intended to obtain information about a discrete
geographic area. This area is typically established by translating intelligence requirements into specific
areas on the ground that must be surveilled to confirm or deny intelligence questions. Area search takes
longer to plan and execute than other forms of tactical reconnaissance, but it provides detail over a wider
area and can answer more questions than other forms. Due to the extended timeline required, area search is
best used in support of deliberate operations, where adequate planning and time for execution can be
devoted to reconnaissance operations. Area search for the CA-BDE is typically conducted by the
reconnaissance battalion, with each reconnaissance troop given a specific area to reconnoiter. Active
reconnaissance is conducted by mounted and dismounted scouts supported by UAS, scout helicopters, or
electromagnetic sensors; passive reconnaissance is conducted by observer teams. Each subordinate
6-10 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

reconnaissance unit is given one or more intelligence questions to answer: examples include confirming or
denying enemy presence in a given area; assessing the condition of enemy defensive works, condition, or
morale; assessing the condition of key terrain; or finding advantageous routes of attack. Figure 6-3 depicts
a reconnaissance troop conducting an area search in support of future combined arms battalion (CA-BN)
operations in the area.
Figure 6-3. Area search (example)
Target Search
6-44. Target search is a tactical reconnaissance method by which a reconnaissance element—likely a scout
team, forward observer, or scout vehicle—conducts surveillance on a specific target. This can be done to
ascertain information about the target or to deliver location data about it to long-range shooters or other
engagement elements. Target search is typically passive, as it is intended to feed information to other
battlefield systems, rather than to develop the situation through action. As such, it is often conducted from
concealment or from standoff ranges. UASs are a key contributor to target reconnaissance, particularly the
UAS company that is part of each artillery battalion. These units act in concert with artillery shooters to
create a reconnaissance-fires complex, a series of sensor-to-shooter linkages that facilitate rapid target
engagement even against over-the-horizon or otherwise concealed target types.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 6-11

Chapter 6
Electronic Search
6-45. Electronic search or digital search is a relatively new tactic that the PLAA recognizes as a distinct
form of reconnaissance, and it has operationalized into long-range or deep electronic reconnaissance.
Electronic search broadly refers to the use of collection assets to conduct reconnaissance on enemy signals,
networks, and network content, such as social media. This approach is broadly similar to that of Western
national-level cyber and intelligence units, the primary difference is that the PLAA intends to try and
provide lower echelon units, such as CA-BDEs and artillery brigades, with the means to conduct electronic
search.
SECURITY FUNDAMENTALS
6-46. PLAA security operations protect a supported force with a designated level of early warning and
combat power. Security and reconnaissance operations complement one another, and together are the key
to gaining an information advantage over the opponent. Security tasks are conducted by all PLAA units,
but primary tactical security in support of CA-BDE operations is conducted largely by the reconnaissance
intelligence system.
6-47. PLAA security operations are in a state of transition. Traditionally, nearly all domestic security
functions were performed by the PAP, while the PLAA focused almost entirely on tactical security tasks
associated with major combat operations. Chinese observation of modern regional conflicts—such as those
in Iraq and Ukraine—revealed the importance of area security operations performed by conventional
military forces as part of securing wider regional objectives. This prompted the PLAA to expand the scope
of its security operations to include wide area security in support of stability tactical tasks and, in turn,
regional stability. It is unclear how the PLAA and PAP might work together in a wide area security mission
against a regional opponent.
6-48. The commander of the parent unit determines the priorities, engagement and disengagement criteria,
withdrawal criteria, and information-gathering priorities for the security force. The security force
commander develops a security plan informed by the intent of the higher-echelon commander. For tactical
units, the priority is typically on protection of the main force, followed by information gathering, then by
disruption of opponent activities. For units conducting wide area security operations not in direct support of
a parent unit, these priorities may shift based on the needs of the operation.
SECURITY OPERATION PRINCIPLES

6-49. PLAA security operations revolve heavily around support to maneuver formations. Five principles
guide PLAA commanders as they develop and implement security plans: defend stubbornly, standoff,
deceive, maintain contact, and protect.
Defend Stubbornly
6-50. Like most security forces, PLAA security elements will likely face superior opponents as they
execute their missions. Commander’s guidance to security elements instructs them to fight fiercely even in
the face of superior numbers or firepower. This principle is intended to ensure three things: enemy forces
are adequately reconnoitered and assessed prior to their reaching their objective, enemy forces are disrupted
or demoralized prior to reaching their objective, and friendly commanders are given decision space in the
form of time and distance.
Stand Off from the Opponent

6-51. This principle instructs security commanders to engage their opponents at or near the maximum
ranges of their weapons systems. This ensures that enemy forces are engaged throughout their approach to
the security line, while making it more difficult to effectively reconnoiter friendly forces. To help enable
this principle, security forces are often equipped with longer-range weapons and sensors, such as antitank
guided missiles, heavy direct fire guns, and airborne sensors. Effectively standing-off one’s opponent is
considered a critical step in the counterreconnaissance process, denying the enemy use of key positions or
capabilities.
6-12 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Deceive the Opponent

6-52. Deception is a common theme in PLAA operations, including security operations. PLAA security
commanders are encouraged to deploy their forces in such a way that the opponent overestimates or
underestimates PLAA combat power. They are also encouraged to use techniques such as decoys, spoofing,
false communications traffic, and feints in order to confuse or mislead enemy commanders. Advanced
deception techniques that integrate higher-level capabilities, such as cyber assets, clandestine intelligence
personnel, and space-based assets, are being integrated into operations, but their use at tactical levels has
not been widely practiced.
Maintain Contact with the Opponent

6-53. This principle is common throughout army security forces worldwide. Once contact with an
opponent is made, security forces attempt to continue it in order to develop the situation through action and
gain useful intelligence about the opponent’s disposition and intent. Continued contact also ensures that the
opponent expends personnel, fuel, and ammunition on the engagement, while further disrupting its plans
and timelines. Traditional contact generally revolves around the use of direct fire systems and small arms;
advanced techniques may involve the use of information warfare capabilities, deep SOF operatives, or
targeting long- range fires by elevated or preplaced sensors.
Protect the Main Body

6-54. This is ultimately the main objective of security operations, and it should be the task of greatest
concern to the security force commander. Security forces conduct stubborn retrogrades in order to buy the
main force commander decision space and ensure that the main force does not face a sudden or unexpected
attack from an unobserved opponent. Security operations should be integrated with the larger mission of
the protected force, enabling the commander to rapidly transition from defensive to offensive operations
when the initiative is seized.
THE SECURITY OPERATION PROCESS

6-55. PLAA security missions broadly follow four steps: assignment, position selection and occupation,
security conduction, and retreat. These steps are described in paragraphs 6-36 through 6-59.
Assign the Mission

6-56. This step is essentially identical to most PLAA operational planning. It involves assessing friendly
and enemy forces, the higher echelon mission, coordination measures, and available time. Security
missions place a high premium on assessing the enemy’s courses of action—specifically the possible
directions of attack.
Choose and Occupy Positions

6-57. Security forces often have some latitude in choosing their positions, and orders may not include
specific battle positions for subordinate units. As such, lower echelon commanders may be charged with
choosing their own positions based on their best judgment. Positions should be selected based on the
expected actions of the enemy, the strength of the position and its ability to blunt or disrupt enemy activity,
and how favorable the terrain is to retrograde movement. Positions should be occupied secretly if at all
possible, and subordinate units should have a clear concept of when to engage and when to retreat.
Conduct Security Operations

6-58. There are three primary substeps to any security mission: defend against firepower assaults, defend
against direct attacks, and guard against flanking maneuvers. Defending against firepower assaults involves
making use of cover and concealment to blunt the enemy’s firepower attack, defense against direct attack
involves the use of direct and indirect fire to disrupt or destroy enemy offensive actions against the security
position, and guarding against flanking maneuvers entails using maneuverable forces to counterattack
enemy attempts to target vulnerable flanks of the security position.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 6-13

Chapter 6
Retreat
6-59. After meeting their prescribed requirements for delaying the enemy, inflicting casualties, or
disrupting enemy attacks, or when their position becomes untenable, security forces should retreat from
their security positions. Retreat should be orderly and should include both rear guard actions and
concealment actions to protect the main body. If possible, the retreating unit should sabotage any terrain
features that may be of use to the enemy. After retreat, the security unit should consolidate and rejoin the
combat action alongside the main body. If retreat is not possible, the security unit should conceal itself and
then conduct sabotage operations in the enemy’s rear areas.
SECURITY OPERATION TASKS

6-60. The PLAA recognizes four forms of security tasks: combat security, security while marching,
security while bivouacking, and garrison security. These tasks are described in paragraphs 6-61 through
6-94.
Combat Security
6-61. Combat security missions are those activities that actively defend larger units, assets, or key terrain
from enemy activity. Missions inherent to combat security include counterreconnaissance and localized
defense. Both offensive and defensive missions include a combat security element. There are two primary
types of combat security missions: screen and cover.
Screen
6-62. The screen is deployed to provide early warning to the main body, to inform the intelligence cycle
through action, and to prevent or preclude enemy reconnaissance and intelligence operations. Screening
forces may also disrupt and delay the enemy, but they are not intended to become decisively engaged.
Counterreconnaissance is the most important mission of a screening unit. The primary targets are enemy
reconnaissance, collection, and surveillance assets. Following the reconnaissance and
counterreconnaissance operation, screening units typically conduct retrograde operations intended to give
the main body commander decision space and inform the commander about enemy intentions. Screens are
conducted during both offensive and defensive actions, and they may consist of either dedicated
reconnaissance/scout units or nonspecialized units. Screens may operate independently at long ranges from
their parent unit, or they may operate in close proximity. Screening units should be capable of conducting
independent operations.
6-63. Screens may consist of observation posts; mounted, dismounted, or aerial patrols; or both. The
distance from the screen to the main body varies based on unit size, terrain, and the commander’s intent. A
screen further away from the main body gives greater decision time and a longer period in which to assess
the nature of the threat, but it is more difficult to communicate with and sustain. At the CA-BDE, the
prescribed distance for a screen is between 5 km and 15 km, though this can vary significantly based on the
aforementioned factors. Screening forces typically enjoy a high priority of indirect fire assets, and
reconnaissance and surveillance sensors may have direct linkages to shooters to conduct rapid targeting.
Indirect fire is considered a critical enabler of retrograde operations, disrupting enemy actions and
preventing the screening force from being decisively engaged.
6-64. A screen is typically assigned to the flanks or rear of a main body. Screens can also be placed
forward, but this is not employed when the main body is maneuvering; instead, security is provided by
forward reconnaissance units as they conduct reconnaissance operations. Screen missions may be employed
to close gaps between units, to influence or deceive enemy commanders, or to support wide area security
operations. There are two primary types of screen mission: static and mobile. Figure 6-4 depicts a screen
operation.
6-65. Static screen missions are most commonly employed during defensive operations. A screening unit is
given a geographic area in which to operate, and it is oriented in a specific direction—usually facing away
from the main body and toward a potential enemy approach. The screen is given a forward and rear
boundary, engagement and disengagement criteria, supporting indirect fire, and reconnaissance objectives
in support of intelligence requirements. The screening unit then assesses terrain, forces available, and
6-14 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

commander’s intent in order to develop a plan to screen the assigned area. The unit integrates multiple
sensors, including organic sensors, assets from the force main body, and assets from higher echelon
headquarters, to collect and monitor conditions throughout its assigned geographic area. Maneuver forces
may also be task-organized with attack or reconnaissance aviation, UA or ground-based sensors, and
SIGINT to create an in-depth sensor network. The sensor network facilitates cueing, mixing, and
redundancy, providing enhanced sensor coverage throughout the security area. Aerial reconnaissance acts
as long-range early warning. Direct and indirect fires and attack aviation are deployed to develop
situational understanding through action, to disrupt enemy operations, and to attrit enemy forces. Engineers
provide mobility, countermobility, and protection enhancements to the screening unit; obstacles that disrupt
or delay an enemy in conjunction with indirect fire are a common approach. The screening unit is
responsible for sustainment and support throughout its assigned security zone.
Figure 6-4. Screen (example)
6-66. Mobile screen missions are broadly similar to static screens, but they are conducted in support of a
main body as it maneuvers. Mobile screens are established using the same control measures as static
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 6-15

Chapter 6
screens, with the main body commander establishing rough geographic boundaries that support anticipated
main-body maneuvers. Mobile screen operations are not typically conducted in front of a maneuvering
main body, only to the flanks and rear. The screening force may remain in continuous motion alongside its
supported main body, or it may conduct bounding movements with a sister unit.
6-67. Mobile screens are of critical importance in PLAA offensive doctrine. Secrecy in maneuvering is a
top priority, a goal that can only be achieved if enemy reconnaissance efforts are effectively neutralized.
Mobile screen operations are a key enabler of this goal. Mobile screens may be integrated with screening
units from a higher echelon, particularly if a group army is conducting maneuvers over a wide area. Mobile
screens may be used to deceive enemy commanders, serving as decoys or distractions to draw
reconnaissance efforts and combat power away from the main body.
Cover
6-68. A cover is a force that conducts independent reconnaissance and security operations in support of a
large main body or geographic area. A cover force is self-sufficient and contains significant combat power.
It must be capable of defeating enemy reconnaissance and security elements without augmentation or
reinforcement from a higher echelon. Covering forces may be employed during offensive or defensive
operations. A covering force is deployed to prevent reconnaissance and targeting of a main body through
aggressive counterreconnaissance and security actions. It does not need to be tied to a specific main body;
it may provide cover for an entire operation or be an operation in itself. The light CA-BDE is the most
well-suited formation to conduct a cover operation—though other units, such as a heavy CA-BDE, a
reconnaissance battalion, or an SOF brigade, can also effectively perform the cover mission. A cover force
is likely organized as an operational system centered around a CA-BDE, with subordinate groups built
around defense, fire support, antitank, and antiair missions.
6-69. The primary difference between a cover force and other reconnaissance and security forces is that a
cover force is self-sufficient, able to conduct the full range of combat operations independent of a parent
unit or main body. This gives a cover force far greater flexibility and combat power than other
reconnaissance and security forces. The cover force is capable of extended defensive or delaying actions,
and it can conduct its own transition and counterattack as required. The security zone established by a
cover force may be dozens of km from its supported force and may cover a very wide geographic area. The
cover force does not retreat or withdraw unless it is tactically necessary, and it does not allow enemy units
to bypass its position without resistance.
6-70. A cover force represents a greater allocation of resources than a screen. It requires extended logistics
and reconnaissance support over wide areas. Cover forces must usually be mobile, and they contain a high
proportion of antitank and counterreconnaissance weapons and systems designed to increase combat power
against enemy scouting and reconnaissance units. There are two forms of cover: offensive cover and
defensive cover. Figure 6-5 depicts a cover mission.
6-71. In support of offensive operations, a cover force may deploy on the flanks of an advance or to any
potentially vulnerable area of terrain. The objective of the cover force is to ensure that the main effort of
the attack does not suffer from enemy surveillance, direct attack, or indirect fire from the force’s assigned
security area. This is accomplished through the deployment of the force to impede enemy movement,
defeat or degrade enemy reconnaissance capabilities, and defeat enemy units that enter the security area. A
cover force may also deploy to the front of an advance, operating at an extended distance from the main
body. When operating in this capacity, the cover force aggressively seeks weaknesses in the enemy position
and exploits them as they appear, enabling follow-on operations into enemy rear areas.
6-72. Offensive cover units may have to rapidly displace to new security areas in order to properly cover a
maneuvering main body. If operating at a significant distance from the supported force, integrating
maneuver and reconnaissance operations with the main body is a challenge. Cover forces should generally
be considered independent and be allowed to conduct operations within prescribed geographic limits
without excessive input from higher echelons.
6-73. In support of defensive operations, a cover force protects a specific flank or geographic area from
enemy attack and surveillance. The cover force’s security zone extends across the full width of the
vulnerable area, and the cover force is responsible for reconnaissance, counterreconnaissance, and security
6-16 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

throughout. The cover force compels the enemy to reveal its disposition and intent, enabling an effective
counterattack and transition to offensive operations. It first looks to transition to offensive operations by
itself. If this is deemed impossible, then a counterattack force from the main body may be committed.
Figure 6-5. Cover (example)
Security While Marching

6-74. Security while marching encompasses those missions that protect a main body while it is on the
move. These missions are collectively referred to as guard missions. Guard is a security mission to protect
the main body by engaging and standing off the enemy, giving the main body decision space and reaction
time. Guard missions differ from screens in that guard units are expected to actively protect the main force
from a significant enemy attack, rather than simply delay or disrupt it. The primary mission of a guard
force is to stand off enemy forces in order to prevent observation, direct fire, and indirect fire observation
on the main body. The guard force also conducts reconnaissance and counterreconnaissance operations
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 6-17

Chapter 6
within its combat area, seeking to destroy or neutralize enemy reconnaissance assets while informing
friendly reconnaissance objectives. The guard force must be prepared to conduct a decisive engagement,
either to defend the main body from a superior force, or to counterattack and defeat a weaker opponent.
There are three types of guard missions: advance, flank, and rear. In a noncontiguous situation, advance,
rear, or flank guard forces may be deployed on cardinal directions or in a general orientation to an enemy.
6-75. Guard forces typically operate in closer proximity to the main body than screen forces. Guard forces
also typically operate over narrower frontages, allowing for greater concentration of firepower and better
command and communication. One of the key tasks of the guard mission is transition, the shift from
defensive operations to offensive operations. Depending on the strength of the opponent, the guard force
may transition to the offense and defeat the enemy on its own, or it may maintain contact with the enemy,
develop situational understanding, and enable reinforcements from the main body to transition rapidly into
an offensive posture. In either case, the key task of the guard is to seize and maintain tactical initiative,
giving the main body commander the ability to dictate actions and timeline. The guard force may conduct a
tactical withdrawal or lead, fix, or disrupt enemy formations to facilitate seizing the initiative.
6-76. Fire support to a guard force is similar to that of a screen. A guard force, however, typically has more
fire support for a given unit size, and it will also integrate observation and aerial surveillance to create a
reconnaissance-fire system that can rapidly engage targets with indirect fire. Engineers support the guard
force with mobility, countermobility, and protection capabilities. Other combat support and combat service
support units are task-organized to support guard operations throughout the security zone.
6-77. One of the primary emerging focuses of PLAA security operations is the development of air-ground
integration. Modernized aviation brigades are to provide enhanced rotary-wing support to guard formations
in security zones. Air support greatly expands the geographic area that the guard force can service, greatly
increases available firepower, and reduces reaction time. Similarly, PLAA units conducting guard
operations routinely employ air defense systems to neutralize or defeat enemy aviation assets operating in
the security zone. Effectively integrating the twinned capabilities of aviation and air defense in the security
zone is an area of tactical emphasis for the CA-BDE. Figure 6-6 on page 6-19 depicts a guard mission.
Advance Guard
6-78. An advance guard is a guard force that deploys ahead of a main body along the main axis of advance,
establishing the advance security zone. The advance guard has three primary missions: streamline
movement of the main body; conduct reconnaissance and counterreconnaissance in anticipation of the main
body’s primary mission; and engage the enemy if it appears along the main axis of advance. If the enemy is
engaged by the advance guard, the latter should maintain contact with the former, develop the situation
through action, and transition to offensive operations based on enemy strength and engagement and
disengagement criteria. The advance guard likely represents the largest proportion of combat power for the
CA-BDE’s reconnaissance intelligence system, and it works closely with the frontline attack group or
frontier defense group during periods of contact, engagement, and transition.
6-79. When functioning as part of an offensive group, the advance guard should maintain close contact
with reconnaissance forces operating to the front and flanks of the main body. These units inform the
advance guard about enemy dispositions and intent, enabling the advance guard commander to make rapid
and effective decisions about positioning and the allocation of fires and reconnaissance assets. The advance
guard commander remains in close contact with the main body commander in order to facilitate rapid
decision making and transition to the offense. Typical advance guard force tasks while on the offense
include deceiving the enemy about the main body’s intent and disposition; forcing the enemy to commit
reserves early; and targeting critical assets, such as command and communication nodes, fires systems, and
lines of communications.
6-80. When functioning as part of a defensive group, the advance guard should deploy along the enemy’s
most likely avenue of approach. The primary mission of the advance guard in this situation is to create a
disruption zone, with the objectives of slowing the opponent’s progress, developing intelligence through
reconnaissance by force, deceiving the enemy as to the main body’s disposition and intent, and forcing the
enemy to commit to one course of action. Once the guard force is in contact, it defends, delays, and disrupts
in support of the main body force. Tactical offensive actions, such as ambushes, raids, or limited
6-18 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

counterattacks, may be employed while part of a defensive group in order to facilitate the transition to
offensive operations.
Figure 6-6. Guard (example)
Flank Guard
6-81. The flank guard protects the flank of the main body, establishing the flank security zone. Flanks are
broadly defined as the areas parallel to the axis of the main body’s direction of travel or, while stationary,
areas not along the expected enemy main avenue of approach. A flank guard will generally have more
geographic territory to cover than an advance guard, and it will do so with fewer forces. Thus, flank guards
must have enhanced wide area reconnaissance capabilities and mobility, but they will likely have less
overall combat power as compared to advance guards. The flank guard should stand off at sufficient
distance to give the main body commander adequate decision space in the event of a flank threat, but it
must maintain constant contact with the main body at all times.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 6-19

Chapter 6
6-82. Flank guards that are part of offensive groups move along with the main body, maintaining
continuous surveillance of their assigned geographic areas while simultaneously conducting
counterreconnaissance and security operations. If contact is made, the flank guard maintains contact while
defending the main body from enemy offensive operations; this defense buys decision time for the main
body commander to react. Maneuvering the flank guard as part of offensive operations is challenging.
Bounding or continuous march are the two primary methods of maneuvering the flank guard. Bounding
involves one unit passing another in sequence to maintain contiguous security across the flank, while
continuous march involves moving constantly along with the main body. Movement of the flank guard
should be carefully integrated with both the main body and outlying reconnaissance elements to maintain a
constant flow of intelligence information and to prevent fratricide.
6-83. As part of a defensive group, flank guards establish a flank security zone and conduct reconnaissance
throughout their assigned geographic areas. A flank guard may employ battle positions, observation posts,
and ambushes enabled by a comprehensive reconnaissance and surveillance effort. The flank guard ensures
that its assigned flank is protected against enemy intrusion, and it is responsible for conducting
counterreconnaissance in its assigned area. Deployments maximize weapon ranges. Extended-range
engagements are designed to delay the enemy and prolong the decision cycle for the main body
commander. If engaged, the flank guard conducts retrograde operations, coupled with limited spoiling
attacks, in order to disrupt the enemy attack and enable transition to offensive operations.
Rear Guard
6-84. The rear guard protects the rear of the main force. This includes traditional guard tasks, such as
reconnaissance, counterreconnaissance, and screening, and it may also include supporting rear area
operations, such as sustainment and engineer efforts. The traditional rear guard is most likely to be used
during offensive operations. However, in the event that the main body must withdraw or retire, the rear
guard may be called upon to conduct a delaying or screening action to enable the maneuver. The rear guard
has responsibility for maintaining the main body’s lines of communications to higher echelon headquarters
and supporting security units in rear areas.
Security While Bivouacking

6-85. Security while bivouacking, also called security at the halt, includes those security activities that
protect a main body when it has stopped moving, but it is not located in a garrison or rear area. These
missions are designed to protect the main body from enemy reconnaissance and attack. It is up to
commanders to balance the security needs of the unit with available forces by carefully assessing the nature
of the threat, the vulnerability of the main body, and the number of troops available to conduct security
missions. There are two types of security missions conducted while bivouacking: patrol and sentry. Figure
6-7 on page 6-21 shows security while bivouacking.
Patrol
6-86. Patrol missions, discussed in paragraph 6-28, are movements designed to facilitate surveillance of a
given geographic area through the use of small, mobile scouting teams. For a main body at the halt, patrols
should conduct wide-ranging assessments of the surrounding terrain, then maintain a reconnaissance
presence ahead of the security zone. These patrols should locate and fix potential enemy activity targeting
the main body, allowing the commander decision space to commit security or defensive group forces. In
general, patrols are not to take direct action against enemy forces and should instead rely on cover,
concealment, and deception to break contact. However, if a patrol encounters an enemy patrol of similar
size and strength, the patrol should either destroy or force the withdrawal of the enemy unit in support of
the wider counterreconnaissance mission.
Sentry
6-87. Sentry missions are security missions that employ small, static units carefully positioned in and
around the security zone in order to provide advanced warning of enemy activity; reconnaissance and
counterreconnaissance support; and, if necessary, early engagement of enemy forces. Sentry missions are
similar to patrols, except that they remain in place or move comparatively little. Sentry missions are
6-20 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

conducted by observer teams, which should be carefully concealed while occupying positions of tactical
advantage. Observer teams should have direct communications links to their supported headquarters.
Figure 6-7. Security while bivouacking (example)
Garrison Security
6-88. Garrison security operations are those security operations that take place behind frontline units.
These missions differ from security while bivouacking missions in that they take place in more permanent
areas: in and around supply depots, assembly areas, air and sea transport facilities, and in civilian areas.
This security mission should not contact enemy frontline units, and so it focuses heavily on defeating
small-scale enemy penetrations, civilian disruption in rear areas, and air intrusions. The PLAA recognizes
the importance of wide area security as part of its transition to an informationized force, and it is
developing capabilities that enhance this mission. In many cases, the PAP will play an important role in
garrison security operations, freeing up PLAA resources for more-demanding missions.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 6-21

Chapter 6
Area Security
6-89. Area security is conducted to protect friendly forces and critical assets across a specified geographic
area. Area security can be assigned to a unit of any size or composition, but it is best performed by mobile
units that can effectively operate while dispersed. Though security is critical to operations of all types,
generally speaking, area security missions are tied closely to stability operations, which are discussed in
chapter 9.
6-90. Area security differs from other security missions in that it is oriented around security objectives,
rather than around a unit, route, or geographic region. Security objectives are those high-value assets in the
security zone that the commander deems most critical. Area security operations orient around these
objectives. When conducting area security, a unit performs many of the tasks associated with screen, guard,
and cover missions. These include—but are not limited to—area reconnaissance, fires integration,
air-ground integration, route reconnaissance, observation posts, and security checkpoints. Observation
posts and security checkpoints are established to control traffic and canalize potential threats. A mobile
reaction force, likely a depth attack group or depth defense group, remains on call to rapidly deploy and
defeat enemy forces. The same basic security principles for all PLAA forces are applied to checkpoints in
an area security operation. Figure 6-8 depicts area security.
6-22 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Figure 6-8. Area security (example)
6-91. Area security nearly always involves a perimeter, a boundary around the security zone that represents
the limit of the area security operation. The unit assigned to the area security mission is responsible for
creating and maintaining the perimeter. The perimeter may focus either on keeping enemy forces out of the
security area or on keeping persons of interest within, for example, a cordon around a separate operation.
Unlike other security operations, area security may require a strong visible presence. Instead of seeking to
conceal friendly forces and deceive an enemy, a unit conducting area security may choose instead to
prominently display its combat power to dissuade or deter enemy actions within the perimeter.
6-92. Area security is likely to be a peacetime or transition task, and it is actively conducted within
Chinese borders. This requires integration with PAP and local police forces, as both of these organizations
may have roles in maintaining security in a given geographic area. PLAA involvement in domestic security
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 6-23

Chapter 6
matters is typically limited, but the potential for an expanded role following ongoing reforms seems
probable.
Route Security
6-93. Route security is a security mission performed along a specific route. The main objective of route
security is to ensure that units using the route can move rapidly and safely from point to point along its
length. Route security operations are terrain oriented and defensive in nature. They typically involve
clearing of enemy presence, maintaining a constant patrol presence, ensuring that the route remains
trafficable, and conducting limited offensive operations to stand off enemy actions. Figure 6-9 depicts route
security.
Figure 6-9. Route security (example)
6-94. Route security also typically involves escort, particularly of vulnerable targets such as convoys or
command vehicles. Units assigned a route security mission may conduct escort missions as part of route
security, or they may enable other units to conduct them. Escort missions are performed in much the same
way as any other tactical movement. The route is reconnoitered, cleared of potential obstacles, then screen
or guard forces stand-off enemy units at sufficient distance that the latter cannot target the assets moving
along the route.
6-24 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Chapter 7
Offensive Actions
Chinese forces consider tactical offensive actions to be the decisive form of land
operations. The active defense strategy relies on effective and credible tactical
offensive actions as the basic contribution of ground forces. Tactical offensive actions
destroy an opponent’s will to fight through a combination of firepower, maneuver,
deception, and information warfare. This chapter outlines the People’s Liberation
Army Army’s (PLAA’s) methodology for planning, preparing, and executing tactical
offensive actions.
OVERVIEW OF PLAA OFFENSIVE OPERATIONS

7-1. Throughout its history, the People’s Liberation Army (PLA) has emphasized offensive operations.
The idea that war can only be won by attacking is fundamental to People’s War theory, and it has been
tested time and again throughout the Chinese Civil War and the Korean War. PLA leaders historically
emphasized the spirit of the attack—what Westerners would call élan or esprit de corps—as the only way
their military forces could overcome the technological, firepower, and training superiority of their
opponents. Developing this spirit in their formations was a fundamental skill of PLA leaders. Indeed, the
role of political officers and commissars was in large part to help develop a unity of purpose underpinning
the spirit of the offensive.
7-2. The PLAA today takes a similar view toward offensive operations, though with a greater focus on
firepower, joint integration, and maneuver instead of the more traditional approach of infiltration followed
by close combat. In keeping with Mao’s principles, PLAA operations focus on destroying enemy
formations rather than taking ground. As such, objectives are often described as enemy formations. PLAA
forces seek to use a mix of maneuver, deception, and firepower to preclude enemy actions, isolate enemy
units, and then fight the isolated enemy to annihilation. PLAA units integrate advanced deception and
information warfare capabilities to fix enemy forces and then conduct decisive attacks on enemy weak
points. They employ firepower not only as an enabler of maneuver, but also as an offensive tactic in itself:
employing massed fires to destroy, neutralize, or fix opponents.
7-3. PLAA offensive operations are performed to accomplish one or more of the following objectives:
z Destroy, defeat, or neutralize enemy formations, personnel, or equipment.
z Enable friendly freedom of maneuver.
z Restrict enemy freedom of maneuver.
z Gain information.
z Gain control of key terrain.
z Disrupt enemy operations.
PLAA leaders traditionally preferred to operate using a grand battle plan—an extensively planned and
prepared operation that demanded adherence to a rigid hierarchy and a complex, often inflexible plan. This
approach was well-suited for armies consisting largely of undertrained and underequipped conscripts, and
leaders who emphasized party loyalty and political enthusiasm over tactical competence. PLA reforms are
attempting to significantly change this approach, employing a decentralized approach to leadership, greater
tactical flexibility in planning, and more empowerment and better resourcing of leaders at lower echelons.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 7-1

Chapter 7
THE INFORMATIONIZED BATTLEFIELD AND OFFENSIVE

OPERATIONS
7-4. The PLAA recognizes six important trends that significantly impact offensive operations on the
informationized battlefield: transparency, precision munitions, electronic warfare (EW), operational tempo,
multidimensional battle, and cost. Leaders and planners must account for these trends when conducting all
types of offensive operation.
THE TRANSPARENCY OF THE INFORMATIONIZED

BATTLEFIELD
7-5. Advanced multispectrum surveillance, networked intelligence, and the connected world have
combined in such a way that true deception is much harder to achieve than it was in the past. Units will find
it far more difficult to assemble, move, and prepare for offensive operations without the enemy uncovering
their intent. Commanders are instructed to integrate deception plans across the entirety of the information
spectrum, and they must always assume that they are being surveilled by a clever enemy.
THE PROLIFERATION OF PRECISION MUNITIONS

7-6. Precision munitions enable rapid, deep, and precise targeting of critical assets all across the
informationized battlefield. Firepower no longer requires mass; effective synchronization of precision
munitions can achieve the same effect that formerly required dozens of attack sorties or hundreds of guns.
Precision platforms usually overlap one another to achieve a combined arms effect, and they are enabled by
advanced multispectrum surveillance in support of targeting. Commanders must always assume the enemy
can strike them. Commanders must work to reduce vulnerability by protecting forces both physically and
electronically; by neutralizing or defeating attacks by precision munitions; by moving rapidly; and by
deceiving the enemy to throw off its targeting process.
THE IMPORTANCE OF ELECTRONIC WARFARE

7-7. The PLAA not only puts a high priority on its own EW capabilities; it also anticipates enemy
capabilities will contest its network and communications capabilities. EW has the potential to offset
precision munitions, sensors, and joint communications networks, creating an environment where
aggression and short-range firepower can prove decisive. As this is equally true for both Chinese forces and
their opponents, electromagnetic protection is a high-priority mission for the PLAA. Chinese leaders and
units are instructed to train in communications blackout conditions, relying on ingenuity and tactical
competency to overcome the effects of communications isolation, and wherever possible, use
communications means that are not susceptible to enemy EW efforts.
THE RAPID TEMPO OF OPERATIONS

7-8. The informationized battlefield moves quickly, and changes in the environment can be unpredictable
and sudden. Motorized and mechanized ground units, along with aerial units, can traverse significant
distances in short periods of time. Firepower systems can range distant targets, and can they react quickly
to targeting information. All of these developments likely mean that windows of opportunity for
commanders to seize the initiative are getting smaller and shorter. Commanders must be mentally agile to
take advantage of these windows in the absence of direction from higher echelons, particularly if the
situation deviates from planned one. Comprehensive planning and training helps to ensure that units can
take advantage of the smallest window of opportunity when it is presented.
THE MULTIDIMENSIONAL BATTLEFIELD

7-9. The informationized battlefield involves all domains and all dimensions. Commanders must think
three dimensionally, and they must effectively integrate capabilities throughout all domains. The PLAA
fears enemy airpower, multispectrum surveillance, and precision firepower, and it seeks to offset these
capabilities through integrating its different operational systems. At the same time, commanders and
7-2 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Offensive Actions
planners must ensure that PLA forces can strike through all domains in a synchronized, intelligent manner,
to effectively isolate enemy units and defeat advanced enemy systems.
THE FINANCIAL COST OF MODERN WAR

7-10. The weapons that populate the informationized battlefield are high technology and often very
expensive. Outfitting an entire force is an exercise in national economics as much as military strategy.
Precision munitions are lethal and effective, but expensive, and stockpiles of them are minimal. The
logistics train, which begins with manufacture and ends on the battlefield, must be up to the task of
supplying the Chinese force with sufficient modern systems and munitions. Once initial stockpiles are
depleted, whichever nation or military that can best sustain its forces will enjoy a significant advantage in
combat.
PRINCIPLES OF THE OFFENSE

7-11. PLAA offensive operations are informed by seven basic principles: concentration, perspective, depth,
coordination, adaptation, bravery, and focus. PLAA commanders make maximum use of these principles to
multiply the effectiveness of their force, keep the enemy off balance, seize and retain the initiative, and
preempt enemy reactions.
CONCENTRATION
7-12. All PLAA offensive operations seek one essential characteristic: concentration of overwhelming
combat power against the enemy at key times and locations. This is a basic and timeless principle,
descended from Sun Tzu and Mao, and modified to fit the informationized battlefield. Concentration
historically involved maneuver forces and possibly artillery conducting a coordinated action with vast local
numerical superiority. Today, however, concentration requires the integration of numerous capabilities
across all domains, carefully synchronized and decisively employed. The PLAA now characterizes
concentration as an exercise in quality rather than quantity. Instead of focusing on gaining numerical
superiority, the command should focus on getting the correct capabilities to achieve the desired effects at
the right time and place. Similarly, concentrated forces are seen as potentially vulnerable to enemy
counteractions, and they should be carefully guarded by security efforts and counterreconnaissance until
their mission is complete. Once complete, forces should either rapidly disperse or swiftly move on to the
next target.
PERSPECTIVE
7-13. The principle of perspective demands two different but interrelated characteristics from PLAA
leaders. First, they must be aware of their higher-echelon mission and shape their own decisions based on
the objective of their higher echelon. Second, they should seek to know their own strengths, along with
enemy weaknesses, to maximize the effectiveness of offensive operations. Offensive objectives should be
carefully chosen and offensive capabilities carefully synchronized to create the best possible environment
for paralyzing, dismembering, and collapsing the enemy’s systems. Once these systems have been defeated,
enemy units can be defeated in detail.
DEPTH
7-14. PLAA doctrine at all echelons places great emphasis on attacks in depth. Depth can refer to the
physical—for instance, operating deep behind enemy defenses; the virtual—utilizing offensive cyber or
EW capabilities; or the psychological—getting into the enemy’s decision cycle, preempting its actions, or
breaking its morale. The primary objective of attacks in depth is to isolate enemy formations physically,
psychologically, or temporally. Conceptually, the principle of depth is closely related to the ancient axiom
of divide and conquer. Enemy units are isolated through envelopment or penetration, weakened, and then
annihilated in detail. Attacks in depth keep the enemy off balance, forcing it to fight in numerous locations
and preventing it from effectively concentrating forces for an effective counterattack. Depth attacks should
be conducted jointly, using all services to create a combined arms effect across the breadth and depth of the
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 7-3

Chapter 7
enemy formation. The end state is a series of isolated and besieged enemy units and strongholds that can
then be annihilated or reduced in detail.
COORDINATION
7-15. The PLAA considers the informationized battlefield to be incredibly complex, fast moving, and
intense. Proactive cooperation between different organizations is a key enabler of offensive actions on the
modern battlefield. The PLAA identifies three different components of effective coordination: First, plans
should include both a primary plan and numerous backup plans, covering a variety of possible
contingencies, and outlining cooperation efforts between different units in each contingency. Second, any
changes that take place as situations evolve should be carefully coordinated with adjacent and other
concerned units. Third, efforts should be coordinated across the force as a whole, with every subordinate
unit conducting operations that support the main effort and commander’s intent.
ADAPTATION
7-16. Adaptability is not a traditional strength of the PLA, but ongoing reforms are trying to change this
dynamic in order to better fit the informationized battlefield. Interestingly, while there is an emphasis on
growing independence in commanders and a decentralized command approach, the principle of adaptation
calls for extensive contingency planning and a scientific approach to unexpected occurrences. Adaptation
also emphasizes mobility as a key capability; reaction speed of troops is a major enabler of an adaptive
force. Adaptability calls for flexible use of tactics and techniques, and it demands that commanders quickly
respond to changing situations on the battlefield with new and creative approaches to the employment of
tactics.
BRAVERY
7-17. The PLAA places a high premium on bravery and aggression in ground actions of all types. Only
through audacious and aggressive action will the initiative be gained, and only by gaining and maintaining
the initiative can the enemy be annihilated. Though lethality of weapons systems and the complexity of the
modern battlefield have changed, the fundamental principle of rapidly closing with the enemy, then
aggressively attacking weak points of its formation, remains the basic approach to PLAA offensive tactical
actions. The PLAA believes that bravery from its leaders and soldiers leads to decisive engagements, which
in turn shorten the length of battles. Bravery in the attack—particularly in the initial assault—helps to take
full advantage of the very small windows of opportunity available on the informationized battlefield. One
of the most important roles of the political officer is building and maintaining a culture of bravery down to
the lowest echelons of the PLAA.
FOCUS
7-18. The principle of focus has two subordinate concepts. First, it instructs leaders to carefully prioritize
their efforts, concentrating their operations against only the most important targets. The PLAA believes that
one who prioritizes everything, prioritizes nothing. Second, it demands that commanders properly resource
their subordinate units in accordance with the tasks asked of them. Commanders must make their priorities
clear to both subordinates and superiors in order to ensure effective prioritization. Subordinates, if given
adequate focus by their leaders, are better able to act properly in the absence of direct orders or in other
ambiguous situations.
PLANNING THE OFFENSE

7-19. The PLA historically stressed the importance of careful planning and preparation before an offensive
operation. This focus continues in the post-reform PLAA, where offensive actions are developed,
rehearsed, revised, and carefully executed whenever possible. Meticulous planning allows for integrating
capabilities, developing tight security measures, and building an effective deception plan. While devoting
more time for planning may reduce speed in the short term, it is the PLAA’s belief that a well-constructed
and well- rehearsed plan ultimately saves time and increases operational speed.
7-4 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Offensive Actions
7-20. PLAA offensive operations are objective-based: the higher echelon commander designates an
objective and specifies a force charged with accomplishing it. People’s War principles dictate that
objectives should typically be enemy formations, though key terrain or other valuable assets may also be
considered. The attacking force identifies key features in the defense and terrain including disposition of
enemy forces, weak points and points of strength, locations of reserves and fire support, and key terrain
features. The offensive action is then designed to rapidly confuse and isolate the enemy, swiftly reducing
its morale and enabling freedom of action for PLAA commanders. Through a combination of careful
planning, effective deception, rapid movement, and application of decisive combat power at key times and
locations, the enemy comes to believe its position to be untenable and either withdraws or faces
annihilation. Once the enemy force is in retreat, reserve forces maintain contact and pursue the enemy
while additional forces secure the area and prepare for follow-on operations.
BUILD THE COMMAND SYSTEM

7-21. An offensive operation makes use of at least two, and ideally four, command posts. The base
command post is the commander’s primary location, and it should be located to best facilitate coordination
between the frontline, depth, and thrust maneuver groups. The advance command post, if established, is led
by the deputy commander, and it is typically located near the main defensive line. The rear command post’s
primary role is to organize logistics and reinforcements and to create the backup defensive line supporting
the offensive action. If possible, a reserve command post is established along a possible route of egress or
in a well-defended rear location, ready to take over for the base or advance command post should either of
them come under threat. At the combined arms battalion (CA-BN) echelon, command post operations may
be informal. The command and limited staff at the battalion may fully decentralize and not physically
co-locate. Additional information on command post operations can be found in chapter 4.
7-22. The offensive zone is further subdivided into two or more secondary zones, each with a specific set
of objectives and different set of tactics. While the PLAA used to be highly prescriptive about the physical
sizes of these zones, it has gradually moved to a more flexible approach. The various zones should account
for terrain, friendly and enemy capabilities, and higher echelon missions, and they should enable careful
integration of various units and capabilities. Figure 7-1 on page 7-7 depicts a combined arms brigade’s
(CA-BDE’s) genericized offensive zone.
Deep Area
7-23. The deep area is the territory past which a unit’s organic sensors and weapons can operate. For a
CA-BDE, this typically means the area past which its rocket artillery and targeting support can operate. The
fight in the deep area usually consists of independent special operations forces (SOF) or scout units
supported by manned or unmanned aircraft (UA), possibly augmented by supporting fires from long-range
shooters assigned to support the offensive action. Reconnaissance, counterreconnaissance, fire, counterfire,
screening, and blocking all take place in deep areas. The purpose of deep-area operations is to provide early
reconnaissance, target long-range preparatory fires, and carefully assess enemy strength and disposition in
preparation for an offensive action.
Frontline Zone
7-24. The frontline zone contains the territory in which the main offensive action is to occur. Early
objectives, along with the enemy’s main defensive line, are typically located in the frontline zone. The
frontline attack group is the primary occupant of this zone, and the depth group may also occupy the area,
depending on terrain and enemy disposition. The advance command post, if present, is usually forward in
the zone, and the base command post is typically located either rearward in this zone or in the zone
immediately behind it. The entire frontline zone should be within the range of the offensive group’s organic
fire support. The frontline zone typically contains a security zone on its forward edge, where security,
reconnaissance, and counterreconnaissance activities take place. The primary battle takes place in the
frontline zone, with the intent of breaching the enemy’s main defensive line and enabling the depth and
thrust maneuver groups to move into enemy rear areas.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 7-5

Chapter 7
Reserve Zone
7-25. The reserve zone lies just to the rear of the frontline zone and typically houses the depth attack
group, thrust maneuvering group, reserve group, command groups, firepower groups, and forward logistics
bases. The reserve zone also usually contains a defensive line intended to resist enemy counterattacks into
rear areas, and serves as the anchor for the offensive action. The reserve command post, if present, is
typically located in this zone, as is the rear command post.
7-6 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Offensive Actions
Figure 7-1. Offensive zone (notional)
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 7-7

Chapter 7
Garrison Zone
7-26. Rear areas not actively occupied by the offensive group make up the garrison zone. Augmentations
and reinforcements may reside in this zone, or it may serve as an assembly area for another offensive group
preparing to conduct follow-on operations. Supporting capabilities such as logistics, EW, and long-range
artillery reside here. Garrison zones typically contain one or more security zones that surround key
positions such as bases, supply routes, or command posts. The People’s Armed Police (PAP) may take on
much of the security load in garrison zones in order to free up PLAA forces for more-intense duties.
PHASES OF THE OFFENSE

7-27. PLAA offensive operations are divided into phases in much the same way that U.S. Army operations
are organized. While an operation may have many phases depending on the breadth and complexity of the
mission, in most cases it will involve five primary phases: advance, unfold, initiate, annihilate, and
continuing operations.
Advance
7-28. The advance, also called the moving-in, is the initial phase of an offensive operation. This
traditionally referred to the movement of a main body from a staging or assembly area to the initial point of
attack. For a modern force, this understanding has expanded to include the full breadth of activities that
occur between the time the mission is received until initial contact is made. These activities include, but are
not limited to—
z Security throughout the combat area, including assembly areas, staging areas, axes of advance,
and flank areas.
z Reconnaissance operations focusing primarily on the objective: assessing the enemy force and
probing for possible weak points or vulnerabilities.
z Counterreconnaissance operations attempting to deny the enemy key information about PLAA
forces’ dispositions and objectives.
z Deception operations designed to mislead and confuse the enemy, conceal friendly movements,
fix enemy formations, and manipulate the enemy’s mindset.
z Artillery groups delivering preparatory fires, reconnaissance by fire, and counterfire.
z Air defense groups seeking to deter air attack against the main body and to deny aerial
reconnaissance to the enemy.
z Engineer groups conducting both mobility and countermobility operations along enemy and
friendly axes of advance.
z Protection operations seeking to maintain the force, especially during periods of vulnerability to
air or artillery attack.
z EW activities seeking to degrade or neutralize enemy sensors and communications, while
protecting friendly network systems and emitters.
7-29. The advance begins upon receipt of an order. Reconnaissance groups are rapidly deployed in order to
determine possible routes of advance, enemy strength and disposition, and key terrain features. The
commander develops an initial scheme of maneuver that outlines objectives, establishes a basic concept,
and enables subordinate units to establish contact and rapidly close with enemy defenses. Concealment of
movement and deception operations are of paramount importance during the advance phase. It is at this
time that the commander can most influence enemy actions, dispositions, and mindset. As the main body
moves to the point of contact, supporting capabilities conduct concurrent missions, including preparatory
fire support, counterfire, information warfare activities, and mobility and countermobility activities.
Commanders continuously assess enemy positions to decide upon a final course of action while attempting
to manipulate the enemy’s mindset and conceal their own intentions. As reconnaissance groups develop the
situation, the commander decides upon a final course of action.
7-30. Security during the advance is also of the utmost importance. Deception operations can only be
successful if enemy reconnaissance operations are neutralized, spoofed, or defeated by friendly
counterreconnaissance. Security elements ensure that main-body movement is unhindered by enemy attack,
7-8 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Offensive Actions
countermobility efforts, or deception activities. Air defense and protection operations ensure that the main
body is not attritted by enemy air attack and artillery during staging or movement.
7-31. The advance phase ends when the main body makes contact with the enemy and the commander
initiates actions on contact. Figure 7-2 depicts a PLAA CA-BDE advancing for an attack on an enemy
position.
Figure 7-2. Advance (example)
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 7-9

Chapter 7
Unfold
7-32. The unfold phase consists of actions designed to set conditions for annihilation that occur upon initial
contact by the main body with enemy defenses. Subordinate units conduct rapid movement in accordance
with the commander’s scheme of maneuver, seeking to position themselves appropriately for the decisive
phases of the operation. Following initial contact, units maintain contact with the enemy and continue to
develop situational understanding. Key intelligence requirements not yet answered by reconnaissance
groups are resolved by main-body actions. During initial contact, the commander attempts to conceal the
direction, strength, and objective of the main effort through deception, information warfare activities,
feints, and demonstrations. Other activities during the unfold phase include, but are not limited to—
z Security operations, particularly to the flanks and rear, to protect the main body from spoiling
attacks or counterattacks.
z Reconnaissance operations moving deeper into enemy areas.
z Counterreconnaissance operations that defeat enemy attempts to identify the main effort and
objectives while reinforcing deception efforts through feints and demonstrations.
z Deception operations attempting to fool the enemy commander about the time and place of the
main effort; the size, strength, and disposition of friendly forces; and the size and proximity of
reinforcements for both sides.
z Artillery groups shifting fire support focus to counterfire, obstacle reduction, and disruption
efforts in deep areas.
z Air defense groups deterring or defeating aerial attack and surveillance throughout the area, with
an emphasis on the main body and main effort.
z Engineer groups shifting focus to obstacle reduction and maintaining friendly mobility.
z EW focusing on jamming or spoofing enemy communications to impede rapid response to the
attack.
7-33. The primary objective of the unfold phase is to ensure that the objective is isolated and contending
with numerous dangers, preferably from multiple directions. The enemy commander should be confused
and enemy forces disrupted. The enemy, however, should not yet know either the direction or strength of
the main effort. The entire unfold phase should be orderly and well planned in order to ensure concealment
and correct positioning of friendly units. Movement should be rapid, but not so fast that confusion sets in or
concealment is broken. The best practice of the unfold phase is to encircle the enemy. Encirclement refers
to the complete isolation of the enemy force through a combination of friendly ground unit actions,
firepower, deception, psychological warfare, and EW. Encirclement does not necessarily imply that an
enemy is actually physically surrounded. A combination of lethal and nonlethal capabilities may be
sufficient to cause the enemy to believe itself encircled. For example, a well-timed artillery raid may cause
the enemy to believe that a route is cut off or unavailable, without requiring the commitment of additional
PLAA ground forces. Similarly, disinformation passed over communications channels may deceive the
enemy into believing it does not have access to a particular route or terrain, without requiring friendly
forces to physically occupy the area in question.
7-34. The unfold phase ends when the initiate phase begins with the commencement of the main effort.
Figure 7-3 depicts a PLAA CA-BDE conducting the unfold phase in preparation for an attack on an enemy
position.
7-10 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Offensive Actions
Figure 7-3. Unfold (example)
Initiate
7-35. The initiate phase commences when the main effort begins its assault against the objective. This
phase often begins with a massive assault by fire, wherein fire support groups target enemy command
nodes, critical systems, mobile reinforcements, and other high-value targets. Supporting efforts continue to
develop the situation. Units charged with fixing enemy units continue to prevent them from reinforcing the
main objective, while counterreinforcement groups preclude the commitment of enemy reserves. The main
effort is typically the primary assault upon the enemy’s center of gravity: that thing—be it a headquarters, a
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 7-11

Chapter 7
unit, or a piece of terrain—that is most essential to the enemy’s morale and mindset. Ideally, the enemy will
either withdraw, collapse, or be routed once the center of gravity is seized or destroyed. Other activities
during the initiate phase include, but are not limited to—
z Security operations continuing with the primary objective of protecting the main body from
spoiling attacks or counterattacks.
z Reconnaissance operations focusing on intelligence objectives that support the main effort.
z Counterreconnaissance operations continuing to spoil enemy efforts to discover the composition,
axis, and objectives of the main effort.
z Deception operations continuing to fool the enemy commander about the time and place of the
main effort; the size, strength, and disposition of friendly forces; and the size and proximity of
reinforcements for both sides.
z Artillery groups conducting a firepower assault, delivering massed fire support to the main
effort, targeting defending enemy units, interdicting movement of reinforcements, and
destroying or suppressing command and communication nodes.
7-36. Attacks are launched from multiple directions simultaneously, forcing the enemy commander to
make decisions about force deployment. If possible, the enemy commander’s decision cycle is
interrupted—or, better yet, influenced—so that reinforcements or other maneuvers do not concentrate in
opposition to the main effort. The main effort employs substantial force concentration to achieve local
firepower and numeral superiority over the enemy, allowing the former to defeat the latter’s forces in detail
and maintain the initiative. Fire support is weighted heavily in support of the main effort’s assault.
7-37. The main effort targets one or more primary objectives as a part of the assault on the enemy’s center
of gravity. These may include enemy command posts, assembly areas, reserve forces, artillery units, or
network nodes. The main effort should seek weak points in the enemy’s defense, then move rapidly to
penetrate them. Follow-on forces help to secure the main effort, fix or deceive remaining enemy forces, and
preclude enemy reinforcement. Groups—possibly airborne, air assault, SOF, or militia—located to the
flanks and rear of the enemy secure key terrain to prevent outside reinforcement of the enemy formation
while encircling the objective. Supporting groups ensure that enemy counterattacks—particularly
counterencirclement—are spoiled, disrupted, neutralized, or defeated before they can affect the main effort.
7-38. The initiate phase is complete once the enemy center of gravity has been seized by the main effort.
Figure 7-4 depicts a PLAA CA-BDE commencing the initiate phase against an enemy position.
7-12 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Offensive Actions
Figure 7-4. Initiate (example)
Annihilate
7-39. The annihilate phase commences after the enemy is confused and demoralized following the seizure
or fall of its center of gravity. Enemy units should be isolated, with communications to their higher
echelons disrupted and routes for reinforcement either cut off or unusable. The enemy is encircled, either
physically or psychologically, and mutual support between enemy units is no longer possible. Decisive
attacks are conducted throughout the combat area, seeking to destroy isolated enemy units before retreat
and a prepared defense are possible. Fire support is used aggressively in brief but violent volleys in order to
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 7-13

Chapter 7
suppress and demoralize enemy units prior to assaults. Special focus is given to ensuring that the enemy
cannot break out of the annihilation zone. Security and countermobility efforts slow or stop movement
before enemy units can escape.
7-40. Once the enemy recognizes that one of its units is facing annihilation, a strong response is likely
inevitable. Enemy air and artillery units will attempt to target friendly formations to suppress or disrupt
friendly attacks. Antiair and artillery groups must be prepared to conduct counterair and counterfire
operations in response. Other enemy ground formations will attempt to reinforce their besieged units
Friendly security forces must defend stubbornly and disrupt, slow, or defeat these attempts until the
objective force has been annihilated.
7-41. The annihilate phase is concluded once the objective force has been destroyed, routed, or has
surrendered. Figure 7-5 depicts a PLAA CA-BDE annihilating an enemy position.
Continuing Operations
7-42. Continuing operations commence immediately when it is clear that the objective force has been
destroyed, routed, or has surrendered. The remainder of the enemy force loses cohesion in the face of
decisive attacks throughout the combat area, and widespread withdrawal or retreat follows. The main focus
during this phase of the operation is pursuit of these fleeing enemies. High-tempo operations continue to
maintain contact with these enemy forces during their retrograde, defeating rear-guard security actions and
preventing the enemy from consolidating to form a coherent defense. Counterreinforcement groups
continue to defeat enemy attempts to reinforce the area by either defeating enemy forces, spoiling enemy
attacks, or conducting countermobility operations. Pursuit actions are discussed in detail in paragraphs 7-93
through 7-96.
7-43. When continuing operations commence, the commander begins assessing follow-on opportunities.
For example, if defeating the enemy unit created a breach in the enemy’s main defensive line, an
opportunity for envelopment or penetration may be present. Similarly, the enemy unit’s defeat may create
an opportunity for a Public Opinion Warfare offensive, highlighting the success of the operation. Units may
begin transition from combat postures to movement postures in accordance with the scheme of maneuver.
The decision to do so is a key decision point. If a unit redeploys into march order too soon, it may be
vulnerable to enemy counterattack. If it waits too long, opportunities for penetration or envelopment may
be lost.
7-44. The PLAA unit must also consolidate. Consolidation consists of three primary activities: perform
security activities, reorganize and reconstitute friendly units, and conduct passage of lines. Security
activities consist of securing the combat area against enemy reconnaissance and counterattack and ensuring
that friendly forces entering the area are not subject to threat from bypassed enemy elements or irregular
forces. Reorganization and reconstitution are those activities that enable the unit to conduct follow-on
operations: resupply, replacement of lost or damaged equipment, casualty processing, and receipt of
reinforcements. Passage of lines takes place when one unit passes through another’s combat area, typically
with the intent to resume offensive operations against the enemy. Passage of lines can be a complex task,
and it is enabled by effective control measures, communications, and planning.
7-14 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Offensive Actions
Figure 7-5. Annihilate (example)
TYPES OF OFFENSIVE OPERATIONS

7-45. The PLAA recognizes at least five different types of offensive operations: attacking a fortified
enemy, attacking an unprepared enemy, amphibious operations, urban offensive operations, and airborne
operations. Though they are broadly similar to deliberate and hasty attacks, the primary difference between
attacking a fortified enemy and attacking an unprepared enemy is the enemy’s level of preparation in
contrast to the friendly forces’ level of preparation. Other offensive operations focus on specific
situations—amphibious, airborne, or urban. In addition to the five types of offensive operations, particular
attention is given to operations taking place in special conditions, such as jungles or extreme cold.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 7-15

Chapter 7
ATTACKING A FORTIFIED ENEMY

7-46. Attacking a fortified enemy is offensive action in which the unit assaults an enemy force that
occupies a prepared position. The attacking unit likely has ample time to conduct all five phases of the
offensive operation. Reconnaissance, firepower, and maneuver are all carefully coordinated to achieve
maximum surprise, deception, and concentration. Enemy positions are carefully reconnoitered, and enemy
reconnaissance is effectively suppressed. The advance phase is done deliberately, with great care used to
conceal friendly movement, strength, and disposition from the enemy. The unfold phase is also performed
carefully, with strong emphasis on deception and concealment of friendly forces. Once the initiate phase
commences, tempo is increased rapidly. Movements are rapid and aggressive, and the unit seeks decisive
contact with the enemy. Attacking a fortified enemy may allow time for complete envelopment of the
enemy, extensive preparatory fires, positioning of forces in deep areas, and extensive information warfare
operations upon enemy leaders and soldiers.
7-47. Attacks against a fortified enemy must make the most effective use of stratagems. Commanders can
carefully manipulate the enemy’s morale and situational understanding through the use of deception,
information warfare, counterreconnaissance, and concealment. Effectively employed stratagems can
convince the enemy to cease resistance, to conduct an early retreat or retrograde, or to counterattack at the
wrong time or place. The development of stratagems begins early in the planning process, and it is a central
objective in any offensive action.
7-48. If a commander has the time and decision space, the ideal objective in attacking a fortified enemy is
to achieve its annihilation. Such opportunities are relatively rare and valuable, especially during high-
intensity operations. The commander must ensure that the unit’s operational tempo, planning, rehearsals,
and execution are all carefully optimized, but still fit within the available timeframe. Synchronization
between units should be well executed, with careful timelines designed to keep the enemy off balance and
confused throughout the engagement.
ATTACKING AN UNPREPARED ENEMY

7-49. Attacking an unprepared enemy is an offensive operation in which the unit must rapidly conduct an
offensive operation against an unprepared or surprised opponent, possibly without the benefit of careful
positioning, preparatory fires, information warfare support, or reconnaissance. Such an operation may be
one of opportunity—such as a friendly unit discovering a previously unseen weakness in an enemy’s
position. It may also be in response to enemy actions, such as a spoiling action against an enemy
counterattack. Rapid tempo is of great importance during an attack against an unprepared enemy. The
window for decisive action may be very limited, requiring rapid decision making and action on behalf of
the attacking unit.
7-50. Unprepared enemies are typically vulnerable, or they hold disadvantageous positions. Careful
reconnaissance may not be possible on a limited timeline, so attacking an enemy in a strong defensive
position without proper preparation should be discouraged. The rapidity and aggressiveness of the attack is
the key enabler to the mission. It keeps the enemy off balance and grants the initiative to the friendly unit
commander.
7-51. Attacks against an unprepared enemy still include all five phases of an offensive operation, but one
or more phases may be very short in duration or limited in scope. The advance phase is short, with units
forgoing careful movement, deception, and concealment for rapidity—they seek to close with the enemy as
quickly as possible, ensuring it cannot construct a strong defensive position. The unfold phase is conducted
in a similar manner, with rapidity of action being prioritized over deception and concealment. While in an
attack against a fortified enemy, units may be positioned on a number of different approach axes. An attack
against an unprepared enemy may allow for as few as two. From the initiate phase onward, operations are
broadly similar to those in an attack against a fortified enemy. The enemy is struck with speed and
aggression, and the attacking units seek to isolate, overwhelm, and then annihilate enemy units in detail.
Note. Chinese military theory suggests no attack be made with fewer than two axes of advance
against a single point.
7-16 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Offensive Actions
7-52. A unit conducting this type of attack is particularly vulnerable to enemy counterattack. The unit
likely did not have the time or resources to deploy a comprehensive security element, and it may be
deployed in a vulnerable or disorganized fashion due to the rapid push through the unfold phase of the
attack. Friendly commanders must be prepared to react to a well-timed enemy counterattack, either through
fire support, information warfare, or direct action by ground or air forces. Developing and maintaining
security following the attack is a critical component of the continuing operations phase.
7-53. Successful attacks against unprepared opponents require a significant degree of autonomy by the
attacking units. The small time window for success and the lack of careful preparation often preclude
careful coordination with higher echelons. Enabling this level of autonomy is a significant focus area for
the PLAA. Historically, it was rare for units above the battalion echelon to conduct any such actions.
Modern PLAA CA-BDE and CA-BNs are expected to be able to conduct quick attacks with only limited
coordination and support from their group army.
AMPHIBIOUS LANDING OPERATIONS

7-54. The PLA defines amphibious landing operations as those that make use of watercraft to cross a body
of water, enabling the attacking unit to conduct an assault and exploitation against an enemy defending a
littoral area or island. The PLAA recognizes two distinct kinds of amphibious landing operations: coast to
coast and vessel to coast. Coast-to-coast operations are those in which staging and embarkation occur on
shore, while vessel-to-coast operations stage and embark from a larger seagoing vessel.
7-55. Amphibious landing operations use a similar approach to operations across land. The largest
differences are that the advance phase occurs across water and reconnaissance efforts are likely to be less
comprehensive. An amphibious landing operation consists of an advance phase, an assault and penetration
phase, and an exploitation and consolidation phase. Secrecy and deception during embarkation and
advancing are considered paramount, as embarked troops are highly vulnerable to counterattack and
firepower attack. Ideally, the initial wave of an amphibious assault strikes an undefended or lightly
defended beach, allowing the first wave to establish a beachhead security area while under minimal enemy
fire. Once the beachhead is established, follow-on waves land within the secure area, then conduct
penetrations of deeper enemy positions. If at all possible, multiple beachheads should be established,
enabling multiple follow-on penetrations and dispersing the effects of enemy counterattack and enabling.
7-56. Amphibious landing operations are to be supported by massive firepower and information attack.
Firepower may be generated from missiles, aircraft, surface vessels, or long-range artillery. Information
attacks maximize the effect of deception operations and seek to extend enemy response times. Once ashore,
the initial wave establishes substantial firepower superiority over local enemy defenses, forcing enemy
retreat and enabling the establishment of a beach security area. Reconnaissance likely occurs concurrently
with the assault. Reconnaissance elements should deploy and conduct reconnaissance in force to ascertain
enemy intent and dispositions and inform the command about how and where to commit penetration
efforts.
7-57. The decision of where and how to commit the follow-on efforts is the most important decision in an
amphibious landing operation. Commanders in the initial wave must communicate their situational
understanding—enabled by on-the-spot reconnaissance efforts—to their higher echelon, allowing the
higher echelon to decide how and where the second wave should attack. Commanders in the first wave
must also coordinate firepower operations to support follow-on waves and clear any remaining obstacles or
other enemy countermobility assets to enable the penetration effort. Figures 7-6 through 7-8 on pages 7- 18
through 7-20 show an amphibious operation.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 7-17

Chapter 7
Figure 7-6. Amphibious landing operation (example, part 1 of 3)
7-18 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Offensive Actions
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 7-19

Chapter 7
URBAN OFFENSIVE OPERATIONS

7-58. Urban offensive operations are those offensive operations that take place in complex urban terrain. In
contrast to maneuver warfare in more open terrain, the PLAA stresses careful planning and execution, slow
and deliberate actions, and meticulous intelligence assessments when conducting offensive operations in
urban areas.
7-59. Urban offensive operations are characterized by bounding overwatch techniques, using streets or
other thoroughfares as avenues of approach. Following an extended period of reconnaissance across the
area, a forward element attacks and secures a position of overwatch. Ideally, this element occupies an
elevated position in order to provide fire and reconnaissance support to assault elements. Assault elements
then move down avenues of approach while targeting enemy weak areas. Urban operations are viewed as
7-20 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Offensive Actions
fundamentally slower and more deliberate than other operations for both sides, Surprise and deception are
even more important, as actions take longer and attacking units are more vulnerable.
7-60. Fighting in urban areas is also characterized by increased complexity, particularly of terrain.
High-rise buildings are areas of special focus. If a large building must be taken, it should be carefully
cordoned, isolated, and then aggressively stormed by specially trained troops. Underground facilities are
defeated in a similar manner. The employment of specialized troops to deal with these difficult targets is a
critical enabler of urban offensive operations.
7-61. Complex urban terrain also changes the nature of the enemy’s counterattack. Buildings and other
hardened pieces of terrain make concealed movement simpler for the enemy’s counterattack force, but they
also enable and enhance ambush operations. PLAA commanders should seek to defeat or demoralize
enemy counterattack forces through ambushes that use the urban terrain. Security units should defend
stubbornly and protect the main body as it deliberately and thoroughly defeats any lingering enemy units
within the combat area. In addition, urban terrain enhances the use of countermobility capabilities,
particularly in tight, canalized areas. Commanders should liberally employ countermobility systems in
careful concert with ambush and security operations. Figure 7-9 on page 7-22 depicts a PLAA CA-BN
conducting an urban offensive operation.
AIRBORNE OPERATIONS
7-62. Airborne operations are offensive operations using fixed- or rotary-wing aircraft to move friendly
troops into enemy territory. Following airborne insertion, units conduct otherwise typical maneuver
warfare. Airborne operations are one of the most important elements of the multidimensional penetration,
the use of all domains and dimensions to create multiple dilemmas for the enemy. Currently there are
relatively few PLAA airborne transportation assets, and airborne units are considered high-value assets.
They are prescribed to target the highest-value enemy assets within their operating area: the flanks and rear
of the enemy main body, airfields, artillery, air defense systems, or key routes for enemy reinforcements.
7-63. Airborne operations are broadly similar to amphibious operations, though they are conducted on a
smaller scale. After careful but rapid reconnaissance and a firepower attack, an assault team attacks and
seizes the landing area, annihilating enemy forces in the vicinity and creating a secure base from which
follow-on operations can be launched. Additional forces are airlifted to the secure base, and they conduct
aggressive offensive operations against key targets in their areas of operations. Security operations are
ongoing, seeking to spoil or defeat enemy counterattacks.
7-64. Airborne forces may be relieved in place by ground forces, or they may be exfiltrated by air. Both
processes are challenging. Relief in place requires careful coordination between friendly units to avoid both
friendly fire and excessive vulnerability to enemy attack, while air exfiltration must be conducted rapidly
and efficiently to minimize the risk to friendly aircraft.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 7-21

Chapter 7
Figure 7-9. Urban offensive operation (example)
OPERATIONS UNDER SPECIAL CONDITIONS

7-65. The PLAA recognizes eight special conditions: hills, mountains, jungles, extreme cold, deserts,
rivers, swamps, and nighttime. Each of these conditions requires modifications and adaptations to baseline
operations. Primary considerations include ensuring that troops are properly prepared for the special
condition-with cold weather gear or bridging equipment, for example. Units should also train for potential
special conditions that may occur in their areas of operations.
OFFENSIVE TACTICS
7-66. The PLAA employs several different offensive tactics: envelopment, penetration, pursuit, firepower,
ambush, and raid. Use of these tactics is informed by the principles discussed earlier in this chapter. Each
tactic may be employed by virtually any echelon, but the figures in this chapter show employment at the
CA-BDE level against a notional enemy. Tactics may be used independently, sequentially, or
7-22 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Offensive Actions
simultaneously. Figures in this section depict genericized units conducting simplified variants of the tactics
described.
ENVELOPMENT TACTICS
7-67. Two primary envelopment methods are used by the PLAA: simple envelopment and complex
envelopment—both of which occur on enemy flanks. These methods are described in paragraphs 7-68
through 7-75.
Complex Envelopment
7-68. A complex envelopment is an offensive tactic wherein an assault occurs against multiple flanks of
the enemy. The complex envelopment has long been a mainstay of Chinese maneuver tactics, employed
regularly by Chinese generals throughout the various wars of Imperial China. More recently, it was used
regularly—and with good effect—by Communist Chinese forces in both the Chinese Civil War and the
Korean War, most famously at the 1946 Battle of Guanzhong and the 1951 Battle of the Soyang River. A
successful complex envelopment creates multiple dilemmas for the enemy commander, enables effective
isolation of enemy units, and enables concentrated forces to defeat enemy strongpoints in detail. For a
contemporary maneuver unit, a complex envelopment requires advanced coordination of multiple
maneuvers along with effective integration of fires, information warfare, and mobility and countermobility
capabilities.
7-69. The definition of flank traditionally refers to the right or left side of a ground formation. The PLAA
recognizes two distinct types of complex envelopment: the flank envelopment, wherein attacks target the
enemy flanks, and the separating envelopment, wherein attacks target enemy positions of weakness in
depth. The PLAA’s multi-domain approach to fighting recognizes that “flanks” can exist not only on the
sides of an enemy formation, but in the air, below ground, or in the virtual world. A modern complex
envelopment may make use of any or all of these in a coordinated, synchronized manner in order to get the
enemy off balance, preclude effective enemy response, gain and maintain the initiative, and get inside the
enemy’s decision cycle. In addition, a penetration attack may create flanks where they did not previously
exist; a network attack may threaten or disrupt the enemy’s digital or virtual flank; and air or missile forces
may threaten an enemy’s flank in the third dimension. A flank, in other words, is defined by the PLA as
any area in which the enemy has not concentrated defenses, does not expect an attack, or is vulnerable. In
general, the more flanks are threatened or engaged simultaneously, the less coherent and effective the
enemy’s response will be. This in turn enables isolation of enemy units and eventually leads to their
destruction.
7-70. The complex envelopment employs one or more depth attack groups enabled by one or more
frontline attack groups. A frontline attack group attacks, feints, or demonstrates against one portion of the
enemy formation to fix or deceive enemy forces, engage enemy artillery, and drive commitment of enemy
reserves. Once the enemy has been fixed, the depth attack groups conduct aggressive, penetrating assaults
against weak points of the enemy’s flank, while reserve and artillery groups continue to fix other enemy
forces, preventing effective reaction to the penetration. Depth attack groups seek to disrupt enemy rear
areas and isolate enemy units, enabling follow-on annihilation attacks. Depth attack groups must achieve
substantial overmatch against their initial opposition, integrating numerical superiority, firepower
superiority, and information superiority to overwhelm the enemy and enable rapid maneuver into and
through enemy rear areas.
7-71. Success of a complex envelopment depends heavily on deceiving the enemy about the strength and
axis of the depth attack groups. Deception operations and careful concealment enable the assault forces to
strike from an unanticipated direction against areas of weakness. The operations of the frontline attack
groups prevent the enemy from counterattacking or reinforcing the units opposing the depth assault until it
is too late to adequately respond. Figure 7-10 on page 7-24 depicts a complex envelopment.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 7-23

Chapter 7
Figure 7-10. Complex envelopment (example)
Simple Envelopment
7-72. The simple envelopment is an offensive tactic wherein an assault occurs on a single flank of the
enemy. A simple envelopment involves two primary groups: a depth attack group and a frontline attack
group. The frontline attack group feints or demonstrates against one portion of the enemy formation, with
the intent of fixing enemy maneuver forces, engaging enemy artillery, and driving enemy commitment of
reserves. Frontline attack group actions can be thought of as a deception operation, intending to prevent the
enemy from concentrating its forces against the depth attack group.
7-73. Once the enemy is engaged by the frontline attack group, the depth attack group advances to its
attack position and commences an assault. The depth attack group seeks to achieve vastly superior
concentration of combat power against the specified flank of the enemy. Maneuver forces, enabled by
integrated fires and information warfare support, overwhelm any prepared defenses, and penetrate enemy
rear areas. Once the enemy’s flank is defeated and its rear areas are threatened, isolated enemy units can be
annihilated by follow-on operations.
7-24 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Offensive Actions
7-74. Much like with a complex envelopment, success of a simple envelopment depends heavily on
deceiving the enemy about the strength and axis of the depth attack group. Deception operations and
careful concealment enable the assault force to strike from an unanticipated direction against areas of
weakness. The operations of the frontline attack group prevent the enemy from counterattacking or
reinforcing the units opposing the depth attack group until it is too late to adequately respond.
7-75. The simple envelopment is employed in situations where a complex envelopment is not possible due
to terrain, strength, or disposition. Use of only a single penetration makes it easier for the enemy to respond
and effectively counter the envelopment attempt. If possible, the enemy should face multiple penetrations
to complicate and confuse responses. Simple envelopments are very common at the squad and platoon
levels, where one element creates a base of fire to fix and suppress the enemy, while another element
assaults the objective. Figure 7-11 depicts a simple envelopment.
Figure 7-11. Simple envelopment (example)
PENETRATION
7-76. A penetration is an offensive tactic wherein a mobile or fast-moving element defeats an enemy line
of defense—preferably through an area of weakness—and continues to press forward into the enemy’s rear
area, bypassing enemy areas of strength. A penetration is rarely employed by itself. Instead, it is typically
employed as one component of a wider operation, such as an envelopment. Ideally, an offensive campaign
successfully conducts numerous multidimensional penetrations, employing a variety of capabilities to
penetrate enemy defenses in a synchronized and mutually supporting manner. Units best suited to conduct a
penetration as part of a ground action are armored or mechanized units due to their combination of
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 7-25

Chapter 7
mobility, protection, and firepower. Penetrations may also be employed in the air or cyber domains or in
the electromagnetic spectrum using the same basic principles: target enemy weak points and bypass strong
points in order to threaten vulnerable areas behind the main lines of defense.
7-77. Most contemporary PLAA tactics involve one or more penetrations as the basis for offensive
operations. This is true for all echelons and unit types. Penetrations are the means by which enemy units are
isolated, enemy actions and counterattacks are disrupted, and additional enemy flanks are exposed.
Aggression and mobility are the key enablers of a successful penetration, along with effective integration of
enablers that preempt enemy response to a penetration, deceive the enemy as to the axis or strength of a
penetrating force, or create confusion or the perception of isolation among enemy units during a
penetration.
7-78. As it requires a unit to bypass active enemy positions, a penetration by itself leaves the conducting
unit highly vulnerable to counterattack on its flanks and rear. In order to maximize the effect of a
penetration, the main effort must be well supported by security operations and follow-on operations
designed to secure the areas bypassed by the penetration.
7-79. Similarly, once a penetration is achieved, it must be exploited in order to maximize effect.
Exploitation can take a variety of forms. For a ground action, it may consist of follow-on operations against
enemy rear area assets, annihilation operations against isolated enemy units, security operations that offset
enemy reconnaissance and counterattack efforts, or consolidation efforts centered on newly seized areas or
terrain. Exploitation in the air domain may include ground attack or strike operations; in the cyber domain,
anything from passive observation to network attack; and in the electromagnetic spectrum, jamming or
meaconing (the interception and surreptitious rebroadcasting of signals).
7-80. The PLAA practices four types of penetration: frontal attack, depth attack, infiltration, and storming
attack. These types of penetration are described in paragraphs 7-81 through 7-92.
Frontal Attack
7-81. A frontal attack is an offensive tactic wherein a penetration is attempted directly against an enemy’s
position of strength. This tactic is generally not preferred, as it allows the enemy to make best use of its
strengths, making effective concentration and the development of overwhelming combat power more
difficult. Frontal attacks should only be conducted either to enable offensive actions or because no other
alternative is available, but an offensive action is necessary. Frontal attacks need not involve maneuver
forces; any offensive action that attacks an enemy’s area of strength can be considered a frontal attack.
7-82. The frontal attack is opposed to both Sun Tzu and Maoist theories about warfare, which prescribe
attacking the enemy at weak points. In a frontal attack, friendly forces should be highly concentrated and
should close as rapidly as possible with the enemy in order to minimize exposure to defensive measures
and stand-off weapons. If possible, a frontal attack should be carefully planned and executed to maximize
the use of enabling capabilities. Any frontal attack should be enabled by massed fire, substantial
information warfare and deception support, and feints or demonstrations designed to preempt enemy
actions, confuse and demoralize the enemy, or suppress the enemy. Enabling capabilities should be
carefully synchronized with the attack to maximize their effectiveness at key times and places. Even with
these enablers effectively used, a frontal attack will likely face significant resistance and will suffer higher
casualties than an attack targeted at an enemy weak point. Figure 7-12 depicts a frontal attack.
7-26 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Offensive Actions
Figure 7-12. Frontal attack (example)
Depth Attack
7-83. A depth attack is an offensive tactic wherein a force focuses on attacking targets deep behind the
enemy’s forward positions through a series of deep penetrations. A depth attack targets enemy high-value
assets in enemy rear areas, such as command nodes, supply bases, reserve troop concentrations, and
artillery units. The depth attack also seeks to further isolate enemy units throughout the battlefield, allowing
their encirclement and destruction in detail.
7-84. The depth attack is typically the main effort of a given battle plan, and it often involves the
best-equipped and -trained troops available to a commander. The depth attack group is typically employed
as the second line of troops, after the initial line engages the enemy and creates one or more breaches in the
enemy’s defensive line. The timing and direction of the depth attack are key decision points in the battle,
and commanders are encouraged to position themselves such that these decisions are not delegated. The
depth attack should achieve maximum concentration of combat power against its key targets. If at all
possible, security functions should be performed by other units in support of the depth attack group.
7-85. Depth attacks may employ one point of entry or multiple points, they may be staged and
synchronized, and they may employ third-dimension mobility. The depth attack should be arranged to meet
few obstacles and entrenched enemy forces in order to maximize the rapidity of movement into enemy rear
areas. It may be supported by demonstrations, feints, assaults, or other penetrations designed to occupy the
enemy’s attention and divert its combat power. Figure 7-13 on page 7-28 depicts a depth attack.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 7-27

Chapter 7
Figure 7-13. Depth attack (example)
Infiltration
7-86. Infiltration is an offensive tactic wherein a force closes with and conducts an undetected penetration
of enemy defenses by using stealth, rapid movement, and deception. Infiltration tactics were the backbone
of PLA tactics for much of the Chinese Civil War and Korean War, and they remain an important element
of light infantry operations today. The primary benefit of infiltration tactics is that they offset enemy
advantages in firepower. By closing distances and conducting penetrating maneuvers covertly, enemy
firepower cannot be brought to bear prior to close contact. This enables friendly units to surprise the
enemy, creating shock and the perception of isolation. The main limitation of infiltration is that it is very
difficult to do with larger formations or with any unit that is not light infantry—large formations and
vehicles are far easier to detect, and thus have great difficulty infiltrating enemy positions. Infiltration
tactics are also very time consuming and limited in both scope and range, due to the slow movement rate of
dismounted infantry and the need to maintain secrecy and concealment.
7-87. The PLAA today employs infiltration tactics alongside penetrations or other assaults to isolate and
annihilate enemy units. For example, a light infantry depth attack group may infiltrate one flank of an
enemy formation while an armor-heavy depth attack group conducts an aggressive penetration of another
flank.
7-28 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Offensive Actions
7-88. Successfully executing an infiltration attack requires considerable skill and initiative by small-unit
leaders. These leaders are charged with identifying enemy weak points, then choosing their own avenues of
approach and methods of attack. By its nature, an infiltration attack requires less concentration of forces
than other forms of offensive action, but it requires greater skill in the advance and unfold phases of the
operation, as detection by the enemy essentially changes the action from an infiltration to a frontal assault.
Artillery and other enablers are also largely unavailable to an infiltration due to the need for secrecy and
concealment, though information warfare and deception operations may provide vital support by fooling
the enemy about the strength or direction of the attack or by directing enemy reconnaissance focuses
elsewhere. Figure 7-14 depicts an infiltration.
Figure 7-14. Infiltration (example)
Storming Attack
7-89. A storming attack is a thoroughly prepared, high-intensity assault against an entrenched, isolated
opponent. Storming occurs after penetrations defeat the enemy’s main defensive line, most enemy units
have been forced to retreat or been annihilated, and the PLAA unit must complete the annihilation phase by
reducing the remaining enemy strongpoints. Storming attacks place great emphasis on obstacle defeat,
firepower and maneuver integration, and aggressive action at the point of contact.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 7-29

Chapter 7
7-90. Storming attacks are preceded by a meticulous and integrated effort to clear enemy obstacles through
a combination of firepower and engineering capabilities. These breaches provide the points of entry for the
final assault. At the same time, careful reconnaissance of the enemy’s position informs the commander of
the enemy’s strength and disposition. Firepower and information attacks against enemy positions are
conducted throughout the operation, attempting to reduce enemy strength and cohesion, reduce morale, and
suppress enemy systems. The enemy should be surrounded if possible, and it should be isolated not only
physically, but also electronically and psychologically.
7-91. The main decision the commander must make in the assault phase is the deployment of armor. Three
methods for armor deployment are prescribed: in front, in close support, and in rear support. The
commander’s decision on how to employ armor is dictated by terrain and enemy antitank capabilities. In
general, tanks in front is preferred in more open terrain, while tighter terrain demands tanks in close
support. If the enemy is in highly restrictive terrain—or if it has substantial antitank capabilities available—
tanks are deployed in rear support.
7-92. The assault itself is carried out bravely and aggressively. Penetrations are carried through breaches
and seek to further isolate smaller enemy units. As units are suppressed and surrounded, they face the
choice of surrender or annihilation. If possible, multiple penetrations are created, and assaults are
coordinated and synchronized. As enemy will begins to break, the breaches are exploited by
second-echelon troops, who complete the annihilation phase and secure the objective. Figure 7-15 depicts a
storming attack.
7-30 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Offensive Actions
Figure 7-15. Storming attack (example)
PURSUIT ATTACK
7-93. Pursuit attack is an offensive tactic wherein a friendly formation maintains constant contact with an
enemy formation in retrograde. This most often occurs when an enemy force is defeated but not
surrounded, and it is thus able to retreat. Pursuit entails maintaining contact with the retreating unit and
conducting quick attacks as required or where possible, with the objective of preventing effective enemy
rear security operations—thus preventing the enemy unit from consolidating or reforming a strong
defensive position.
7-94. Aggressively pursuing a defeated enemy formation is a basic component of mechanized warfare. The
PLAA historically employed both mechanized and armored forces and fast-moving infantry forces in this
role; on a modern battlefield, a mechanized force is likely required. Following an initial penetration,
envelopment, or isolation, the enemy force is dislodged from its primary defensive position and begins
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 7-31

Chapter 7
retrograde operations to attempt to regain the initiative. Aggressive pursuit of the enemy allows friendly
forces to retain the initiative while keeping the enemy force isolated and off balance.
7-95. Pursuit attack does not necessarily need to take the form of ground maneuver. Other capabilities can
achieve the pursuit effects of maintaining contact with the enemy, preventing enemy consolidation, and
retaining friendly initiative. Artillery fire, air attack, and countermobility activities can disrupt enemy
formations or canalize or direct enemy movements. Network or electromagnetic attack can suppress enemy
communications or disseminate disinformation to influence enemy actions. SOF or guerrilla forces can
conduct raids, feints, or demonstrations to degrade enemy cohesion or influence enemy decision making.
Any pursuit operation is best conducted using a variety of different capabilities to create a combined arms
effect and maximize the impact of friendly operations on the strength and mindset of the enemy.
7-96. A unit conducting pursuit operations is vulnerable to counterattacks or other spoiling operations,
especially if it is a maneuver unit strung out over a wide area. Security operations or supporting attacks
should work to ensure that a unit conducting a pursuit operation is secure against enemy counterattack,
reconnaissance, and countermobility activities. Figure 7-16 depicts a pursuit attack.
FIREPOWER ATTACK
7-97. A firepower attack is a tactic wherein a number of firepower capabilities are massed on a specific
target to achieve an offensive effect. Firepower capabilities include, but are not limited to field artillery,
ballistic or cruise missiles, air attack, antiair attack, network attack, electromagnetic attack, and direct fire.
The defining characteristic of the firepower attack is that it does not require any physical occupation of key
terrain or close contact with enemy forces. Instead, massed firepower is used to isolate or annihilate enemy
units, canalize enemy movements, penetrate enemy defenses, reduce enemy morale, or affect enemy
decision making. The PLAA uses firepower attacks in a variety of ways, including to reduce cohesion or
strength of enemy forces, to support assaults or advances, to fix the enemy, to attack enemy flanks or rear
areas, or to spoil or defeat enemy counterattacks. Firepower attacks can be employed either alone or in an
integrated and synchronized manner with other actions.
7-98. The PLAA recognizes at least seven different forms of firepower attack: advance fire, fire support,
information and firepower assault, depth firepower, counter-counterattack firepower, annihilation
firepower, and air defense firepower. These forms of firepower attack are described in paragraphs 7-99
through 7-107.
Advance Fire
7-99. Advance fire is fire that targets enemy positions or other key assets prior to follow-on operations. In
Western operations, it is typically referred to as preparatory fire. Advance fire targets enemy
reconnaissance platforms, command and communication nodes, security units, and artillery units. The
purpose of advance fire is to neutralize, destroy, or degrade key enemy capabilities in support of future
operations.
7-32 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Offensive Actions
Figure 7-16. Pursuit attack (example)
Fire Support (Advance or Assault)

7-100. Fire support consists of those fires that are integrated closely with the advance phase or initiate
phase of an operation. During the advance phase, the key mission for firepower is to ensure that enemy
reconnaissance platforms are suppressed or destroyed—thus preserving the secrecy of the attack—along
with enemy artillery units that may target the vulnerable advancing force during its movement operation. In
support of assaults, firepower targets key enemy positions and units, creating weak points or breaches in
the enemy’s defensive line that enable effective penetration. Key targets of this mission type include enemy
armor and antitank units, obstacles, fortified positions, and exposed units.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 7-33

Chapter 7
Information and Firepower Assault

7-101. The information and firepower assault is also referred to as the blitz—a specialized tactic wherein
physical fires and information attack are carefully synchronized to maximize the combined arms effect
against the enemy. Physical fires destroy, degrade, or neutralize key targets through their destructive
power, while information attack targets enemy morale, cohesion, and communications. The blitz is
employed at the key point in an overall offensive operation, targeting the enemy’s center of gravity. When
and where to employ the blitz is a key consideration when planning offensive operations.
Depth Firepower
7-102. Depth firepower targets enemy forces and key assets in deep areas, supporting follow-on
operations that are exploiting successful initial assaults. Key targets for depth firepower include enemy
artillery reserves attempting to spoil the exploitation effort, mobile enemy reserves conducting retrograde
operations, enemy command posts, and enemy reconnaissance platforms. Depth firepower’s primary
mission is to create or enhance the isolation effect on enemy forces and enable the annihilation phase to
commence.
Counter-counterattack Firepower
7-103. Counter-counterattack firepower specifically targets enemy counterattacks. This includes not only
targeting ground forces, but also air power through antiair attack and information attack against enemy
communications and command structures. The counter-counterattack firepower mission is reserved for the
point in time when the enemy’s counterattack has been clearly detected and identified. It can be thought of
as a miniature blitz, specifically targeting the enemy’s commitment of reserves to the counterattack.
Annihilation Firepower
7-104. Annihilation firepower attempts to destroy isolated or encircled troops. This may be in support of
storming attacks, or it may be to annihilate the enemy independently. Annihilation firepower targets not
only the enemy’s isolated formations, but also any possible routes for retreat, any enemy forces attempting
to relieve the besieged unit, and any obstacles that might inhibit a storming attack.
Air Defense Firepower

7-105. Air defense firepower uses ground-based defensive counterair systems—surface-to-air missile
systems, self-propelled antiaircraft guns, and EW systems—in an aggressive, forward-positioned manner.
There are two possible missions for air defense firepower: restrict the enemy’s use of a specific volume of
airspace through deterrence, or destroy or attrit enemy aircraft. Though it employs systems that Western
armies view as defensive, the PLAA characterizes air defense operations as fundamentally offensive, either
on their own, or in support of other offensive actions.
7-106. In order to restrict the enemy’s use of airspace, commanders should deploy their air defense
systems aggressively, fully integrated with higher echelon air defenses and aircraft. When attempting to
destroy or attrit enemy aircraft, commanders should use raid-like tactics, carefully concealing their air
defense systems in order to surprise and overwhelm enemy aircraft. Missions can be performed separately
or concurrently; a deterrence mission may be used to canalize aircraft toward a well-positioned air defense
raid, for instance.
7-107. Air defense firepower is deployed in two distinct ways: to defend static assets, such as assembly
areas, headquarters, or supply bases; or to defend units on the move. Air defense firepower is concentrated
to protect the most important assets and oriented towards the enemy’s most likely avenue of approach.
Commanders employ a mix of air defense capabilities to achieve a combined arms effect. Air defense
systems use several interlocking tiers of systems to offset friendly vulnerabilities.
AMBUSH
7-108. An ambush is an operation in which a unit deploys to a location in advance, then strikes the enemy
from a concealed position in a surprise attack. The PLAA historically emphasized ambush tactics as a
7-34 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Offensive Actions
highly effective way to offset enemy advantages in firepower or protection, and it used ambushes
extensively during the Second Sino-Japanese War and the Chinese Civil War. The ambush is still a popular
tactic, but the PLAA advises that the informationized battlefield makes conducting an effective ambush
more challenging. Figure 7-17 on page 7-36 depicts an ambush operation.
7-109. The PLAA recognizes three distinct types of ambush: the waiting ambush, the decoy ambush, and
the forced ambush. The waiting ambush is employed when an enemy travels along a predictable route, and
friendly forces can deploy and lie in wait in a concealed position. A decoy ambush is similar, but instead of
making use of a known route, it employs a decoy that tricks the enemy into moving into the ambush zone.
A forced ambush is somewhat different: it employs direct actions such as feints, demonstrations, or
countermobility activities to force the enemy into the ambush zone.
7-110. Choosing the ambush site is the most important decision when planning an ambush. Terrain should
canalize the enemy formation while helping to conceal the friendly unit. If possible, enemy forces should
be carefully reconnoitered to ensure friendly forces will enjoy local combat superiority. Engineers should
set up obstacles to maneuver the enemy into the ambush zone and complicate its retreat. Artillery is
deployed in concealed positions and registered across the ambush zone.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 7-35

Chapter 7
Figure 7-17. Ambush (example)
7-111. Maneuver units on ambush missions are divided into four primary groups: concealed, flank,
pursuit, and interception. The concealed group initiates contact, engages, and fixes enemy forces from at
least one flank. The flank unit assaults an alternate flank once the enemy force is fixed by the concealed
group. The pursuit group is a reserve that engages and maintains contact with the enemy force as it retreats
from the ambush zone. The interception group is deployed along potential reinforcement avenues of
approach in order to prevent support or reinforcement to the ambushed enemy formation.
7-112. Concealment and deception are key enablers of the ambush. Reconnaissance and surveillance on
the informationized battlefield make moving to ambush positions in secret a difficult task. Commanders
must carefully move forces into their ambush positions, and units must remain highly disciplined in order
to avoid detection. Once the ambush is complete and the enemy unit annihilated, secure retrograde
operations should be conducted quickly.
7-36 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Offensive Actions
RAID
7-113. A raid is an offensive operation designed to strike and surprise an unsuspecting enemy. The
primary defining characteristic of the raid is the employment of a hit-and-run approach. The enemy is
struck and injured, then, in most cases, the attacking force breaks contact and rapidly retreats. Though raids
may evolve into full-scale assaults in certain circumstances—encountering a weaker-than-expected enemy,
for instance—the typical approach to a raid is a fast-moving, intentionally abbreviated attack.
7-114. Raids are aggressive actions that have clearly defined parameters. They may seek to harass the
enemy, to probe it, or to destroy isolated enemy units. A raid requires skillful use of concealment and
deception, rapid movement, and sudden, aggressive action within the commander’s parameters.
Subordinate units must be aware of the commander’s intent and must not over-engage the enemy unless a
clear opportunity presents itself.
7-115. The PLAA recognizes five different types of raids: rapid, long-range, sabotage, sneak, and
harassing. These types of raids are described in paragraphs 7-116 through 7-120. Reconnaissance raids are
discussed in more detail in chapter 6.
Rapid Raid
7-116. The rapid raid is analogous to the Western idea of a meeting engagement. A unit unexpectedly
comes upon an enemy, transitions to an attack posture, then conducts an aggressive attack that is pressed
until the commander deems it complete. Rapid raids are specifically prescribed as spoiling actions against
counterattacking forces or newly arrived airborne or amphibious forces.
Long-range Raid
7-117. The long-range raid is not necessarily defined by the distance the unit travels to conduct the raid.
Rather, it refers to how deep behind the enemy’s main defensive line the raid takes place. Long-range raids
are conducted by light forces or SOF who infiltrate the enemy’s territory to strike at predetermined targets.
This may be a separate action, or it may be integrated as part of a larger operation.
Sabotage Raid
7-118. A sabotage raid is one in which a specific high-value asset is targeted for destruction. The unit
infiltrates enemy territory with the intent of locating and destroying one or more high-value assets through
covert, aggressive action. Potential targets include command nodes, key intersections or roadways, lines of
communications, ammunition stockpiles, or high-value weapons systems such as combat aircraft or
surface- to-air missile systems.
Sneak Raid
7-119. The sneak raid is a small-scale, short-distance raid designed primarily to make use of local
conditions such as nighttime or bad weather to conceal the raiding force. Sneak raids may attempt to seize
enemy prisoners, probe enemy defenses, or reconnoiter. The sneak raid does not attempt to strongly engage
the enemy, and the sneak raiders retrograde quickly back to concealed positions. Figure 7-18 on page 7-38
depicts a sneak raid against an enemy position.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 7-37

Chapter 7
Figure 7-18. Sneak raid (example)
Harassing Raid
7-120. The harassing raid is one intended to annoy, disrupt, or confuse the enemy. Harassing raids are
intended to provoke an enemy response, wear out enemy soldiers, or spoil enemy maneuvers. Most
importantly, they are used to disperse the enemy, forcing it to defend a wider geographic area and reducing
its presence at potential key places on the battlefield.
7-38 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Chapter 8
Defensive Actions
A well-planned and -coordinated defense is a critical component of every combat

action. The defense is carried out in order to attrit enemy forces, retain key positions
or terrain, buy the commander time and decision space, seize the initiative from the
enemy, and transition to offensive operations. The People’s Liberation Army Army
(PLAA) believes that defense is an inherently stronger form of war, as the defender
enjoys advantages of terrain and time unavailable to the attacker. The informationized
battlefield, however, has reduced many of these traditional advantages. While it is not
possible to destroy an opponent through defensive actions alone, a tenacious and
well-executed defense enables decisive follow-on offensive operations.
OVERVIEW OF PLAA DEFENSIVE OPERATIONS

8-1. The PLAA takes the position that defensive actions are ultimately to preserve one or more assets,
such as friendly forces, key terrain, or the initiative. In addition, defensive operations can play a key role in
a wider operational or strategic sense by attritting the enemy’s strength, forcing it to commit greater forces
in an attempt to achieve an objective, and reducing or restricting the options available to enemy
commanders. Though the PLAA considers the offense to be the decisive form of warfare, centuries of
invasion and occupation have led to considerable emphasis on the importance of defensive operations: the
People’s Liberation Army’s (PLA’s) most sacred mission is defending Chinese territory from outside
aggression.
THE INFORMATIONIZED BATTLEFIELD AND DEFENSIVE

OPERATIONS
8-2. The PLAA still maintains that defense is a fundamentally stronger form of warfare than offense, but
it acknowledges that many elements of the informationized battlefield have changed the traditional
dynamics between attack and defense. Most—though not all—of these changes benefit the attacker, making
defensive operations more difficult than they have been historically. The PLAA has identified four major
trends on the informationized battlefield that influence defensive operations: increasing arduousness, fewer
traditional advantages, more dynamic, and increasing importance of offensive actions.
INCREASING ARDUOUSNESS
8-3. Multiple factors have combined to make combat for the defender more difficult than in the past.
While ground commanders once only had to concern themselves with enemy land forces, enemies can now
strike simultaneously or consecutively from multiple domains. This requires, in turn, a comprehensive
multi-domain defense that can effectively blunt or check enemy actions, even when coming from
unexpected directions. Commanders must also defend their forces not only from physical attack, but also
from information, electromagnetic, and psychological attack: a capable opponent will target enemy troops’
morale and cohesion through a variety of channels. Finally, the depth and variety of enemy firepower
systems have increased substantially in recent years. Long-range artillery and missile strikes, air strikes,
attack helicopter operations, direct action by special operations forces (SOF), and electromagnetic and
network attack capabilities allow an enemy to target the full depth of friendly formations and defended
areas. There is no safe space on the informationized battlefield.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 8-1

Chapter 8
FEWER TRADITIONAL ADVANTAGES

8-4. Historically, a defender enjoyed several fundamental advantages that translated to nearly every
combat action: greater ability to conceal one’s forces and deceive the enemy; better use of terrain to cover
and harden one’s position; improved communications and coordination due to interior lines and known
terrain; and more time to make the best use of the deployment area and battlefield depth. Conditions on the
informationized battlefield have eroded all of these traditional advantages. Because of advanced wide-area
multispectrum reconnaissance, intelligence, and surveillance capabilities, concealing one’s own forces and
deceiving the enemy about deployments and dispositions is far more difficult. In the past, one only needed
to win the ground reconnaissance and counterreconnaissance battle, but the informationized battlefield
leverages air, space, and cyber intelligence collection in addition to more advanced ground-based
capabilities. Precision munitions and long-range strike capabilities have eroded several basic defensive
advantages offered by terrain, making it far more difficult to effectively harden defensive positions. The
enemy can also effectively target the command and communication systems of a defensive position in ways
never before available. Electronic warfare methods, such as communications jamming and meaconing, and
network attack are capable of destroying, disabling, degrading, or manipulating the command and
communication backbone of a defensive position. Finally, the defender’s traditional advantage of depth has
been eroded or eliminated by capabilities that enable the enemy to strike into deep areas. Depth areas that
were once generally considered secure and untouchable can now be targeted with both lethal and nonlethal
attack methods, even when many miles from forward areas.
MORE DYNAMIC
8-5. As modern offensive operations demand rapid thrusts that target weak points from unexpected
directions, the traditional approach of defending strong points with a relatively static approach is now
obsolete. Static formations, even in a strong defensive position, will quickly be bypassed, isolated, and then
annihilated by a competent attacker. Instead, defense must be considered a dynamic action characterized by
rapid movement and decisive concentration of combat power at key times and places. Information
superiority coupled with mobility enables the defender to rapidly detect and appropriately respond to
enemy offensive actions, regardless of where they might occur. This approach to defense is in keeping with
the PLAA’s new emphasis on decentralization. A mobile, rapidly reacting defensive strategy requires
lower-echelon commanders able to react appropriately to unexpected events without input from a higher
echelon. While the hasty defense was once considered a last-ditch option, it is today the cornerstone of a
PLAA defensive operation versus a capable opponent.
INCREASING IMPORTANCE OF OFFENSIVE ACTIONS

8-6. While seeming somewhat paradoxical, offensive actions within a broader defensive operation are
considered to be of heightened importance. Due to the conditions of the informationized battlefield,
offensive actions have increased in their lethality and unpredictability; this trend extends to counterattacks.
A well- timed and -executed counterattack can disrupt, defeat, or spoil an enemy’s offensive action just as
effectively as a well-planned defense, and the counterattack enjoys all the advantages of other offensive
actions: enhanced firepower, enhanced reconnaissance, multi-domain options, and the elements of surprise
and initiative. The PLAA approach to defense-by-offense prescribes the use of depth attacks and aggressive
maneuver to put the counterattack group in the best possible position, concentrating combat power against
enemy weak points and enabling the isolation and destruction of enemy offensive groups.
PRINCIPLES OF THE DEFENSE

8-7. The PLAA has identified four key principles that should guide commanders’ planning and operations
when conducting a defensive operation on the informationized battlefield: depth, consolidation, integration,
and flexibility. When applied skillfully, these principles enable the commander conducting a defensive
action to effectively blunt the opponent’s attack and then rapidly transition to decisive offensive operations.
8-2 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Defensive Actions
DEPTH
8-8. While defense-in-depth is an ancient concept, its modern application requires a somewhat different
approach than the traditional ground-only concept. Defense-in-depth now requires PLAA commanders to
integrate defensive measures throughout all domains while placing a strong emphasis on the counterattack.
It is impossible to defend all areas of the modern battlefield from all potential avenues of attack, so
commanders must effectively prioritize key areas for defense and make best use of available space—
trading space for time is now more important than ever before. Commanders should encourage enemies to
ingress through unimportant or noncritical areas, extending their lines of communications (LOCs) and
exposing their flanks. Decisive counterattacks should target these formations at key times and places,
seeking to disrupt or destroy enemy formations as they move through deep areas. These efforts are
simultaneously aided by raids, firepower operations, and information warfare operations that target enemy
reinforcement movement into the combat area. A properly executed defensive operation makes use of depth
to achieve isolation of enemy forces while effectively integrating all available assets into a cooperative
defensive effort throughout the combat area.
CONSOLIDATION
8-9. The defensive principle of consolidation mirrors the offensive principle of concentration: it
prescribes massing combat power at key times and places to make best use of available forces. Effective
consolidation is underpinned by the thoughtful deployment of friendly forces to key points around the
defensive zone before wider defensive operations commence. This deployment, in turn, requires the
commander and staff to conduct extensive analysis of the enemy’s probable approach, then prescribe the
primary defensive line and axis, key defense points (KDPs), and key targets for the counterattack.
Defensive operations must take advantage of favorable terrain or information conditions as combat
multipliers, as counterattack groups are expected to be outnumbered by the forces they engage. The main
defensive combat capability should take the form of a powerful mobile force able to conduct independent
operations anywhere in the defensive zone. The commitment of this force typically represents the key point
in a defensive battle. In addition, powerful mobile and armored forces should seek to conceal their
movements as much as possible to deceive the enemy about the time and place of their commitment, and
they should remain as dispersed as possible to protect against enemy firepower and to further deceive the
enemy.
INTEGRATION
8-10. A defensive operation must be carefully integrated throughout the defensive zone. This includes not
only careful planning and unification of purpose, but also preservation of combat power, effective use of
terrain and firepower as means of resistance, and use of small-unit actions across the defensive zone to
harass and distract the enemy. Protection of friendly forces is a key element of integration. This involves
not only traditional hardening of defensive positions, but winning the information battle as well—keeping
friendly forces from being affected by enemy psychological attack and propaganda. Physical resistance
should be enhanced by the use of obstacles and other countermobility capabilities, which are used to slow,
stop, or canalize enemy formations in accordance with the overall scheme of defense. The appropriate use
of firepower and terrain can allow vastly overpowered units the ability to resist enemy attacks for long
periods, forcing the enemy to commit reserves and overextend its offensive to achieve its attack goals.
Antitank and air defense weaponry must be fully integrated into the defense in order to offset enemy
advantages in armor, firepower, and air power. Coordinated firepower assaults mixing direct fire and
artillery can attrit or disrupt enemy formations at stand-off distances. Depth operations target enemy LOCs
and reinforcements, attempting to isolate powerful enemy offensive groups as they penetrate into the
defensive zone.
FLEXIBILITY
8-11. The defensive principle of flexibility seeks to achieve a state of localized initiative where defensive
forces, despite fighting on the defensive, successfully maneuver, consolidate, and achieve localized combat
power at key times and places. It requires commanders to take prudent risk in their defensive plans, to use
stratagems effectively in order to gain the advantage of surprise, and to attack and defend resolutely as the
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 8-3

Chapter 8
situation develops. A flexible defense is able to absorb enemy offensive actions by trading time and space,
then rapidly adjusting to enemy tactics and strategy to formulate a response. A flexible defense is, in many
ways, a series of small offensive actions, seeking to target enemy weak points with friendly strength and
seizing localized initiative at key times and places. The sort of flexibility that the PLAA seeks requires
superior lower-echelon leadership, with lower echelons capable of independent actions and lower echelon
commanders able to make good decisions even in the absence of complete information.
PLANNING THE DEFENSE

8-12. PLAA doctrine prescribes a large number of steps for planning and executing a defensive operation,
which can be consolidated into seven major phases:
z Build the command system.
z Organize reconnaissance.
z Organize the defensive group and deploy.
z Spoil the enemy’s preparations.
z Resist the enemy’s assaults.
z Counterattack.
z Consolidate or withdraw.
Each phase is part of every defensive operation to some degree, but the phases are not necessarily
sequential. Because they are largely in response to enemy actions, they may be conducted in varied order or
concurrently. This planning includes organizing the defensive battlefield and building the defensive groups
that comprise the operational system.
BUILD THE COMMAND SYSTEM

8-13. As with offensive operations, the PLAA prefers to carefully plan and organize major defensive
operations. Meticulous planning enables greater redundancy and depth in the defense, improved overall
security measures, a more effective deception plan, and a greater chance of a decisive counterattack. The
centerpiece of the defensive plan is the deployment of the command posts. A defensive operation makes
use of at least two, and ideally four, command posts. The base command post is the commander’s primary
location, and it will typically be located to best coordinate between frontier defense and depth defense
units, oriented toward the enemy’s anticipated main axis of attack. The commander may also establish an
advance command post in a more forward position. The rear command post is led by the deputy
commander, and it is deployed in a well-defended location. Its primary role is to organize logistics and rear
area defense. If possible, a reserve command post is established along a possible route of egress or in a
well-defended rear location, ready to take over for the base or advance command post should either of them
come under threat. Additional information on command post operations can be found in chapter 4.
8-14. The defensive battle makes careful use of terrain and geographic control. There are two primary
features that a commander must identify to make best use of the terrain. First, the main direction of defense
informs the combat group as to the orientation of the enemy’s anticipated primary effort. Commanders
placing the main direction of defense should take into account higher echelon and adjacent-unit missions,
specified defensive tasks, the unique characteristics and tendencies of the opponent, and terrain throughout
the defensive zone. Second, the commander must establish KDPs. These are the specific features within the
defensive zone that are of greatest importance to the integrity of the overall defense. Commanders should
keep the numbers of KDPs small, choosing only those points absolutely critical to successfully prosecuting
the defensive battle. The defensive plan should be centered on maintaining these KDPs, which assists
commanders in prioritizing their available resources. KDPs should also be phased, allowing for them to
change during the course of the battle. Finally, these points are not limited to key terrain. They may also
include a critical command or network node, a key unit or leader, or even a piece of information on a
computer network.
8-15. The defensive zone is further subdivided into two or more secondary zones, each with a specific set
of objectives and different set of tactics. While the PLAA used to be highly prescriptive about the physical
sizes of these zones, it has gradually moved to a more flexible approach. The various zones should account
for terrain, friendly and enemy capabilities, and higher echelon missions. They should also enable careful
8-4 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Defensive Actions
integration of various units and capabilities. Figure 8-1 depicts a combined arms brigade’s (CA-BDE’s)
genericized defensive zone
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 8-5

Chapter 8
Figure 8-1. Defensive zone (notional)
8-6 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Defensive Actions
Deep Area
8-16. Deep areas are those areas that are not targetable by a defensive group’s organic weapons systems.
They may still be occupied by elements of the defensive group conducting reconnaissance,
counterreconnaissance, and screening missions, but these elements operate independently. SOF elements
also occupy deep areas, and both air and missile support may be employed in support of deep-area
operations. The primary purpose of deep area operations is to disrupt and slow the enemy advance while
providing the defensive group commander with critical intelligence about the enemy’s strength, disposition,
and possible objectives.
Frontal Blocking Zone

8-17. The frontal blocking zone is the forward-most area of the defensive zone. It is analogous to the
Western security zone, and it is designed in much the same way. The frontal blocking zone is occupied by
units performing screen or cover missions, and it serves as the primary early warning, disruption,
reconnaissance, and counterreconnaissance zone for the main body. The frontal blocking zone should orient
toward the enemy’s primary axis of advance—particularly its primary reconnaissance axis. This zone
should be positioned sufficiently in front of the main body to give the commander time and decision space,
usually between 3 kilometers (km) and 5 km for a CA-BDE. The frontal blocking zone is likely occupied
primarily by the cover group.
Frontier Defense Zone

8-18. The frontier defense zone is typically the combat group’s primary defensive area. It should contain
most KDPs and the preponderance of combat power. Units should seek to conduct a strong defense within
the frontier defense zone, attempting to force the enemy to commit most of its combat power and leave its
forces vulnerable to counterattack. The frontier defense zone is primarily occupied by one or more frontier
defense groups, and possibly a depth group. Operations in this zone are centered largely on active
resistance to enemy assaults. Fortifications and entrenchments should be as extensive as time and resources
allow, and units should be prepared to conduct stubborn and brave resistance, possibly in the face of
significant odds. The base command post is typically located in this zone, while the advance command post
will be either forward in the zone or rearward in the frontal blocking zone.
Depth Defense Zone

8-19. The depth defense zone extends behind the frontier defense zone, and it serves as the deep area of the
defensive zone. Depth defense groups—the heart of the counterattack force—are deployed here, to react
quickly and appropriately to the enemy’s assaults in the forward defensive areas. In addition, combat
reserve groups may be stationed in this zone to reinforce or assist forward units. A single depth defense
zone may serve as the deep area for multiple frontier defense zones. Operations in the depth defense zone
should ensure protection of the depth defense group from air or artillery assault, ensure mobility, and
ensure the concealment and secrecy of counterattack operations. The reserve command post, if established,
will likely be located in this zone.
Rear Defense Zone

8-20. The rear defense zone is the deepest area of the defensive zone, and it houses logistics, equipment
support, and other rear area units and capabilities, including the rear command post. This zone is occupied
primarily by rear area security units—possibly People’s Armed Police (PAP) units in addition to PLAA
security forces—and it may also house depth or combat reserve groups. The rear defense zone ensures
protection against enemy deep artillery, air strikes, and enemy SOF or guerrilla actions in rear areas, and it
ensures mobility to enable retrograde or reinforcement movements through the zone.
ORGANIZE RECONNAISSANCE
8-21. The reconnaissance effort is a critical enabler of a defensive operation. Reconnaissance must be
comprehensive and well planned, extending through all domains and the depth of the battlefield. These
efforts concentrate on three primary intelligence objectives: disposition and intent of enemy forces; terrain;
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 8-7

Chapter 8
and conditions of the battlefield—civilians, weather, the electromagnetic environment, and so on.
Reconnaissance commences immediately upon receipt of warning orders: commanders rapidly build and
deploy the reconnaissance and intelligence group to facilitate rapid, accurate, and continuous scouting for
the main body. Like all other aspects of a defensive battle, reconnaissance must be conducted in depth.
Deep and forward reconnaissance units surveil and disrupt enemy forces in deep areas. As the situation
develops, additional reconnaissance forces, having been held in reserve, are deployed to key areas of the
battlefield to enhance situational understanding.
8-22. Reconnaissance groups are often charged with disrupting enemy operations, typically as part of a
screen or cover force. This requires a mixture of stubborn resistance and prudent tactical offensive actions,
usually in the form of raids coupled with entrenched units. These activities are intended to force the enemy
to deploy earlier than it would like, buying the commander decision space and revealing the enemy’s plan
of action. At the same time, counterreconnaissance actions attempt to spoil the enemy’s efforts to ascertain
friendly force dispositions, leaving it ignorant as to the strong and weak points of the defense.
Reconnaissance screens may attempt to canalize or steer enemy forces toward areas of strength.
8-23. Reconnaissance information should be carefully analyzed and processed to give the commander the
clearest possible picture of the battlefield. The commander must identify the most important elements of
information, and the reconnaissance and intelligence group must strive to answer these questions as clearly
and accurately as possible. Intelligence filtering enables the commander to judge friendly and enemy
situations; make best use of terrain, weather, and the conditions of the electromagnetic spectrum; then
distill the ground truth from the “fog of war.” In contrast to its historical approach of top-down intelligence,
the post-reform PLAA places greatest value on the lower-echelon commander’s situational understanding,
above that which is handed down by upper-level leadership. Lower-level commanders are encouraged to
act decisively based on their own judgment, though they must consider the higher-echelon mission and
intent. Additional information on reconnaissance and security operations and the PLAA’s intelligence
process can be found in chapter 6.
ORGANIZE THE DEFENSIVE GROUP AND DEPLOY

8-24. The combat power that comprises the defense is organized into a defensive group, the combat group
assigned to the defensive mission. This operational system is built in the same way as any other tactical
operational system, using the CA-BDE as the primary force provider and the combined arms battalion
(CA-BN) as the primary building block. Capabilities are organized into one of four primary groups, each
with a distinct mission: the frontier defense group, the depth defense group, the combat reserve group, and
the cover group. A combat group may contain some or all of these, and it may contain more than one of
each. Additional groups that may be employed include a firepower strike or artillery group, an air defense
group, an electronic and network warfare group, and a combat support group. A specific description of each
of these groups can be found in chapter 4. In addition, the commander may designate teams for specific
missions, such as antitank, mobile artillery, obstacle construction or reduction, or rear defense.
8-25. Once the defensive group is assembled, groups deploy to the defensive zone. This action should be
undertaken quickly, allowing time for adjustments and amendments to orders after the groups reach their
initial positions. The cover group typically has the mission of scouting, occupying, and securing the
defensive area, enabling the other groups to move into place quickly and safely. Any enemy reconnaissance
or scouting elements in the defensive area must be aggressively attacked and driven off, ensuring secrecy of
movement and disposition of friendly forces. These operations are likely performed in tandem with
ongoing friendly reconnaissance efforts.
8-26. Secrecy of movement is a critical consideration as follow-on friendly forces occupy their assigned
defensive positions. Commanders must always assume that the enemy is watching, and they should employ
concealment and deception as much as possible to confuse or deceive the enemy. Commanders must also
be aware of the threats posed by artillery bombardments, airborne or ground-based raids, and information
operations efforts targeting the combat group throughout this phase.
8-27. Engineering construction begins immediately as the groups enter the defensive position. Engineer
priorities are determined primarily by terrain, enemy capabilities, and time available. A hasty defense may
only allow simple structures, such as improvised obstacles and firing positions. With more time available, a
8-8 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Defensive Actions
more elaborate defense may allow for extensive tunnels, entrenchments, field structures, permanent
shelters, and fallback positions. The PLAA emphasizes the use of irregular units such as local militia and
local populations for engineering construction efforts. All engineering efforts focus heavily on KDPs.
Figure 8-2 depicts reconnaissance and deployment activities occurring in the defensive zone.
Figure 8-2. Reconnaissance and deployment in the defensive zone (example)
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 8-9

Chapter 8
SPOIL THE ENEMY’S PREPARATIONS

8-28. Once the reconnaissance efforts determine the enemy’s presence and disposition, the defensive group
commences efforts to spoil the enemy’s offensive plan. In most cases, this phase involves two primary
efforts: spoiling attacks and firepower assaults. Ideally, these efforts are conducted concurrently to achieve
a combined-arms effect. Spoiling efforts are not intended to be decisive; instead, they are seen as enabling
the main defensive efforts and eventual counterattacks.
8-29. Spoiling attacks, also called harassing attacks or harassing assaults, are limited-scope offensive
actions that are designed to disrupt enemy movement and cohesion, reduce enemy morale, develop PLAA
situational understanding, and manipulate the enemy commander’s decision making. Spoiling attacks may
take the form of offensive ground action, air attack, or information attack. Spoiling attacks target key
enemy formations or capabilities, attempting to engage them when they are in a vulnerable state, such as
during movement. Ground spoiling attacks often employ hit-and-run tactics—such as raids—and
commanders are warned not to become decisively engaged. Enemy assets such as communications systems,
high-value weapons systems, and LOCs are the most prized targets. Forces that conduct spoiling attacks are
often expected to act independently, and thus they must be skilled and flexible. Objectives for spoiling
attacks may include disrupting enemy command and communication to forward units, inflicting casualties,
destroying or neutralizing key systems, and slowing the enemy’s advance. Spoiling attacks occur
throughout the defensive operation, and they are of particular importance in defeating any enemy breaches
of the main defensive line.
8-30. Firepower assaults employ artillery groups or firepower strike groups to target enemy offensive
forces with destructive massed fire. The firepower assault may employ a firepower assault zone, a
predetermined and pretargeted area serving as an ambush point. If employed, firepower assault zones
should be located along the enemy’s expected avenue of approach or on terrain the enemy is likely to
occupy. A firepower assault seeks to decimate the enemy formation when it is most vulnerable, either
during movement or during a halt in open terrain. The best practice is to integrate the firepower assault with
other attacks, particularly spoiling attacks by reconnaissance forces, to maximize the accuracy of fire and
the combined-arms effect of multidimensional threats. Commanders must, however, ensure that the groups
that conduct the firepower assault do not expose themselves to enemy counterfire unnecessarily, as it is
likely that the enemy plans for a counterfire attack once friendly artillery forces are discovered.
Commanders may employ mobile artillery in the firepower assault role or may rely on hardening or
deception to protect their artillery force. Figure 8-3 on depicts a defensive group conducting spoiling
operations against an upcoming enemy attack.
8-10 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Defensive Actions
Figure 8-3. Spoil (example)
RESIST THE ENEMY’S ASSAULTS

8-31. The main defensive effort occurs when the enemy commences its main assault through the defensive
zone. The enemy’s attack consists of a mixture of maneuver, firepower, and information attack,
coordinated and synchronized to overwhelm, destroy, or force the withdrawal of friendly units. The focus
of the resistance phase is to blunt the enemy’s attack; sap its combat power, cohesion, and morale; and put
it in a vulnerable position. This allows the defender to seize the initiative through aggressive counterattacks
and then transition to the offense. The PLAA anticipates fighting throughout the depth of the defensive
zone, and it offers three guidelines to inform commanders during this critical phase: wage simultaneous
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 8-11

Chapter 8
resistance, prioritize combat strength, and use proper countermeasures. Figure 8-4 depicts the defensive
group resisting the enemy’s initial assault.
Wage Simultaneous Resistance

8-32. The enemy’s attack will likely target the full depth of the defensive zone with depth assaults,
flanking assaults, and encircling maneuvers. These various actions must be resisted using a comprehensive
and integrated approach. Resistance may take the form of symmetric, force-on-force actions—such as
meeting an armored thrust with an armored reserve—or it may be asymmetric, such as using
electromagnetic attack to confuse and neutralize an enemy air depth assault. Commanders must anticipate
heavy enemy activity within the defensive zone and skillfully and flexibly move their own forces—taking
advantage of interior LOCs and knowledge of terrain—to meet and defeat the various enemy actions.
Commanders employ two primary actions during resistance: blocking actions and repositioning actions.
8-33. Blocking actions involve a group or unit standing fast and tenaciously defending a specified position,
with the intent to stop or delay an enemy action, reduce enemy cohesion, and inflict casualties on enemy
units. Blocking actions should only be conducted when necessary, or when terrain or other factors make
such actions highly advantageous. Blocking actions are to be performed judiciously, as they make a unit or
group vulnerable to encirclement, isolation, and firepower attack. Blocking actions should be supported
with firepower, obstacles, and reinforcements. They are ultimately intended to enable follow-on actions,
such as counterattacks, and they are described in greater detail in paragraphs 8-73 through 8-75.
8-34. Repositioning actions are movements conducted by units or groups during the course of the defense.
Commanders mix repositioning and blocking actions to conduct a tenacious withdrawal, ceding
unimportant territory to the enemy only after inflicting heavy casualties. Skillful defense alternates
blocking and repositioning in such a way that resistance is continuous and no unit is ever exposed to enemy
assault. Repositioning actions are described in greater detail in paragraphs 8-76 through 8-78.
Prioritize Combat Strength

8-35. Effective resistance is underpinned by effective prioritization of combat resources. This guideline
references the broader People’s War principle of prioritization, but with a focus on defensive action. As a
defensive group is assaulted through multiple domains and from multiple directions, the commander makes
decisions about how and where to commit reserves and reposition units. Enemy thrusts should be met with
the least force believed necessary. This differs significantly from offensive actions, where commanders are
encouraged to concentrate as much combat power as possible against key objectives. Commanders should
seek to minimize movement—especially long-distance movement—during critical phases of resistance. If a
unit must move long distances, it is essentially unavailable as a fighting force. Commanders must prioritize
the value of moving a unit during a defensive action, carefully considering the loss of the unit’s combat
power during the movement period and the vulnerability of the unit to enemy action. Effective
prioritization is largely underwritten by high-quality, comprehensive reconnaissance and intelligence, as
quality information tells the commander how and where to prioritize.
Use Proper Countermeasures

8-36. Even the best defensive action is inherently reactionary. The defensive group must assess and react to
the enemy, rather than dictating the fight on its own terms. This means that defensive combat places a
higher premium on employing the right tactical means to counter enemy capabilities. Commanders must
have a clear picture of the enemy capabilities they are facing and build operational systems to effectively
counter their anticipated opponent. So too must commanders rapidly and effectively react to the enemy’s
actions as the situation unfolds, deploying friendly combat power to counteract enemy penetrations and
assaults.
8-12 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Defensive Actions
Figure 8-4. Resist (example)
COUNTERATTACK
8-37. The counterattack, also called the mobile assault, is typically the culmination of a defensive
operation. It requires the defensive group to mass combat power and conduct an aggressive, decisive attack
against one or more enemy units, with the intent of disintegrating the enemy attack and forcing the enemy
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 8-13

Chapter 8
to either rapidly retreat or face annihilation. Counterattacks happen throughout a defensive action on
smaller scales, but the decisive counterattack at the tactical level likely involves either the depth defense
group or the combat reserve group conducting multidimensional penetrations of an enemy assault force.
These penetrations target weak or exposed flanks of the enemy formation.
8-38. The timing and axis of the counterattack is critical. It should be timed around the moment when the
enemy attack has culminated, and enemy forces are possibly overextended, low on supplies, and beyond
their supporting or security elements. Resolute defense throughout the frontal blocking zone and the
frontier defense zone should create favorable conditions for the attack, magnifying the combat power of the
counterattack force. A counterattack should include one or more of four phases, which may be concurrent
or in varying order. Figure 8-5 depicts a defensive group counterattacking the enemy.
Concentrate Fire
8-39. Concentration of firepower is often the touchstone that begins the counterattack in earnest.
Commanders may use any combination of indirect fire—possibly in the form of a firepower assault—direct
fire, and information attack, concentrated on the most powerful part of the enemy’s formation. In many
situations this will be the enemy’s armored spearhead, and so the concentration of fire should involve a
large number of antitank weapons. Concentrated fire disrupts the enemy’s attack, creates casualties, and
destroys key weapons systems, opening a window of opportunity for the counterattack to break through the
enemy’s exposed flank.
Seal Off Breakthroughs

8-40. Before a counterattack commences, any significant or dangerous enemy breakthroughs in the
counterattack zone must be neutralized or defeated. Enemy forces that have achieved significant
penetrations in the defensive zone can threaten the counterattack with defeat or destruction. Breakthroughs
can be sealed off using firepower or direct attack, or the can be neutralized by attacking enemy LOCs.
Sealing off breakthroughs does not mean that the enemy units must be annihilated; it only ensures that they
cannot threaten the counterattack force as it conducts its mission. Once the counterattack is successful, the
remaining enemy units will be isolated and encircled, enabling their destruction or forcing their withdrawal.
Use Multi-domain or Multidirectional Assault

8-41. The decisive phase of the counterattack should take the form of a small-scale offensive operation,
and it is informed by most of the principles and guidelines outlined in chapter 7. Ideally, a commander
executes an attack that involves penetrations from multiple directions and through multiple domains,
preventing the enemy from massing combat power and confusing it about the disposition and axis of the
main effort. Direct assaults on the enemy’s front are the preferred method of attack, as this fixes the enemy
and immediately targets its most valuable units. Pincer movements are considered a secondary approach,
and while they may be effective at targeting the enemy’s exposed flank, they require longer movement and
more time, which exposes the counterattack force to enemy artillery or direct attack. Firepower assaults can
cut off or block access to the rear, while blocking units work to stop further penetrations. The assault
targets the enemy’s center of gravity, attempting to isolate enemy units throughout the defensive zone.
Hold Key Defense Points

8-42. As the counterattack commences, commanders assess its effectiveness. If it is effective, they may
order a continuation of the attack or consolidation of the gains. If it is ineffective, they may order the
counterattacking force to assume a defensive posture and resist any further enemy advances. Regardless of
effectiveness, commanders must immediately deploy the defensive group to retain KDPs, be they still held
by friendly forces or recently retaken. Commanders should anticipate the enemy sending reinforcements or
conducting supporting attacks promptly after it recognizes the threat of the counterattack. Having the
defensive group deployed and in place to block these attacks ensures that the gains achieved by the
counterattack are not lost.
8-14 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Defensive Actions
Figure 8-5. Counterattack (example)
CONSOLIDATE OR WITHDRAW
8-43. During or after the counterattack commanders face a critical decision on how to proceed with the
defensive battle. If the counterattack succeeded in decimating, blunting, or neutralizing the enemy assault,
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 8-15

Chapter 8
commanders may consider ordering a follow-on attack into the enemy’s depth. Alternatively, they may
consider holding fast, reinforcing and entrenching the current position to better resist any further enemy
assaults. Commanders must consider casualties sustained, the overall readiness of available troops, the
vulnerability of the enemy, and the advantages gained by each course of action when making a decision to
continue advancing or hold in place.
8-44. If the counterattack was unsuccessful or the defensive group suffered serious casualties during the
counterattack, the commander may order a withdrawal. The withdrawal should be orderly and decisive,
with available groups conducting alternating retrograde operations and blocking actions. No unit should
ever be exposed to an enemy pursuit attack. The deployment of air defense groups to deter or defeat attack
by air is particularly important. Units are particularly vulnerable to firepower attack during withdrawals.
Concealment and cover are important for the unit, and the firepower or artillery groups must prioritize
counterfire operations if any unit is in the process of withdrawal. Figure 8-6 depicts the defensive group
consolidating its position after a successful counterattack.
8-45. The PLAA prescribes a rough order of precedence for a combat group’s withdrawal. First, the cover
group exits the frontal blocking zone. Next, all support and logistics groups exit the rear area. Then the
main body and firepower and artillery groups exit the frontier defense zone. This leaves the combat reserve,
or rear group, to conduct a rearguard or screening action in the rear defense zone, ensuring that all other
groups move to safety. The combat group commander must designate an assembly area that is both
accessible and defensible, then rapidly establish a new defensive zone and begin entrenching as quickly as
possible. A detailed description of a withdrawal action can be found in paragraphs 8-88 through 8-91.
8-16 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Defensive Actions
Figure 8-6. Consolidate (example)
TYPES OF DEFENSIVE OPERATIONS

8-46. The PLAA recognizes several types of defensive operations: positional, mobile, hasty, urban,
diversionary, and specialized. These types of operations are described in paragraphs 8-47 through 8-69
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 8-17

Chapter 8
POSITIONAL DEFENSIVE OPERATIONS

8-47. Positional defensive operations are defensive operations that rely on a strongly entrenched position,
defensive terrain advantages, obstacles, and stubborn resistance. They are static in nature, and they are not
designed to enable the rapid relocation of troops. Positional operations are not considered decisive, and
they should always be executed as part of a wider defensive action. Positional actions defend a key piece of
terrain or other target, delay or block enemy forces moving through an area, deplete an enemy’s strength by
forcing it to assault entrenched positions, or buy time and decision space for offensive operations in other
areas. Figures 8-7 through 8-10 on pages 8-19 through 8-22 depict a positional defensive operation.
8-48. When planning a positional defensive operation, three key principles should be considered: keep the
defensive zone small, prepare sufficiently, and emphasize holding positions. These principles are described
in paragraphs 8-49 through 8-51.
Keep the Defensive Zone Small

8-49. Forces conducting a positional defensive operation are not expected to move with the same rapidity
as those conducting more mobile forms of defense. This, in turn, means that concentrating combat power
with a positional defensive group is more time consuming and difficult than with a mobile group. Positional
defensive operations must ensure adequate concentration of combat power through a higher density of
troops—rather than relying on mobility—which requires defensive zones to be smaller relative to defensive
group size. This restricts the enemy’s ability to maneuver, enhances the mutually supporting effects of
defensive entrenchments, and enables defensive groups to operate with greater independence in the face of
an enemy assault.
Prepare Sufficiently
8-50. A positional defensive battle should be anticipated and carefully planned. Commanders must give
subordinate units sufficient time to plan their defense and then build the necessary fortified positions on
KDPs. Higher echelon defensive plans must account for the time necessary to prepare a defensive zone,
and delaying actions may be needed to create the necessary time and decision space. Defensive group
commanders should employ entrenchments, fortifications, and underground facilities, coupled with
integrated firepower and information attack. Building these systems and creating these plans takes a
considerable amount of time.
Emphasize Holding Positions

8-51. A positional defensive operation should be built around holding strong pieces of terrain, even when
outnumbered, under assault, or faced with intense firepower attack. Holding these pieces of terrain forces
the enemy to commit and exhaust more and more troops in its attempt to break the defensive zone. With
sufficient time and quality planning, a defensive group commander can create a comprehensive, in-depth
plan that can hold strong positions, attrit the enemy, reduce the enemy’s morale and cohesion, and buy
other commanders in the area time and decision space.
8-18 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Defensive Actions
Figure 8-7. Positional defense (example part 1 of 4)
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 8-19

Chapter 8
8-20 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Defensive Actions
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 8-21

Chapter 8
MOBILE DEFENSIVE OPERATIONS

8-52. Mobile defensive operations are defensive operations that mix blocking and restraining actions with
counterattacks, seeking to achieve a decisive defeat of an opponent’s assault. Mobile defensive operations
employ armored or mechanized forces that are able to maneuver and concentrate combat power decisively
at key points throughout the defensive zone. Firepower, information warfare, and engineer support are all
carefully integrated to support the main counterattack effort. The mobile defensive operation seeks to halt
the enemy assault, isolate attacking enemy units, then either annihilate them or force their withdrawal.
Figures 8-11 through 8-14 on pages 8-24 through 8-27 depict a mobile defensive operation.
8-53. When planning a mobile defensive operation, five key principles should be considered: plan and
execute quickly and decisively, assume a large defensive zone, focus on the offense, emphasize flexibility
and mobility, and assume command and communication challenges. These principles are described in
paragraphs 8-54 through 8-58.
8-22 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Defensive Actions
Plan and Execute Quickly and Decisively

8-54. Unlike positional defensive operations, mobile defensive operations are often opportunistic or hasty
in nature, as they are fundamentally reactionary to enemy actions. This requires mobile defensive actions to
be planned and executed on a much shorter timeline than positional defenses. Commanders must be
flexible in their deployments and plan in advance as much as possible. They also must allow for changes to
occur during the battle and allow the plan to adapt to the situation. Plans should, at a minimum, instruct
lower-echelon units about key defensive positions, the main direction of defense, and how to employ key
countermeasures to enemy actions.
Assume a Large Defensive Zone

8-55. Mobile defensive operations should be conducted in a relatively wide geographic area. This forces
the enemy to disperse its forces—making its intentions clearer earlier in the battle—and takes full
advantage of the mobility of the defensive group. A larger relative area decreases the value of key
defensive positions and makes defensive engineering more challenging and less effective. This, in turn,
means that the bulk of the defense in a mobile operation falls to mobile units and their ability to concentrate
combat power. The key competency of a mobile defense is the rapid transfer of combat strength, along with
the ability to gracefully fall back or aggressively attack, as required.
Focus on the Offense

8-56. The mobile defensive operation, though defensive at the operational level, is built around attack at
the tactical level. An effective mobile defense emphasizes offensive operations, using the bulk of available
combat power on attacks and counterattacks and seeking a decisive engagement with the enemy assault
force. Other activities in the defensive zone should revolve around the decisive action by either
manipulating enemy forces or providing direct support to the main counterattack. Mobile defensive
operations must also employ a variety of combat actions, such as raids, ambushes, screens, firepower
assaults, and information warfare to best support the counterattack effort.
Emphasize Flexibility and Mobility

8-57. The success of a mobile defensive operation is contingent on the defensive group massing combat
power at key times and places. Considering the large geographic area of the defensive zone and the
assumption that the enemy possesses greater local combat power than the defensive group, a combination
of flexibility and mobility are required to achieve decisive concentration. Commanders must be prepared to
shift their center of gravity and conduct offensive actions across the flanks, depth, or rear areas of enemy
formations, or anywhere else within their defensive zone. Defensive groups in mobile operations are often
ad hoc or informal. Troops and units must be comfortable with the rapid forming and reforming of combat
groups to fit the needs of the immediate situation.
Assume Command and Communication Challenges

8-58. The combination of hasty action, a large defensive area, ad-hoc combat groups, and aggressive
enemy actions make command and communication of a mobile defensive operation very difficult.
Commanders must approach this issue with two different solutions: First, they must train their subordinates
to act appropriately in the absence of orders or direct connection with their leaders. Second, they must
maximize efforts to establish and sustain command and communication structure throughout the defensive
area. Despite these efforts, commanders must assume that subordinate units will have to fight when isolated
or out of contact, and they must provide their subordinates with the means to conduct operations without
direct communication.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 8-23

Chapter 8
Figure 8-11. Mobile defense (example part 1 of 4)
8-24 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Defensive Actions
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 8-25

Chapter 8
8-26 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Defensive Actions
HASTY DEFENSIVE OPERATIONS

8-59. Hasty defensive operations are those defensive operations conducted under emergent circumstances
and on a short timeline, usually in direct response to enemy actions. Hasty operations attempt to make best
use of terrain and reconnaissance and security operations—coupled with surprise and deception—to defeat,
neutralize, or blunt enemy advances. Hasty operations may take the form of abbreviated positional
operations, mobile operations, or contain characteristics of both, depending on available forces, terrain, and
enemy actions.
8-60. Hasty defensive operations are highly dependent on two key actions: extensive reconnaissance and
security and the seizing and fortification of key terrain. The importance of reconnaissance is enhanced due
to the shortened timeline available for planning and preparation, as the defensive group has less time to
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 8-27

Chapter 8
plan for enemy contingencies and entrench, while security efforts can delay the enemy assault and buy the
defensive group additional time for preparation. Seizing key terrain in the defensive zone is a relatively
simple and time-saving method for increasing the overall combat effectiveness of the defensive group. Key
terrain should be selected with a view toward simple and aggressive defensive actions, such as ambushes.
Once terrain is taken, entrenchments should be constructed using whatever time and resources are
available.
URBAN DEFENSIVE OPERATIONS

8-61. Urban defensive operations are seen as optimal in many ways, but they also provide some unique
challenges for the defensive group. The urban defense is conducted using the same principles as other
forms of defense: building the defensive group and establishing the primary direction of defense and KDPs.
Urban terrain is characterized by buildings, streets, and subsurface facilities; planners must account for and
make best use of these terrain features when planning an urban defensive operation.
8-62. Reconnaissance in an urban defensive zone concentrates on mapping the characteristics of buildings,
streets, and subsurface developments. Buildings should be assessed for strength, vulnerability, and
defensibility. Streets are assessed for their effects on mobility and how they might be used by an enemy
assault force. Underground facilities are carefully scouted and assessed for use as fortifications and as
movement corridors; they must also be assessed as potential vulnerabilities. If the defensive operation is
anticipated to be lengthy, scouting must also assess long-term support assets, such as water availability and
supply-line viability in and out of the defensive area.
8-63. The main defensive direction in an urban defensive operation should prioritize the use of strong
blocking positions that can control wide areas of terrain in the defensive zone. In most cases this implies
large, strong buildings that can be further fortified or hardened. Elevation is seen as a key enabler in urban
defense. If a force controls the high ground, that force can command a large physical area while being
difficult to detect and engage. Key defensive positions should be spread out, but they should be mutually
supporting. Support points, consisting of supply, fallback, and firepower positions, are established to the
rear of key defensive positions. Multiple defensive positions are supported by each support point, and they
are linked by communications trenches or other concealed and protected methods of transit.
8-64. Urban defensive operations are more likely to involve complications, such as the presence of
civilians, militia, or security forces. Commanders must plan for the various problems associated with
civilian presence while integrating militia and security forces into the defensive plan. They must also make
clear to subordinates the rules governing the presence and treatment of civilians in the defensive zone.
Security forces may be leveraged to assist with the removal or protection of civilians.
8-65. Obstructions and obstacles are often more effective in urban areas due to the canalizing effects of
streets and the lack of available alternative routes. The defensive group should make best use of obstacles
to manipulate enemy movement, encouraging the enemy to overextend past its support and leave itself
vulnerable to counterattack. Obstacles should be carefully integrated with firepower. Firepower that is
optimized to engage an enemy attempting to breach an obstacle creates a powerful combined arms effect. It
should also be used to dominate key avenues of approach. Firepower in urban terrain is often magnified by
the close proximity of the combatants and the canalizing nature of the terrain, but it may be degraded by the
wide availability of cover and protection offered by strong buildings and underground facilities. Figure
8-15 depicts an urban defensive operation.
8-28 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Defensive Actions
Figure 8-15. Urban defensive operation (example)
DIVERSIONARY DEFENSIVE OPERATIONS

8-66. Diversionary defensive operations include the multitude of different temporary or hasty missions
conducted both in and out of the defensive zone to surprise, confuse, frustrate, or degrade enemy forces.
Missions under the diversionary umbrella include screens and covers, counterreconnaissance efforts,
ambushes, blocking actions, and raids. Diversionary operations are defined by their purpose. They are
intended to force the enemy to deploy, deplete enemy supplies, inflict casualties, slow the enemy advance,
suppress enemy reconnaissance, and provide early warning for the main defensive group. They are
typically conducted far in front of the main defensive zone. The deeper the penetration into the enemy’s
territory, the more effective these operations tend to be.
8-67. Depth is the key principle during diversionary defensive operations. Deploying in depth enhances the
effects of frustration and confusion upon the enemy, as it requires enemy forces to continually fight through
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 8-29

Chapter 8
stubborn resistance. Diversionary operations may be along the main direction of defense, or they may be
deployed in alternative directions as a means of screening or covering the main defensive effort.
Countermobility and firepower are key enablers of diversionary operations, as they magnify the combat
power of the diversionary force without requiring additional troops.
8-68. Commanders of diversionary forces probably have significant latitude in their decision making. If the
diversionary force encounters a strong enemy force, it may decide to remain concealed and reconnoiter the
enemy, or it may decide to carefully harass the enemy formation. If the diversionary force encounters a
weaker enemy, the defending unit may aggressively assault the enemy, seeking to inflict significant
casualties or spoil the enemy’s movement. Diversionary forces may also be employed by the defensive
group to counterattack on the enemy’s flanks as the enemy penetrates forward defensive positions. In
general, diversionary forces should avoid being decisively engaged, always maintaining the ability to
rapidly and safely withdraw to deeper defensive positions.
OPERATIONS UNDER SPECIAL CONDITIONS

8-69. The PLAA recognizes eight special defensive operations conditions: hills, mountains, jungles,
extreme cold, deserts, rivers, swamps, and nighttime. Each of these conditions requires modifications and
adaptations to baseline operations. Primary considerations include ensuring that troops are properly
prepared for the special condition—with cold weather gear or bridging equipment, for example. Units
should also train for potential special conditions that may occur in their combat area.
DEFENSIVE TACTICS
8-70. The PLAA uses several different tactics during defensive operations, with their use informed by the
principles discussed earlier in this chapter. Each of these may be employed by virtually any echelon, and
each may be used independently, sequentially, or simultaneously. Figures in this section depict genericized
units conducting simplified variants of the defensive tactics against a notional enemy.
COUNTERRECONNAISSANCE
8-71. Counterreconnaissance as a tactic crosses operations of all types, and it is critical in each. Effective
counterreconnaissance during defensive operations denies the enemy knowledge about the disposition and
strength of friendly forces, the axis and timing of counterattacks, and the locations of key objectives.
Counterreconnaissance may be active—attempting to aggressively defeat enemy reconnaissance efforts
using direct action against reconnaissance elements—or it may be passive, using techniques such as
camouflage, concealment, or decoys to fool or spoof enemy collection efforts. The best practice is to
employ both active and passive measures in an integrated manner. Active measures deny the enemy
knowledge of friendly forces, while passive measures feed the enemy false or misleading information,
fooling it into making faulty decisions.
8-72. Much of the counterreconnaissance effort is conducted by the cover group, which is likely built
around reconnaissance or other light, mobile forces. These units conduct screening and covering actions
throughout the frontal blocking zone. PLAA reconnaissance units are generally lighter and less powerful
than their Western equivalents, and so they rely more heavily on deception and integrated firepower to
achieve their objectives rather than direct action. Electromagnetic attack and defense must be carefully
integrated into the counterreconnaissance mission, and information warfare may be used to deceive the
enemy. Counterreconnaissance must be practiced throughout the depth of the battlefield, as the enemy has a
variety of reconnaissance and intelligence capabilities capable of collecting at any point and in any set of
conditions.
BLOCKING ACTIONS
8-73. Blocking defensive actions are those actions that place a unit or group in a relatively static position,
seeking to stop an enemy advance, attrit an enemy formation, or reduce enemy strength and cohesion
through tenacious defending. Blocking actions are generally not decisive, but they are used to complement
other actions on the battlefield by occupying enemy forces or slowing enemy advances.
8-30 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Defensive Actions
8-74. Blocking actions make less use of depth than other defensive actions. Commanders executing a
blocking action should seek to concentrate as much combat power as possible along the main line of
defense, using terrain, obstacles, and entrenchments to enhance the strength of the position. Blocking
actions are fundamentally less reliant on mobility and rapid reaction than other actions, and instead they
rely heavily on terrain advantage, firepower, and brave defense to effectively resist the enemy.
Commanders should generally consider blocking actions to be temporary in nature, as a static defense is
always vulnerable to being overwhelmed, encircled, or isolated. Groups executing a blocking action should
be prepared to retrograde if necessary, and commanders should make rear guards or reinforcements
available if possible.
8-75. Blocking actions must make best use of firepower and obstacles to overcome the disadvantage of
immobility. Artillery should be pre-registered and carefully integrated into the overall defensive plan.
Firepower and obstacles should be employed cooperatively to create a protective boundary of firepower
ambushes around vulnerable spots in the defensive line.
REPOSITIONING ACTIONS
8-76. Repositioning actions are movements conducted to shift combat power during a defensive operation.
These movements are intended to move combat power to blocking, counterattack, or fallback positions. As
with blocking actions, commanders must use repositioning actions judiciously, as units on the move are
more vulnerable to attack and firepower assault. Repositioning actions should be concealed if at all
possible; movements at nighttime or during periods of bad weather are optimal. Repositioning actions
should be performed rapidly with security provided to the main body, especially while it is in transit.
Security must involve counterreconnaissance, counterfire, and screen or cover activity to counter direct
action.
8-77. Repositioning actions are done for one of three reasons: to reposition a unit to a new, stronger, or
more defensible blocking position; to attempt to shift the enemy’s focus from one axis of defense to
another; or to enable an adjacent unit to move, consolidate, or retreat. Repositioning actions are employed
in careful coordination with blocking, screening, and covering actions to create an integrated, in-depth
defensive effort. Commanders make use of repositioning actions to gracefully retrograde, ensuring that
units on the move are well protected. Once a unit or group completes a repositioning action, it immediately
converts to a strong defensive posture, enabling adjacent units or groups to conduct their own repositioning
actions.
8-78. If the defense must retrograde into the deepest areas of the defensive zone, the defensive group must
reposition its firepower and support units and its forward defensive groups. Commanders use the same
principles when displacing rear area units as with forward units, while accounting for the former’s lesser
mobility and greater vulnerability. Air defense coverage becomes critical in rear areas, as rear area units on
the move are highly vulnerable to air attack. Air defense coverage must be comprehensive and makes use
of leapfrog or bounding overwatch techniques to maintain continuous coverage over moving units.
BREAKOUT
8-79. Breakouts are conducted when a unit or group is encircled, flanked, or in danger of being encircled.
The PLAA believes that most mechanized opponents will seek to encircle and isolate units or groups, using
many of the same tactics and techniques the PLAA itself employs. This, in turn, has caused it to emphasize
the importance of a unit being able to break out of an encircled or isolated situation while preserving
manpower and avoiding destruction or surrender. Figure 8-16 on page 8-32 depicts a unit conducting a
breakout action.
8-80. A breakout is as much a mental activity as it is a physical activity. Commanders must fight against
the tendency of their troops to become passive, afraid, or despondent when facing long odds or a difficult
situation. Encircled units will practically always be heavily outnumbered and outgunned. Through the use
of skillful command, rapid maneuver, and careful deception, an encircled unit masses combat power at a
weak spot in the enemy’s position and, with the aid of other nearby units, groups, and systems, breaches the
encirclement and moves quickly to a secure defensive position.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 8-31

Chapter 8
Figure 8-16. Breakout (example)
8-81. Encircled units have likely endured heavy multi-domain firepower assaults and attacks through
various flanks on the ground. As such, an encircled unit is likely significantly weakened and damaged,
which presents a major challenge to the commander. The nature of the enemy’s attacks will be
unpredictable and constant, making extensive planning an impossibility. Preparations for a breakout are
thus necessarily hasty, and commanders must assume a higher degree of risk when planning deployments
and maneuvers.
8-82. The most critical element of a successful breakout is coordination with supporting groups and
units—particularly firepower groups. This too presents a challenge, both to the encircled commander and to
any supporting units. The enemy will certainly attempt to target and suppress any communications between
an encircled unit and its potential support to ensure its isolation and preclude any attempts at relief.
Commanders may employ creative or subtle methods for coordinating a breakout action. They may also
encourage units to act independently. While this may decrease the concentration of combat power, it may
enable a subordinate commander to effectively seize an opportunity and the initiative that otherwise passes
the unit by.
8-32 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Defensive Actions
8-83. The breakout action begins with rapid planning. The encircled commander should attempt to contact
all subordinate groups and units to achieve some level of integration and coordination of purpose. Plans
should be simple and easy to understand and transmit. Commanders at all levels must place a high premium
on concealing their actual intentions, as they are likely under intense reconnaissance and surveillance.
Deceiving the enemy about the time and place of the breakout effort is a key enabler.
8-84. The encircled commander’s first objective is to build a highly defensible position. A strong defensive
base helps to resist enemy penetrations and provides the anchor for an eventual breakout assault.
Commanders take advantage of interior lines and strong terrain to create an in-depth, 360-degree defensive
perimeter. Hasty fortifications and entrenchments should be constructed by all units and groups within the
defensive area. The commander organizes the encircled units into two primary groups: a frontier group that
forms the main defensive line, and a reserve or assault group that conducts the actual breakout attack.
8-85. Coordination with external support should be attempted and employed wherever possible. The
coordination priority for an encircled unit is firepower. A firepower assault may disrupt, disable, or blunt
the enemy’s assaults and create useable breaches in the enemy’s encirclement. Firepower coordination is
very difficult for an encircled unit; however, and commanders should strive to keep firepower planning as
simple as possible. Intricate firepower schemes are of little use; instead, commanders of assisting units
should employ massed area fires in simple phased schemes, placing the onus on the encircled unit to make
best use of the firepower assault. Adjacent assault, security, or reconnaissance units may also assist the
encircled unit by conducting demonstrations, feints, or penetrations of the enemy’s assault force.
Coordination with these units is likely difficult or impossible, so much responsibility lies with the
individual group commanders to exercise their discretion in assisting the encircled unit.
8-86. After encircled commanders establish a strong central defensive position, they gather combat power
from the reserve group and establishes the axis of the breakout assault. Deception and concealment are
paramount during this phase, as the enemy will attempt to discover the disposition of any breakout attempt
and destroy it with firepower or ground assault. A breakout attack should take the form of multiple
simultaneous penetrations, each targeting a weak spot along the enemy’s assault force. These penetrations
should be separate, but close enough to be mutually supporting. Commanders should strive to create a
strong unity of purpose and strong morale in the assault group members. Though they are outnumbered,
they can still achieve a victory and save their fellow soldiers if they succeed in breaking out of the
encirclement. Once it is clear that one or more penetrations has succeeded, the commander should feed
additional troops into the successful breach to secure it and enable the remainder of the encircled unit to
withdraw.
8-87. As the remainder of the unit withdraws through the breach, the formerly encircled unit makes use of
the reserve and assault groups, plus any outside assisting units, to secure the egress route. The enemy will
react strongly to the breakout attempt, and it will attempt to counterattack. This counterattack must be
anticipated and defeated with blocking actions and firepower. Movement out of the encirclement may be
slow and arduous due to the condition of the encircled unit. Commanders must give these units as much
time as possible to move to secure areas. The enemy will also enthusiastically pursue the formerly encircled
unit with both air and ground forces. The higher echelon commander must establish a secure defensive
position for the encircled unit to retrograde to, and commanders should launch spoiling attacks and employ
air defense firepower to defeat the pursuit attack.
WITHDRAWAL
8-88. A withdrawal is a carefully organized and planned retreat from a combat situation. There are two
types of withdrawal: active and compelled. Active withdrawal is when a unit or group conducts a
retrograde operation to take up a more defensible position, better defend an adjacent unit under assault,
avoid enemy firepower, or lure the enemy into overextending itself. A compelled withdrawal is a retrograde
operation undertaken in direct response to an enemy attack, when a unit is unable to continue resistance in
its current position or it is unwise to do so.
8-89. Withdrawals are among the riskiest tactical actions. They are nearly always done while in direct
contact with an enemy force, and they are often executed in close proximity to a superior enemy.
Well-executed withdrawals integrate a wide array of combat power and a variety of methods to ensure the
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 8-33

Chapter 8
safety of the withdrawing unit and prevent the enemy from taking advantage of the potential
disorganization and vulnerability in the defensive zone. Active withdrawals tend to be relatively well
planned and carefully executed, while compelled withdrawals may require very fast planning and a great
deal of flexibility in execution.
8-90. The prescribed order for withdrawal ensures that vulnerable friendly units are protected as the
withdrawing unit breaks contact with the enemy. First, the cover and screen forces in the forward zones
withdraw and move quickly to the established assembly point to the rear to establish a new security zone.
Next, the unit’s rear security and logistics elements move, passing lines with the cover and screen forces
and establishing rear security and logistics support at the new assembly area. Next, the main body
withdraws, along with the commander. This is considered the key point in a withdrawal operation, and it
should be timed to take best advantage of weather, time of day, and other environmental factors that help
conceal the main-body movement. This leaves only the rear-guard defensive element and the firepower
element; these groups withdraw last. The firepower element moves quickly to prepared positions in the new
defensive area. The rear-guard element conducts a stubborn retrograde action to delay and disrupt the
enemy’s pursuit attacks.
8-91. Once at the new assembly area, the defensive group rapidly establishes a new defensive area while
simultaneously evacuating casualties, reorganizing subordinate groups, and establishing contact with any
new adjacent units. Figure 8-17 depicts a unit conducting a withdrawal action.
Figure 8-17. Withdrawal (example)
8-34 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Defensive Actions
FIREPOWER DEFENSE
8-92. The PLAA considers the application of firepower to be the primary tool for defeating enemy ground
assaults. Firepower defense is often the trigger for decisive counterattacks, and it has an important
amplifying function for blocking and harassment missions. Firepower is employed throughout the depth of
the battlefield and in all phases of the battle to disrupt the enemy, inflict casualties, defeat penetrations, and
isolate enemy formations.
8-93. Firepower in the defense is provided by the firepower system, which is a mixture of mobile and static
artillery, air defense systems, antitank and other direct fire systems, and attack aircraft. Firepower is
organized both vertically and horizontally. Horizontal firepower seeks to dominate a specific axis—usually
the main direction of defense—with a mixture of artillery, antitank, and mobile firepower. Vertical
firepower seeks to control the sky above the battlefield with air defense firepower and make use of the air
domain through fixed- and rotary-wing firepower systems. Firepower is concentrated against key points at
key times, and it is carefully synchronized with maneuver to mass combat power. Firepower system
effectiveness is enhanced when it is integrated with obstacles.
Firepower Defense Purposes

8-94. The PLAA prescribes six primary reasons for employing firepower in the defense:
z Target enemy information networks and firepower systems.
z Strike assembling or unfolding troops.
z Resist enemy assaults.
z Defeat airborne, infiltration, and flanking maneuvers.
z Defeat penetrations.
z Target the enemy’s depth.
These reasons are described in paragraphs 8-95 through 8-100.
Target Enemy Information Networks and Firepower Systems

8-95. A mixture of artillery, attack aviation, and electronic warfare targets the enemy’s communications
networks and artillery systems. This action seeks to either destroy or disrupt these key enemy systems,
undermining the enemy’s overall offensive action and enabling the decisive counterattack.
Strike Assembling or Deploying Troops

8-96. Enemy troops are at their most vulnerable when deploying and massing for an attack. (The preferred
PLAA term is “unfolding” to mean deploying, but this publication uses deploying to reduce confusion.)
Commanders should seek to target enemy forces during this phase of their offensive action by judiciously
employing blocking forces and carefully timing firepower assaults. A mixture of aerial firepower and
rocket and tube artillery is best suited for this firepower mission.
Resist Enemy Assaults

8-97. Directly supporting friendly units that are resisting enemy assaults throughout the frontier defense
zone is the backbone of the firepower defense mission. These attacks seek to destroy or disrupt enemy
formations before and during contact and provide agile, adaptive support to defensive groups as the battle
evolves. This firepower is provided mainly by massed rocket and tube artillery.
Defeat Airborne, Infiltration, and Flanking Maneuvers

8-98. If mobile reserve units are unavailable, firepower may be used to disrupt or blunt enemy infiltrations
and flanking maneuvers. These enemy units are often exposed, unarmored, or otherwise vulnerable, and
targeting them with massed firepower may defeat them without the need for ground intervention.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 8-35

Chapter 8
Defeat Penetrations
8-99. As the enemy’s assaults begin to penetrate through the frontier defense zone, enemy units will
encounter continued resistance and counterattacks from the depth defense zone. Firepower defense is
employed throughout the depth defense zone to support counterattacks and cause casualties in enemy
assault groups. Much of this firepower is provided by antitank and mobile groups.
Target the Enemy’s Depth

8-100. As the defensive action proceeds, the enemy’s rear area is an important target. Enemy
reinforcements, resupply efforts, fallback positions, command and communication nodes, and security
forces are all commonly located in the enemy’s depth area. A mixture of long-range rocket artillery and
fixed-wing aircraft provides most of the firepower for this mission.
Firepower Defense Capabilities

8-101. The bulk of the firepower system is comprised of four capabilities: artillery, antitank, aerial, and
air defense. These capabilities are described in paragraphs 8-102 through 8-110.
Artillery Firepower
8-102. Artillery firepower consists of indirect firepower systems that deliver either precision or massed
fire throughout the depth of the battlefield. This includes rocket artillery, static and mobile tube artillery,
and mounted and dismounted mortars. Artillery systems are the backbone of the firepower system. The
PLAA envisions a high density of artillery systems to be a decisive capability in most defensive actions.
Artillery systems perform every mission inherent in a firepower defense mission, including ground
targeting, counterreconnaissance, antitank, information attack, counterfire, and air defense via targeting
enemy aircraft support systems and aircraft on the ground.
8-103. If employed intelligently, the wide variety of artillery system capabilities creates a combined-arms
effect, amplifying the effectiveness of each system while offsetting its vulnerabilities or limitations. Long-
range rocket and static tube systems target enemy firepower systems, protecting other friendly firepower
systems from enemy counterfire. They also target the enemy throughout its depth, disrupting operations
and retarding penetrations. Mobile artillery systems respond rapidly to enemy breakthroughs, defending the
heavy, less-mobile systems from enemy ground assault. Mobile mortars are used to flexibly enhance
localized firepower in direct support of ground units, enabling heavier and more destructive systems to
target the enemy’s vulnerable rear areas. Artillery firepower thus creates interlocking rings of firepower
systems that are weighted toward the main direction of defense.
Antitank Firepower
8-104. The deployment of antitank firepower is a critical component of any defensive action against an
opponent equipped with armored or mechanized forces. The PLAA employs an extensive array of antitank
weapons, including assault guns, antitank guided missiles, short-range antitank weapons, and specialized
artillery munitions. The PLAA employs a comparatively low concentration of antitank guided missiles,
relying more heavily on massed short-range antitank weapons than its Western counterparts.
8-105. The employment of antitank firepower is one of the few ways in which the PLAA seeks to
confront an enemy armored force. Commanders are encouraged to mass as much antitank firepower as
possible along the expected avenues of approach for enemy armored forces and integrate the antitank
groups carefully with obstacles and artillery. Concentrated antitank firepower seeks to destroy as many
enemy armored vehicles as possible, with the understanding that the antitank group may suffer heavy
casualties in the process. However, without this concentration of firepower and its associated risks, the
enemy’s armored thrust would likely succeed. Commanders must be aware of the short range of most
PLAA antitank weapons, and they should seek to engage enemy armor at the closest range possible to
maximize their effects.
8-106. Antitank teams must make best use of terrain, entrenchments, and concealment to survive the
enemy’s armored thrust. Though they are attacking the enemy head on, antitank teams should seek to attack
8-36 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Defensive Actions
individual vehicles or small units from the flanks or rear to strike at the weakest portion of the enemy’s
armor. Antitank teams must be protected against the enemy’s inevitable counterstrike, which will employ a
mixture of infantry and artillery. Careful concealment, fortifications, and security support offset the
enemy’s attempts to suppress the antitank group. Tactics such as ambushes and feints can multiply the
effectiveness of the antitank group.
Aerial Firepower
8-107. Aerial firepower is the combined capabilities of fixed-wing attack aircraft and attack helicopters.
These two capabilities are somewhat different but largely complementary. Fixed-wing aircraft can deliver
huge destructive power, but they are typically not well-coordinated with the ground element in contact, and
they are often somewhat limited in their precision and accuracy. Thus, fixed-wing attacks are best
employed targeting enemy rear areas: halting reinforcements, destroying supplies, and disrupting command
and communication. Conversely, attack helicopter assaults are carefully coordinated with ground forces,
and they are precise in their application of firepower. They are, however, far more vulnerable to ground and
air defense firepower. Helicopters are best employed as a highly mobile reserve—targeting enemy flanking
actions, encirclements, and infiltrations, as these are least likely to have substantial air defense capabilities
or defensive counterair support. Commanders may also choose to employ attack helicopters to blunt the
enemy’s decisive attack. While this approach adds to the value of the decisive counterattack, it exposes the
helicopters to more-concentrated air defense firepower.
Air Defense Firepower

8-108. The PLAA is keenly aware of the massive destructive potential present in enemy air attack, and it
places heavy emphasis on defending ground units from enemy aircraft. Air defense firepower is deployed
throughout the defensive area using a tiered and layered approach, and it is enhanced by more-powerful,
longer-range systems that are deployed across the theater. The PLAA employs a wide variety of air defense
systems. Man-portable air defense systems (MANPADS) are widely fielded across formations and groups
of all types. Self-propelled antiaircraft guns (SPAAGs) are widely employed by mechanized and motorized
units, and short- and medium-range missile systems are present at the CA-BDE level. These systems are
employed using a combined arms approach, wherein the capabilities of one system offset the vulnerabilities
of another.
8-109. The PLAA divides target types by altitude. Ultralow-altitude air defense is provided by a
combination of small arms, crew-served weapons, and SPAAGs. Low and medium air defense is provided
by a mixture of SPAAGs, MANPADS, and missiles. High-altitude air defense is provided by theater assets,
such as long-range missiles and fighter aircraft. Tactical echelons are most concerned with ultralow- and
low-altitude threats, such as unmanned aircraft (UA) and helicopters, and seek to defeat these systems
through a mixture of concentrated firepower that defends key assets and air defense ambushes that strike at
enemy aircraft as they move along air routes. Air defense systems are oriented by section, while the
coverage of the defensive zone is ideally all-directional.
8-110. Commanders develop the air defense firepower plan by designating assets to be defended, then
building an air defense group. Commanders must strike the right balance between point defense of targets
and active, offensive-minded air defense activities, such as ambushes. The PLAA seeks to field such a
heavy weight of air defense firepower that the enemy is deterred from even attempting to operate aircraft in
the defensive zone. If this deterrence fails, the air defense group typically has highly permissive rules of
engagement-which may preclude friendly aircraft from entering the defensive zone. This risk profile is
acceptable, as the PLAA believes the enemy to be far more reliant on air power than the PLAA is. The
PLAA would prefer to have no aircraft from either side be present over the defensive zone than have
aircraft from both sides.
DEPTH DEFENSIVE ACTIONS

8-111. Depth defensive actions are those that typically take place in the depth defense zone. These actions
are typically calculated to be decisive, as this is where the enemy’s assault force is often the most
vulnerable and friendly defensive measures are strongest. Depth defensive actions seek to definitively turn
back the enemy assault or—ideally—annihilate the enemy’s assault force. These actions are built around
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 8-37

Chapter 8
the depth defensive group, which typically contains a high proportion of firepower, mobile, or armored
forces able to move quickly and deliver decisive attacks to the flanks or front of an enemy assault force.
This effort is aided by comprehensive security throughout the depth defense zone, spoiling attacks, and
blocking actions.
Depth Security
8-112. Security throughout the depth defense zone may be provided by a number of different units or
groups that either deliberately or dynamically conduct security operations. The cover group, having
withdrawn from the frontal blocking zone, may be called upon to screen or cover the depth group.
Additional security can be provided by the reserve group, scouting groups, or elements of the frontier
defense group. It is critical that the commander make best use of available forces to maximize security.
This will often involve reorganizing or reconstituting disparate groups into useful security forces in an ad
hoc manner. Deliberate security measures may also be employed in the depth defense zone, but planning
must account for the unpredictability of the enemy’s axis of advance into the zone. If the enemy approaches
from an unanticipated direction, security deployments may be useless unless they can be rapidly adapted.
8-113. Security forces may also take on the mission of shaping the enemy’s actions and disposition in
anticipation of the decisive counterattack. Shaping and deception operations attempt to orient the enemy’s
attention away from the axis of the main assault while fixing, deceiving, or blocking enemy forces that
might react to the counterattack. Effects of demonstrations and feints are amplified by information warfare
operations.
8-114. Security operations in the depth defense zone are broadly similar to those in other areas.
Commanders of security groups, however, should be encouraged to defend more stubbornly and attack
more aggressively than commanders of other groups, as the enemy should be prevented from entering the
rear defense zone if at all possible. This may involve security groups being ordered to perform impromptu
or hasty blocking actions, making best use of terrain, firepower, and hasty fortifications to prevent enemy
penetration into rear areas.
Spoiling Attack
8-115. Spoiling attacks are small-scale offensive actions that target an enemy formation’s cohesion and
morale. In the depth defense zone, spoiling attacks are primarily intended to defeat, blunt, or disrupt enemy
maneuvers, such as flanking movements and penetrations, that may affect or threaten the primary
counterattack effort. Spoiling attacks may be conducted by any type of group, but commanders should seek
to avoid siphoning off power from the depth group for nondecisive actions, if at all possible. Spoiling
attacks are discussed in more detail in paragraph 8-29.
Counterattack
8-116. A counterattack is typically the decisive action within the depth defense zone. Ideally, it consists of
an aggressive, concentrated assault by the depth defense group against a vulnerable portion of the enemy’s
assault force. The counterattack should be heavily supported by firepower, information warfare, and
adjacent or supporting units. The counterattack seeks to break the enemy’s cohesion and will, ending its
thrust or penetration, and forcing it to choose between retreat and annihilation. Counterattacks are
discussed in more detail in paragraphs 8-37 through 8-42.
REAR DEFENSE
8-117. The rear defense zone is the deepest and most vulnerable section of the defensive battlefield.
Commanders and defensive groups should strive to prevent significant enemy penetrations into the rear
defense zone. Decisive actions should be planned for more-forward areas. Rear defense operations seek to
blunt, delay, or defeat enemy penetrations, protect critical assets in the rear area, and—if necessary—
enable the retreat or retrograde of vulnerable forces in the rear defense zone. Operations in the rear defense
zone are undertaken by the reserve group, by rear security units—possibly including militia or paramilitary
security units—and by any other groups that have moved into the rear area due to the maneuvers of the
battle.
8-38 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Defensive Actions
8-118. The rear defense zone typically houses important and potentially vulnerable systems and units,
such as artillery groups, air defense groups, supply and logistics groups, command groups, and aviation
groups. These groups are necessarily more vulnerable to direct attack. Protecting them or enabling their
withdrawal is a critical mission in the rear defense zone.
8-119. Rear defense also includes the mission and associated tasks of defeating smaller enemy
penetrations and infiltrations. The enemy seeks to establish a combat presence throughout the depth of the
battlefield, and it will use aerial insertions and ground infiltrations to move small, mobile units into the rear
area. These enemy units are charged with conducting covert direct operations, such as sabotage and raids,
along with reconnaissance and surveillance activities. Rear defense units must be capable of detecting and
neutralizing these enemy forces, either through direct action or deception. Commanders must assess the
threat level in rear areas and ensure that the rear defense or reserve groups have the necessary combat
power available to counter these threats. Figure 8-18 depicts defense operations in the rear defense zone.
Figure 8-18. Rear area defense (example)
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 8-39

Chapter 8
Rear Security
8-120. Security in rear areas is a critical enabler of the overall defense. Numerous key groups and
capabilities reside in the rear defense zone, and the enemy will seek to target these high-value assets with a
mixture of infiltration, penetration—particularly by aerial forces—firepower, and electromagnetic attack.
Security forces in rear areas consist of a mixture of static groups that resolutely defend the most valuable
assets and mobile forces that react rapidly and aggressively to any intrusions.
8-121. Commanders determine the responsibilities of the rear security groups according to the priorities of
the battle and available forces. First, the commander must establish a clear priority of rear area assets.
Those assets most critical to the overall prosecution of the defensive battle are placed highest. Then, a rear
defense zone plan is developed which assigns available troops to defend or secure assets based on priority.
Static or less-mobile groups conduct positional defensive actions. This cohort consists of militia, armed
police, and dismounted soldiers. These groups carefully entrench around their specified defended asset and
work in concert with the commander of the asset to harden the entirety of the critical area. Simultaneously,
more-mobile forces, such as mounted police, mechanized infantry, or armor (if available), are formed into
mobile defensive groups. These groups are placed carefully to best counter anticipated enemy axes of
intrusion and to best support the more-static units in their positional defenses.
8-122. Airborne infiltrations and penetrations should be deterred, neutralized, or attritted by air defense
firepower which is carefully placed along anticipated axes of advance. Ground infiltrations are met
aggressively by mobile defensive groups, then isolated and defeated. Static defensive groups should seek to
fix any enemy attack forces, enabling the mobile defensive groups to attack them along flanks or from the
rear. Enemy firepower attacks in the rear area are countered by concealment, hardening, and aggressive
counterfire operations. A key enabler of counterfire operations in rear areas is breaking the enemy’s linkage
with reconnaissance and surveillance assets as they conduct targeting operations. This can be accomplished
by destroying the platform or neutralizing the communications link between sensor and shooter.
Cover
8-123. Cover missions are of particular importance in the rear defense zone. Commanders employ a
mixture of mobile armored, mounted, and reconnaissance assets using a 360-degree approach, always
assuming that the rear defense zone is vulnerable from any direction. Cover units deploy a sufficient
distance from the main body (between three to five kilometers [km] for a CA-BDE) to give adequate early
warning about enemy activity and grant adequate space for stubborn resistance. Deployments of covering
units focus on anticipated primary axes of advance. Units are carefully integrated with mobile defensive
groups. As a cover unit encounters an enemy penetration, it resists while falling back to defensible terrain,
seeking to fix the enemy intrusion and enable the mobile group to decisively counterattack.
8-124. Cover missions in rear areas must place a high priority on air defense firepower. It is highly likely
that enemy air intrusions will overfly areas occupied by cover forces; this provides an excellent opportunity
to conduct aerial ambushes. Cover groups in rear areas should, if possible, be augmented by MANPADS or
anti-aircraft guns to make best use of this tactic.
8-125. If units are adjacent to one another, commanders between the units should coordinate their
respective rear area cover missions. It may be unnecessary to deploy a cover force facing a friendly unit.
Commanders must be aware of what is to the left and right of their rear defense zone and weigh their
deployments accordingly. Commanders must also deploy cover forces along any seams or borders between
units that may be exploited by enemy infiltration or penetration.
Sabotage and Countermobility

8-126. As rear defense groups may be both outmanned and outgunned in the event of a major enemy
penetration, rear defense zone operations must make best use of both countermobility and sabotage
missions. Countermobility efforts focus on building integrated obstacle systems that slow the enemy, force
it to spread combat power or change axis of advance, or canalize it into ambush or counterattack zones.
Rear defense groups typically have more time and assets to build obstacle systems, and they should rely
heavily upon them to multiply available combat power. Particular attention should be paid to slowing the
8-40 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Defensive Actions
enemy as it enters engagement areas for firepower systems—both direct and indirect—and manipulating
enemy movement to make it more susceptible to spoiling attacks or counterattacks.
8-127. Sabotage is the deliberate, covert targeting and destruction of enemy assets to negatively affect the
enemy’s operations. While sabotage has its place everywhere on the battlefield, its usefulness is most
pronounced in the rear defense zone. Militia, SOF, or paramilitary units are highly effective sabotage
groups, as they can blend into the surrounding environment and subtly sabotage critical assets without
provoking a strong enemy response. Sabotage efforts work in concert with countermobility efforts to slow
the enemy advance through the rear defense zone. These efforts include, but are not limited to destroying
bridges, roads, tunnels, or other mobility corridors; ambushing enemy supply elements as they move to
resupply the enemy attack group; or conducting small ambushes of isolated enemy units. Sabotage teams
should be kept small to minimize their signature, and sabotage efforts should be conducted in a
decentralized manner.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 8-41

Chapter 9
Antiterrorism and Stability Actions
Antiterrorism and stability actions are conducted by a wide variety of different

organizations within the Chinese government, ranging from both the regular and
special operations (SOF) forces of the People’s Liberation Army (PLA), to the
People’s Armed Police (PAP), to national and local law enforcement. These actions
include domestic law enforcement, stability operations, maritime security, and
international stability operations. The PLA broadly categorizes antiterrorism actions
as part of maintaining both domestic and international stability, while PAP stability
actions are largely domestic in nature and focus on internal threats and dissent. This
chapter discusses national-level antiterrorism and stability operations, focusing
predominantly on the mission types undertaken by People’s Liberation Army Army
(PLAA) and PAP units under the control and direction of the national government.
OVERVIEW OF PLAA ANTITERRORISM OPERATIONS

9-1. Terrorism in the modern sense is a relatively new phenomenon in China, and the Chinese
government is still working to establish a clear understanding of what constitutes both domestic and
international acts of terror. The PLA defines terrorism as acts of violence that disrupt national unity and
societal stability by creating casualties or damaging property. This definition is very broad, far more
sweeping and ambiguous—possibly deliberately so—than most Western definitions. This helps to explain
why the PLA views antiterrorist actions as supporting national stability. Instead of only acts of violence
perpetrated to achieve a political or social objective, the Chinese definition also includes acts that threaten
peace and stability within the country. This, in turn, gives Chinese authorities a very broad set of
circumstances in which antiterrorism laws and operations can be applied. The growing Chinese interest in
antiterrorism operations coincides with rising religious and sectarian tensions in specific regions of China
and the rise of global terrorism through the latter half of the 20th century.
THE INFORMATIONIZED BATTLEFIELD AND ANTITERRORISM

OPERATIONS
9-2. The PLA recognizes several characteristics that shape antiterrorism activities: urgency, complexity,
significant effects, joint nature, and asymmetry. As with all other military operations, China is acutely
aware of the changes the informationized battlefield has brought to its antiterrorism mission. Unlike
offensive and defensive actions, however, many of the effects the informationized battlefield has on
antiterrorism operations are related to media, public opinion, public policy, and public perception.
URGENCY
9-3. Antiterrorism missions are urgent in nature. Generally speaking, all of the initiative during a terrorist
attack or campaign rests with the terrorist organization. Proactive antiterrorism efforts are possible, but they
are limited in scope and effectiveness by the difficulties associated with identifying and neutralizing
potential terrorists before they strike. This makes most antiterrorism activities reactionary and highly time
sensitive. Constant vigilance is an important consideration for any unit or organization charged with
conducting an antiterrorism mission, and rapid response to a terrorist event is one of the most important
elements in preventing casualties, maintaining stability, and suppressing further terrorist acts.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 9-1

Chapter 9
COMPLEXITY
9-4. Antiterrorism missions are complex. Terrorist activities are often sophisticated and complex, making
use of media, religious or political factionalism, civilians, and international actors to manipulate the
situation to the terrorists’ advantage. By framing an activity as defending religious freedom or democracy,
terrorists can gain sympathy from other parts of the world. By coercing local civilians, they can conceal
their activities and disrupt efforts to find and suppress them. This requires antiterrorism forces to be equally
sophisticated and highly aware of both the effects their actions have on the global political dialogue and
how they can push back against attempts to manipulate local civilian populations by building trust and
maintaining a strong visible presence.
SIGNIFICANT EFFECTS
9-5. The effects of terrorism can be significant. One of the primary features of terrorism is that the
psychological and political effects of terrorist acts can often far exceed the actual physical effects.
Terrorism is designed to amplify the effects of violence by disrupting lives, bringing anxiety to a society,
and pressuring those conducting antiterrorism efforts into overreacting to real or perceived threats. These
effects may be realized even when a terrorist operation fails. The simple threat may be enough to achieve
the desired effect. Antiterrorism efforts must be valued according to their ability to maintain the long-term
peace, prosperity, and stability of a society, not just in terms of their ability to directly root out and defeat
terrorist elements.
JOINT NATURE
9-6. Antiterrorism operations must be joint in nature. Antiterrorism missions require cooperation between
different elements, perhaps more than for any other security activity. The complexity of terrorist activities,
along with the fact that they often cross international borders, causes a high premium to be placed on open
and effective cooperation. In this context, joint refers to three different forms of cooperation: between the
military, police, and civilian antiterrorism units domestically; between the political and military parts of the
government; and between different international actors.
ASYMMETRY
9-7. Terrorist actions are nearly always asymmetric. Terrorists seldom enjoy any significant parity in
equipment or training to that of their opponents, and they seek to offset these disadvantages by attacking
vulnerable targets from unforeseen directions. Most antiterrorist organizations are also asymmetric in
nature. While they may be formally trained and equipped, most are drawn from police or militia
organizations, and so they do not habitually employ aggressive military tactics. Operational methods used
by both sides are described as irregular. Terrorists employ ambushes, raids, and sabotage, while
antiterrorists employ their own ambushes, along with careful counterattacks, search and annihilate, and
infiltration methods.
PRINCIPLES OF ANTITERRORISM OPERATIONS

9-8. China recognizes the significant challenges that antiterrorism operations face and their significant
differences from more-traditional military operations. As a result, the principles that the PLA and the rest
of the Chinese Security Apparatus apply to antiterrorism operations are unique and much more subtle than
those that apply to more-symmetric kinds of actions.
ACTIVE PREVENTION
9-9. One of the most insidious elements of terrorism is that terrorist actions can still achieve much or all
of their desired effects even when the mission itself fails. Terrorist acts can also target a virtually infinite
number of different elements of a society, from the military, to education, to infrastructure, to government,
to simple random targets. The only sure way to eliminate the terrorist threat is to suppress it when it is still
in the embryonic stage. This requires antiterrorism forces to take constant, targeted preventative measures
in order to identify and suppress terrorism before it reaches a more formal stage. Authorities must also take
9-2 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

measures to reduce the intensity of terrorist actions by hardening vulnerable targets, keeping the local
population informed, and ensuring that emergency response capabilities are robust and well maintained.
RAPID REACTION
9-10. In spite of the best efforts to actively prevent them, terrorism events typically occur suddenly; often
with little or no widespread warning. This requires the forces and organizations that respond to them to
plan carefully for many different contingencies and react with great rapidity when a terrorist attack does
occur. These organizations should be localized and know the population, terrain, and other characteristics
of their assigned area. They must war-game many different possible courses of action to save time when
actual events occur. When an event does occur, the planning is rapidly revised to meet the needs of the
real-world situation. The priorities in these situations are (1) to secure the immediate area, (2) to reduce or
contain civilian casualties, and (3) to rapidly counterattack and attempt to kill or capture the terrorist actors.
JOINT ACTIONS
9-11. The complex legal framework of antiterrorism activities requires a unique joint approach to
antiterrorism operations. PLAA, PAP, China Militia, national police, and local police must all work jointly
under a unified command structure in order to achieve the best results. Because terrorism activities can take
on an incredibly wide variety of different forms, structures, and capabilities, antiterrorism forces must be
able to adopt any potential posture, from passive and cooperative to high intensity. This approach requires a
true joint command that has the authority to unify and coordinate actions across numerous different
organizations. This principle is inherently political, and deciding who actually commands an antiterrorism
group is likely to be a decision made at higher levels of government. Leaders of subordinate organizations
must put aside their own agendas and those of their commands in order to achieve harmony and unity of
purpose within a joint group.
LEGALITY
9-12. One of the most important elements of a terrorist action is the undermining of the rule of law and the
customs and observances of a people. Terrorists deliberately attack these important institutions to magnify
the effects of their violent actions by eliciting reactions of anger and fear from their victims. Antiterrorist
groups must take great care to act in a legal manner, observing all relevant laws and regulations to make
clear to the population that they have the moral high ground. Similarly, antiterrorism groups must carefully
observe all important local customs and culture to gain the trust of the people. Acting in a legal and moral
manner may put antiterrorism groups at a disadvantage versus wily and subversive opponents, but
commanders must stick fast to this principle, even if it means incurring greater casualties or reducing the
overall effectiveness of the antiterrorism operation. While it may seem prudent in the short term to shelve
laws and decency in order to defeat the terrorist threat, behaving in a violent, illegal, or insensitive way
toward the local population helps to breed future terrorists and may cost commanders the trust of the people
they are trying to protect.
ANTITERRORISM MISSIONS AND TACTICS

9-13. Unlike most other military operations, antiterrorism operations are prescribed to be tightly controlled
and commanded by a central authority. This ensures that the antiterrorism operation is tightly integrated
and that subordinate groups conduct their own operations in accordance with the principles of antiterrorism
operations. Freedom of action by lower echelon groups is viewed as less critical, as the scope of
antiterrorism operations is typically much smaller than major military operations, and the consequences for
a subordinate’s mistake are often more significant.
9-14. There are five primary antiterrorism missions; each has numerous subtypes and permutations based
on the operational environment and the nature of the threat. Many of the same terms, techniques, and
tactics carry over from full-scale military operations.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 9-3

Chapter 9
RIOT CONTROL
9-15. Riot control is seen as one of the most important elements in maintaining domestic stability. Rioting
is viewed as a direct threat to Chinese national security, and control efforts are centered on ensuring the
safety of both people and property. The methods used, however, are aggressive—employing many of the
same tactics and techniques used during high-intensity military operations. Riot-control operations consist
of four phases: control and blocking; divide and encircle; pursue and destroy; and eliminate enemy
remnants and suppress follow-on rioting. Figures 9-1 through 9-3 on pages 9-4 through 9-6 depict a riot
control operation.
Note. PLA doctrine does not make much differentiation between demonstrations and large-scale
destructive riots. The methods prescribed are essentially high-intensity military tactics. It may be
inferred that riot control in this context is referring to a large-scale insurrection or highly
destructive riot. It should also be noted that all rioters are referred to as terrorists, independent of
actual affiliation with a terrorist group or its motivations.
Figure 9-1. Riot control (example; part 1 of 3)
9-4 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 9-5

Chapter 9
Control and Blocking

9-16. The control and blocking phase always initiates a riot-control action. This phase consists of blocking
groups who focus on denying possible rioter escape or reinforcement routes deploying around the riot area.
Blocking operations should include both military and police forces, ideally working in concert with one
another to properly leverage the capabilities of each. Blocking should also include the denial of
communications and the suppression of ports, subterranean facilities, and other possible ways of escape or
reinforcement. Blocking is continuous throughout the operation, but blocking forces should maintain a
flexible approach to their deployment, ready to reinforce key areas if and when they come under direct
assault. During this phase, comprehensive reconnaissance is conducted throughout the riot area to ascertain
the positions of the leaders, key rioter defensive positions, and any other important pieces of intelligence to
inform the upcoming decisive phases.
9-6 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Divide and Encircle

9-17. The divide and encircle phase is the decisive phase of the riot-control operation. It employs a mixture
of surprise attacks and storming attacks to overwhelm the rioters, with a focus on dividing the various
groups, isolating them from their leadership, and then annihilating them. Some groups are highly
vulnerable to isolation and will cease resistance once cut off from their leaders, while others will fight
determinedly—even when completely cut off and surrounded. Antiterrorist forces must be aware of the
tendencies of their opponents as they face destruction. Some riot participants will surrender willingly and
without further resistance, while others will respond with suicidal violence, even when facing certain
defeat. Antiterrorist force leaders must employ force measures appropriate to their opponent. Less-fanatical
adversaries may be willing to peacefully surrender if offered the opportunity, while suicidal, fanatical
individuals pose a lethal threat until they are captured or killed.
Pursue and Destroy

9-18. The next phase of the riot-control operation is the pursuit and destruction of any remaining remnants.
It is critical that as many terrorists as possible be captured or killed, as any who escape will remain a threat
and can easily consolidate and rally new recruits in a short period of time. As most riots occur in urban
environments, pursuit will likely be on city roads and through populated areas. Pursuing forces integrate
both land and air assets to keep careful track of the positions of those retreating, canalizing them into less
densely populated areas and blocking their escape to safe havens. Once the groups are pushed to a
favorable position, they are blocked from all sides and attacked until captured or destroyed. Antiterrorist
groups may also employ techniques such as ambushes to surprise and defeat retreating rioters.
Eliminate Enemy Remnants and Suppress Follow-on Rioting

9-19. Once most rioting forces are captured or killed, the operation transitions from pursuit to search.
Antiterrorist groups conduct comprehensive searches of the combat area in order to find any remaining
isolated remnants. This search can be either immediately after the successful destruction of the main group
or some time afterward, giving remaining enemy forces time to relax and believe themselves safe from
reprisal. Searches must be careful, leaving no blind spots or areas unchecked, but the antiterrorist group
also must not disrupt the lives of peaceful citizens in the search area.
ACTIVE ANTITERRORISM ATTACK

9-20. Active antiterrorist attacks are those attacks that proactively target terrorist bases of operations and
leaders. They may be independent missions, or they may be conducted concurrently with or in support of
other antiterrorist activities. The general approach to these attacks is much the same as for a riot-control or
ground offensive operation. Decisive attacks penetrate the enemy defenses and isolate enemy units,
allowing their destruction in detail. There are, however, two important activities that must be emphasized
during a decisive pre-emptive attack. First, reconnaissance and search must be comprehensive and
meticulous, ensuring that the entire battlefield is carefully assessed and all terrorist targets identified. This
may be a lengthy process and commanders must be patient, not launching their attack until it is complete.
Second, antiterrorist groups must emphasize the blocking actions or cordon that surrounds the terrorist
target. Terrorists likely have preplanned escape routes in place. They will rapidly flee the area if threatened,
so a substantial cordon force may be required in order to fully contain the area. A careful search should
reveal all major possible egress routes.
HOSTAGE RESCUE
9-21. Hostage rescue missions integrate multiple different competencies in such a way that decisive
application of both physical and psychological force frees the hostages and eliminates the terrorist group.
Hostage rescue missions are arguably the highest profile of all antiterrorism mission types. They often are
carefully followed by the world at large, and they have outsized significance and consequences for both
security forces and society at large.
9-22. A hostage rescue mission employs five different groups: a blocking group, an assault group, a
reconnaissance group, a psychological warfare group, and a rescue group. These groups work in concert
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 9-7

Chapter 9
with one another to break terrorist resistance while protecting the hostages. The rescue mission commences
after hostages are taken and antiterrorist forces are organized and deployed. The first phase of the operation
is the unfold phase, where the blocking unit deploys around the periphery of the combat area and secures
land, sea, and air routes from either ingress or egress. The other groups spend this period organizing
themselves and developing the plan of action.
9-23. Psychological warfare operations commence in the next phase of the mission. This naturally centers
on the psychological warfare group, although a variety of other organizations may have roles to play. The
psychological warfare phase typically consists of negotiating with the terrorist group. Negotiations are
never used to concede to the political demands of the terrorists, but rather to begin the process of isolating
them, dividing their forces, and disintegrating their strength. Negotiations should be deliberately difficult,
causing psychological stress to the terrorists, but they should not be so aggressive as to cause a threat to the
hostages. They may also serve to distract terrorists from ongoing assault preparations, enabling the assault
group and reconnaissance group to conduct their missions without detection. If it is possible to resolve the
situation through negotiation without making political concessions to the terrorists, this should always be
the first choice.
9-24. The final phase of the hostage rescue mission is the raid or attack. This consists of the reconnaissance
and assault groups carefully assessing the situation, developing an assault plan, and then bravely and
aggressively executing the plan. Reconnaissance efforts should ascertain the exact position of the terrorists
and hostages, identify all of the potential ambush points or strongpoints in and around the objective, and
provide the assault team with a comprehensive plan of attack against the heart of the terrorist group. The
psychological warfare effort should have caused distress and division among the terrorists, possibly
compromising their defenses and isolating the different terrorist groups. Careful concealment during the
approach phase, coupled with surprise and precision in the attack, are the best ways to ensure that the
terrorists are killed and the hostages unhurt. Nonlethal munitions—such as smoke, flash, and flare rounds—
may be used to temporarily disorient the terrorists without harming hostages. Sniper teams should also be
employed, both as reconnaissance platforms and as overwatch. Multiple sniper teams are deployed in a
variety of different positions around the combat area, creating a variety of threats to the terrorists. Snipers
may also be employed as ambush teams to engage terrorists attempting to escape the area.
BORDER CONTROL AND SECURITY

9-25. China places a high priority on border security in general, and in particular where border regions are
unstable or dangerous. Border security falls to a number of different organizations, from local and national
police active units of the PLAA. The territory designated for enhanced security measures is called a border
control area.
9-26. Borders cross three domains: land, sea, and air. In order to effectively control the border, the
border-control force must control traffic through all three domains. Land borders are controlled by a
mixture of firepower and physical occupation. Forces align along widely used corridors and critical areas,
and they make use of mobile forces to react to unexpected intrusions through less-patrolled areas.
Firepower may be used to augment these forces or to close areas of the border that are not physically
manned. Border-control areas do not necessarily need to be placed directly on the border. If terrain or other
conditions dictate, they may extend some distance into Chinese territory.
9-27. Border control areas must be carefully cordoned through the use of blocking forces and checkpoints.
Blocking forces employ defense-in-depth techniques to ensure that the area is secure from both ingress and
egress, and checkpoints control the flow of traffic in and out of the area. As border-control efforts become
harsher, the negative effects on the civilian population and economy increase. Local officials must carefully
balance the need for security with the negative effects on the lawful population and cross-border trade.
Ports are another area of emphasis: while they are not likely to be targeted by offensive action, they provide
ingress routes for undesirable forces and cargo. In a high-security border zone, inspection efforts through
ports must be significantly enhanced.
9-28. Air and sea border control typically involve the use of exclusion zones to deny the use of airspace or
waterways to unwanted traffic. A no-fly zone or restricted airspace denies opponents the use of airspace
over the border-control zone, while a naval exclusion zone denies use of waterways. These measures must
9-8 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

be widely publicized to ensure that domestic and international aircraft or ships do not inadvertently violate
them, and sufficient air and naval and coast guard forces must be present to ensure that the measures can
actually be enforced.
THE INFORMATIONIZED BATTLEFIELD AND STABILITY AND

SECURITY ACTIONS
9-29. Security and stability missions are among the highest priorities for the Chinese Security Apparatus.
In past generations, much of the domestic security mission fell to the PLA. Today, most of the burden is
shouldered by the PAP, along with a mixture of national and domestic law enforcement agencies. In
addition to peacetime stability and security missions, the PAP has a significant role in supporting wartime
missions. The PAP should not be underestimated as a military and paramilitary force; it is comparable to a
regional power’s national army in size and combat power. The PLA recognizes several characteristics of
stability and security actions: political nature, hybrid warfare, threat strength, and international
peacekeeping. These characteristics are discussed in paragraphs 9-32 through 9-35.
9-30. The PAP command structure and control mechanisms are still somewhat opaque to outsiders. It
appears that PAP units are organized into brigade-sized formations called mobile detachments that are
subsequently assigned to a specific region. In wartime, group armies may take over operational control of
PAP units to support group army operations, primarily in rear area and security roles.
9-31. PAP equipment is discussed in the following appendixes:
z Appendix A, maneuver capabilities.
z Appendix B, fire support capabilities.
z Appendix C, air defense capabilities.
z Appendix D, aviation capabilities.
z Appendix E, engineer and chemical capabilities.
z Appendix F, network and communications capabilities.
z Appendix G, special operations forces capabilities.
Figure 9-4 depicts a genericized PAP mobile detachment as it might be organized for wartime support
operations.
Figure 9-4. Task-organized People’s Armed Police mobile detachment (example)
POLITICAL NATURE
9-32. While all military activities are political to a certain extent, security and stability operations are more
heavily influenced by politics than are force-against-force operations. Security and stability forces must
coexist with local populations, and they may be required to protect them from attack or to suppress civil
unrest. Social media is more readily available in security zones removed from the front line. Security-group
activities are often high-profile and likely to be seen and publicized. As a result, security and stability
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 9-9

Chapter 9
forces are given more leeway and more responsibility for implementing domestic policy than other forces
as they conduct traditional law enforcement alongside their military duties.
HYBRID WARFARE
9-33. Hybrid warfare seeks to significantly influence behind-the-lines operations, where security and
stability forces typically operate. Activities of a hybrid opponent may include the use of either civilians or
soldiers in civilian attire to conduct raids, ambushes, or other direct actions in rear areas; the use of
firepower or electromagnetic attack to target key assets in rear areas; the use of information attack to
influence civilian populations throughout the security zone; or the use of special operations or irregular
forces to conduct deep direct action throughout the security zone. The clash between security and stability
forces and the enemy’s offensive hybrid warfare elements will likely be a key factor on the informationized
battlefield.
THREAT STRENGTH
9-34. The ability to threaten rear areas with a variety of different attack methods has expanded as firepower
and irregular threats have proliferated and grown in capability. Security areas now face many of the same
levels of threats as forward defensive areas, but security and stability forces do not enjoy the same combat
power as most of their military counterparts. Security forces must ensure they can effectively neutralize the
anticipated threats throughout their assigned security area, and they must carefully allocate combat power
to ensure the right balance of forces in accordance with their higher echelon’s priorities.
INTERNATIONAL PEACEKEEPING
9-35. The multiple disciplines required of stability and security forces place them in an ideal position to
function as international peacekeepers. As China seeks to expand its international role through participation
in peacekeeping missions, it is likely that the government will lean heavily on its PAP units to function in
an expeditionary capacity. As with any other stability-type mission, peacekeeping missions are often
complex and ambiguous, requiring mentally agile leaders and versatile units.
PRINCIPLES OF STABILITY AND SECURITY OPERATIONS

9-36. Stability and security operations are conducted in accordance with a fixed set of principles, as are all
other PLA activities. The principles governing stability and security operations, however, are referred to
specifically as guiding thoughts, likely inferring that they are meant to be broader in scope and less
restrictive than other Chinese military principles. This is in keeping with the view that stability and security
missions are more complex and ambiguous than other operations, and thus they require greater latitude for
leaders to act in accordance with their judgment.
SITUATIONAL AWARENESS
9-37. While situational awareness is required for military units of all types, it is of particular importance
for security units operating in concert with PLA units on an active campaign. Security force commanders
must be acutely aware of the general objectives and strategy of the military forces they are supporting, and
they may be required to operate with little or no direct oversight in securing rear areas, supply and
communications lines, and key assets. Security forces may also be required, in dire situations, to face off
against much more powerful opponents in order to delay the enemy or buy time for the supported force to
reposition or retreat. Security forces must be prepared to make this sacrifice either when called upon or
when they recognize the situation requires it.
KEY-POINT CONCENTRATION
9-38. Security forces operate with far less density than do regular army units. Contiguous deployments
throughout the security zone are likely impossible, considering available forces and the number of different
assets that must be defended. Commanders must carefully prioritize what they want to defend and from
what type of threat. This enables the security force to properly allocate its subordinate forces to concentrate
9-10 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

greater security on key points throughout the security zone. At the same time, security forces must be able
to continue operations even when enemy forces are moving through the security zone, provided that they
are moving through unimportant or indefensible areas.
DEFENSE FOCUS
9-39. Security forces will most likely be outnumbered when facing conventional opponents, and they may
be outnumbered even by irregular opponents. This makes offensive actions difficult, as security forces will
seldom be able to concentrate sufficient combat power to attack and destroy an opponent. Instead, they
must focus on the defense, building their operations around steadfast protection of key points, enabled by
extensive entrenchments and a defense-in-depth approach. The doctrine of active defense still applies;
however, when a security unit can achieve local superiority, it must attack and spoil the enemy’s
preparations. Security units contribute significantly to the victory of the larger military force by delaying
enemy forces, attritting enemy formations, and disaggregating enemy capabilities in the security zone,
setting the enemy up for decisive defeat by a counterattack.
STABILITY AND SECURITY MISSIONS IN SUPPORT OF JOINT

MILITARY OPERATIONS
9-40. As with other stability and security missions, those performed in support of joint military operations
are primarily defensive in nature. They can range across many combinations of domains.
DEFENSIVE ACTIONS
9-41. The PLA recognizes that assets throughout rear areas, such as air and seaports, bridges, railheads,
command and communication nodes, and missile operation sites will be high-value targets for the enemy.
Much of the responsibility for defending these assets from land, sea, and air attack falls to security forces.
GROUND DEFENSE
9-42. Ground defense actions by security forces employ a defense-in-depth approach to make it difficult or
impossible for the enemy to successfully attack key assets. Enemy strike methods against rear areas include
direct attack by ground forces, secret attacks by special or irregular forces, and firepower attacks. Security
forces employ a mixture of blocking actions along key avenues of approach, strong defenses around key
assets, and the use of ambushes and raids against enemy intrusions.
9-43. Blocking forces employ either static defense methods or checkpoints. Static defense—allowing no
one to pass through the defended area—is employed when the chances of enemy action are high, and the
movement of friendly forces or civilians through the area is not critical to wider operations. Checkpoints—
allowing carefully screened personnel to pass through—are employed in more-secure areas or where
friendly movement is required. Static defense techniques are more secure than checkpoints, but they create
more hardship for the local population and friendly forces. Commanders must weigh the risk of threat to an
asset with the needs of friendly forces and the local population when choosing which method to employ.
9-44. Security units should make extensive use of entrenchments, hardening, and fortifications to enhance
the defensive effort. This is particularly true for static assets: if an asset cannot be moved, it is far easier for
the enemy to target and destroy it. Hardening and fortifying these assets forces the enemy to commit more
resources to their destruction while protecting security forces from enemy attack and multiplying the
effects of their defensive efforts.
9-45. As enemy forces move into the security zone, security forces engage the intruding forces through a
mixture of stubborn defenses, counterattacks, raids, and ambushes. If the enemy force is relatively small
and weak, a decisive counterattack or ambush may seek to annihilate it or force its withdrawal. If the
enemy force is powerful, security forces conduct stubborn retrograde operations, delaying the enemy’s
advance, inflicting casualties, and disrupting enemy cohesion in anticipation of a powerful counterattack
from a main-body defensive group. Retrograde operations cease once the security group reaches a key
asset. At this time, the security unit must bravely defend without further retreat, using all of its remaining
combat power to resist the enemy’s assault.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 9-11

Chapter 9
COASTAL DEFENSE
9-46. Security-force responsibilities revolve primarily around neutralizing shore raids and harassments that
target wide areas of shoreline. Most of these duties fall to the Chinese Coast Guard, a subsidiary of the
PAP. Due to the vast distances of vulnerable coast in China, this necessarily requires security units to be
widely dispersed, limiting their combat power. Security forces are not intended to resist major amphibious
operations; this responsibility falls to the PLAA. Instead, they are to remain vigilant against small-scale
enemy intrusions over the shore, mainly reconnaissance raids, sabotage raids, and insertion or extraction of
enemy agents. They also take on numerous civil missions, including coastal patrol and policing, regulation
and protection of trade, and interdiction of smuggling.
AIR DEFENSE
9-47. Security-force responsibility for air defense is similar to coastal defense. Security forces have little to
no active air defense capability, but they are instead responsible for responding to aerial insertions of
ground forces into the security zone. China fears the use of helicopters to conduct air insertions of troops
into rear areas, and it relies heavily on security forces to counter this threat. Security forces will be widely
dispersed and cannot resist a major air assault operation, but they are expected to detect and neutralize
smaller aerial insertions of commandos, raiders, or enemy agents. The best method is to ambush helicopters
as they descend in altitude and consolidate. An alternative method is to target enemy forces while they are
vulnerable immediately after landing. This requires security forces to detect and track enemy air elements
as they move into the security zone, then rapidly mass combat power in and around the landing zone.
Security units should make extensive use of observation posts integrated with radar and the wider air
defense network.
DEFENSE OF SOCIAL STABILITY

9-48. China places a high priority on security and stability at all times; this emphasis also extends to
combat theaters. Security forces play an important role in maintaining social stability in rear areas. The
policy focus is almost entirely on social stability in Chinese domestic territory, but this emphasis likely
extends to any foreign territory that has been occupied, conquered, or annexed during the course of a
conflict. There are three primary components to the defense of social stability mission: guard socially vital
assets, maintain social order, and address the effects of enemy attacks.
Guard Socially Vital Assets

9-49. A subcomponent of guarding key points throughout the security area, security forces have
responsibility for guarding those assets that are vital to social stability. In a wartime theater, these assets
include distribution stations for food, water, and fuel; civilian transportation nodes; civilian government
facilities; and public utilities. Unlike more-aggressive security missions that may face enemy regular
forces, security groups charged with guarding these assets should focus on reducing their visibility and
either concealing the target or deceiving the enemy as their primary courses of action. The most likely
enemy actions against targets of this type are irregular forces and recruited criminal elements operating in a
secret or concealed fashion. As such, measures to guard these assets are as much police work as military
security work, and integration between civilian police forces and security forces is vital.
Maintain Social Order

9-50. The component of maintaining social order reflects the ongoing Chinese fear of counterrevolutionary
activities that may leverage propaganda and politics to undermine the Chinese government and military,
seeding discord through rear areas. This mission type necessarily involves interaction between security
forces and the population at large as the former tries to locate and neutralize enemy or other elements
attempting to sow discord, cause riots, harass military units, or sabotage infrastructure. Commanders must
work together with civilian law enforcement units when conducting this mission, and they should carefully
weigh the risk to friendly operations against the risk of alienating either friendly or occupied peaceful
civilian populations through the use of excessive force.
9-12 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Address the Effects of Enemy Attacks

9-51. Enemy efforts in rear areas will sometimes succeed, whether they are from firepower attacks, ground
attacks, or attacks by irregular forces. Security forces have an important role to play in dealing with the
effects of these attacks. If the local population does not see national leaders reacting strongly and quickly to
minimize the effects of a successful enemy attack, its morale will suffer. In particular, casualties suffered in
rear areas must be quickly and efficiently cared for, either treated on site or evacuated to proper medical
facilities. Destroyed buildings, roads, bridges, or other infrastructure must be first secured, then
rehabilitated as quickly as possible not only for the strategic benefit, but also to show the local population
the strength of the government. The primary role of security forces in this mission is care of casualties,
followed by the securing of destroyed or damaged areas.
Defense of Supply Routes and Traffic

9-52. The most important mission for security forces in the security area of an active combat theater is the
management of military traffic and the defense of transportation and supply lines. The PLA rightly fears
rear area attacks on its transportation infrastructure as a means to cutting off its powerful frontline army
units. In areas not near the front line, the bulk of this mission falls to security units. There are three primary
components to defending supply routes and traffic: route security, traffic management, and emergency
repairs. Route security requires constant, active vigilance against a variety of enemy attack methods that
might seek to destroy friendly convoys or bridges, tunnels, and other key transportation assets. Active
defense is conducted along main routes to discover enemy activity and neutralize enemy efforts.
9-53. Traffic management involves the careful routing of military traffic to ensure that the most valuable
convoys use the most secure routes, and that cargo is effectively prioritized in accordance with the needs of
the theater. Civilian traffic must be carefully controlled to ensure that priority military traffic has the right
of way. This is a specialized skill set, and security units must be prepared to conduct this mission at any
time and place.
9-54. Emergency repairs are those construction activities that take place when a route has been
successfully attacked. Security units must secure the immediate area, drive off any lingering enemy forces,
and then protect the construction engineering teams as they quickly repair the damage to re-enable military
traffic flow.
SECURITY FOR THE MAIN FORCE

9-55. The PLA envisions its security forces in an expanded role, providing direct security for the PLAA.
This likely involves defense of the rear and flanks of a main body, along with defending critical assets and
routes of march within the main body’s combat area. It also includes management of the military region,
including the wider geographic area occupied by the main body. Security forces integrate with the
reconnaissance and security elements of the main body when conducting this mission, with armed police
supporting military operations by securing rear areas.
9-56. This mission requires the security force to carefully integrate with the main body, keeping close track
of its activities. If the main body advances, the security force provides rear area security and route security.
If the main body retreats, the security force may be required to provide flank security or, in dire situations,
conduct rear-guard actions against enemy forces. Main-force security operations also contain a
counterreconnaissance element. Security forces must ensure that enemy scouts cannot infiltrate rear areas
and conduct reconnaissance or targeting of the main body or key assets in the security area. This may
involve direct action against enemy scouting elements, some of which may be powerful armored units.
Armed police units have only minimal antitank capabilities; these must be enhanced if the security unit
anticipates contact with enemy heavy forces.
DECEPTION ACTIONS
9-57. The PLA also envisions its security units contributing to ground actions through deception, primarily
through the use of feint actions. Security forces—particularly armed police—are well suited to missions of
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 9-13

Chapter 9
this type due to their high density of light, mobile armored vehicles and the ability to move quickly through
a variety of different terrain types. Five different forms of feint are envisioned for security forces:
z Feint movement: a security force moves in such a way that it deceives the enemy into thinking a
larger army movement is occurring.
z Feint assembly: a security force simulates a more-powerful ground force assembling on the
ground for an offensive action.
z Feint attack: a security force conducts an actual limited attack on an enemy position.
z Feint defense: a security force conducts a limited or simulated defense against an attacking
enemy.
z Feint withdrawal: a security force pretends to be a larger force withdrawing from the battlefield.
9-58. All of these measures are supported with false intelligence, including fake radio traffic. Their general
intent is to fool enemy reconnaissance and surveillance assets into thinking that the security unit is actually
a mechanized or armored friendly unit and to manipulate them into acting a certain way due to this
misbelief. This, in turn, puts actual main body forces on the offensive, knowing that the enemy has been
fooled and is pursuing an action against a deception unit. Commanders must remember, however, that
security forces are not equipped to operate in close quarters with enemy heavy forces, and they should
strive to protect their assigned security forces during deception actions.
9-14 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Appendix A
Maneuver Capabilities
MANEUVER CAPABILITIES FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW

A-1. People’s Liberation Army (PLA) maneuver forces include the People’s Liberation Army Army’s
(PLAA’s) combined arms brigades (CA-BDEs), special operations forces (SOF), army aviation brigades,
and the handful of remaining infantry divisions, along with the airborne brigades of the People’s Liberation
Army Air Force (PLAAF) and the marine brigades of the people’s Liberation Army Navy (PLAN). The
paramilitary formations of the People’s Liberation Army Reserve infantry units, People’s Armed Police
(PAP), and China Militia units may be used for rear area or flank security or economy of force and
deception (feint) missions. While the entirety of the PLA is undergoing substantial reform and
modernization, significant but decreasing numbers of older systems are expected to be fielded throughout
frontline formations through 2035—the scheduled date for PLA equipment modernization to be complete.
Unlike Western armies that tend to field very homogenous formations from an equipment perspective, the
PLAA employs a very wide variety of vehicles with varying capabilities and readiness levels. CA-BDEs
with more-critical missions or in more strategically important areas receive newer and better equipment,
with older equipment gradually trickling down to less-important commands. The PAP employs a wide
variety of equipment types, generally tending toward light, motorized forces along with inexpensive
mortars, recoilless rifles, armored personnel carriers (APCs), and limited numbers of helicopters.
A-2. The core of the PLAA’s maneuver component consists of around 73 CA-BDEs of three different
types: light (motorized), medium (mechanized), and heavy (armored), along with a handful of legacy
division structures. In addition, there are approximately 18 divisions in the reserves and militia, though
their equipment and readiness levels are much lower than those of the active-duty force. All or nearly all of
the active component is either motorized or mechanized. CA-BDEs regularly conduct large-scale training
maneuvers against a full-time opposing force brigade. The PLAA brigade structure is described in detail in
chapter 2.
MANEUVER CAPABILITIES EQUIPMENT OVERVIEW

A-3. The PLAA employs a wide variety of tanks, infantry fighting vehicles (IFVs), and APCs, ranging
from high-end modern systems to Cold-War relics. Historically, the PLAA has been reticent to throw
anything away. As new equipment arrived, older equipment was handed down to lower-readiness units,
then to reserves, then militia, and finally to massive storage facilities. The recent set of PLAA reforms,
however, moves away from this model, seeking greater homogenization through a force equipped entirely
with modern equipment. This necessarily reduces the overall size of the army, and it promises significant
cost savings in the maintenance and operation of obsolete equipment. At the present time, however, the
PLAA still employs a variety of armored vehicles, with most CA-BDEs still equipped with older or
obsolescent vehicles. Due to the vast differences in capability between in-use systems, it is critical that
PLAA units’ equipment be carefully assessed on an individual basis, rather than generically.
Note. The equipment overview provided in this appendix is not intended to be exhaustive, but
rather to introduce the most widely employed variants of major equipment types used by the
PLA.
TANKS
A-4. The PLAA fields a massive number of tanks, most of which are main battle tanks (MBTs), with a
handful of light and amphibious tanks. The MBT force currently has more than 6,500 vehicles—more than
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 A-1

Appendix A
twice the number fielded by any other country. Many of these, however, are early Cold-War vintage and of
dubious utility on the modern battlefield. Early Chinese tanks were either direct copies or heavily
influenced by Soviet designs, but the more-modern tanks are entirely indigenous and show more design
similarities with Western tanks than with Russian ones.
A-5. Despite its age, the Type 59 tank is still fielded in limited numbers in active units, and large numbers
are maintained in reserve or mothball status. The Type 59 was derived from the ubiquitous Soviet T-54/55
tank and shares most of its design features. Its armor is homogenous steel, and its early 100-mm gun is
inadequate against modern MBTs. The PLAA has, however, periodically upgraded its Type 59 fleet,
adding modern thermal sights, a larger gun, improved gun stabilizers, explosive-reactive armor (ERA), and
improved crew survivability systems. Modernized Type 59 tanks are lightweight, reasonably mobile,
possess relatively modern fire control systems, and are simple to operate and maintain. However, their
protection—even when upgraded with ERA—is poor by modern standards. Though the tanks employ a
copy of the once-ubiquitous L7 105-mm main gun that can fire both tungsten and uranium penetrators,
main gun performance is poor compared to modern larger guns.
A-6. The Type 80/Type 88 tank was the first Chinese indigenous tank design. The PLAA mixed Western
and Soviet design philosophies in the Type 80, using a Soviet-style chassis and turret design with a
Western gun and crew configuration. The result was an MBT that was competitive with the T-72, T-80, and
early M1 Abrams designs. The first variants entered service in the early 1980s, and they have been
continuously upgraded. Those currently in service are essentially comparable to the much-later Type 96.
Upgrade versions feature advanced computerized fire control, a mixture of homogenous and applique
composite armor, a 125 millimeter (mm) smoothbore gun capable of firing penetrators, high explosives
(HE) and missiles, ERA, and a significantly upgraded engine. While an older design, upgraded Type 80/88
tanks are competitive with older Western MBTs, and they can threaten even the most modern designs.
A-7. The Type 96 tank is the most widespread modern MBT in the PLAA inventory. A fully indigenous
design derived from the Type 80, the Type 96 was the first Chinese tank to feature full composite armor
and a Western-style arrow-shaped turret, in contrast to the bowl-shaped turrets of the Type 80/88. The Type
96 is a relatively light modern MBT with excellent mobility, leading the PLAA to deploy most of its Type
96s in hilly regions and other areas of difficult terrain. Composite ERA and laser jammers have been added
to the original Type 96, improving its survivability against antitank guided missiles (ATGMs). The Type 96
was originally only an iterative upgrade, and it was not truly competitive with either its Western or Russian
counterparts when it was first deployed. It was built in large numbers, however, and upgraded variants—
including Types 96A1 and 96B—have improved lethality and protection.
A-8. The Type 99 tank is China’s newest MBT. It represents the PLAA’s new commitment to
modernization and investment in technology. Using the same design approach as the Type 96, the Type 99
employs a Russian-style chassis with a Western-style turret. It features a full suite of modern protective
systems, including spaced composite armor enhanced with ERA; full chemical, biological, radiological,
and nuclear protection; crew survivability upgrades; and an active protection system. Its 125-mm main gun
can fire sabot, HE, and missiles, and its advanced suspension and powerful engine give it excellent
cross-country mobility. An upgraded variant, the Type 99A, enhances the protection scheme with thicker
armor and multi-layer ERA, a more powerful engine, and improved electronic warfare and network
capabilities. Due to its high cost, it is not anticipated that the Type 99 will fully replace the Type 96, and
the Type 99A will only see service in elite “digitized” units.
A-9. The Type 62 is an evolution of a Cold-War tank that has been modified and modernized into a light
tank platform. Developed specifically to operate in the challenging mountains and jungles of southern
China, the Type 62 was essentially a scaled-down Type 59, armed with an 85-mm gun and a lightweight
armor package. At around 30 metric tons, the Type 62 filled the gap between heavy MBTs and very light
airborne and amphibious tanks. Modernized variants feature upgraded armor and targeting packages, but
they are badly undergunned and have virtually no offensive capability against modern MBTs. These tanks
are still in limited use in specific geographic areas, but they are being phased out in favor of the Type 15
light tank.
A-10. The Type 15 is a brand-new light tank developed to take over the role filled by the Type 62. It
features the ubiquitous 105-mm rifled gun and composite armor, along with an advanced remote weapons
station and autoloader. The Type 15 is likely not intended to compete directly with modern MBTs, but
A-2 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

rather to enhance the firepower of mountain and jungle units. It is also likely tailored for the export
market—numerous lower-tier militaries around the world are seeking to replace their Soviet-era equipment,
and a modern tank in the 30-metric-ton class meets many of their requirements. The Type 15 was just
recently accepted by the PLAA, and it is in only limited use by operational units.
A-11. The Type 63 is a widely proliferated amphibious light tank. Early Type 63 models were built
primarily to provide PLAA forces with an armored platform capable of crossing rivers and other small
bodies of water. These vehicles are still in limited service in lowland regions. The upgraded Type 63A was
built specifically for the People’s Liberation Army Navy Marine Corps (PLANMC), and it is capable of
crossing open-ocean areas. Both types are capable of firing while embarked, though the Type 63A has a
greatly enhanced on-the-move capability. Both tanks have only light homogenous armor, and they are not
intended to withstand attacks from modern ATGMs or enemy tanks. While still in use by both the PLAA
and PLAN, Type 63s are being phased out in favor of more modern amphibious tank systems.
A-12. The ZLT-05 amphibious tank is a hybrid IFV, tank, and assault-gun platform with impressive
performance across even large bodies of water. A modern 105-mm gun employs sabot, HE, and ATGMs
from land or water, using a modern fire control computer and extensive stabilization. While heavier than
the Type 63, the ZLT-05 still features only light armor, and it is intended to protect only against
fragmentation and light weapons. The ZLT-05 is intended to be the standard amphibious tank throughout
the PLANMC and, as such, it is the backbone of the PLA’s short-range amphibious capability.
INFANTRY FIGHTING VEHICLES

A-13. Despite being one of the early adopters of IFVs, the PLAA employs a lower density of them than do
other large militaries, particularly as compared to Russia. There are numerous varieties and configurations
of Chinese IFVs, and categorizing them can be complex: weight, configuration, and firepower are not
conclusive, as they are with the U.S. military. Instead, one must look at the organization of the unit in
question: a mechanized (medium) CA-BDE employs its armored vehicles as both IFVs and APCs, while
motorized (light) CA-BDEs employ their vehicles almost exclusively as APCs. Chinese IFV designs have
generally mirrored Soviet and Russian designs going back to the BMP-1 of the 1960s, although PLAA
preferences now seem to be trending toward favoring wheeled as opposed to tracked vehicles. The PLAA
actively fields roughly 4,000 IFVs of all types, plus a large number of older vehicles in reserve status.
A-14. The Type 86 IFV is a copy of the ubiquitous BMP-1, and it is still widely fielded by active PLAA
formations. The original Type 86 featured a 100-mm gun, while the newer Type 86A was rebuilt with a
30-mm autocannon. Variations include troop transport (with an eight-soldier capacity), scouting,
engineering, ATGM carrier, air defense, amphibious, and command vehicles. The Type 86 is tracked, with
good cross- country mobility and considerable firepower for its weight. Its protection is poor, however,
consisting only of thin homogenous steel and minimal survivability improvements.
A-15. The ZBD-04 IFV is a heavy tracked vehicle that strongly resembles the Russian BMP-3. It features a
powerful engine, improved protection, and impressive firepower, though it weighs nearly twice as much as
the Types 86 and 86A that it was built to replace. The ZBD-04 is broadly similar to the M2 Bradley in
configuration, size, and capability. It employs both a high-velocity 100-mm main gun and a 30-mm chain
gun, coupled with ATGMs and machine guns—a remarkable amount of firepower for an IFV platform. It
can carry seven soldiers, and it is fully amphibious, though it cannot cross ocean waters. Its armor is
modular—ranging from the homogenous steel hull to applique composite and ERA add-ons—giving it
frontal protection from cannon fire in addition to all-around machine gun and fragmentation protection.
Other variants of the ZBD- 04 include tank destroyer (replaces passengers with additional missiles), heavy
tank destroyer (replaces normal HJ-8 ATGMs with heavy HJ-10 ATGMs), command, and reconnaissance
vehicles. The reconnaissance variant is the heaviest and most-powerful scouting platform in the PLAA. An
improved variant, the ZBD-04A, adds additional armor protection and improved fire control and network
capability, though at the cost of additional weight.
A-16. The ZBD-03 IFV is the PLAAF’s primary airborne armored platform. The ZBD-03 is very small
compared to its contemporaries—it is only eight metric tons, as compared to 24-plus metric tons for the
ZBD-04 and nearly 30 metric tons for the M2 Bradley. Despite its small size, it enjoys excellent firepower.
A 30-mm autocannon and a lightweight ATGM launcher give the ZBD-03 punch similar to much-larger

Appendix A
IFVs. Its protection, however, is very light, and it is likely only fully resistant to small arms and
fragmentation. The IFV’s mobility is outstanding, thanks to its light weight, high power-to-weight ratio,
and advanced suspension. The ZBD-03 is both air mobile and air droppable, and it forms the primary
armored component of the PLAAF’s airborne corps. It is envisioned as the main offensive capability of the
airborne corps, and it is intended to take on enemy rear area forces, garrison forces, and other soft targets as
part of airborne operations. This IFV was not designed to confront heavy mechanized forces. Variants
include a command vehicle and a tank destroyer variant with a larger ATGM launcher instead of a gun.
A-17. The ZBD-05 IFV is the PLANMC’s amphibious fighting vehicle. It shares a chassis and machinery
with the ZLT-05 light amphibious tank, the primary difference being that the IFV carries eight passengers
and employs a 30-mm autocannon, rather than the 105-mm main gun. The ZBD-05 can cross open ocean
with relative speed and safety, and it can engage targets while embarked due to advanced stabilization of
the gun and missile launchers. The ZBD-05’s protection is similar to that of the ZLT-05. It is necessarily
light and only proof against small arms and fragmentation. The ZBD-05 is in wide service with the PLAA’s
amphibious brigades and the PLANMC; proliferation will likely increase significantly as the PLANMC
expansion continues.
A-18. The ZBL-08 is an IFV built on the relatively new Type 08 8 x 8 wheeled vehicle chassis. The Type
08 chassis is broadly similar to the U.S. Stryker or the Russian BTR, though it is an indigenous Chinese
design, and it is somewhat heavier than either of its contemporaries. The ZBL-08 variant carries seven
passengers, and it employs a 30-mm autocannon plus ATGMs. It has good cross-country mobility, and it is
notably fast on improved roads, making it a first choice for urban combat situations. Its armor is likely
proof against heavy machine-gun fire and fragmentation, though it may have limited protection against
light cannon from some directions. The IFV variants are employed in much the same way as their tracked
counterparts—as firepower support for dismounted infantry. A reconnaissance variant is equipped with a
sophisticated sensor suite including radar, thermal sensors, electro-optical sensors, and a laser designator, in
addition to the gun and missile package of the IFV.
ARMORED PERSONNEL CARRIERS

A-19. As with IFVs, the PLAA employs a relatively low density of APCs as compared to other major
militaries. APCs comprise the main mobility element of light CA-BDEs, providing light infantry with
enhanced mobility and protection but contributing only limited offensive firepower. Most PLAA APCs are
tracked, but a growing number are 8 x 8 wheeled vehicles. In addition to the PLAA’s APC force, the PAP
employs a significant number of APCs in support of its security, domestic stability, and antiterrorism roles.
A-20. The Type 63 APC is one of the first Chinese indigenous armored fighting vehicle (AFV) designs,
and it is very similar to the U.S. M113 in size, capability, and role. Simple, lightweight, and amphibious, it
has enjoyed a long and useful lifespan—just like the M113. It employs lightweight steel armor to defend
against small arms and fragmentation, and it can carry up to 10 passengers. The Type 63’s design has lent
itself to a number of different variants, including command vehicle, ambulance, and mortar or artillery
carrier. It has been periodically upgraded with more-powerful engines and better suspension, and it will
continue in PLAA service for the foreseeable future.
A-21. The ZSD-89 APC was developed as an offshoot of an export product. The PLAA was impressed by
its carrying capacity and mobility and ordered it to serve alongside the Type 63s already in service. The
ZSD-89 is one of the world’s largest APCs in terms of capacity, able to carry 13 passengers or a large
number of ATGMs, artillery rounds, or mines in other configurations. It is amphibious and protected
against fragmentation and heavy machine-gun rounds. Like the Type 63, the ZSD-89 has been developed
into a large number of different variants, including mortar and artillery carriers, command vehicles,
scouting vehicles, supply and recovery vehicles, tank destroyers, and IFVs.
A-22. The Type 08 is the APC variant of the ZBL-08 8 x 8 wheeled AFV. It can carry up to 10 passengers,
and it enjoys a substantial advantage in both speed and range as compared to tracked vehicles. The Type 08
employs a number of advanced features, such as a remote weapons station and advanced suspension, and it
is likely to be the PLAA’s APC of choice as older vehicles are retired, particularly in the medium
CA-BDE. The Type 08’s chassis is large and well-suited to a variety of roles, including command,
communication, artillery and mortar carrier, antiaircraft gun, reconnaissance, ambulance, electronic

warfare, engineering support, and assault gun. The PAP also employs Type 08s in domestic security and
antiterrorism roles. This is the largest and most-powerful vehicle employed by the PAP.
A-23. The ZSL-92 is a light APC that employs two different 6 x 6 wheeled chassis that are collectively
referred to as the WZ-551. Despite a long and troubled development period, the ZSL-92 is widely
proliferated in the PLAA, the PAP, and internationally. An IFV variant is equipped with a 25-mm
autocannon, and it can carry nine passengers, while the APC variant employs a heavy machine gun, and it
can carry up to 11 passengers. Due to its light armor, however, it is unlikely that the PLAA employs the
ZSL-92 in an offensive role. The ZSL- 92’s light weight and road mobility make it a natural choice for the
PAP, and large numbers are employed in engineering, crowd control, and security roles.
TANK DESTROYERS, ASSAULT GUNS, AND ANTITANK GUIDED MISSILE VEHICLES

A-24. The PLAA places a very high priority on antitank firepower in tactical formations. As a result, it
extensively modifies virtually all of its AFV platforms to enhance their antitank, antipersonnel, and
anti-obstacle firepower. The two most common approaches to these modifications are either to replace a
machine gun or cannon with a tank gun (usually in the 105-mm class), or to add additional ATGM
launchers and replace the crew compartment with additional ATGM storage. These systems provide
enhanced firepower to light and medium CA-BDEs, typically operating as one company within a battalion.
A-25. Tank destroyers and assault guns are generally similar in capability and appearance. Nearly all
employ an APC or IFV chassis, with the crew compartment occupied by the machinery and ammunition to
support a 105-mm main gun and turret. Nearly all of the PLAA’s 105-mm guns are derived from the widely
proliferated British L7 gun of the 1960s. These guns still pose a threat to even modern armor because of
upgrades to their muzzle velocity and ammunition. In addition to their mobile antitank role, these guns also
have useful antipersonnel and anti-obstacle capabilities, and they are employed by battalion or group
commanders whenever enhanced firepower is required. Among the most common assault-gun types are the
ZTL-11 (a modified Type 08 APC) and the PTL-02, based on the ZSL-92 APC.
A-26. ATGM vehicles are widespread in PLAA formations of all types. Virtually every battalion-level
organization employs at least a platoon of ATGM vehicles. For lighter units, this represents the bulk of
their mobile antitank firepower. Due to their thin armor, ATGM vehicles are best employed in ambushes or
standoff attacks where they cannot be targeted by enemy tanks or IFVs. They are almost exclusively a
defensive weapon, though they can employ their missiles to target bunkers or other fortifications if
required. Virtually every PLAA APC model has been modified to be an ATGM vehicle.
LIGHT ARMORED VEHICLES AND WHEELED VEHICLES

A-27. Most of the PLAA’s light tactical vehicles are in the Mengshi family, a group of vehicles derived
from the U.S. H1 Hummer, which is the civilian version of the U.S. M998 high mobility multipurpose
wheeled vehicle. Like the M998, the Mengshi family of vehicles has been periodically upgraded, starting
primarily as soft-sided utility vehicles and now featuring extensive armor, mine-resistant chassis, and
remote weapons stations. These vehicles fill a wide variety of roles, from simple transport, to ambulance, to
command, and to maintenance, fulfilling practically every role available for a light wheeled tactical truck.
The PLAA, carefully following coalition activities in Iraq and Afghanistan, also developed the Mengshi
into capable patrol vehicles, scouting platforms, and local fire support in the form of the CSK series of
vehicles. The latest Mengshi vehicles are significantly larger than their Hummer predecessors, strongly
resembling U.S. joint light tactical vehicles in both size and capability. These vehicles are ubiquitous
throughout the PLAA and the PAP, providing much of the motorization support for ground forces along
with a growing protection and firepower suite.
A-28. The PLA employs a variety of heavy wheeled vehicles, varying widely in size and payload. The
MV3 is the generic medium truck, usually operated in a 6 x 6 configuration. It is largely comparable to the
U.S. M939 or light medium tactical vehicle, though it is a newer design than either. Numerous different
models of larger trucks provide progressively greater payload. The largest varieties are up to 10 x 10 in
configuration and serve as transporter-erector-launchers for intercontinental ballistic missiles (ICBMs) and
long-range surface-to-air missile (SAM) systems. The density of cargo trucks—particularly the medium-lift
cargo trucks that are the backbone of tactical logistics—is relatively low in the PLA, and it affects China’s

Appendix A
ability to conduct expeditionary operations or operations a significant distance from its internal logistics
structure.
SMALL ARMS AND DIRECT FIRE WEAPONS

A-29. China’s military independence from the Soviet Union can be tracked with the growth of its small
arms industry. While the early PLA relied entirely upon Soviet and Soviet-derived weapons, years of
investment built the Chinese small-arms industry into one of the world’s largest and most sophisticated.
This development was paralleled by the advancement of the PLAA’s service rifle: over the last 50 years it
transitioned from a simple copy of the Soviet SKS, to the development of variants based on the AK 47,
AKM, and AK-74, to completely indigenous contemporary designs.
A-30. The QBZ-95 is the PLAA’s primary service rifle today. A bullpup design, the QBZ-95 is optimized
for ease of use and volume of fire. It is well regarded as a simple, sturdy, and comfortable weapon. Its
5.8-mm x 42-mm round offers more power and better ballistic performance than the standard 5.56-mm
North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) round, though at slightly increased weight and recoil. It is less
accurate than most of its Western competitors, and it lacks the modular upgrade capabilities—such as rail
systems— enjoyed by most modern assault rifles. The next generation of the QBZ-95 is thought to include
a flat-top rail system instead of simple iron sights. The QBZ-95 has been modified into grenade launcher,
carbine, and light support-weapon variants. Older service rifles—mostly AKM and AK-74 variants—are
still in wide use across militia and reserve formations.
A-31. Like most Western Armies, PLAA formations employ three classes of machine gun: squad automatic
weapons, primarily the QBB-95 light machine-gun variant of the QBZ-95; general purpose machine
guns— a mixture of older Soviet-derived weapons and newer Western-style general-purpose machine guns;
and heavy machine guns in the 12.7-mm caliber class, including a direct copy of the U.S. M2HB. In
addition, 14.5-mm heavy machine guns are employed as antiaircraft weapons throughout tactical
formations. General- purpose machine guns are operated by machine-gun teams and mounted on vehicles
of all types; heavy machine guns are typically mounted on armored vehicles. Heavy antiaircraft machine
guns are fielded in each combined arms battalion (CA-BN) heavy-weapon company. Generally speaking,
PLAA machine guns can be considered comparable—and in many cases practically identical—to their
Western equivalents.
MAN-PORTABLE MISSILES AND ROCKETS

A-32. The PLAA employs a very high density of man-portable antitank weapons throughout its formations,
echoing a general emphasis on antitank capability that is visible throughout the organization. The PLAA’s
historical approach to man-portable antitank warfare was simple mass, equipping formations of all types
with huge numbers of unguided rockets—mostly based on the ubiquitous Soviet RPG-7—and simple
ATGMs, predominantly the HJ-73, a copy of the Soviet AT-3 Sagger. These systems are still in use and
still pose a threat to many armored vehicles due to periodic upgrades and the density of their deployment.
The PLAA, however, is beginning to take a quality-over-quantity approach with regard to its ATGMs, seen
most easily in the development and fielding of the HJ-12. Developed specifically to compete with the U.S.
FGM-148 Javelin, the HJ-12 employs most of the latest ATGM developments, including a top-down attack
profile, tandem warheads, soft launch, and a fire-and-forget targeting capability. These systems are
expensive and complex, however, and their density is limited by their cost.
A-33. The PLAA still employs a high density of unguided man-portable rockets throughout its formations,
particularly in light infantry units. These weapons employ simple HE, antitank, fuel and air explosive,
incendiary, and demolition warheads, filling a variety of different roles and providing significant
enhancement to the firepower of the infantry squad. The PF-89 is the most widely proliferated shoulder-
fired antitank rocket system, and it is very similar to the NATO AT-4 in both size and capability. The FHJ-
84 is a lightweight twin- rocket system that fires an incendiary warhead for antipersonnel or demolition use,
and the PF-97 is a heavy fuel and air explosive rocket system. The PF-98 does not have a Western
equivalent. It is a powerful 120-mm antitank and antipersonnel rocket system, usually fired from a bipod.
This weapon gives the light infantry squad a lethal capability against a modern MBT, though its weight,
size, and cost limit its proliferation.

MANEUVER CAPABILITIES AND LIMITATIONS

A-34. In just over 20 years, the PLAA’s maneuver capabilities evolved from a force mixture of light
infantry conscripts and obsolete tanks to a nearly fully motorized and mechanized force that employs a
variety of cutting-edge armored vehicles and advanced guided munitions. This evolution is incomplete,
however. A significant number of CA-BDEs are still equipped with older systems, and they are likely to
remain so for the foreseeable future. So too has the movement towards professionalization within the
maneuver force produced mixed results. While the quality of both recruits and noncommissioned officers
(NCOs) has increased significantly, the PLAA still struggles with decentralizing planning and operations at
lower tactical echelons. The maneuver force has also struggled with the complexities of the informationized
battlefield and modern mechanized forces. The technical demands of the informationized soldier are far
greater than for conscripts of past generations, and the maintenance and logistics demands of mechanized
forces are much greater than those of light infantry forces.
A-35. The most significant capability enhancement in the PLA is the development of a viable expeditionary
capability. Previous PLA forces planned only to operate in Chinese territory, in neighboring territories, and
in Chinese territorial waters. In order to establish itself as a great power, however, China believes that a
powerful ground expeditionary capability is required. This is the primary driver behind the expansion of the
PLANMC. It is likely the most significant effort in the PLA to meet the new expeditionary requirements.
Despite these efforts, the PLA still cannot deploy or sustain a heavy mechanized force outside of shared
land borders and its territorial waters, limiting the combat power of an expeditionary force.
A-36. PLAA leaders at tactical echelons are technically and tactically competent, with fairly regular
training in both staff and command functions. The officer corps is professionalized and well educated, with
many officers completing both advanced degrees and advanced military educations. Many PLAA officers
are commissioned enlisted personnel. The PLAA relies very heavily on its officer corps for leadership
functions. A professionalized NCO corps is a relatively new development. PLAA NCOs were historically
just conscripts with a few years’ experience, but starting in the late 1990s the PLAA began exploring the
idea of career NCOs. This cohort is still underdeveloped compared to the U.S. Army, with minimal staff
experience and no command experience, but the PLAA’s belief in this new system is reflected in
decreasing officer recruitment and the continued expansion of the NCO corps.
A-37. Despite these reforms and a greater emphasis on independence and initiative at lower tactical
echelons, PLAA formations still struggle with independent action. Small unit leaders are afraid to make
decisions due to a zero-tolerance culture, and officers remain hesitant to empower subordinates lest they
underperform and thus reflect poorly on the officer. Except in elite units such as SOF or reconnaissance,
the battalion is likely to be the lowest echelon capable of operating independently for any significant period
of time, and even the battalion’s independence is limited by a small staff and a low density of support
assets. Significant resources are being devoted to mitigating these gaps, however, such as the establishment
of training facilities that mimic U.S. Army Combat Training Centers and the development of a
professionalized, dedicated opposing force.
A-38. The Chinese soldier is tough, physically fit, and deeply loyal to the country and the Communist Party
of China (CPC). China’s growing urbanization and improving social infrastructure are increasing the
health, education, and general quality of its conscripts across the board. Training quality, however, varies
wildly. Some units receive substantial training resources, such as maneuver exercises against a professional
opposing force, while others may not even receive adequate ammunition for regular marksmanship
practice. It is challenging for outsiders to effectively assess a unit’s training readiness level due to the wide
variations between brigades, even within the same group armies. Readiness levels vary even more among
reserve and militia units. Some maintain regular training schedules and musters, while others exist
practically in name only. Reservists are nearly all taken from former active-duty soldiers and, as such,
enjoy a baseline level of training, but a reserve or militia unit, if activated, will take an extended period to
reach a useful training readiness level. Conversely, the elite elements of the PLA—SOF, prestigious
CA-BDEs, airborne, and marine forces, among others—enjoy substantial training resources and are likely
comparable in competence to well-trained Western formations.

Appendix B
Fire Support Capabilities
FIRE SUPPORT FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW

B-1. No other capability area within the People’s Liberation Army Army (PLAA) has received greater
emphasis during the recent period of reform than fire support. In just over two decades, PLAA fire support
evolved from a collection of aging Soviet-derived equipment to a largely indigenous, sophisticated, widely
varied, and numerous collection of gun and rocket systems. The PLAA employs a mixture of mortars,
howitzers, and rockets as the backbone of its fire support, including a notably high density of modernized
rocket systems capable of employing precision and near-precision guided munitions.
B-2. The PLAA’s emphasis on firepower manifests most clearly in its investment in modernizing its fire
support capabilities. Experiences and observation led PLAA leaders to conclude that their maneuver units
faced significant challenges when matching up against their approximate equivalents in the U.S. and
Russian armies, so the decision was made to pursue enhanced firepower as a means of offsetting that
capability gap. Joint fire support—from fixed-wing or rotary-wing aircraft, or from ships or submarines—is
much less well developed. Close air support is virtually nonexistent as a capability, and the PLAA employs
a very low density of attack helicopters, though this number is set to increase. Naval firepower is similarly
largely absent from the People’s Liberation Army’s (PLA’s) portfolio, though amphibious forces can
provide much of their own firepower support through amphibious tanks, assault guns, and mortars.
B-3. The PLAA fields ground-based fire support in very high densities throughout its formations.
Battalions of all types operate organic medium mortars, while combined arms brigades (CA-BDEs) employ
heavy mortars, howitzers, and rocket artillery (multiple rocket launchers—MRLs) in their organic fire
support battalions. The group army’s artillery brigade also features a mixture of guns and rockets, adding in
a heavy rocket battalion. These units may be retained by the group army to mass fires on a critical target, or
they may be task-organized down to the CA-BDE in order to enhance the CA-BDE’s firepower. The
CA-BDE’s organic firepower is roughly equivalent to that of a U.S. brigade combat team (BCT): 27 guns,
along with a light rocket battery. Most of the CA-BDE’s guns are 122 millimeter (mm) versus the
predominantly 155-mm guns of the BCTs, but the BCT lacks an organic rocket capability. The CA-BDE
possesses a higher density of guns and better mobility of firepower systems, while the BCT enjoys the
greater range and destructive power of larger, higher-caliber gun systems. The density and destructive
firepower of reinforcing fires is strongly in the PLAA’s favor. The artillery brigade includes up to 72 guns,
plus up to 40 MRLs of various caliber. These systems give the group army a significant advantage in both
range and firepower over equivalent Western formations.
B-4. Fire direction, targeting, and forward observation have also been major areas of investment for the
PLAA. China is the world leader in unmanned aircraft system production and development, and the PLAA
was an early adopter of unmanned aircraft as intelligence, surveillance, and reconnaissance platforms in
support of its artillery—particularly its long-range rocket artillery. CA-BDE artillery battalions include
fire-finding radars, battlefield surveillance radars, long-range electro-optical and infrared sensors, and
sound- ranging equipment, in addition to well-equipped forward observers, both mounted and dismounted.
The PLAA devotes significant training resources to the battlefield surveillance and targeting mission.
Observers of all types are likely well trained, and integration between sensors and shooters is likely agile,
redundant, and reliable.
FIRE SUPPORT EQUIPMENT OVERVIEW

B-5. The PLAA employs a huge variety of guns, mortars, and rockets. China manufactures a variety of
these systems for export. This makes assessing PLAA equipment challenging. Much like with armored
vehicles, units of the same type may possess systems with very different capabilities. One notable trend is
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 B-1

Appendix B
how the PLAA prioritized the modernization of its artillery systems. Self-propelled guns (SPGs) and MRLs
received enormous investments and have largely completely modernized systems, while many towed and
mortar systems can be dated back to at least the 1960s.
PLA.
MORTARS
B-6. The Type 87 mortar is the standard light mortar employed throughout the PLAA, reserves, and
militia units. A simple design similar to U.S. and Soviet or Russian light mortars, it fires a variety of
ammunition, including high explosives (HE), smoke, and illumination, out to roughly 4,000 meters. These
mortars are the basic indirect firepower of the light combined arms battalion (CA-BN), with each battalion
employing a battery’s worth of mortars (12 to 16 tubes) in the firepower company. The Type 87 is
man-portable, though it is rather heavy by 81 or 82-mm standards.
B-7. The W-99 mortar looks like a hybrid between a mortar and a light howitzer. A towed system, it is
referred to by the PLAA as a rapid-fire mortar, and it is capable of an impressive rate of fire, far surpassing
that of man-packed 81 or 82-mm mortar types. It does, however, require significantly more support,
including a prime mover and more ammunition. It is not man-portable, but it represents a significant
increase in the firepower available to the infantry battalion. This capability is not replicated in U.S.
formations.
TOWED HOWITZERS
B-8. The Type 54 howitzer is a simple 122-mm pack gun derived from the World War II-era Soviet M-30.
Despite its advanced age, the M-30/Type 54 is still widely fielded and is almost certainly the most
numerous light howitzer design in the world today. Chinese designs were periodically upgraded over the
years, becoming lighter, increasing reliability and rate of fire, and simplifying march-order and
emplacement procedures. While old, the Type 54’s performance is roughly in line with modern 105-mm
guns, though it is somewhat heavier than most contemporary light howitzers. It provides the bulk of the
artillery firepower for the light CA-BDE, and it still equips many of the towed howitzer battalions of the
artillery brigades. The most common evolved versions of the Type 54 are the Type 83 and Type 86, both
redevelopments from the 1980s that feature superior chassis technology and increased rates of fire. The
Type 54 family is a versatile system. It can provide both indirect or direct fire, and PLAA forces train to
employ these systems as direct-fire antitank guns in addition to their role as artillery.
B-9. The Type 66 howitzer is another Soviet design, based around the D-20 152-mm howitzer. This
system dates from the 1960s, and it still comprises most of the PLAA’s heavy tube artillery capability. The
Type 66 is a large and heavy gun with middling-to-poor performance by modern standards, but when
employed competently and in mass, it can still deliver decisive firepower. The system is simple and robust,
able to operate in austere environments with minimal maintenance support. Its rate of fire is similar to that
of more modern guns, but its range and accuracy are significantly worse when firing conventional
ammunition. Rocket-assisted ammunition and precision-guided rounds offset these limitations somewhat,
but their availability is limited. The Type 66 equips the heavy towed batteries of PLAA artillery brigades,
and it is used to provide heavy fire support for maneuver operations.
SELF-PROPELLED HOWITZERS
B-10. The PLZ-89 is the PLAA’s most widely used SPG. It mates the gun from the ubiquitous Type
54/83/86 122-mm towed howitzers with the chassis of the Type 63 light tank, creating a simple,
lightweight, mobile self-propelled artillery system. The performance and protection of the PLZ-89 are both
unremarkable, but the system is robust and easy to employ. The PLAA employs around 700 PLZ-89s
throughout its formations; nearly all are in the artillery battalions of medium or heavy CA-BDEs. These
systems provide close-range fire support for CA-BDE maneuver actions, typically rolling just behind the
B-2 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

maneuver battalions. Though outranged and outgunned by more-modern 155-mm SPGs, the PLZ-89’s
mobility and simplicity make it indispensable to the PLAA. The SH-3 is a recent modernized variant,
offering improved fire control and mobility.
B-11. The PLZ-07 is the PLAA’s newest 122-mm SPG. It employs a modernized version of the PLZ-89’s
gun, itself derived from the obsolete Soviet D-30, though its performance is improved with modernized fire
control and advanced ammunition. The primary advance of the PLZ-07 is the use of the modern ZBD-04
armored personnel carrier (APC) as its chassis, giving it improved cross-country and amphibious
performance, greater range, and improved reliability versus older SPGs. The PLZ-07 will likely be
produced in large numbers, eventually replacing all of the older PLZ-89 subtypes throughout the PLAA.
Like the older system, the PLZ-07 is outgunned by 155-mm systems, but its mobility and simplicity make it
very well adapted for closely supporting maneuver formations.
B-12. The PLZ-83 was the PLAA’s first heavy tracked SPG, mating the gun from the Type 66 howitzer
with a generic Soviet heavy armored fighting vehicle (AFV) chassis. Though the 152-mm gun provided
enhanced firepower compared to the widely fielded 122-mm models, the PLAA was dissatisfied with the
PLZ-83’s mobility and reliability. The ballistic performance of the gun was also poor. Relatively small
numbers were fielded, with the PLAA initially equipping division artillery units with them, and today
equipping individual batteries within artillery brigades with them. These systems are still in service, though
they are set to be replaced by more-modern systems.
B-13. The PLZ-05 is the PLAA’s new heavy SPG, mating a new 155-mm gun with a specially developed
light AFV chassis. The PLZ-05 can employ a wide variety of munitions and enjoys the impressive range
and accuracy of a fully modernized 155-mm gun system. In addition, the PLZ-05 employs an autoloader,
increasing its sustained rate of fire to 10 rounds per minute, with a 3-rounds-in-15-seconds burst capability.
The PLZ-05 is comparable to other advanced SPGs in most respects, and it represents a major increase in
indirect-fire capability for the PLAA. It is likely that all artillery brigades will eventually employ a
battalion’s worth of PLZ-05s as the older PLZ-83s are phased out. The PLZ-05 is a very large and heavy
system with substantial support requirements, but its cross-country mobility remains excellent.
MULTIPLE ROCKET LAUNCHERS

B-14. The PHL-81 is the PLAA’s most widely distributed 122-mm MRL. A simple truck-mounted design
derived from the Soviet BM-21, the PHL-81 provides both CA-BDE artillery battalions and artillery
brigades with long-range destructive firepower. Though the PHL-81 is derived from a 1960s-era design, it
has been periodically upgraded with digital fire control and a wide variety of munitions, including HE,
antitank submunitions, fuel-air, smoke, and mine scattering. More-specialized types of ammunition,
including radio- frequency jamming, incendiary, and chemical, have been produced in the past or in other
nations, and they may be available to PLAA forces. Precision-guided 122-mm rounds may also be
available, though their cost and complexity limit their proliferation. Nominal range for the modernized
122-mm rounds is around 50 kilometers (kms). The PHZ-89 is essentially a tracked version of the PHL-81,
developed to operate in support of PLAA mechanized and armored forces. It fires the same suite of
122-mm rocket rounds while improving protection and mobility at the expense of weight and cost. These
systems feature a rapid-reload capability, enabling a second rocket pod to be fired within minutes and
essentially doubling a battery’s firepower against a time-sensitive target. Both the PHL-81 and the PHZ-89
are set to be replaced with domestically produced systems in the relatively near future. The PHL-11 is the
new wheeled variant, and the PHZ-11 as the tracked.
B-15. The PHL-03 is the PLAA’s version of the Soviet or Russian BM-30 Smerch, a widely proliferated
heavy (300-mm) MRL. PHL-03 batteries provide long-range striking power for the PLAA’s artillery
brigades. Advancements in the 300-mm class of rockets make these among the most powerful and versatile
artillery pieces fielded today. The PLAA operates a wide variety of 300-mm rocket ammunition types,
including HE, antitank submunitions, fuel-air, incendiary, radio-frequency jamming, mine scattering, near-
precision, and precision. New long-range variants push engagement ranges out more than 150 kms while
maintaining reasonable accuracy. Reload of the PHL-03 is relatively slow. Each tube must be reloaded
separately, rather than exchanging a pod. The PLAA likely views its 300-mm rocket class as the backbone
of its operational fires capability of the future, bridging the gap between its gun and light rocket artillery

Appendix B
and its ballistic missile force, and it is the primary offset for the lack of a meaningful close air support
capability.
BALLISTIC MISSILES
B-16. The DF-11 is the People’s Liberation Army Rocket Force’s (PLARF’s) most widely employed
short-range ballistic missile (SRBM). Originally designed to provide operational-level area fires out to 300
kms to theater commanders, subsequent versions have expanded the range out past 700 kms. Accuracy has
also increased, reducing circular error probable to only 30 meters, giving theater commanders a long-range
precision strike capability. The DF-11 can employ both conventional and nuclear warheads; conventional
warheads may be either HE submunition or fuel-air explosive. The PLARF is capable of structured attacks
with its DF-11 fleet, and the solid-fuel rocket and mobile transporter-erector-launchers enable rapid launch
and reload operations.
B-17. The DF-15/16 is a newer family of systems that provides the bulk of the PLARF’s operational-level
fire support capability. These systems range between 600 kms and 1,000 kms, and they employ advanced
antiballistic missile countermeasures such as terminal maneuvers and decoys. Early variants were not
accurate enough for precision strikes, but modernized variants enjoy a circular error probable of 30 meters
or less. These missiles can employ nuclear or conventional warheads, and have a significantly larger
payload (over 600 kilograms) than do most SRBMs.
B-18. The B-611 is a new SRBM system that likely seeks to replicate the capabilities of the Soviet SS-26
Iskander. Its capabilities include a 500-km range, advanced penetration aids, good mobility, rapid reload,
and precision targeting. The B-611 is likely intended to complement the 300-mm rocket class with an
enhanced penetration weapon, enabling the targeting and destruction of antiballistic missile systems prior
to more general targeting.
Note. This section only discusses PLARF ballistic missiles that may be employed in support of
tactical formations; it does not include long-range or intercontinental ballistic missiles (ICBMs).
FIRE SUPPORT CAPABILITIES AND LIMITATIONS

B-19. The PLAA relies heavily on fire support to offset capability shortcomings in its maneuver forces and
air power. Artillery of all types—mortars, tubes, and rockets—is deployed in significant density across
every type of PLAA formation. Fire support is integrated effectively with maneuver operations. In
particular, SPGs train to maneuver closely with armored and mechanized forces. Targeting can be
decentralized, with lower echelon commanders integrating artillery spotters, unmanned aircraft (UA), and
other surveillance assets. Massed fires are still considered the primary objective of artillery forces, and
artillery commanders will generally seek to mass fires on the most valuable targets within range of their
systems.
B-20. PLAA towed systems are much older and heavier than their Western counterparts, but they still have
adequate tactical mobility to accomplish their fire support tasks. The PLAA relies on density and mass to
accomplish these tasks, and logistics support for artillery is likely one of its primary limitations. The PLAA
has a lower density of logistics support than do Western militaries—particularly the U.S. Army—and so
sustaining ammunition requirements for operational artillery units may prove a significant challenge.
PLAA SPGs are considerably lighter than their Western counterparts, and they are both outranged and
outgunned, but they have fantastic cross-country mobility and easier sustainment requirements. The ability
of these lightweight SPGs to maneuver closely with armored units is a key element of PLAA tactical
operations.
B-21. PLAA rocket artillery is versatile and effective. It mixes a wide variety of different effects through
the use of different munitions, integrated on simple, robust, mobile chassis. Lighter systems lack the
destructive power of heavier Western MRLs, but their simplicity and versatility make them indispensable.
Heavy MRLs comprise a huge part of the artillery brigade’s firepower. These systems are carefully
integrated with forward observers and other surveillance assets to make the most of their destructive
potential.
B-4 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

B-22. While the PLAA fields a variety of precision and near-precision munitions for all of its fire support
systems, the cost and complexity of these munitions limit their usage to the highest-priority missions.
Precision munitions use a variety of guidance methods, including laser targeting, inertial, satellite, imagery,
and radar. High-end ballistic missiles employ multiple methods to enhance accuracy at extreme ranges. The
PLAA process for mensurating a target is not well known, but is likely less precise than U.S. processes.
The decision-making process supporting targeting, however, is likely well-rehearsed and meticulous—in
part due to reactions from the bombing of the Chinese embassy in Belgrade by American aircraft in 1999.
B-23. Like their Russian counterparts, PLAA fire support elements are very concerned with the counterfire
threat, and significant resources are given over to counterfire operations. PLAA artillery units generally
have good tactical mobility and practice the simple “shoot-and-scoot” methodology to avoid counterfire,
while carefully concealing their positions from aerial attack and observation. The PLAA employs a variety
of counterfire systems including sounding, radars, and visual means, and counterfire missions are highly
prioritized.

Appendix C
Air Defense Capabilities
AIR DEFENSE FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW

C-1. Ground-based air defenses are ubiquitous throughout the People’s Liberation Army Army (PLAA),
attempting to offset shortfalls in joint airpower. Experiences from Allied air power during the Korean
War— and careful observation of the effects of joint airpower during Operation Desert Storm—profoundly
influenced the People’s Liberation Army’s (PLA’s) belief in air defense as a critical battlefield capability.
Every maneuver formation larger than a company fields an organic air defense capability, and larger
organizations employ a mixture of air defense systems to create a combined arms effect. Mass and depth
are the operative words for PLAA air defense. Most of its short-range systems are relatively primitive and
lack capability against modern air threats. They are, however, deployed very densely and broadly across the
battlefield, creating a deterrent effect against low-altitude air threats. Medium- and long-range systems are
significantly more lethal, capable of standing off against advanced air threats at any altitude.
C-2. Man-portable air defense systems (MANPADS) and heavy machine guns are fielded in the
battalion’s firepower company, and a mixture of self-propelled antiaircraft guns (SPAAGs), towed guns,
and short-range infrared surface-to-air missile (SAM) systems, some medium-range radar systems, and a
sensor and command component comprise the brigade’s air defense battalion. Group army air defense
brigades mix gun systems, short-range infrared missile systems, and medium-range radar missile systems.
Air defense brigades also add an electronic air defense battalion that employs a variety of electronic
warfare systems focused on defeating or neutralizing the enemy air threat. PLAA systems may or may not
be fully digitally integrated into a wider integrated air defense system (IADS). Army units have the
capability for digital integration all the way down to individual gun or missile teams, but it is not clear if
this capability is fielded. Procedural controls such as airspace control measures and weapon control statuses
are likely the dominant methods of fire control for most PLAA air defense units, excepting the
medium-range SAM units.
C-3. Longer-range SAM systems are operated by the People’s Liberation Army Air Force (PLAAF) as
part of a nationwide IADS. PLAAF long-range SAM battalions are fully digitally integrated and likely
centrally controlled by theater commands in cooperation with fixed-wing defensive counterair operations.
Medium- range SAM units are also operated by the PLAAF, used either to defend long-range systems from
oblique or pop-up attacks or to bridge gaps in SAM coverage. The PLAAF envisions its long-range SAM
systems as wide area denial weapons, able to deny the use of airspace to enemy aircraft and create air
superiority, or at least air parity, from the ground. These systems employ advanced
counter-precision-guided munitions and electronic counter-countermeasures along with a variety of
interceptor types and advanced, networked sensors.
AIR DEFENSE EQUIPMENT OVERVIEW

C-4. PLAA air defense capabilities are primarily comprised of guns—towed, self-propelled, and hybrid—
and missile systems that range from man portable to long range.
PLA.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 C-1

Appendix C
TOWED GUNS
C-5. The PG-87 is the most widespread towed antiaircraft gun in the PLAA’s inventory, with several
thousand units equipping light combined arms brigades (CA-BDEs), reserve units, and militia units. The
PG- 87 is an up-gunned variant of the widely proliferated Soviet ZU-23, first fielded in 1960. PLAA
variants employ two barrels firing 25-millimeter (mm) ammunition—in contrast to the Soviet 23 mm—
giving Chinese weapons increased range and lethality. The PG-87 was further upgraded with enhanced
targeting (including an infrared sight and fire control radar), improved training and direction mechanisms,
and larger ammunition magazines. The PG-87 can fire a variety of ammunition types, including high
explosive, armor piercing, and tracer. The PG-87’s range is limited to two kilometers (kms), but it is lethal
against aerial targets of all types that enter its engagement envelope. The PLAA also employs its PG-87
guns in direct-fire mode against ground targets. Its 25-mm ammunition has similar performance to infantry
fighting vehicle (IFV) autocannons in this role.
C-6. The PG-99 is a newer towed twin 35-mm system likely derived from the Oerlikon GDF family of
guns. The PG-99 makes use of a variety of different search and tracking sensors, including an
electro-optical visual sensor, a laser range finder, and digital integration with supporting radars. Traverse
and elevation are rapid and mechanically assisted, and the gun has excellent mobility. Its emplacement time
is less than two minutes. The PG-99 can fire high explosive, incendiary, and armor piercing rounds past
four kms, and it can also engage ground targets, including light armored vehicles. The PG-99’s gun system
is also the primary weapon for many of the PLAA’s SPAAGs and hybrid systems, simplifying sustainment
and crew training requirements.
SELF-PROPELLED GUNS AND HYBRID SYSTEMS

C-7. The PGZ-04/04A marries the ubiquitous ZBD-04 armored personnel carrier (APC) chassis with four
25-mm autocannons taken from the PG-87 towed gun and four QW-2 short-range infrared missiles,
creating a mobile, protected short-range air defense (SHORAD) platform. The PGZ-04 enjoys the same
protection as its APC and IFV counterparts, and it likely has comparable mobility. Its sensor suite includes
the same electro-optical, infrared, and laser rangefinder as the PLAA’s towed guns and it adds a
short-range, low-altitude search radar. The 25-mm guns have a range of around two kms, while the QW-2
missiles can reach out to six kms. Firing doctrine likely instructs crews to employ guns against low and
slow targets such as unmanned aircraft, reserving the missiles for standing off more-dangerous
high-performance threats such as helicopters. Crews train to employ the 25-mm guns against ground targets
as well. The combination of the advanced electro-optical, infrared sensor and the four autocannons likely
make the PGZ-04 a particularly effective ground support system.
C-8. The PGZ-07/09 is a heavy SPAAG built on the PLZ-05 chassis. It mates the 35-mm gun from the
PG- 99 towed system with a short-range radar system. The PGZ-09 may also employ short-range infrared
missiles (likely the same QW-2 as the PGZ-04), though this is unconfirmed. The 35-mm guns employ a
variety of ammunition types out past four kms, and they can also engage ground targets: the firepower of
the PGZ-09’s guns in a direct-fire role surpasses nearly every existing IFV. The PGZ-07s complement the
PGZ-04s in the heavy CA- BDE’s air defense battalion, and they are also fielded in the air defense brigade.
MAN-PORTABLE MISSILE SYSTEMS

C-9. The HN-5 is China’s first MANPADS, developed from the early variants of the Soviet 9K32
Strela-2. China was late in developing MANPADS as compared to the U.S. and the Soviets, and by the
time the HN-5 reached operational status it was already obsolete. Upgraded variants were produced
throughout the 1980s and 1990s, including an all-aspect version, though these too are now largely
ineffective against modern countermeasures. The HN-5 claims a range of four kms, but this distance is
significantly limited by aspect angle. HN-5 variants are employed as man-pack weapons and mounted on
tactical vehicles of all types—particularly light wheeled vehicles—mated with a digital electro-optical fire
control sensors. The remaining HN-5/5A/5B rounds are employed by reserve and militia units, and they
may still effectively engage larger unmanned platforms or older military aircraft that lack modernized
MANPADS countermeasures.
C-2 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

C-10. The FN-6 is a reverse-engineered copy of the European Mistral system. Though technically still a
MANPADS, the FN-6 is a heavier and more-powerful missile than most MANPADS, and it is best suited
for use on vehicle-mounted platforms or from stabilized ground positions. The PLAA employs FN-6
variants on a wide variety of vehicles, most notably the FN-6A. The FN-6A combines the infrared missile
with a heavy machine gun on a light tactical vehicle chassis, mimicking the U.S. Army’s AN/TWQ-1
Avenger SHORAD platform. It is likely that most future SHORAD vehicles will employ the FN-6 and
evolved variants—such as the FN-16—as either a dedicated SHORAD system or a bolt-on option, as
required. The FN-6 is an all- aspect weapon with a range of more than six kms.
C-11. The QW-1/2 are the PLAA’s newest and most advanced MANPADSs. They are likely reverse-
engineered or rough copies of the Russian 9K310 Igla-1 system. Each is a lightweight, shoulder-fired
system with an advanced infrared seeker and continuously upgraded counter-countermeasures. The newer
QW-2 has been upgraded to increase its performance against very low and fast-moving targets, potentially
giving it a counter-cruise missile capability. The QW series is also mounted on a vast array of vehicles,
ranging from light wheeled systems to heavy armored systems. Most of these systems employ only visual
and infrared sensors, though some integrate short-range radars. QW-series missiles have a range of roughly
six kms.
C-12. Chinese MANPADS systems are enabled by an advanced command and control system called
SmartHunter. This system includes an advanced short-range radar, identification of friend and foe
capability, and network backbone to support decentralized operations by MANPADS teams. SmartHunter
is vehicle-mounted and tactically mobile, able to provide a high-quality air defense sensor and fire control
support in advanced or austere areas.
SHORT-RANGE MISSILE SYSTEMS

C-13. The HQ-6D is a short-range system that combines a semi-active radar-homing interceptor—derived
from the U.S. AIM-7 Sparrow—and a truck-mounted transporter-erector-launcher (TEL). An HQ-6D
battery includes a medium-range surveillance radar, tracking radars, and up to eight TELs, each with four
ready missiles. The HQ-6D is less lethal and less survivable than more-modern active radar-homing
systems, but it is still used for point defense missions against low-flying aircraft and cruise missiles.
Evolved versions can be centrally controlled at the battalion echelon, and they can be integrated into a
theater IADS. The HQ-6D’s interceptor has a slant range of roughly 18 kms. The HQ-6D is the primary
short-range system employed by the PLAAF.
C-14. The HQ-7 is a widely proliferated short-range infrared system based on the French Crotale. Though
relatively old by SAM standards—it was first fielded in the early 1980s—the HQ-7’s simplicity, mobility,
and lethality have contributed to a long and ongoing service life in the PLAA. HQ-7 interceptors are
deployed on mobile trucks, at fixed sites, and on ships. A battery consists of a short-range search radar and
three launchers, each with either four or eight ready missiles. Launchers can be cued by the radar or engage
targets visually. The interceptor’s slant range is roughly eight kms against a fast-moving target and up to 15
kms against a slower target. The HQ-7 is typically the primary missile system of the medium CA-BDE,
with one or two battery’s worth of equipment organic to that organization. Other batteries are employed in
static defense roles of critical assets. The HQ-7 is employed by both the PLAA as a mobile SAM platform
and by the PLAAF as a lower-tier system.
MEDIUM-RANGE MISSILE SYSTEMS

C-15. The HQ-16/16A is a highly modified variant of the Russian 9K37 Buk. The HQ-16 combines a
modernized semi-active radar-homing interceptor with a mobile tactical six wheel drive truck. Its
interceptor was originally procured as a naval system, then adapted to land operations once its potential was
recognized. A battery consists of a command post, two multi-mode (surveillance/tracking/illumination)
radars, and four to six TELs, each with six ready missiles. The HQ-16 found a useful home within the
PLAA. Its mobility makes it difficult to target when part of joint suppression of enemy air defenses, and its
range/lethality occupy the space between the HQ-6/7 and the HQ-9. The HQ-16 is used primarily as a point
defense system for critical assets, especially those vulnerable to attack by cruise missiles. Its interceptors
are relatively simple and inexpensive, making it an attractive option for wide proliferation. The original
interceptor’s slant range was around 40 kms. This has been extended past 70 kms in the newest HQ-16B/C

Appendix C
variants. The PLAA operates the HQ-16, but it likely integrates it fully into theater IADS along with the
long-range PLAAF SAM systems.
C-16. The HQ-17 is a reverse-engineered copy of the Russian 9K331 Tor-M1 SAM system. The HQ-17
marries a simple command-guided interceptor with a robust tracked chassis and a powerful electronically
scanned radar array, creating a mobile and protected medium-range SAM system. HQ-17s are primarily
housed within heavy CA-BDEs, providing a uniquely lethal and long-range air defense capability within
the CA-BDE’s air defense battalion. HQ-17 batteries consist of a medium-range radar and four launchers,
each with eight ready missiles. Though it uses an older command guidance system, the HQ-17’s accuracy
and lethality are thought to be excellent. Some analysists claim that the HQ-17 is capable of challenging
targets such as cruise missiles and precision munitions. Its slant range is quoted as anywhere between 12
kms and 20 kms; the detection range of the radar is past 30 kms.
LONG-RANGE MISSILE SYSTEMS

C-17. The HQ-2/A/B is an evolved version of the aging Soviet S-75/SA-2, one of the earliest effective
SAMs. Modernized HQ-2 batteries employ a multi-mission radar instead of the numerous single-purpose
radars of earlier versions, but the command-guided interceptor remains largely unchanged. The slant range
of PLAAF HQ- 2 interceptors is roughly 45 kms. The HQ-2 lacks the maneuverability and precision of
more-modern systems, but its speed and range still pose a threat to larger, less-maneuverable aircraft. It is
likely that the large numbers of HQ-2 systems still in use are envisioned as deception or decoy platforms,
forcing the enemy to alter plans or expend expensive and rare joint suppression of enemy air defense
resources to defeat or neutralize obsolete, inexpensive equipment. Each HQ-2 battery includes a
multi-mission radar and up to six launchers, each with one ready missile.
C-18. The HQ-12/22 was originally intended as an incremental improvement to the HQ-2, but due to a
lengthy development timeline it entered service at about the same time as the next generation of SAM
systems. It employs a semi-active radar-homing interceptor and a multi-mission, phased-array sensor. It is
truck mounted and significantly more mobile than the HQ-2—though not sufficiently so to support
maneuver forces. Initial variants had a slant range of around 70 kms. The newer HQ-22 pushes this out to
around 170 kms. An HQ 12/22 battery consists of a multi-mission radar and four launchers, each with two
ready missiles. While the HQ 12/22 does not have performance comparable to that of the HQ-9 and newer
SAM systems, it is far less expensive, and it is used to reinforce more-advanced SAM deployments with
adequate, less-expensive interceptors and radars.
C-19. The HQ-9/HQ-15/HQ-18 is a family of long-range SAM systems based around the Russian S-300.
Beginning with the HQ-9, these systems represent one of the largest and highest-profile military programs
in Chinese history, helping to form the backbone of the PLA’s anti-access and area denial strategy. The
S-300 was built using a system-of-systems concept, enabling a battery or battalion to employ a mixture of
radars and interceptors to meet operational needs. The PLA began development of the HQ-9—a reverse-
engineered S-300—after carefully observing the devastating effects of allied air power during
OPERATION DESERT STORM. The HQ-9 was specifically designed to deny large areas of airspace to
fourth-generation Western aircraft through a combination of advanced sensors; large, long-range
interceptors; and modernized electronic counter-countermeasures. While initial variants lacked the
kinematic performance of contemporary Russian and U.S. SAM systems, periodic upgrades dramatically
improved both the speed and maneuverability of interceptors. The HQ-15 was the first major
modernization, adding an antiballistic missile capability and extending both detection and engagement
ranges past 200 kms. The HQ-18 was the second major upgrade, adding a new pair of high-performance
interceptors along with a larger, more-powerful radar. The HQ-18’s interceptor ranges are shorter, but its
performance against the most challenging targets—ballistic and cruise missiles, other precision-guided
munitions, and maneuvering aircraft—is likely superior to the HQ-15. An HQ-9/15/18 battery typically
consists of a long-range search radar, a powerful tracking radar, and up to eight TELs, each with four ready
interceptors. Interceptors and radars can be mixed to a certain extent, either within a battalion or even
within a battery. China recently purchased several S-400 systems from Russia. If the country follows its
previous practices, these systems will be used to develop reverse-engineered upgrades to existing systems.
All HQ-9/15/18 systems are integrated into theater IADS.
C-4 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

AIR DEFENSE CAPABILITIES AND LIMITATIONS

C-20. Chinese air defense capabilities are comprehensive and numerous, mixing mobile, short-range
systems under the control of the PLAA with powerful, modernized long-range systems operated by the
PLAAF. Maneuver units will typically not operate without at least local SHORAD systems in support.
MANPADS are widely distributed throughout PLAA formations of all types, and they are also employed
by militia and reserve units throughout rear areas. This creates a tiered and layered air defense capability,
using the combined arms effect of multiple systems to offset the vulnerabilities of one system with the
strengths of another.
C-21. Long-range and many medium-range systems operate as part of the theater IADS. This integration
amplifies the effectiveness of individual batteries by enabling them to participate in data sharing and
centralized fire control. It is not known how effectively hardened the Chinese IADS communications
network is, but it is likely among the highest-priority network systems in the PLA. Lower echelon units
may also have the capability to participate in a wider air defense network construct, but they are not
dependent on it. Battalions and batteries operate in a decentralized fashion, employing localized networks
that integrate sensors and shooters at tactical echelons. This enables even the smallest units, such as a
MANPADS team, to receive data and fire control support from their higher echelon headquarters.
C-22. The PLAA’s continued interest in gun-based systems is unique among the world’s advanced
militaries: no other modern army employs such a density of gun systems. While guns have significant
limitations in range and accuracy as compared to missiles, their simplicity, versatility, and capability
against low-altitude air threats validate the continued PLAA investment. Indeed, several other militaries—
the U.S. among them— are revisiting heavy antiaircraft guns, decades after abandoning them, as offsets to
unmanned aircraft and attack helicopters.

Appendix D
Aviation Capabilities
AVIATION FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW

D-1. People’s Liberation Army Army (PLAA) aviation capabilities consist of a mixture of attack,
multirole (medium), and transport helicopters, plus a number of different unmanned aircraft systems
(UASs). Army aviation was a low priority of the PLAA for most of its history. This is reflected in the very
low density of Chinese rotary-wing systems compared to other first-order militaries. As a basis for
comparison, the U.S. Army’s density of helicopters per capita is over eight times that of the PLAA.
Nonetheless, the PLAA has invested significantly in developing its rotary-wing capabilities in recent years,
moving from a force employing only light multirole helicopters in limited missions to fully equipped army
aviation brigades (AABs) that field a mixture of new advanced attack, reconnaissance, multirole, and
transport helicopters. AABs are likely to continue expansion as the PLAA modernizes.
AVIATION EQUIPMENT OVERVIEW

D-2. PLAA aviation capabilities consist of attack, multirole, transport, and light helicopters and unmanned
aircraft (UAs). These capabilities are described in paragraphs D-3 through D-10.
People’s Liberation Army (PLA).
ATTACK HELICOPTERS
D-3. The Z-10 is China’s first modern attack helicopter. Pursued after the PLA studied the effectiveness of
the U.S. Apache during Operation Desert Storm, the Z-10 is the result of collaboration between the Russian
Kamov design bureau and the PLA. It strongly resembles other modern attack helicopters both physically
and in capabilities, and its specifications are competitive with any contemporary design. The Z-10 has a
crew of two and employs a chin-mounted chain gun—likely a copy of the U.S. M242 25-millimeter (mm)
system—along with a versatile mixture of missiles and rockets. Z-10 missiles include both precision air-to-
air and air-to-surface weapons. The Z-10 can carry up to 16 missiles of various types, four rocket pods, or
some combination thereof, as required. The Z-10 also employs a modern sensor suite, including fire-control
radars, infrared optics, and an optional targeting pod with an electro-optical targeting system. The Z-10 has
an integrated electronic warfare capability that can be augmented by an add-on pod.
D-4. The Z-19 is a lightweight attack and reconnaissance helicopter that was developed in concert with the
Z-10 and is derived from the Z-9 utility helicopter. It also employs a two-person crew, though it is
substantially smaller and lighter than the Z-10. Unlike virtually every other attack helicopter, the Z-19 does
not use a machine gun or cannon; its offensive capability comes either from eight missiles (air-to-air or
air-to-surface) or two rocket pods. Its sensor suite is similar to that of the WZ-10, with a radar system and
infrared targeting. The Z-19 features an integrated targeting pod under the nose, enhancing its targeting and
reconnaissance capabilities at the expense of a gun system. Z-19s are fielded in the reconnaissance
battalions of AABs; their primary tactical role is reconnaissance and targeting in support of heavier attack
platforms. They may also be used more extensively in the rotary-wing air-to-air role; their small size,
smaller infrared signature, and increased agility makes them well-suited to the low-level counter-air
mission.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 D-1

Appendix D
MULTIROLE HELICOPTERS
D-5. The Mi-17 is a long-serving Russian medium-lift and -utility design still in limited use in the PLAA.
An evolved version of the Mi-8, the Mi-17 is slightly larger and more powerful than the U.S. UH-60 Black
Hawk. It is a simple utility design able to carry or sling a useful payload or up to two squads’ worth of
troops. Winglet-equipped variants can carry a substantial offensive payload, including rocket and gun pods,
though they lack the sophisticated targeting capabilities and protection schemes of dedicated attack
helicopters. The PLAA uses several different Mi-17 variants, though their performance and roles vary little.
Mi- 17s serve mostly in the utility helicopter battalions of AABs.
D-6. The Z-9 is a light multirole helicopter derived from a European design. It is versatile and lightweight,
able to serve in light transport, attack, reconnaissance, search-and-rescue, or maritime roles. In attack roles,
it employs a mixture of light cannons and up to four missiles, both air-to-air and air-to-surface. The Z-9
may be considered a compromise platform. It was fielded as one of China’s first modern military
helicopters. It lacks the endurance and payload of a transport helicopter and the protection and sensors of
an attack helicopter. Nonetheless, Z-9s are fielded widely throughout the PLAA, the People’s Liberation
Army Air Force (PLAAF) and People’s Liberation Army Navy (PLAN). Z9s will see widespread use in
multiple roles for the foreseeable future.
TRANSPORT HELICOPTERS
D-7. The Z-8 is a modernized version of a 1960s-era French heavy-lift helicopter, the SA-321. China
reverse-engineered and modernized the French design, making it the standard heavy-lift platform for both
the PLAA and the PLAN. The Z-8 is both fast and long-ranged, and it can carry a substantial payload. The
basic design is very old; however, and it is both inefficient and maintenance-heavy compared to more
modern designs. Due to its size and poor agility, it is also very vulnerable to ground fire, and it is likely
relegated to transport roles in deeper operational areas.
D-8. The Z-20 is a new design that bears a very strong resemblance to the UH-60 Black Hawk. It is likely
reverse-engineered from copies of the S-70, the Black Hawk’s civilian counterpart. The Z-20 is a new
design, accepted into service in 2018, and few examples are operational. It is very likely, however, that the
Z-20 will become the PLAA’s new standard medium-lift and multirole platform, replacing both the Z-8 and
the Mi-17 in these roles. Navalized versions are also in development. Unsurprisingly, the Z-20’s
specifications mirror those of the UH-60, though uprated engines and a new five-bladed propeller may
moderately enhance performance.
LIGHT HELICOPTERS
D-9. The PLAA operates a number of light helicopter systems, nearly all of which are either commercial
purchases from European manufacturers or licensed or reverse-engineered copies of European designs. The
most common is the HC-120. It is a simple and agile design that performs a number of light transport and
liaison duties. These systems do not appear to be used in combat roles. They are, however, likely used by
both People’s Armed Police (PAP) and militia units as light air support for rear area and security
operations, and civilian variants are widely fielded by Chinese police organizations of all types.
UNMANNED SYSTEMS
D-10. China is a world leader in UAS development and production. This industrial capability is reflected in
the widespread use of UASs throughout PLA formations of all types. The PLAA employs advanced
medium-altitude UA as surveillance platforms at the theater and group army echelons, and they have likely
weaponized some of these systems. Lightweight UA are employed at brigade and battalion level, and
man-portable systems are employed by units as small as squads or patrols. The PLAA also employs
weaponized UA in antiradiation and electronic warfare roles. The PLAN uses UASs for long-range
surveillance in support of surface operations, and it may employ weaponized versions as antisubmarine
platforms. The PLAAF employs a variety of sophisticated long-range UASs that provide surveillance and
intelligence at the national and theater level and weaponized systems that conduct precision strike missions.
D-2 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Aviation Capabilities
AVIATION CAPABILITIES AND LIMITATIONS

D-11. PLAA aviation is relatively modern, and it fields a number of capable systems. Its primary limitation
is the low density of systems and limited maintenance and sustainment resources, especially at lower
tactical echelons. The PLAA has enthusiastically pursued an air assault capability and, though it is still
developing, this investment will likely continue. It is unclear how effectively ground forces integrate with
attack aviation; the relationship between the AAB and the combined arms brigade (CA-BDE) is likely
theoretically similar to that between the U.S. Army’s combat aviation brigades and its brigade combat
teams but, considering the newness of PLAA attack aviation, this integration is likely immature.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 D-3

Appendix E
Engineer and Chemical Defense Capabilities
ENGINEER AND CHEMICAL DEFENSE FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW

E-1. The People’s Liberation Army Army (PLAA) employs a robust combat engineer capability
throughout its maneuver formations, underpinning the consistent focus on obstacles, entrenchments,
fortifications, and mobility seen throughout its doctrine. There are four primary components to the PLAA
combat engineer capability: mobility, countermobility, protection, and recovery. Mobility systems include
those designed to repair and maintain roads, establish or repair bridges, and sweep enemy minefields.
Countermobility systems construct obstacles and deploy mines, while protection systems build
entrenchments and fortifications. Recovery systems recuperate damaged or immobilized vehicles.
E-2. Chemical defense capabilities are considered part of the same capability set as engineering, and they
frequently occupy the same unit. The chemical defense mission is twofold: equipping and training the
parent unit for operations in a chemical environment and decontaminating equipment and personnel that
have suffered chemical attack.
E-3. In addition to traditional combat engineering, the PLAA and People’s Armed Police (PAP) both have
robust civil engineering capabilities. Civil engineering missions are conducted in support of both military
operations and civil authorities. The Chinese government views these operations as having great social
value to the Chinese population. PLAA engineering units have among the most-advanced heavy equipment
and engineering expertise available in China. Their projects include buildings, highways, bridges, railroads,
air and seaports, and pipelines. Nominally, the PLAA assumes that many of these are dual-use projects or
of some military value. In addition, PLAA engineering units stand by to serve as rapid-reaction forces in
the event of natural disasters or other such events. Engineering support is one of the flagship examples of
Military-Civil Fusion.
ENGINEER AND CHEMICAL DEFENSE EQUIPMENT OVERVIEW

E-4. Historically, PLAA engineering work was performed either with simple manpower or with simple
modifications to tactical vehicles—such as attaching a plow or bulldozer to the front of a tank. While a lot
of this “do-it-yourself” mentality still exists within modern formations, the PLAA now has a portfolio of
modernized engineering vehicles and specially trained personnel. Each combined arms brigade (CA-BDE)
employs a variety of engineering systems in the operational support battalion, which includes a mobility
company, a protection company, and a mine warfare company. Heavier engineering capabilities are housed
in the group army’s engineer and chemical defense brigade.
E-5. The GCZ-110 is one of several types of tracked and armored multipurpose engineer vehicles, all of
which are simply tank chassis and engine with the turret removed and engineering equipment attached.
These systems provide the heavy and medium CA-BDEs with obstacle breaching, fortifications, and
recovery support. Light CA-BDEs have lighter engineer support, consisting of similar capabilities but on
truck-mounted platforms.
E-6. Mine laying and clearing remain important capabilities for the PLAA. Specialized mine-clearing
vehicles combine plows and magnetic detectors with short-range mine-clearing rocket artillery on armored,
tracked platforms, most notably the GSL-130. Lightweight wheeled systems are also common, serving in
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 E-1

Appendix E
both medium and light CA-BDEs. Mine laying is accomplished primarily through artillery-scatterable
mines, although large, advanced antitank mines are also employed in large numbers.
E-7. The PLAA employs a wide variety and high density of bridging systems, both truck-mounted and
tank chassis-mounted. Lightweight bridging systems can handle wheeled or light armored systems, while
heavy bridging systems can handle main battle tanks (MBTs). Many bridging systems are modular,
allowing multiple segments of bridge to be combined together in order to cross wider gaps. PLAA
maneuver units conduct regular training with bridging units and consider river crossing to be an important
skillset. Bridging systems are also regularly used in support of civilian populations.
E-8. As with most militaries, the PLAA’s armored recovery vehicles nearly all consist of tank chassis and
engines, a fully armored crew compartment, and simple, powerful recovery gear designed to quickly
retrieve damaged or immobilized armored vehicles. As the weight of armored vehicles—particularly
tanks—has risen, so too have recovery vehicles needed to become more powerful. The PLAA has
traditionally developed a recovery vehicle based on the previous generation’s MBT. The most current
recovery vehicle, the Type 654, is thought to be the only vehicle capable of recovering the Type 99 MBT.
Heavy CA-BDEs employ recovery vehicles in their operational support battalion. Engineer brigades also
operate recovery vehicle companies in support of group army operations.
ENGINEER AND CHEMICAL DEFENSE CAPABILITIES AND

LIMITATIONS
E-9. The PLAA’s engineers are further along in their modernization timeline than several other Chinese
capability sets. Modernized equipment and evolved tactics have been in place for several years, and
frontline engineer units have conducted extensive training exercises using all aspects of these updated
capabilities. In particular, armored engineering units appear highly capable in conducting obstacle
breaching, mine clearing, and fortification construction in support of armored maneuver. Mine-laying
systems also appear mature and capable. The high density of rocket artillery systems throughout the PLAA
simplifies the use of scatterable mines at the CA-BDE.
E-10. Civil engineering support capabilities are also well developed, and the relationship between army
engineers and civilian authorities is viewed as very important and meaningful. Work on civilian projects
provides useful training opportunities to military engineers while improving local infrastructure. These
projects are typically given high priority and significant media coverage.
E-11. The most significant limitations that PLAA engineers face are tactical mobility and sustainment. A
large proportion of new PLAA engineer vehicles are heavy tracked systems, and they are thus ill-suited for
movement over long distances by themselves. The PLAA has relatively few heavy transports capable of
moving heavy vehicles, and these will likely be reserved for tanks and infantry fighting vehicles (IFVs) in
the event that an armored unit needs to conduct a rapid overland movement. Sustainment is likely another
issue. These systems have significant fuel and maintenance requirements. The relatively low density of
PLAA logistics and armament troops may struggle to sustain heavy armored forces over long distances or
for an extended period of time. This issue is further compounded by maneuver forces likely having a higher
priority for sustainment assets than engineer forces. The PLAA does enjoy, however, a robust strategic
transportation network within Chinese borders, based mostly around China’s enormous rail network. This
network is capable of moving large bodies of troops and equipment in and around China rapidly and
efficiently, but it has little reach outside Chinese territory.
E-2 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Appendix F
Network and Communications Capabilities
NETWORK AND COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW

F-1. The People’s Liberation Army Army (PLAA) historically did not seek to integrate tactical echelons
into a wider communications architecture; the division was the first echelon with a robust communications
capability. Lower echelons relied on a combination of close proximity to headquarters and couriers to meet
their communications needs, with battalions as the lowest echelon to employ modernized radios. The
evolution of the PLAA into an informationized force required a complete overhaul of the network and
communications backbone, along with a far more robust density of communications systems and
specialists. These reforms are ongoing. As with most of the PLAA’s modernizations, units are likely in
various stages of development. The PLAA’s desired end state is likely to have every squad or patrol
equipped with a secure, reliable radio communications capability and to extend a secure, reliable network
data capability down to the platoon. Air defense and artillery systems are to be part of a theater-wide
sensor-to-shooter network. Electromagnetic attack and defense capabilities are linked to tactical
commanders, and they support tactical-level operations.
NETWORK AND COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT OVERVIEW

F-2. PLAA radio sets largely mirror those employed by U.S. and other North Atlantic Treaty
Organization (NATO) forces. This is unsurprising—most PLAA radios are derived from U.S. designs
acquired during the 1970s and 1980s. Company and battalion radio networks are built around a powerful
tactical command post radio, with a series of either man-packed or vehicle-mounted radios connecting to an
encrypted network. Platoon leaders employ backpack or vehicle systems such as the TBR-121, which has
many of the same capabilities as the most modern U.S. single-channel ground and airborne radio system
(also known as SINCGARS). Encrypted voice communications and limited data transfer are possible over
the air.
F-3. Chinese artillery and gun radio networks are more mature than other Chinese communication
systems. Forward-observer networks employ powerful two-way systems that integrate observers and guns
over secure data and voice networks, based largely on the TBR-142, a component-based radio system of
systems. These networks can be very organized, linking gun pairs with individual observers, or they can be
centralized and controlled through a fire-direction section. Unmanned aircraft system (UAS) integration
into forward-observer nets is likely performed at fire-direction sections as well, allowing an artillery
battalion to integrate multiple sensor types into its network. Artillery brigade systems are more advanced
and powerful than battalion systems, allowing greater data throughput and range in support of heavy rocket
and howitzer batteries.
F-4. PLAA communications units now employ both satellite-based tactical communications and terrestrial
data networks. Satellite communications are heavily limited by bandwidth, and they and are reserved for
the highest-priority networks. China plans to launch numerous new communications satellites in the
coming years, however, and this may expand the availability of satellite networks to lower echelons. The
PLA has a unique relationship with Chinese civilian telecommunications networks. Many civilian networks
were built with PLA requirements in mind. As a result, the PLA can employ domestic cellular and landline
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 F-1

Appendix F
networks for both voice and data communications. This capability is limited strictly to domestic military
operations. Any expeditionary operations must use secure tactical communications on separate networks.
F-5. Integrated air defense system (IADS) components employ their own data network that integrates
sensors and shooters from both the PLAA and the People’s Liberation Army Air Force (PLAAF). While
track-sharing and sensor fusion are likely not yet fielded capabilities, medium- and long-range platforms
can likely share airspace pictures and voice networks, and fire-control centers are integrated with fixed-
wing assets as part of defensive counterair operations. The static nature of most long-range surface-to-air
missile systems enables most of these network components to be hardened and isolated, making them
immune to jamming or intrusion. Lower-level air defense systems use a mixture of voice and limited data
to direct fire. Larger systems may have an automatic cueing capability. Man-portable air defense systems
(MANPADS) can receive fire-control orders from a fire direction section, and they may also have small
data devices to enhance situational awareness.
NETWORK AND COMMUNICATIONS CAPABILITIES AND

LIMITATIONS
F-6. The expansion of modern communications capabilities to lower echelons has been challenging. The
increased quality of PLAA recruits has helped to smooth this transition, providing a cohort of tech-savvy
conscripts to operate advanced communications equipment. The PLAA is still developing a modern radio
network, however, and it will inevitably run into significant roadblocks as its forces are modernized. These
roadblocks will likely include everything from dealing with frequency management issues in a contested
electronic environment to a lack of batteries at lower tactical echelons.
F-7. While terrestrial radios are a meaningful first step to an informationized force, the challenges of
building an expeditionary force—and the consistently challenging terrain of China—highlight the PLA’s
shortfalls in satellite, long-range, and non-line-of-sight communications technologies. While the PLA has a
joint data network similar to Link-16, it is still in its infancy, and it is likely many years away from being
useful in combat. Integration between land, air, and naval assets is poor to nonexistent—a major limitation
in achieving an integrated joint force. Higher echelon units, such as theater commands, have access to
advanced, specialized equipment such as troposcatter radios, but these are not fielded at tactical echelons.
Communications between tactical units over wide areas is a challenge due to limited resources.
F-8. The PLAA places a very high priority on electromagnetic defense as a part of an information
superiority campaign and carefully encrypts as many tactical communications as possible. Data networks
are hardened against intrusion, and specialized cells at the brigade and group army echelons conduct
ongoing electromagnetic and communications network protection missions.
F-2 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Appendix G
Special Operations Forces Capabilities
SPECIAL OPERATIONS FORCES FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW

G-1. China’s special operations forces (SOF) represent the best-trained and best-equipped light ground
forces in every People’s Liberation Army (PLA) service. The People’s Liberation Army Army (PLAA),
People’s Liberation Army Navy (PLAN), People’s Liberation Army Air Force (PLAAF), and the People’s
Armed Police (PAP) all operate units designed as SOF. Each group army fields an SOF brigade, with
specialized training and equipment suited to its theater of operations. In addition, the PLAN employs at
least one dedicated SOF brigade, the PLAAF employs an airborne army, and the PAP employs at least two
highly specialized SOF groups.
G-2. PLAA SOF units have a fundamentally different task and purpose than U.S. military special forces,
the United States Special Operations Command (USSOCOM). USSOCOM missions include direct action,
strategic reconnaissance, foreign internal defense, unconventional warfare, counterterrorism, and civil
affairs. PLAA SOF, conversely, focus on support of conventional military operations. Special
reconnaissance is their most-important mission. Their other primary missions include sabotage, raids, deep
targeting, and search and rescue. As such, PLAA SOF can be viewed as an elite light infantry capability, as
opposed to a Western-style SOF capability. PLAA SOF brigades at the group army will be employed in
much the same way as the U.S. Army employs its Ranger light infantry units. PAP SOF units, on the other
hand, focus more on security, counterterrorism, and hostage rescue missions, and they are more comparable
to elite U.S. domestic law enforcement units. It is likely that these two SOF missions overlap in combat
situations, with PLAA SOF taking a more forward or deep role and PAP SOF a more rearward role.
SPECIAL OPERATIONS FORCES CAPABILITIES AND

LIMITATIONS
G-3. Chinese SOF brigades generally receive the best-quality equipment, the highest training priority, and
the best recruits and officers. As a result, their training and readiness level is likely comparable to that of
the U.S. Army’s best light infantry units. Unlike most Western SOF units, however, they do not always
recruit experienced soldiers from the active-duty force. Quality conscripts may be recruited directly into
SOF training, and new officers can be selected directly for SOF assignments.
G-4. Chinese SOF units, particularly those in the PLAA, are carefully tailored to the regions in which they
serve. Units in mountainous regions receive mountain training, units in jungle areas receive jungle training,
units in maritime areas receive amphibious training, and so on. All PLAA SOF units focus on urban
combat, particularly small-unit tactics in urban environments. All Chinese SOF units are airborne and air
assault capable, though no Chinese SOF unit has the same access to air support as USSOCOM units. The
PLAA and PLAAF lack the aviation capabilities to conduct the deep clandestine insertions necessary for
strategic-level direct action or reconnaissance, but they can conduct air insertions of SOF in support of
operational units.
G-5. There are no PLAA SOF units specially designed or equipped for long-distance expeditionary
operations, but units do conduct joint training exercises with other national militaries. Outside of operations
in and around Chinese border areas and territorial waters, PLAA SOF are generally domestically oriented.
Antiterrorism and riot control are key missions for both PLAA and PAP SOF, and either of these units may
assist in maintaining domestic stability in conjunction with police or other security personnel.
G-6. PLAA SOF do not conduct foreign internal defense or unconventional warfare, with the possible
exception of areas in the immediate geographic area of China. It is possible that these missions will be
adopted as the PLA develops its expeditionary capability. In general, it is likely that the Chinese
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 G-1

Appendix G
government will prioritize the continued development of its SOF units, as these capabilities provide greater
flexibility and deployability than heavy conventional forces, enabling greater force projection and
providing a wider range of military and nonmilitary options to political leaders.
G-2 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Glossary
The glossary lists acronyms and a term with a joint definition. Acronyms appearing
in ATP 7-100.3 that are not Army or joint are marked with an asterisk (*).The
proponent publication is listed in parentheses after the definition.
SECTION I – ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS

*AAB army aviation brigade
ADP Army doctrine publication
*AFV armored fighting vehicle
APC armored personnel carrier
AR Army regulation
ATGM antitank guided missile
ATP Army techniques publication
B.C. [years] before Christ; equivalent to [years] B.C.E. (“before common era”)
BCT brigade combat team
CA-BN combined arms battalion
*CA-BDE combined arms brigade
CAS close air support
CCG China Coast Guard
*CMC Central Military Commission
*CNP Comprehensive National Power
*CPC Communist Party of China
DA Department of the Army
DOD Department of Defense
ELINT electronic intelligence
*ERA explosive-reactive armor
EW electronic warfare
FM field manual
HE high explosives
HUMINT human intelligence
IADS integrated air defense system
ICBM intercontinental ballistic missile
*IFV infantry fighting vehicle
IO information operations
IW information warfare
JP joint publication
KDP key defense point
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 Glossary-1

Glossary
km kilometer
*LC local command
LOC line of communications
m meter
MANPADS man-portable air defense system
*MBT main battle tank
*MD military district
mm millimeter
*MPS Ministry of Public Security
MRL multiple rocket launcher
*MSS Ministry of State Security
NATO North Atlantic Treaty Organization
NCO noncommissioned officer
*PAP People’s Armed Police
*PLA People’s Liberation Army
*PLAA People’s Liberation Army Army
*PLAAF People’s Liberation Army Air Force
*PLAJLSF People’s Liberation Army Joint Logistics Support Force
*PLAN People’s Liberation Army Navy
*PLANMC People’s Liberation Army Navy Marine Corps
*PLARF People’s Liberation Army Rocket Force
*PLASSF People’s Liberation Army Strategic Support Force
PMESII-PT political, military, economic, social, information, infrastructure, physical
environment, and time
*PRC People’s Republic of China
SAM surface-to-air missile
SHORAD short-range air defense
SIGINT signals intelligence
SOF special operations forces
*SPAAG self-propelled antiaircraft gun
*SPG self-propelled gun
SRBM short-range ballistic missile
*TC theater command
TEL transporter-erector-launcher
UA unmanned aircraft
UAS unmanned aircraft system
U.S. United States
USAF United States Air Force
USSOCOM United States Special Operations Command
Glossary-2 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Glossary
SECTION II – TERMS
course of action
A scheme developed to accomplish a mission. (JP 5 0)
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 Glossary-3

References
All websites accessed on 11 May 2021.
REQUIRED PUBLICATIONS
These documents must be available to the intended user of this publication.
DOD Dictionary of Military and Associated Terms. January 2021.
FM 1-02.1. Operational Terms. 09 March 2021.
FM 1-02.2. Military Symbols. 10 November 2020.
RELATED PUBLICATIONS
These sources contain relevant supplemental information.
STRATEGIC GUIDANCE AND POLICY

The Capstone Concept for Joint Operations: Joint Force 2030. Classified and available on SIPRNET
only.
The National Security Strategy of the United States. 18 December 2017. Available at
https://trumpwhitehouse.archives.gov/wp-content/uploads/2017/12/NSS-Final-12-18-2017-
0905.pdf.
JOINT PUBLICATIONS
Most joint doctrinal publications are available online at the Joint Electronic Library (JEL) at
https://www.jcs.mil/Doctrine/Joint-Doctine-Pubs/.
JP 3-0. Joint Operations. 17 January 2017.
JP 5-0. Joint Planning. 01 December 2020.
ARMY PUBLICATION
Army doctrine and training publications are available at https://armypubs.army.mil/.
ADP 3-0. Operations. 31 July 2019.
AR 350-2. Operational Environment and Opposing Force Program. 19 May 2015.
FM 3-0. Operations. 06 October 2017.
FM 6-27/MCTP 11-10C. The Commander’s Handbook on the Law of Land Warfare. 7 August 2019.
AIR FORCE PUBLICATION

Air Force Future Operating Concept: A View of the Air Force in 2035. September 2015. Available at
https://www.af.mil/Portals/1/images/airpower/AFFOC.pdf.
OTHER PUBLICATIONS
The Army Training Department of the Headquarters of the [Chinese] General Staff. Infantry Unit
Tactics, 2nd ed. Translated by the National Ground Intelligence Center. 2004.
Sun Tzu. The Art of War. Translated by Samuel B. Griffith. London: Oxford University Press, 1963.
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 References-1

References
RECOMMENDED READINGS
Blasko, Dennis J. The Chinese Army Today: Tradition and Transformation for the 21st Century, 2nd
ed. New York: Routledge, 2012.
Ji Rongren, ed. Services and Arms Application in Joint Operations, 3rd ed. Translated. Baishan Press,
2010.
The People’s Liberation Army. Army Combined Tactics under the Condition of Informationization,
2nd ed. Translated by the National Ground Intelligence Center. Shijiazhuang Army Command
Academy Press, 2009.
U.S. Defense Intelligence Agency. China Military Power: Modernizing a Force to Fight and Win. 15
January 2019. Available at https://www.dia.mil/Military-Power-Publications.
Zhang Yuliang, chief ed. The Science of Campaigns. Translated. Beijing, China: National Defense
University Press, 2006.
PRESCRIBED FORMS
This section contains no entries.
REFERENCED FORMS
Unless otherwise indicated, DA forms are available on the Army Publishing Directorate website at
https://armypubs.army.mil.
DA Form 2028. Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms.
References-2 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Index
Entries are by paragraph number.
A antitank firepower, 8-104– approach to conflict,

8-106 comprehensive national
achieve synthesis, 5-11–5-12 power, 1-54–1-55
antitank group, 4-54
active antiterrorism attack, 9-20 deception, 1-56
antitank guided missile. See Three Warfares, 1-57–1-60
active prevention, 9-9 ATGM
actively attack, 5-9 area search, 6-43
antiterrorism and stability
adaptation, 7-16 actions, 9-1–9-58 area security, 6-89–6-92
address effects of enemy antiterrorism missions and armored personnel carriers,
attacks, 9-51 tactics, 9-13–9-28 A-19–A-23
advance, 7-28–7-31 antiterrorism operations army aviation brigade, 2-29
advance command post, 4-16 overview, 9-1 artillery battalion, 2-35
advance fire, 7-99 antiterrorism operations artillery brigade, 2-25
principles, 9-8–9-12 artillery firepower, 8-102–8-103
advance group, 4-41
informationized battlefield
advance guard, 6-78–6-80 and antiterrorism artillery group, 4-52
aerial firepower, 8-107 operations, 9-2–9-7 assess situation, 4-9
agile, 6-8 informationized battlefield assign mission, 6-56
and stability and security
air defense, 9-47 assume command and
actions, 9-29–9-35
communication challenges,
air defense battalion, 2-36 stability and security
8-58
air defense brigade, 2-26 missions supporting joint
operations, 9-40–9-58 assume large defensive zone,
air defense capabilities, C-1– stability and security 8- 55
C-22 operations principles, asymmetry, 9-7
capabilities and limitations, 9-36–9-39
C-20–C-22 attack helicopters, D-3–D-4
equipment overview, C-4– antiterrorism missions and attacking a fortified enemy,
C-19 tactics, active antiterrorism 7-46–7-48
functional overview, C-1– attack, 9-20 attacking an unprepared
C-3 antiterrorism missions and enemy, 7-49–7-53
air defense firepower, tactics, 9-13–9-28 aviation capabilities, D-1–D-11
firepower attack, 7-105– border control and security, capabilities and limitations,
7-107 9-25–9-28 D-11
firepower defense hostage rescue, 9-21–9-24
riot control, 9-15–9-19 equipment overview, D-2–D-10
capabilities, 8-108–8-110 functional overview, D-1
air defense group, 4-56 antiterrorism operations
overview, 9-1 B
air firepower strike group, 4-53
antiterrorism operations ballistic missiles, B-16–B-18
air force, 3-1–3-9 principles, active prevention, base command post, 4-15
airborne operations, 7-62–7-64 9-9 battlefield management group,
ambush, 7-108–7-112 antiterrorism principles, 9-8– 4- 38
amphibious landing operations, 9-12 blocking actions, 8-73–8-75
joint actions, 9-11 border control and security,
7-54–7-57
legality, 9-12 9-25–9-28
annihilate, 7-39–7-41 rapid reaction, 9-10
bravery, 7-17
annihilation firepower, 7-104
$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 Index-1

Index
breakout, 8-79–8-87 combat reconnaissance, feint, concentrate forces, then defeat

build the command system, demonstration, diversion, or in detail, 1-48
deep area, 7-23, 8-13–8-15 decoy attack, 6-40 concentration, 7-12
depth defense zone, 8-19 raid, 6-39
reconnaissance attack, 6-37 concurrent hard- and soft-kill
frontal blocking zone, techniques, 5-31
8-17 reconnaissance by fire,
frontier defense zone, 8-18 6-38 conduct security operations,
frontline zone, 7-24 tactical reconnaissance 6-58
garrison zone, 7-26 forms, 6-35–6-45 consolidate or withdraw, 8-43–
planning the defense, 8-12– combat reserve group, 8-45
8- 20 defensive groups, 4-50 consolidation, 8-9
planning the offense, 7-21– offensive groups, 4-45
continuing operations, 7-42–
7- 26 combat security, cover, 6-68– 7-44
rear defense zone, 8-20 6-73
reserve zone, 7-25 continuous, 6-5
screen, 6-62–6-67
security operation tasks, control and blocking, 9-16
C
6-61– 6-73 control measures, defensive
capabilities and limitations, air control measures, 4-25–4-30
defense capabilities, C-20– combat support group, 4-58
offensive control measures,
C- 22 combine mobile, positional,
4- 20–4-24
aviation capabilities, D-11 and guerrilla war, 1-51
engineer and chemical coordination, 7-15
combined arms battalion, 2-31
defense capabilities, E-9– cost of modern war, 7-10
combined arms brigade, 2-20–
E-11 counterattack, concentrate fire,
2- 24
fire support capabilities, 8-39
B-19–B-23 command and communication
depth defensive actions,
maneuver capabilities, group, 4-34
8-111
A-34–A-38 command groups, battlefield hold key defense points,
network and management group, 4-38 8-42
communications command and communication planning the defense, 8-12–
capabilities, F-6–F-8 group, 4-34 8-45
SOF capabilities, G-3–G-6 seal off breakthroughs, 8-40
command post group, 4-33
capture small towns before electronic and network use multi-domain or
large urban areas, 1-45 warfare group, 4-37 multidirectional assault,
central role, 5-29–5-30 firepower coordination 8-41
choose and occupy positions, group, 4-36 counter-counterattack
6- 57 political work group, 4-39 firepower, 7-103
reconnaissance and counterreconnaissance, 8-71–
choose first battle carefully,
intelligence group, 4-35 8-72
1-49 coastal defense, 9-46
tactical system warfare
collection principles, course of action, defined, 1-56
methodology, 4-31–4-39
mission-supporting, 6-15 cover, combat security, 6-68–
command post group, 4-33
reconnaissance at the 6-73
command post operations, rear defense, 8-123–8-125
combined arms brigade, 6- 13–
advance command post,
6-19 cover group, 4-47
4-16
selective, 6-19
base command post, 4-15 D
target-oriented, 6-16
planning and organizing deceive the opponent, 6-52
well-hidden, 6-18
operations, 4-14–4-18
well-planned, 6-17 deception, 1-56
rear command post, 4-17
collection process, deploy reserve command post, deception actions, 9-57–9-58
reconnaissance forces, 6-22 4-18 deep area, build the command
develop reconnaissance
command-directed, 6-6 system, 7-23, 8-16
plan, 6-21
reconnaissance at the complex envelopment, 7-68– defeat airborne, infiltration, and
combined arms brigade, 7-71 flanking maneuvers, 8-98
6-13–6-24 complexity, 9-4 defeat penetrations, 8-99
report, 6-24 comprehensive national power, defend stubbornly, 6-50
screen and integrate 1- 55
information, 6-23 defense focus, 9-39
concentrate fire, 8-39
Index-2 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Index
defense principles, rear defense, 8-117–8-127 functional overview, E-1–

consolidation, 8-9 repositioning actions, 8-76– E-3
depth, 8-8 8-78 envelopment tactics, complex
flexibility, 8-11 withdrawal, 8-88–8-91 envelopment, 7-68–7-71
integration, 8-10 deploy reconnaissance offensive tactics, 7-67–7-75
forces, 6-22 simple envelopment, 7-72–
defensive actions, 8-1–8-127 depth, defense principles,
air defense, 9-47 7-75
8-8
coastal defense, 9-46 offense principles, 7-14 equipment overview, air
defense principles, 8-7–8-11 depth attack, 7-83–7-85 defense capabilities, C-4–
depth defense group, C-19
defensive operations armored personnel carriers,
overview,8-1 defensive groups, 4-49
offensive groups, 4-43 A-19–A-23
defensive operations types, attack helicopters, D-3–D-4
depth defense zone, 8-19
8-46–8-69 aviation capabilities, D-2–
depth defensive actions,
defensive tactics, 8-70–8-127 counterattack, 8-116 D-10
ground defense, 9-42–9-45 ballistic missiles, B-16–B-18
defensive actions, 8-111–8-116 engineer and chemical
informationized battlefield
depth security, 8-112–8-114 defense capabilities,
and defensive
spoiling attack, 8-115 E-4–E- 8
depth firepower, 7-102 fire support capabilities,
planning the defense, 8-12–
depth security, 8-112–8-114 B-5–B-18
8-45
develop reconnaissance infantry fighting vehicles,
stability and security
plan, 6-21 A-13–A-18
missions supporting joint
diversionary defensive light armored and wheeled
operations, 8-66–8-68 vehicles, A-27–A-28
defensive control measures, divide and encircle, 9-17 light helicopters, D-9
4-25–4-30
E long-range missile systems,
defensive groups, combat C- 17–C-19
reserve group, 4-50 electromagnetic attack, 5-16 maneuver capabilities, A-3–
cover group, 4-47 electromagnetic protection, A-33
depth defense group, 4-40 5-21 man-portable missile
frontier defense group, 4-48 systems, C-9–C-12
electronic and network warfare
tactical system warfare man-portable missiles and
group, 4-37
methodology, 4-31–4-60 rockets, A-32–A-33
electronic search, 6-45
defensive operations overview, Mao Zedong, 1-30, 1-35, 1-
8-1 electronic warfare 36, 1-39, 1-43, 1-51, 1-
importance,7-7 53, 1-68, 4-1, 7-2, 7-12
defensive operations types,
defensive actions, 8-46–8-69 eliminate enemy remnants and medium-range missile
diversionary defensive suppress follow-on rioting, systems, C-15–C-16
operations, 8-66–8-68 9-19 mortars, B-6–B-7
hasty defensive operations, eliminate enemy's fighting multiple rocket launchers,
8-59–8-60 capacity, 1-46 B-14–B-15
mobile defensive multirole helicopters, D-5–
eliminate isolated enemy D-6
operations, 8-52–8-58 pockets first, 1-44
operations under special network and
conditions, 8-69 emphasize flexibility and communications
positional defensive mobility, 8-57 capabilities, F-2–F-5
operations, 8-47–8-51 emphasize holding positions, self-propelled guns and
urban defensive operations, 8-51 hybrid systems, C-7–C-8
8- 61–8-65 self-propelled howitzers, B-
employ forces and tactics 10–B-13
defensive tactics, blocking flexibly, 1-52 short-range missile
actions, 8-73–8-75 engineer and chemical defense systems, C-13–C-14
breakout, 8-79–8-87 brigade, 2-27 small arms and direct fire
counterreconnaissance, weapons, A-29–A-31
engineer and chemical defense
8-71–8-72 tank destroyers, assault
capabilities, E-1–E- 11
defensive actions, 8-70–8-127 capabilities and limitations, guns, and ATGM
depth defensive actions, 8- E-9–E-11 vehicles, A-24–A-26
111–8-116 tanks, A-4–A-12 towed
firepower defense, 8-92–8- equipment overview, E-4–E-8
guns, C-5–C-6
110 towed howitzers, B-8–B-9

Index
transport helicopters, D-7– firepower defense, 8-101– network and

D-8 8-110 communications
unmanned systems, D-10 firepower defense purposes, capabilities, F-1
establish clear and reasonable defeat airborne, infiltration, SOF capabilities, G-1–G-2
objectives, 5-37 and flanking maneuvers, fundamentals, 1-1–1-71
establish positive conditions for 8-98 approach to conflict, 1-54–
hostilities, 1-26 defeat penetrations, 8-99 1-60
firepower defense, 8-94– framework for operations,
F 8-100 1-61–1-66
feint, demonstration, diversion, resist enemy assaults, 8-97 new Chinese grand
or decoy attack, 6-40 strike assembling or strategy, 1-15–1-19
unfolding troops, 8-96 operational environments,
fewer traditional advantages,
8-4 target enemy depth, 8-100 1-27
target enemy information PLA overview, 1-28–1-42
fight in one's own way, 1-53
networks and firepower political objectives, 1-10–
fight no battle unprepared, 1-47 systems, 8-95 1-14
fire support (advance or firepower strike groups, air principles, 1-43–1-53
assault), 7-100 defense group, 4-56 strategic environment, 1-1–
fire support capabilities, B-1– air firepower strike group, 1-9
B-23 4-53 strategic objectives, 1-20–
capabilities and limitations, antitank group, 4-54 1-26
B-19–B-23 artillery group, 4-52 system warfare, 1-67–1-71
equipment overview, B-5– mobile artillery group, 4-55 G
B-18 tactical system warfare
methodology, 4-31–4-60 garrison security, area security,
functional overview, B-1–
6-89–6-92
B-4 flank guard, 6-81–6-83 route security, 6-93–6-94
firepower attack, advance fire, flexibility, 8-11 security operation tasks,
7-99 6-60–6-94
focus, 7-18
air defense firepower,
focus on the offense, 8-56 garrison zone, 7-26
7-105–7-107
annihilation firepower, force structure, 2-1–2-39 ground defense, 9-42–9-45
7-104 operational-level guard socially vital assets, 9-49
counter-counterattack organizations, 2-14–2-18
security apparatus, 2-1–2-7 H
firepower, 7-103
depth firepower, 7-102 strategic-level harassing raid, 7-120
fire support (advance or organizations, 2-8–2-13 hasty defensive operations,
assault), 7-100 tactical-level organizations, 8-59–8-60
information and firepower 2-19–2-39
framework for operations, high target value, 5-5
assault, 7-101
offensive tactics, 7-97– 1-61–1-66 hold key defense points, 8-42
7-107 frontal attack, 7-81–7-82 hostage rescue, 9-21–9-24
frontal blocking zone, 8-17
firepower coordination group, hybrid warfare, 9-33
frontier defense group, 4-48
4-36
frontier defense zone, 8-18 I
firepower defense, defensive frontline attack group, 4-42
tactics, 8-92–8-110 increasing arduousness, 8-3
frontline zone, 7-24
firepower defense capabilities, functional overview, air increasing importance of
8-101–8-110 defense capabilities, offensive actions, 8-6
firepower defense purposes, C-1–C-3 infantry fighting vehicles, A-13–
8-94–8-100 aviation capabilities, D-1 A-18
engineer and chemical infiltration, 7-86–7-88
firepower defense capabilities, defense capabilities,
aerial firepower, 8-107 information and firepower
E-1–E-3 assault, 7-101
air defense firepower,
8-108–8-110 fire support capabilities, B-1– information attack,
antitank firepower, 8-104– B-4 electromagnetic attack, 5-16
8-106 maneuver capabilities, A-1– information warfare tactics,
artillery firepower, 8-102– A- 2 5-14–5-24
8-103 network attack, 5-17
physical attack, 5-18

Index
psychological attack, 5-19 electronic warfare long duration, 5-32

information defense, importance, 7-7 long-range missile systems,
electromagnetic protection, informationized battlefield C-17–C-19
5-21 transparency, 7-5 long-range raid, 7-117
information warfare tactics, multidimensional battlefield,
5-14–5-24 7-9 M
offensive actions, 7-4–7-10 main force security, 9-55–9-56
intelligence protection, 5-24 precision munitions
network protection, 5-22 maintain concealment and
proliferation, 7-6 secrecy, 5-38
physical protection, 5-23 rapid tempo of operations,
information operations maintain contact with the
7-8
characteristics, high target opponent, 6-53
informationized battlefield and
value, 5-5 maintain freedom of navigation,
stability and security actions,
integration and synthesis 1-24
antiterrorism and stability
importance, 5-6 actions, 9-29–9-35 maintain internal security and
linkage between attack and hybrid warfare, 9-33 stability, 1-21
defense, 5-7 international peacekeeping, maintain regional stability, 1-23
tactical information 9-35 maintain social order, 9-50
operations, 5-3–5-7 political nature, 9-32
universal permeation, 5-4 make decisions, 4-10
threat strength, 9-34
information operations maneuver capabilities, A-1–
informationized battlefield A-38
overview, 5-1–5-2 transparency, 7-5 capabilities and limitations,
information operations initiate, 7-35–7-38 A-34–A-38
principles, achieve
integrate psychological attack equipment overview, A-3–
synthesis, 5-11–5-12
and protection, 5-35 A-33
actively attack, 5-9
functional overview, A-1–A-
protect tightly, 5-13 integration, 8-10 integration
2
tactical information and synthesis
operations, principles, importance, 5-6 man-portable missile systems,
5-8–5-13 C-9–C-12
target nodes, 5-10 intelligence protection, 5-24
man-portable missiles and
information warfare tactics, international peacekeeping, rockets, A-32–A-33
information attack, 5-15– 9-35
Mao Zedong, 1-30, 1-35–1-36,
5-19 issue orders, 4-11 1-39, 1-43, 1-51, 1-53, 1-68,
information defense, 5-20–5-24 J 4-1, 7-2, 7-12, 7-82
tactics of information medium-range missile
joint actions, 9-11
operations, 5-14–5-24 systems, C-15–C-16
joint capabilities, 3-1–3-28
informationized battlefield and mission-supporting, 6-15
air force, 3-1–3-9
antiterrorism operations, mobile artillery group, 4-55
navy, 3-10–3-17
antiterrorism and stability mobile defensive operations,
rocket force, 3-18–3-23
actions, 9-2–9-7 assume command and
strategic support force,
asymmetry, 9-7 communication challenges,
3-24–3-28
complexity, 9-4 8-58
joint nature, 9-6 joint nature, 9-6
assume large defensive
significant effects, 9-5 zone, 8-55
urgency, 9-3
K
keep defensive zone small, defensive operations types,
informationized battlefield and 8-46–8-127
8-49
defensive operations, emphasize flexibility and
defensive actions, 8-2–8-6 key-point concentration, 9-38 mobility, 8-57
fewer traditional focus on the offense, 8-56
L
advantages, 8-4 plan and execute quickly
legality, 9-12 and decisively, 8-54
increasing arduousness, 8-3
light armored and wheeled more dynamic, 8-5 mortars,
increasing importance of
vehicles, A-27–A-28 B-6–B-7
offensive actions, 8-6
more dynamic, 8-5 light helicopters, D-9 linear multidimensional battlefield,
search, 6-42 7-9
informationized battlefield and
offensive operations, cost of linkage between attack and multiple rocket launchers, B-
modern war, 7-10 defense, 5-7 14–B-15

Index
multirole helicopters, D-5–D-6 thrust maneuvering group, People's Liberation Army. See
4-44 PLA
N
offensive operations overview, People's War. See principles
navy, 3-10–3-17 7-1–7-3 performed through action,
network and communications offensive operations types, 6-7
capabilities, F-1–F-8 airborne operations, 7-62– perspective, 7-13
capabilities and limitations, 7-64 physical attack, 5-18
F-6–F-8 amphibious landing
equipment overview, F-2– physical protection, 5-23
F-5 attacking a fortified enemy, PLA overview, 1-28–1-41
functional overview, F-1 7-46–7-48 PLAAF. See air force
network attack, 5-17 attacking an unprepared plan and execute quickly and
network protection, 5-22 enemy, 7-49–7-53 decisively, 8-54
new Chinese grand strategy, offensive operations, types, PLAN. See navy planning and
1-15–1-19 7-45–7-65 organizing.
operations under special planning operations, command
O conditions, 7-65 post operations, 4-14–4-18
offense phases, advance, urban offensive operations, control measures, 4-19–4-
7-28–7-31 7-58–7-61 30
annihilate, 7-39–7-41 offensive tactics, ambush, planning process, 4-7–4-13
continuing operations, 7-42– 7-108–7-112 tactical system warfare,
7-44 envelopment tactics, 7-67– 4-1–4-64
initiate, 7-35–7-38 7-75
planning process, assess
phases of the offense, firepower attack, 7-97–
situation, 4-9
7-27–7-44 7-107
issue orders, 4-11
unfold, 7-32–7-34 offensive tactics, 7-66–7-120 make decisions, 4-10
offense principles, adaptation, penetration, 7-76–7-92 organize coordination, 4-12
7-16 pursuit attack, 7-93–7-96 organize support, 4-13
bravery, 7-17 raid, 7-113–7-120 planning and organizing
concentration, 7-12 operational environments, 1-27 operations, 4-7–4-13
coordination, 7-15
operational support battalion, planning the defense, build the
depth, 7-14
2-38 command system, 8-13–
focus, 7-18
operational-level organizations, 8-20
offensive principles, 7-11–7-18 consolidate or withdraw,
perspective, 7-13 2-14–2-18
8-43–8-45
offensive actions, 7-1–7-120 operations under special counterattack, 8-37–8-42
informationized battlefield conditions, defensive defensive actions, 8-12–
and offensive operations, operations types, 8-69 8-45
7-4–7-10 offensive operations types, organize reconnaissance,
7-65 8-21–8-23
offense principles, 7-11–7-18
organize coordination, 4-12 organize the defensive
offensive operations overview, group and deploy, 8-24–
7-1–7-3 organize reconnaissance,
8-21–8-23 8-27
offensive operations types, resist enemy assaults,
7-45–7-65 organize support, 4-13 8-31–8- 36
offensive tactics, 7-66–7-120 organize the defensive group spoil enemy preparations,
planning the offense, 7-19– and deploy, 8-24–8-27 8- 28–8-30
7-44 P planning the offense, build the
offensive control measures, command system, 7-21–
patrol, 6-86
4-20 7-26
penetration, depth attack, offense phases, 7-27–7-44
offensive groups, advance 7-83–7-85 offensive actions, 7-19–7-
group, 4-41 frontal attack, 7-81–7-82 44
combat reserve group, 4-45 infiltration, 7-86–7-88
depth defense group, 4-49 PLARF. See rocket force
offensive tactics, 7-66–
frontline attack group, 4-42 7-120 PLASSF. See strategic support
tactical system warfare storming attack, 7-89–7-92 force
methodology, 4-31–4-60 political nature, 9-32

Index
political objectives, 1-10–1-14 psychological warfare reconnaissance at the

political work group, 4-39 overview, 5-25–5-27 combined arms brigade,
psychological warfare 6-13–6-24
positional defensive
operations, defensive principles, establish clear reconnaissance fundamentals,
operations types, 8-47–8-51 and reasonable objectives, 6-1–6-8
emphasize holding 5-37 reconnaissance organizations
positions, 8-51 integrate psychological and capabilities, 6-25–6-34
keep defensive zone small, attack and protection, security fundamentals, 6-
8-49 5-35 46–6-94
maintain concealment and tactical reconnaissance
prepare sufficiently, 8-50 secrecy, 5-38 forms, 6-35–6-45
precision munitions specialize operations, 5-36
proliferation, 7-6 tactics, psychological reconnaissance at echelons
warfare, 5-39–5-43 above brigade, 6-9–6-12
prepare sufficiently, 8-50
principles, capture small psychological warfare tactics, reconnaissance at the
towns before large urban psychological attack, 5-40– combined arms brigade,
areas, 1- 45 5-41 collection principles, 6-14–
choose first battle carefully, 6-19
psychological protection, 5-42– collection process, 6-20–6-
1-49 5-43
combine mobile, positional, 24
and guerrilla war, 1-51 pursue and destroy, 9-18 reconnaissance and security
concentrate forces, then pursuit attack, 7-93–7-96 actions, 6-1–6-94
defeat in detail, 1-48 reconnaissance attack, 6-37
eliminate enemy's fighting Q-R
capacity, 1-46 raid, combat reconnaissance, reconnaissance battalion, 2-37
eliminate isolated enemy 6-39 reconnaissance by fire, 6-38
pockets first, 1-44 harassing raid, 7-120 reconnaissance fundamentals,
employ forces and tactics long-range raid, 7-117 agile, 6-8
flexibly, 1-52 offensive tactics, 7-66– command-directed, 6-6
fight in one's own way, 1-53 7-120 continuous, 6-5
fight no battle unprepared, rapid raid, 7-116 performed through action,
1-47 sabotage raid, 7-118 6-7
principles, 1-43–1-53 unify sneak raid, 7-119
reconnaissance organizations
command and coordinate, rapid raid, 7-116 and capabilities, 6-25–6-34
1-50 rapid reaction, 9-10 report, 6-24
prioritize combat strength, 8-35 rapid tempo of operations, 7-8 repositioning actions, 8-76–
protect land borders and
rear area support group, 4-59 8-78
coastlines, 1-22
rear command post, 4-17 reserve command post, 4-18
protect the main body, 6-54
rear defense, cover, 8-123– reserve zone, 7-25
protect tightly, 5-13
8-125 resist enemy assaults,
psychological attack, defensive tactics, 8-117– firepower defense purposes,
information attack, 5-15 8-127 8-97
psychological warfare tactics, rear security, 8-120–8-122 planning the defense, 8-12–
5-39–5-43 sabotage and 8-45
psychological protection, 5-42– countermobility, 8-126– prioritize combat strength,
5-43 8-127 8-35 utilize proper
psychological warfare rear defense zone, 8-20 countermeasures, 8-36
characteristics, central role, wage simultaneous
rear guard, 6-84 resistance, 8-32–8-34
5-29–5-30
rear security, 8-120–8-122 resolve maritime territorial
concurrent hard- and soft-
kill techniques, 5-31 reconnaissance and disputes, 1-25
long duration, 5-32 intelligence group, 4-35 retreat, 6-59
tactical information reconnaissance and security riot control, antiterrorism
operations, 5-1–5-43 actions, 6-1–6-94 missions and tactics, 9-15–
vast scope, 5-33 reconnaissance at echelons 9-19
psychological warfare group, above brigade, 6-9–6-12 control and blocking, 9-16
4-60 divide and encircle, 9-17

Index
eliminate enemy remnants security while bivouacking, antiterrorism and stability

and suppress follow-on 6-85–6-87 actions, 9-40–9-58
rioting, 9-19 security while marching, 6-74– deception actions, 9-57–
pursue and destroy, 9-18 6-83 9-58
rocket force, 3-18–3-23 defensive actions, 9-41–
security while bivouacking, 9-47
route security, 6-93–6-94 patrol, 6-86 main force security, 9-55–
sentry, 6-87 9-56
S
security while marching, social stability defense,
sabotage and countermobility, advance guard, 6-78–6-80 9-48–9-54
8-126–8-127 flank guard, 6-81–6-83 supply routes and traffic
sabotage raid, 7-118 rear guard, 6-84 defense, 9-52–9-54
screen, 6-62–6-67 security operation tasks, 6-60– stability and security operations
screen and integrate 6-94 principles, antiterrorism and
information, 6-23 selective, 6-19 stability actions, 9-36–9-39
seal off breakthroughs, 8-40 defense focus, 9-39
self-propelled guns and hybrid
key-point concentration, 9-
search, area search, 6-43 systems, C-7–C-8
38
electronic search, 6-45 self-propelled howitzers, B-10– situational awareness, 9-37
linear search, 6-42 B-13
tactical reconnaissance stand off, 6-51
sentry, 6-87
forms, 6-41–6-45 storming attack, 7-89–7-92
target search, 6-44 service support battalion, 2-39
strategic environment, 1-1–1-9
security apparatus, 2-1–2-7 service support brigade, 2-28
strategic-level organizations, 2-
security fundamentals, short-range missile systems, 8–2-13
reconnaissance and C-13–C-14
strategic objectives, establish
security actions, 6-46– significant effects, 9-5 positive conditions for
6-94
simple envelopment, 7-72– hostilities, 1-26
security operation principles, 7-75 fundamentals, 1-20–1-26
6-49–6-54 maintain freedom of
situational awareness, 9-37
security operation process, navigation, 1-24
small arms and direct fire maintain internal security
6-55–6-59
weapons, A-29–A-31 and stability, 1-21
security operation tasks, 6-60–
sneak raid, 7-119 maintain regional stability,
6-94
social stability defense, 1-23
security operation principles, protect land borders and
address effects of enemy
deceive the opponent, 6-52 coastlines, 1-22
attacks, 9-51
defend stubbornly, 6-50 resolve maritime territorial
guard socially vital assets,
maintain contact with the disputes, 1-25
9- 49
opponent, 6-53
maintain social order, 9-50 strategic support force, 3-24–
protect the main body, 6-54
stability and security 3-28
security fundamentals, 6-45–6- missions supporting joint
54 strike assembling or deploying
operations, 9-40–9-58 troops, 8-96
stand off, 6-51
SOF brigade, 2-30 Sun Tzu, 1-30–1-31, 1-56–
security operation process,
SOF capabilities, G-1–G-6 1-57, 1-59, 1-68, 4-1, 5-27,
6-55–6-59
capabilities and limitations, 7-12, 7-82
assign mission, 6-56
G-3–G-6 supply routes and traffic
choose and occupy
functional overview, G-1–G- defense, 9-52–9-54
positions, 6-57
2
conduct security operations, support groups, combat
6-58 special operations forces. See support group, 4-58
retreat, 6-59 SOF psychological warfare group,
security operation tasks, 6-60– specialize operations, 5-36 4-60
6-94 spoil enemy preparations, rear area support group, 4-59
combat security, 6-61–6-73 8-28–8-30 tactical system warfare
garrison security, 6-88–6-94 spoiling attack, 8-115 methodology, 4-31–4-60
security fundamentals,
stability and security missions system warfare, 1-67–1-71
6-60–6-94
supporting joint operations,

Index
T artillery battalion, 2-35 W-X-Y-Z

tactical information operations, artillery brigade, 2-25 wage simultaneous resistance,
5-1–5-43 combined arms battalion, 2- 8-32–8-34
information operations 31
combined arms brigades, well-hidden, 6-18
characteristics, 5-3–5-7
information operations 2-20–2-24 well-planned, 6-17
overview, 5-1–5-2 engineer and chemical withdrawal, 8-88–8-91
information operations defense brigade, 2-27
principles, 5-8–5-13 force structure, 2-19–2-39
information warfare operational support
tactics, 5-14–5-24 battalion, 2-38
psychological warfare reconnaissance battalion, 2-
characteristics, 5-28–5- 37
33 service support battalion, 2-
psychological warfare 39
overview, 5-25–5-27 service support brigade, 2-
psychological warfare 28
principles, 5-34–5-38 SOF brigade, 2-30
psychological warfare tank destroyers, assault guns,
tactics, 5-39–5-43 and ATGM vehicles, A-24–
tactical reconnaissance forms, A-26
combat reconnaissance, tanks, A-4–A-12
6-36–6-40 target enemy depth, 8-100
reconnaissance and
target enemy information
security actions, 6-35–
networks and firepower
6-45
systems, 8-95
search, 6-41–6-45
target nodes, 5-10
tactical system warfare, 4-1–
4-64 target search, 6-44
planning and organizing target-oriented, 6-16
operations, 4-5–4-30 threat strength, 9-34
tactical system warfare Three Warfares, 1-57–1-60
methodology, 4-31–4-60
thrust maneuvering group, 4-44
principles, 4-1–4-4 towed guns, C-5–C-6
tactical-level notional towed howitzers, B-8–B-9
operational system, 4-61– transport helicopters, D-7–D-8
4-64
U
methodology, command unfold, 7-32–7-34 unify
groups, 4-32–4-39 command and coordinate,
defensive groups, 4-46– 1-50
4-60 universal permeation, 5-4
firepower strike groups, unmanned systems, D-10
4-51–4-56 urban defensive operations,
offensive groups, 4-40–4-45 8-61–8-65
support groups, 4-57–4-60
urban offensive operations, 7-
tactical system warfare,
58–7-61
4-31–4-60
urgency, 9-3
principles, 4-1–4-4 use multi-domain or
multidirectional assault, 8-41
tactical-level notional
operational system, 4-61– use proper countermeasures,
4-64 8-36
tactical-level organizations, air V
defense battalion, 2-36
vast scope, 5-33
air defense brigade, 2-26
army aviation brigade, 2-29

ATP 7-100.3
09 August 2021
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
JAMES C. MCCONVILLE
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff
Official:
KATHLEEN S. MILLER
Administrative Assistant
to the Secretary of the Army
2121502
DISTRIBUTION:
Active Army, Army National Guard, and United States Army Reserve: Distributed in
electronic media only (EMO).
PIN:

Chinese Tactics

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chinese Tactics

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chinese Tactics

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ATP 7-100.

DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION: Approved for public release, distribution is unlimited.

HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

PART ONE PEOPLES’S LIBERATION ARMY FORCES

DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION: Approved for public release, distribution is unlimited.

Overview of PLA Psychological Warfare .................................................................. 5-6

PART TWO PEOPLE’S LIBERATION ARMY ACTIONS

ii ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 iii

Figure 6-9. Route security (example) .......................................................................................... 6-24

iv ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 v

$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 vii

PART ONE—PEOPLE’S LIBERATION ARMY FORCES

PART TWO—PEOPLE’S LIBERATION ARMY ACTIONS

$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 ix

x ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

People’s Liberation Army Forces

THE STRATEGIC ENVIRONMENT

$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 1-1

CHINESE POLITICAL OBJECTIVES

1-2 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 1-3

THE NEW CHINESE GRAND STRATEGY

CHINESE STRATEGIC OBJECTIVES

1-4 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

z Maintain internal security and stability.

MAINTAIN INTERNAL SECURITY AND STABILITY

SECURE AND PROTECT LAND BORDERS AND COASTLINES

MAINTAIN REGIONAL STABILITY

MAINTAIN FREEDOM OF NAVIGATION

RESOLVE MARITIME TERRITORIAL DISPUTES

ESTABLISH POSITIVE CONDITIONS FOR POTENTIAL HOSTILITIES

$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 1-5

1-6 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

THE PEOPLE’S LIBERATION ARMY—OVERVIEW

$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 1-7

Figure 1-1. Active defense

1-8 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 1-9

Figure 1-2. People’s War

1-10 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

PLA PRINCIPLES—PEOPLE’S WAR

ELIMINATE ISOLATED POCKETS OF THE ENEMY BEFORE CONCENTRATING TO FIGHT

ELIMINATE THE ENEMY’S FIGHTING CAPACITY; DO NOT FOCUS ON TERRITORY

$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 1-11

FIGHT NO BATTLE UNPREPARED; DEVELOP STRATEGY BASED ON THE WORST

CONCENTRATE FORCES TO ACHIEVE AN OVERWHELMING ADVANTAGE IN NUMBERS,

CHOOSE THE FIRST BATTLE CAREFULLY

UNIFY THE COMMAND AND COORDINATE

COMBINE MOBILE WAR, POSITIONAL WAR, AND GUERRILLA WAR

EMPLOY FORCES AND TACTICS FLEXIBLY

1-12 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

CHINA’S APPROACH TO CONFLICT

COMPREHENSIVE NATIONAL POWER

Figure 1-3. Comprehensive national power

$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 1-13

FRAMEWORK FOR PLA OPERATIONS

1-14 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

Figure 1-4. PLA operational framework

ii ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 iii

iv ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 v

$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 vii

$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 ix

x ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 1-1

1-2 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 1-3

1-4 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 1-5

1-6 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 1-7

1-8 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 1-9

1-10 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 1-11

1-12 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 1-13

1-14 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 1-15

1-16 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 1-17

$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 2-1

2-2 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 2-3

2-4 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 2-5

2-6 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 2-7

2-8 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 2-9

2-10 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 2-11

2-12 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 2-13

2-14 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 2-15

2-16 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 2-17

2-18 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 3-1

3-2 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 3-3

3-4 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 3-5

3-6 ATP 7-100.3 $XJXVW

$XJXVW ATP 7-100.3 3-7